13 .uno%3AClosePreview 59 Para saír da visualización de impresión, prema no botón  botón Pechar Vista previa .
13 .uno%3APrintPreview 4d Preséntase unha visualización da páxina impresa ou pecha a visualización.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fcontentbox 26 Mostra todos os obxectos do documento.
10 .uno%3ANavigator 1f Activa e desactiva o Navegador.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fstart 77 Move a cela para o comezo do intervalo de datas actual, que é posíbel realzar empregando o botón Intervalo de datos.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscenariomenu%2Fedit 5b Abre ca caixa de diálogo Editar escenario, na que pode editar as propiedades do escenario.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fdocuments 2f Mostra os nomes de todos os documentos abertos.
26 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdropmenu%2Flink 58 Crea unha ligazón ao arrastrar e soltar un obxecto desde o Navegador para un documento.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Frow 6c Introduza un número de fila. Prema Intro para recolocar o cursor da cela na fila indicada da mesma columna.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fdatarange 4e Indica o intervalo de datos actual indicado pola posición do cursor de celas.
26 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdropmenu%2Fcopy 54 Xera unha copia ao arrastrar e soltar un obxecto desde o Navegador para o documento.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fend 74 Move a cela para a fin do intervalo de datas actual, que é posíbel realzar empregando o botón Intervalo de datos.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fscenarios 60 Mostra todos os escenarios dispoñíbeis. Prema dúas veces no nome dun escenario para aplicalo.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fcolumn 6d Introduza a letra da columna. Prema Intro para recolocar o cursor de cela na columna indicada da mesma liña.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fdragmode 10a Abre un submenú para seleccionar o modo de arrastre. Pode decidir que acción se realiza ao arrastrar e soltar un obxecto desde o Navegador para o documento. Dependendo do modo seleccionado, a icona indica se se crea unha hiperligazón, unha ligazón ou unha copia.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscenariomenu%2Fdelete 21 Elimina o escenario seleccionado.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdropmenu%2Fhyperlink 5f Insire unha hiperligazón ao arrastrar e soltar un obxecto desde o Navegador para un documento.
3b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fheaderfootercontent%2FbuttonBTN_TIME b5 Insire un marcador de posición na área de cabeceira / pé de páxina seleccionada, que é substituída pola hora actual na cabeceira / pé de páxina en cada páxina do documento.
3b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fheaderfootercontent%2FbuttonBTN_DATE c1 Insire un marcador de posición na área de cabeceira / pé de páxina seleccionada, que pasa a ter a data actual, que será repetida na cabeceira / pé de páxina en cada páxina do documento.
54 modules%20%2F%20scalc%20%2F%20ui%20%2F%20HeaderFooterContent%20%2F%20buttonBTN_TABLE a4 Insire un marcador de posición na área de cabeceira / pé de páxina seleccionada, que pasa a ter o nome da folla na cabeceira / pé de páxina do documento real.
3b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fheaderfootercontent%2FbuttonBTN_PAGE bf Insire un marcador de posición na área de cabeceira / pé de páxina seleccionada, que pasa a ter a numeración de páxina. Isto permite que a numeración de páxina continua nun documento.
3b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fheaderfootercontent%2FbuttonBTN_TEXT 55 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para lle asignar formatos ao texto novo ou seleccionado .
53 modules%20%2F%20scalc%20%2F%20ui%20%2F%20HeaderFooterContent%20%2F%20buttonBTN_FILE 47 Insire un marcador de posición nome do ficheiro na área seleccionada.
3c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fheaderfootercontent%2FcomboLB_DEFINED 3b Seleccione unha cabeceira ou rodapé predefinidos da lista.
3e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fheaderfootercontent%2FtextviewWND_RIGHT 4e Introduza o texto que desexa colocar na parte dereita da cabeceira ou rodapé.
3f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fheaderfootercontent%2FtextviewWND_CENTER 47 Introduza o texto que desexa colocar no centro da cabeceira ou rodapé.
3c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fheaderfootercontent%2FbuttonBTN_PAGES 8d Insire un marcador de posición na área de cabeceira / pé de páxina seleccionada, que pasa a ter o número total de páxinas do documento.
3d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fheaderfootercontent%2FtextviewWND_LEFT 46 Introduza o texto a mostrar na parte esquerda da cabeceira ou rodapé.
40 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fheaderfootercontent%2FHeaderFooterContent 8d Defines or formats a header or footer for the page style in use. You can define separate settings for the first page and the remaining pages.
11 .uno%3ADataSelect 52 Unha caixa de lista que contén todos os textos atopados na columna actual aparece
14 .uno%3AFillCellsMenu 2b Enche automaticamente as celas con contido.
f .uno%3AFillDown 63 Enche un intervalo seleccionado de polo menos dúas filas co contido da cela superior do intervalo.
10 .uno%3AFillRight 64 Enche un intervalo seleccionado de polo menos dúas columnas co contido da cela do extremo esquerdo.
d .uno%3AFillUp 56 Enche un intervalo seleccionado de polo menos dúas filas co contido da cela inferior.
f .uno%3AFillLeft 63 Enche un intervalo seleccionado de polo menos dúas columnas co contido da cela do extremo dereito.
10 .uno%3AFillTable 7e Indica as opcións para transferir follas ou intervalos dunha folla determinada ás mesmas celas doutras follas seleccionadas.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ffilldlg%2FendValue 25 Determina o valor final para a serie.
11 .uno%3AFillSeries 85 Xere series automaticamente coas opcións deste diálogo. Determine a dirección, o incremento, a unidade de tempo e o tipo de serie.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ffilldlg%2Fincrement 4d Determina o valor polo que a serie do tipo seleccionado aumenta en cada paso.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ffilldlg%2FstartValue 23 Determina o valor inicial da serie.
40 modules%20%2F%20scalc%20%2F%20ui%20%2F%20filldlg%20%2F%20dereita 8e Crea unha serie en execución de esquerda a dereita dentro do intervalo de celas seleccionado usando o incremento definido para o valor final.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ffilldlg%2Fautofill 26 Forma unha serie directamente na folla
3b modules%20%2F%20scalc%20%2F%20ui%20%2F%20filldlg%20%2F%20up 6f Crea unha serie superior no intervalo de celas da columna mediante o incremento establecido para o valor final.
25 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ffilldlg%2Fweek 88 Empregue o tipo de serie Data e esta opción para crear unha serie que só utilice os días laborais. A unidade de Incremento é un día
40 modules%20%2F%20scalc%20%2F%20ui%20%2F%20filldlg%20%2F%5C%20left 87 Crea unha serie en execución de dereita a esquerda no intervalo de celas seleccionado usando o incremento definido para o valor final.
3f modules%20%2F%20scalc%20%2F%20ui%20%2F%20filldlg%20%2F%20lineal 4c Crea unha serie número lineal usando o valor de incremento e fin definidos.
25 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ffilldlg%2Fdown 83 Crea unha serie descendente no intervalo de celas seleccionado para a columna mediante o incremento establecido para o valor final.
25 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ffilldlg%2Fyear 6a Empregue o tipo de serie Data e esta opción para crear unha serie cuxa unidade de Incremento sexa un ano.
27 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ffilldlg%2Fgrowth 4c Crea unha serie de crecemento usando o incremento e o valor final definidos.
25 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ffilldlg%2Fdate 45 Crea unha serie de datas usando o incremento e data de fin definidos.
24 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ffilldlg%2Fday 8b Empregue o tipo de serie Data e esta opción para crear unha serie que utilice os sete días da semana. A unidade de Incremento é un día.
26 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ffilldlg%2Fmonth 6b Empregue o tipo de serie Data e esta opción para formar unha serie cuxa unidade de Incremento sexa un mes.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Frandomnumbergenerator%2Fseed-spin 171 Valor definido para iniciar o algoritmo do xerador de números aleatorios. Emprégase para inicializar (sementar) o xerador de números aleatorios para reproducir a mesma secuencia de números pseudoaleatorios. Indique un enteiro positivo (1, 2, ...) para producir unha secuencia específica ou deixe o campo en branco se non precisa desta funcionalidade en particular.
40 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Frandomnumbergenerator%2Fenable-seed-check 4e Define como valor inicial do xenerador de números aleatorios un valor semente
42 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Frandomnumbergenerator%2Fdecimal-places-spin 29 Número de decimais dos números xerados.
44 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Frandomnumbergenerator%2Fenable-rounding-check 39 Arredonda o número a un número dado de cifras decimais.
41 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Frandomnumbergenerator%2Fdistribution-combo 42 A función de distribución para o xerador de números aleatorios.
3e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Frandomnumbergenerator%2Fcell-range-edit 7b Define o intervalo de celas para encher con números aleatorios. Se xa ten seleccionado un intervalo, este móstrase aquí.
3b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Frandomnumbergenerator%2F@@nowidget@@ 93 Encha un intervalo de celas con números pseudoaleatorios xerados automaticamente coa función de distribución seleccionada e os seus parámetros.
4a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Frandomnumbergenerator%2FRandomNumberGeneratorDialog 93 Encha un intervalo de celas con números pseudoaleatorios xerados automaticamente coa función de distribución seleccionada e os seus parámetros.
50 m%C3%B3dulos%20%2F%20scalc%20%2F%20ui%20%2F%20DeleteContents%20%2F%20comentarios 5b Borra comentarios engadidos ás células. Todos os outros elementos permanecen inalterados.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdeletecontents%2Fobjects 3e Elimina obxectos. Todo o contido da cela permanece inalterado.
48 modules%20%2F%20scalc%20%2F%20ui%20%2F%20DeleteContents%20%2F%20formatos 61 Exclúe atributos de formato aplicados ás células. Todo o contido célula permanece inalterado.
48 modules%20%2F%20scalc%20%2F%20ui%20%2F%20DeleteContents%20%2F%20datetime 60 Exclúe os valores de data e hora. Formatos, texto, números e fórmulas permanecen inalterados.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdeletecontents%2Fnumbers 4b Elimina só os números. Os formatos e as fórmulas permanecen inalterados.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdeletecontents%2Ftext 4a Elimina só o texto. Non afecta a formatos, fórmulas, números nin datas.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdeletecontents%2Fdeleteall 3f Elimina todo o contido desde o intervalo de celas seleccionado.
4d modules%20%2F%20scalc%20%2F%20ui%20%2F%20DeleteContents%20%2F%20f%C3%B3rmulas 56 Exclúe fórmulas. Texto, números, formatos, datas e horarios permanecen inalterados.
d .uno%3ADelete 5e Especifica o contido a ser excluídos da célula activa ou dun intervalo de celas seleccionado
11 .uno%3ADeleteRows 51 Despois de seleccionar polo menos unha célula, exclúe a liña enteira da folla.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdeletecells%2Fleft 4e Enche o espazo resultante coas celas situadas á dereita das celas eliminadas.
14 .uno%3ADeleteColumns 55 Despois de seleccionar polo menos unha célula, exclúe toda a columna desde a folla.
27 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdeletecells%2Fup 56 Enche o espazo producido polas celas eliminadas coas celas situadas debaixo do espazo.
11 .uno%3ADeleteCell 8c Completamente borra seleccionados células, columnas ou liñas. As células baixo ou á dereita das células excluídas vai encher o espazo.
d .uno%3ARemove 34 Elimina a folla actual ou as que haxa seleccionadas.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmovecopysheet%2Fcopy 5d Especifica que a folla está a ser copiado. Se a opción está desmarcada, a folla é movida.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmovecopysheet%2FinsertBefore 40 A folla actual é movido ou copiado diante da folla seleccionada
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmovecopysheet%2FtoDocument 3d Indica onde a folla actual está a ser movido ou copiado para
b .uno%3AMove 52 Move ou copia unha folla a un novo local no documento ou a un documento diferente.
13 .uno%3ADelBreakMenu 3a Seleccione o tipo de manual de quebra que desexa eliminar.
15 .uno%3ADeleteRowbreak 37 Elimina a quebra de liña manual enriba da cela activa.
18 .uno%3ADeleteColumnbreak 42 Eliminar unha quebra de columna manual á esquerda da cela activa.
14 .uno%3AEditSheetMenu 27 Ordes de edición para follas enteiras.
13 SC_HID_SELECTTABLES 183 Lista as follas do documento actual. Para seleccionar unha folla, prema as teclas de frecha para arriba ou para abaixo para moverse a unha folla da lista. Para engadir unha folla á selección, manteña premido Ctlr mentres preme as teclas de frecha e a seguir prema na barra espazadora. Para seleccionar un intervalo de follas, manteña Maiúsculas premido e perma nas teclas de frecha.
13 .uno%3ASelectTables 39 Opens the Select Sheets dialog to select multiple sheets.
10 SC_HID_GOTOTABLE 101 Lista as follas do documento actual. Non se mostran as follas agochadas. Para seleccionar unha folla, prema nas teclas de frecha para arriba ou para abaixo para moverse a unha folla da lista. Prema dúas veces nun nome para saltar directamente a esta folla.
14 SC_HID_GOTOTABLEMASK fd Escriba algúns caracteres incluídos no nome da folla que busca. A listaxe de follas limítase aos nomes de folla que inclúen eses caracteres. A busca distingue entre maiúsculas e minúsculas. Se estiver baleira, móstranse todas as follas visíbeis.
12 .uno%3AJumpToTable 1e Ir para unha páxina indicada.
1b .uno%3AViewRowColumnHeaders 2e Mostra as cabeceiras das columnas e das filas.
1c .uno%3AViewValueHighlighting 43 Mostra o contido das celas en cores diferentes, dependendo do tipo.
17 .uno%3AInputLineVisible b5 Mostra ou oculta a barra de fórmulas, que se usa para introducir e editar fórmulas. A barra de fórmulas é a ferramenta máis importante cando se traballa con follas de cálculo.
16 .uno%3ADeleteAllBreaks 2f Borra todas as quebras manuais na folla actual.
14 .uno%3APagebreakMode 36 Display the page breaks and print ranges in the sheet.
16 .uno%3AInsertBreakMenu ed Este comando inserir liña ou columna quebras manuais para garantir que as súas impresións de datos correctamente. Pode inserir unha quebra de páxina horizontal enriba, ou un salto de páxina vertical á esquerda de, a célula activa.
15 .uno%3AInsertRowBreak 57 Insire unha quebra de liña (quebra de páxina horizontal) enriba da cela seleccionada.
18 .uno%3AInsertColumnBreak 56 Insire unha quebra de columna (quebra de páxina vertical) á esquerda da cela activa.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Finsertcells%2Fcols 78 Insire unha columna enteira. O número de columnas a ser inserido é determinado polo número de columnas seleccionadas.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Finsertcells%2Frows 58 Insire unha liña enteira. A posición da liña é determinada pola selección na folla.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Finsertcells%2Fdown 44 Inserts cells and moves the contents of the selected range downward.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Finsertcells%2Fright 48 Inserts cells and moves the contents of the selected range to the right.
11 .uno%3AInsertCell 6b Opens the Insert Cells dialog, in which you can insert new cells according to the options that you specify.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Finsertsheet%2Fbrowse 39 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para seleccionar un ficheiro.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Finsertsheet%2Ftables d5 Se seleccionou un ficheiro mediante o botón  Browse , as follas nel contidos son mostrados no cadro de lista. O camiño do ficheiro aparece debaixo desa caixa. Seleccione a folla a ser inserido na caixa de lista.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Finsertsheet%2Ffromfile 3d Insire unha folla dun ficheiro existente no documento actual.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Finsertsheet%2Fnameed 20 Especifica o nome da nova folla.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Finsertsheet%2Fcountnf 2f Especifica o número de follas que se crearán.
28 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Finsertsheet%2Fnew 93 Crea unha nova folla. Introduza un nome de folla no campo Nome. Os caracteres permitidos son as letras, números, espazos e o carácter subliñado.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Finsertsheet%2Flink 8d Seleccionar para inserir a folla como unha ligazón en vez de como unha copia. As ligazóns poden actualizarse para mostrar o contido actual.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Finsertsheet%2Fafter 35 Insire unha nova folla xusto despois da folla actual.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Finsertsheet%2Fbefore 33 Insire unha nova folla xusto antes da folla actual.
17 .uno%3AAnimationObjects 37 Crea unha animación predefinida na diapositiva actual.
1a .uno%3AInsertSheetFromFile 48 Insire unha folla procedente dun ficheiro de folla de cálculo distinto.
22 formula%2Fui%2Fstructpage%2Fstruct 3b Mostra unha representación xerárquica da función actual.
25 formula%2Fui%2Fformuladialog%2Fcancel 26 Pecha o diálogo sen crear a fórmula.
21 formula%2Fui%2Fformuladialog%2Fok 52 Finaliza o Asistente de fórmulas e transfire a fórmula para a cela seleccionada.
2d formula%2Fui%2Fformuladialog%2Fformula_result 37 Mostra o resultado do cálculo ou unha mensaxe de erro.
23 formula%2Fui%2Fformuladialog%2Fnext 4f Move o foco para adiante polos compoñentes da fórmula na xanela de fórmulas.
2a formula%2Fui%2Ffunctionpage%2FFunctionPage 4c Abre o Asistente de funcións, que axuda a crear fórmulas interactivamente.
2a formula%2Fui%2Ffunctionpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 4c Abre o Asistente de funcións, que axuda a crear fórmulas interactivamente.
25 formula%2Fui%2Fformuladialog%2Fresult 92 Permite acceder a un nivel subordinado do Asistente de funcións para aniñar outra función dentro da función, no canto dun valor ou referencia.
15 .uno%3AFunctionDialog 4c Abre o Asistente de funcións, que axuda a crear fórmulas interactivamente.
24 formula%2Fui%2Ffunctionpage%2Fsearch 26 Buscar unha parte do nome da función.
24 formula%2Fui%2Fformuladialog%2Farray 68 Indica que a función seleccionada se insire no intervalo de celas seleccionado como fórmula de matriz.
1e formula%2Fui%2Fparameter%2FFX1 92 Permite acceder a un nivel subordinado do Asistente de funcións para aniñar outra función dentro da función, no canto dun valor ou referencia.
12 SC_HID_INSWIN_CALC 4c Abre o Asistente de funcións, que axuda a crear fórmulas interactivamente.
26 formula%2Fui%2Ffunctionpage%2Ffunction 6f Mostra as funcións que se atopan na categoría seleccionada. Prema dúas veces para seleccionar unha función.
1e formula%2Fui%2Fparameter%2FFX2 92 Permite acceder a un nivel subordinado do Asistente de funcións para aniñar outra función dentro da función, no canto dun valor ou referencia.
1e formula%2Fui%2Fparameter%2FFX3 92 Permite acceder a un nivel subordinado do Asistente de funcións para aniñar outra función dentro da función, no canto dun valor ou referencia.
23 formula%2Fui%2Fformuladialog%2Fback 57 Move o foco para atrás polos compoñentes da fórmula, marcándoos a medida que o fai.
29 formula%2Fui%2Fformuladialog%2Fed_formula 6b Mostra a fórmula creada. Escriba as súas entradas directamente ou cree a fórmula empregando o asistente.
26 formula%2Fui%2Ffunctionpage%2Fcategory a0 Lista todas as categorías ás que se asignaron as distintas funcións. Seleccione unha categoría para ver as funcións apropiadas no campo de lista de abaixo.
1e formula%2Fui%2Fparameter%2FFX4 92 Permite acceder a un nivel subordinado do Asistente de funcións para aniñar outra función dentro da función, no canto dun valor ou referencia.
10 HID_FUNC_DBSUMME a6 DSUM calculates the sum of all numeric values in the cells (fields) of the specified column, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria.
12 HID_FUNC_DBSTDABWN c9 DSTDEVP calculates the population standard deviation based on the numeric values in the cells (fields) of the specified column, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria.
14 HID_FUNC_DBVARIANZEN be DVARP calculates the population variation based on the numeric values in the cells (fields) of the specified column, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria.
11 HID_FUNC_DBSTDABW c4 DSTDEV calculates the sample standard deviation based on the numeric values in the cells (fields) of the specified column, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria.
12 HID_FUNC_DBPRODUKT ae DPRODUCT calculates the product of all numeric values in the cells (fields) of the specified column, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria.
15 HID_FUNC_DBMITTELWERT ae DAVERAGE calculates the average of the numeric values in the cells (fields) of the specified column, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria.
e HID_FUNC_DBMIN ba DMIN calculates the minimum value across the cells (fields) of the specified column that contain numeric values, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria.
e HID_FUNC_DBMAX ba DMAX calculates the maximum value across the cells (fields) of the specified column that contain numeric values, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria.
12 HID_FUNC_DBVARIANZ b8 DVAR calculates the sample variance based on the numeric values in the cells (fields) of the specified column, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria.
11 HID_FUNC_DBAUSZUG 97 DGET returns the contents of the cell (field) of the specified column, for the single row (database record) that matches the specified search criteria.
12 HID_FUNC_DBANZAHL2 a1 DCOUNTA counts the number of cells (fields) of the specified column that are not blank, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria.
11 HID_FUNC_DBANZAHL a9 DCOUNT counts the number of cells (fields) of the specified column that contain numeric values, for all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria.
e HID_FUNC_ISPMT 47 Calcula o nivel de interese para parcelas de amortización inalteradas.
c HID_FUNC_IKV 33 Calcula a taxa interna de retorno dun investimento.
16 HID_AAI_FUNC_AMORDEGRC 6a Calcula o valor da depreciación para un período de liquidación en concepto de amortización degressiva.
15 HID_AAI_FUNC_AMORLINC e5 Calcula o valor da depreciación para un período de liquidación en concepto de amortización lineal. Se o ben de capital é adquirido durante o período de liquidación, a cantidade proporcional de depreciación é considerada.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_ACCRINT 4a Calcula os xuros acumulados dun título no caso de pagamentos periódicos.
11 HID_AAI_FUNC_DISC 42 Calcula o subsidio (desconto) dunha caução como unha porcentaxe.
b HID_FUNC_BW 59 Devolve o valor presente dun investimento resultante dunha serie de pagamentos regulares.
15 HID_AAI_FUNC_RECEIVED 6a Calcula a cantidade recibida que é de pago por un título con xuros fixos nun determinado punto no tempo.
c HID_FUNC_DIA 3a Devolve a taxa de depreciación do decaimento aritmético.
15 HID_AAI_FUNC_DURATION 38 Calcula a duración dun título con xuros fixos en anos.
15 HID_AAI_FUNC_ACCRINTM 59 Calcula os xuros acumulados dun título, no caso dun pago único na data de liquidación.
11 HID_FUNC_EFFEKTIV 46 Devolve a taxa de interese anual líquido a unha taxa de xuro nominal.
d HID_FUNC_GDA2 6e Devolve a depreciación dun activo para un período especificado usando o método de descenso fixo equilibrio.
c HID_FUNC_GDA 6c Devolve a depreciación dun activo para un período especificado usando o método do decaimento aritmético.
13 HID_AAI_FUNC_EFFECT 79 Calcula a taxa anual efectiva de interese con base na taxa de interese nominal eo número de pagamentos de xuros por ano.
18 HID_AAI_FUNC_%C3%89IMPAR 5a Devolve VERDADEIRO (1) se o número non voltar un número enteiro cando dividido por dous.
10 HID_FUNC_ISTTEXT 39 Devolve VERDADEIRO se o contido da cela referir ao texto.
e HID_FUNC_ZELLE 45 Devolve información sobre enderezo, formato ou o contido dunha cela.
d HID_FUNC_IFNA 7f Returns the value if the cell does not contain the #N/A (value not available) error value, or the alternative value if it does.
b HID_FUNC_NV 20 Devolve o valor de erro # N / A.
e HID_FUNC_ISTNV 56 Devolve VERDADEIRO se unha cela contén o valor de erro #N/D (valor non dispoñíbel).
f HID_FUNC_FORMEL 42 Mostra a fórmula dunha cela da fórmula como unha cadea de texto.
14 HID_FUNC_ISTUNGERADE 47 Devolve VERDADEIRO se o valor é impar, ou FALSE se o número é mesmo.
10 HID_FUNC_ISTFEHL 5d As probas de condicións de erro, excepto o # N / A valor de erro, e dá VERDADEIRO ou TEITO.
10 HID_FUNC_IFERROR 63 Returns the value if the cell does not contain an error value, or the alternative value if it does.
10 HID_FUNC_ISTLEER 3d Devolve VERDADEIRO se a referencia a unha cela está baleiro.
12 HID_FUNC_ISTFEHLER 5d Proba as condicións de erro, incluíndo o valor de erro #N/D, e devolve VERDADEIRO ou FALSO.
a HID_FUNC_N 5d Devolve o valor numérico do parámetro dato. Devolve 0 se o parámetro é un texto ou TEITO.
11 HID_FUNC_ISTBEZUG 29 probas se o argumento é unha referencia.
13 HID_AAI_FUNC_ISEVEN 4e As probas de números pares. dá 1 se o número dividido por 2 dá un enteiro.
12 HID_FUNC_ISTFORMEL 3f Devolve VERDADEIRO se unha célula é unha célula de fórmula.
c HID_FUNC_TYP 74 Returns the type of value, where 1 = number, 2 = text, 4 = Boolean value, 8 = formula, 16 = error value, 64 = array.
12 HID_FUNC_ISTGERADE 53 Devolve VERDADEIRO se o valor é un número enteiro par, ou se o valor é estraño.
10 HID_FUNC_ISTZAHL 3a Devolve VERDADEIRO se o valor fai referencia a un número.
11 HID_FUNC_ISTKTEXT 56 Comproba se o contido da cela é texto ou números, e dá FALSE se o contido do texto.
10 HID_FUNC_AKTUELL 12a Esta función devolve o resultado ata o momento de avaliar a fórmula do cal é unha parte (noutras palabras o resultado, tanto como que a avaliación ten). O seu principal uso é en conxunto coa función STYLE () para aplicar estilos seleccionados para unha célula, dependendo do contido da cela.
f HID_FUNC_ISTLOG 33 Probas para un valor lóxico (VERDADEIRO ou FALSO).
d HID_FUNC_WAHR 2a O valor lóxico defínese como VERDADEIRO.
d HID_FUNC_ODER 3e Devolve VERDADEIRO se polo menos un argumento sexa VERDADEIRO.
e HID_FUNC_NICHT 28 Complementos (inverte) un valor lóxico.
f HID_FUNC_FALSCH 1e Devolve o valor lóxico FALSO.
c HID_FUNC_XOR 4e Devolve VERDADEIRO se un número impar de argumentos valorada como VERDADEIRO.
d HID_FUNC_WENN 31 Especifica unha proba lóxica para ser executada.
c HID_FUNC_UND 3b Devolve VERDADEIRO se todos os argumentos sexan VERDADEIRO.
f HID_FUNC_WURZEL 2d Devolve a raíz cadrada dun número positivo.
13 HID_FUNC_VORZEICHEN 5b Devolve o sinal dun número. dá 1 se o número é positivo, -1 se é negativo e 0 se cero.
15 HID_FUNC_TEILERGEBNIS 12 Calcula subtotais.
f HID_FUNC_TANHYP 2c Devolve a tanxente hiperbólica dun número.
f HID_FUNC_SINHYP 28 Devolve o seno hiperbólico dun número.
c HID_FUNC_SIN 35 Devolve o seno do ángulo especificado (en radiáns).
f HID_FUNC_SECANT 87 Devolve a secante do ángulo especificado (en radiáns). O secante dun ángulo é equivalente a 1 dividido polo coseno do que o ángulo
f HID_FUNC_RUNDEN 3e arredonda un número para un certo número de cifras decimais.
12 HID_FUNC_SECANTHYP 2b Devolve a secante hiperbólico dun número.
c HID_FUNC_RAD 1b Converte graos en radiáns.
16 HID_FUNC_QUADRATESUMME 36 Calculates the sum of the squares of a set of numbers.
10 HID_FUNC_PRODUKT 4d Multiplica todos os números facilitados como argumentos e devolve o produto.
f HID_FUNC_POTENZ 2b Devolve un número elevado a outro número.
b HID_FUNC_PI 55 Devolve 3,14159265358979, o valor da constante matemática pi para 14 casas decimais.
e HID_FUNC_LOG10 2b Devolve o logaritmo de base 10 dun número.
f HID_FUNC_COSHYP 2a Devolve o coseno hiperbólico dun número.
10 HID_FUNC_ARCTAN2 6c Returns the angle (in radians) between the x-axis and a line from the origin to the point (NumberX|NumberY).
13 HID_AAI_FUNC_SQRTPI 31 Devolve a raíz cadrada de (PI veces un número).
c HID_FUNC_TAN 39 Devolve a tanxente do ángulo especificado (en radiáns).
19 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_SERIESSUM 31 Suma os primeiros termos dunha serie de potencia.
f HID_FUNC_ARCCOT 43 Devolve a cotanxente inversa (a arccotanxente) do número indicado.
13 HID_AAI_FUNC_MROUND 4e Devolve un número arredondado para o múltiple máis próximo doutro número.
f HID_FUNC_GERADE 80 arredonda un número positivo ao seguinte número enteiro par e un número negativo cara abaixo ao seguinte número enteiro par.
10 HID_FUNC_RAND_NV 35 Returns a non-volatile random number between 0 and 1.
11 HID_FUNC_ARCOTHYP 3e Devolve a inversa cotanxente hiperbólica do número indicado.
11 HID_FUNC_ARCOSHYP 32 Devolve o coseno hiperbólico inverso dun número.
12 HID_FUNC_FAKULTAET 20 Devolve o factorial dun número.
11 HID_FUNC_GANZZAHL 48 Arredonda un número cara a abaixo ata o número enteiro máis próximo.
11 HID_FUNC_ARTANHYP 34 Devolve a tanxente hiperbólica inversa dun número.
12 HID_FUNC_AUFRUNDEN 4c arredonda un número superior, lonxe do cero, para unha correcta precisión.
11 HID_FUNC_ARSINHYP 30 Devolve o seno hiperbólico inverso dun número.
f HID_FUNC_ARCCOS 36 Devolve o coseno inverso trigonométricas dun número.
c HID_FUNC_GGT 3b Devolve o máximo divisor común de dous ou máis enteiros.
14 HID_FUNC_ZUFALLSZAHL 29 Devolve un número aleatorio entre 0 e 1.
11 HID_FUNC_UNGERADE 82 Arredonda un número positivo ao número enteiro raro máis próximo e un número negativo ao número enteiro raro máis próximo.
c HID_FUNC_LOG 35 Devolve o logaritmo dun número á base especificada.
12 HID_FUNC_UMRECHNEN 3e Converte entre moeda nacional e europeo vello de e para Euros.
f HID_FUNC_ARCTAN 37 Devolve a tanxente trigonométrica inversa dun número.
f HID_FUNC_COTHYP 45 Devolve a co-tanxente hiperbólica dun determinado número (ángulo).
11 HID_FUNC_COSECANT 85 Devolve a cosecante do ángulo especificado (en radiáns). A cosecante dun ángulo é equivalente a 1 dividido polo seno dese ángulo
17 HID_FUNC_RANDBETWEEN_NV 43 Returns an non-volatile integer random number in a specified range.
14 HID_FUNC_COSECANTHYP 2d Devolve a cosecante hiperbólica dun número.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_UMRECHNEN 81 Converts to euros a currency value expressed in one of the legacy currencies of 19 member states of the Eurozone, and vice versa.
d HID_FUNC_REST 42 Devolve o resto cando un número enteiro está dividido por outro.
c HID_FUNC_DEG 1b Converte radiáns en graos.
c HID_FUNC_ABS 25 Devolve o valor absoluto dun número.
10 HID_AAI_FUNC_GCD 3f The result is the greatest common divisor of a list of numbers.
c HID_FUNC_KGV 44 Devolve o mínimo común múltiplo de un ou máis números enteiros.
c HID_FUNC_EXP 2a Devolve e elevado á potencia dun número.
c HID_FUNC_COT 3c Devolve a co-tanxente do ángulo especificado (en radiáns).
10 HID_AAI_FUNC_LCM 3e The result is the lowest common multiple of a list of numbers.
c HID_FUNC_COS 37 Devolve o coseno do ángulo especificado (en radiáns).
16 HID_FUNC_KOMBINATIONEN 40 Devolve o número de combinacións de elementos sen repetición.
15 HID_AAI_FUNC_QUOTIENT 36 Devolve a parte enteira dunha operación de división.
18 HID_AAI_FUNC_MULTINOMIAL 6c Returns the factorial of the sum of the arguments divided by the product of the factorials of the arguments.
f HID_FUNC_ARCSIN 33 Devolve o seno trigonométrico inverso dun número.
b HID_FUNC_LN 3f Devolve o logaritmo natural en base á constante e dun número.
18 HID_AAI_FUNC_RANDBETWEEN 40 Devolve un número aleatorio enteiro nun intervalo especificado.
17 HID_FUNC_KOMBINATIONEN2 59 Devolve o número de combinacións dun subconxunto de elementos, incluíndo repeticións.
12 HID_FUNC_VARIATION 3b Calcula os puntos dunha tendencia exponencial nunha matriz.
c HID_FUNC_RGP 65 Devolve unha táboa de estatísticas para unha liña recta que mellor se adapta un conxunto de datos.
17 HID_FUNC_EINHEITSMATRIX 3a Devolve a matriz cadrada unitaria dun determinado tamaño.
d HID_FUNC_MDET 27 Preséntase o determinante dunha matriz
c HID_FUNC_RKP 70 Esta función calcula o axuste dos datos introducidos como unha curva de regresión exponencial (y = b * m ^ x).
12 HID_FUNC_SUMMEXMY2 4f Engade as prazas da variación entre valores correspondentes en dúas matrices.
d HID_FUNC_MINV 19 Devolve a matriz inversa.
16 HID_FUNC_SUMMENPRODUKT 53 Multiplica elementos nos arrays datos correspondente, e dá a suma destes produtos.
e HID_FUNC_MMULT 2d Calcula o produto conxunto de dúas matrices.
f HID_FUNC_MTRANS 2b traspón as liñas e columnas dunha matriz.
13 HID_FUNC_SUMMEX2MY2 57 Devolve a suma da diferenza dos cadrados dos valores correspondentes en dúas matrices.
14 HID_FUNC_HAEUFIGKEIT 42 Indica a distribución de frecuencia nunha matriz de unha columna.
13 HID_FUNC_SUMMEX2PY2 52 Devolve a suma da suma dos cadrados dos valores correspondentes en dúas matrices.
e HID_FUNC_TREND 30 Devolve valores ao longo dunha tendencia lineal.
18 SC_HID_FUNC_GETPIVOTDATA d4 A función GETPIVOTDATA devolve un valor de resultado dunha táboa dinámica. O valor é o destinatario usando de campo e elemento nomes, por iso, segue sendo válida se o esquema dos cambios de táboa dinámica.
12 HID_FUNC_HYPERLINK 4f Cando fai clic nunha cela que contén a función hyperlink, o hiperenlace abre.
e HID_FUNC_ZEILE 2b Returns the row number of a cell reference.
11 HID_FUNC_WVERWEIS 48 Busca por un valor e referencia ás celas debaixo da área seleccionada.
d HID_FUNC_WAHL 43 Usa un índice para volver un valor dunha lista de até 30 valores.
10 HID_FUNC_VERWEIS 49 Returns the contents of a cell either from a one-row or one-column range.
10 HID_FUNC_SPALTEN 31 Devolve o número de columnas na referencia dada.
12 HID_FUNC_VERGLEICH 5f Devolve a posición relativa dun elemento nunha matriz que corresponde a un valor especificado.
f HID_FUNC_SPALTE 2e Returns the column number of a cell reference.
c HID_FUNC_DDE 2f Devolve o resultado dunha ligazón baseada DDE.
12 HID_FUNC_FEHLERTYP 5b Devolve o número correspondente a un  valor de erro  que ocorre en unha célula diferente.
11 HID_FUNC_SVERWEIS 3e Vertical search with reference to adjacent cells to the right.
11 HID_FUNC_BEREICHE 4f Devolve o número de pistas individuais que pertencen a un intervalo múltiplo.
e HID_FUNC_INDEX ca INDEX returns a reference, a value or an array of values from a reference range, specified by row and column index number or array of row and array of columns index numbers, and an optional range index.
10 HID_FUNC_ADRESSE 6e Devolve un enderezo de célula (referencia), como texto, segundo os números de liña e columna especificados.
11 HID_FUNC_INDIREKT 3a Devolve o  referencia  especifica por unha cadea de texto.
15 HID_FUNC_VERSCHIEBUNG 78 Devolve o valor dun compensado por un determinado número de liñas e columnas a partir dun punto de referencia da cela.
f HID_FUNC_ZEILEN 36 Devolve o número de filas nunha referencia ou matriz.
10 HID_FUNC_TABELLE 55 Returns the sheet number of either a reference or a string representing a sheet name.
11 HID_FUNC_TABELLEN 2f Determina o número de follas nunha referencia.
e HID_FUNC_GROSS 4e Converte a secuencia de caracteres especificada no  texto  campo a maiúscula.
d HID_FUNC_FEST 65 Returns a number as text with a specified number of decimal places and optional thousands separators.
12 HID_FUNC_IDENTISCH 49 Compara dúas secuencias de texto e devolve VERDADEIRO se son idénticos.
d HID_FUNC_MIDB 75 Devolve unha cadea de texto dun texto DBCS. Os parámetros especifican a posición inicial e o número de caracteres.
f HID_FUNC_RIGHTB 5f Devolve o último carácter ou caracteres dun texto co dobre personaxes bytes conxuntos (DBCS).
b HID_FUNC_DM c0 Converts a number to a string representing the amount in the currency format, rounded to a specified decimal places, using the decimal separator that corresponds to the current locale setting.
a HID_FUNC_T 6b Esta función devolve o texto de destino, ou unha secuencia de texto en branco se o destino non é o texto.
12 HID_FUNC_VERKETTEN 2f Combina varios secuencias de texto nunha cadea.
e HID_FUNC_LINKS 3f Devolve o primeiro carácter ou primeiros caracteres dun texto.
10 HID_FUNC_DEZIMAL 6b Converts text that represents a number in a numeral system with the given base radix to a positive integer.
e HID_FUNC_LEFTB 2f Devolve os primeiros caracteres dun texto DBCS.
11 HID_FUNC_SAEUBERN 39 Todos os caracteres non imprimibles elimínanse da cadea.
f HID_FUNC_SUCHEN 41 Returns the position of a text segment within a character string.
f HID_FUNC_LAENGE 34 Devolve a lonxitude dunha cadea, incluíndo espazos.
10 HID_FUNC_ZEICHEN 49 Converte un número nun carácter de acordo coa táboa de código actual.
e HID_FUNC_BASIS 56 Converts a positive integer to a specified base into a text from the numbering system.
f HID_FUNC_FINDEN 3f Returns the position of a string of text within another string.
e HID_FUNC_KLEIN 4d Converte todas as letras maiúsculas nunha secuencia de texto en minúsculas.
f HID_FUNC_GROSS2 46 maiúscula a primeira letra de todas as palabras dunha cadea de texto.
d HID_FUNC_TEIL 70 Devolve unha cadea de texto dun texto. Os parámetros especifican a posición inicial e o número de caracteres.
11 HID_FUNC_ERSETZEN 49 Substitúe parte dunha cadea de texto cunha secuencia de texto diferente.
d HID_FUNC_TEXT 37 Converts a value into text according to a given format.
d HID_FUNC_CODE 65 Devolve un código numérico correspondente ao primeiro carácter dunha cadea de caracteres de texto.
f HID_FUNC_RECHTS 37 Devolve o derradeiro carácter ou caracteres dun texto.
11 HID_FUNC_WECHSELN 47 Substitúe un texto novo por un texto antigo nunha cadea de caracteres.
14 HID_FUNC_WIEDERHOLEN 41 Repite unha secuencia de caracteres por  número dato  de copias.
11 HID_FUNC_GLAETTEN 5d Elimina os espazos dunha corda, deixando só un único carácter de espazo entre as palabras.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_UNICHAR 3f Converte un número de código a un carácter ou letra Unicode.
d HID_FUNC_LENB 9f Para a conxunto de caracteres de bytes dobres (DBCS) idiomas, devolve o número de bytes usados ​​para representar os carácteres nunha secuencia de texto.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_UNICODE 4f Devolve o código numérico do primeiro carácter Unicode dunha cadea de texto.
18 HID_DAI_FUNC_WEEKSINYEAR 41 Calcula o número de semanas do ano en que a data inserida ocorre
18 HID_DAI_FUNC_DAYSINMONTH 44 Calcula o número de días do mes en que se produce a data inserida.
17 HID_DAI_FUNC_DAYSINYEAR 44 Calcula o número de días do ano en que se produce a data inserida.
16 HID_DAI_FUNC_DIFFWEEKS 31 Calcula a diferenza en semanas entre dúas datas.
12 HID_DAI_FUNC_ROT13 58 Criptografía unha cadea de caracteres, movendo os personaxes 13 posicións no alfabeto.
17 HID_DAI_FUNC_DIFFMONTHS 2f Calcula a diferenza en meses entre dúas datas.
16 HID_DAI_FUNC_DIFFYEARS 2e Calcula a diferenza en anos entre dúas datas.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_HEX2BIN 73 The result is the string representing the number in binary (base-2) form for the hexadecimal number string entered.
13 HID_AAI_FUNC_GESTEP 39 O resultado é 1 se  Número  é maior ou igual a  Paso .
10 HID_FUNC_ERFC_MS 4d Devolve valores complementarios do erro Gaussian completo entre x e infinito.
11 HID_AAI_FUNC_ERFC 4d Devolve valores complementarios do erro Gaussian completo entre x e infinito.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_BESSELI 40 Calculates the modified Bessel function of the first kind In(x).
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_BESSELY 38 Calculates the Bessel function of the second kind Yn(x).
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_HEX2DEC 43 The result is the number for the hexadecimal number string entered.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_BESSELJ 4b Calculates the Bessel function of the first kind Jn(x) (cylinder function).
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_BIN2DEC 47 The result is the number for the binary (base-2) number string entered.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_HEX2OCT 69 The result is the string representing the number in octal form for the hexadecimal number string entered.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_BESSELK 41 Calculates the modified Bessel function of the second kind Kn(x).
10 HID_AAI_FUNC_ERF 2a Devolve valores do erro Gaussian integral.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_BIN2HEX 73 The result is the string representing the number in hexadecimal form for the binary (base-2) number string entered.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_DEC2BIN 60 The result is the string representing the number in binary (base-2) form for the number entered.
f HID_FUNC_ERF_MS 4c Returns values of the Gaussian error integral between 0 and the given limit.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_BIN2OCT 6d The result is the string representing the number in octal form for the binary (base-2) number string entered.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_DEC2OCT 56 The result is the string representing the number in octal form for the number entered.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_DEC2HEX 5c The result is the string representing the number in hexadecimal form for the number entered.
12 HID_AAI_FUNC_DELTA 79 O resultado é VERDADEIRO (1) se os dous números, que son entregados como un argumento, son iguais, se non é FALSE (0).
17 HID_AAI_FUNC_FACTDOUBLE 26 Devolve o dobre factorial dun número.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_OCT2HEX 69 The result is the string representing the number in hexadecimal form for the octal number string entered.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_OCT2DEZ 3d The result is the number for the octal number string entered.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_OCT2BIN 6d The result is the string representing the number in binary (base-2) form for the octal number string entered.
13 HID_AAI_FUNC_IMSQRT 34 O resultado é a raíz cadrada dun número complexo.
12 HID_AAI_FUNC_IMSUM 32 The result is the sum of a set of complex numbers.
16 HID_AAI_FUNC_IMAGINARY 3d O resultado é o coeficiente imaxinario dun número complexo.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_IMPOWER 43 O resultado é o  Númerocomplexo  elevado á potencia de  Number .
12 HID_AAI_FUNC_IMABS 35 O resultado é o valor absoluto dun número complexo.
16 HID_AAI_FUNC_IMPRODUCT 36 The result is the product of a set of complex numbers.
18 HID_AAI_FUNC_IMCONJUGATE 45 O resultado é o complemento complexo conxugado dun número complexo.
12 HID_AAI_FUNC_IMDIV 36 O resultado é a división de dous números complexos.
12 HID_AAI_FUNC_IMEXP 30 O resultado é o poder de e co número complexo.
12 HID_AAI_FUNC_IMSUB 39 O resultado é a subtracción de dous números complexos.
17 HID_AAI_FUNC_IMARGUMENT 40 O resultado é o argumento (o ángulo phi) dun número complexo.
11 HID_AAI_FUNC_IMLN 44 O resultado é o logaritmo natural (á base e) dun número complexo.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_COMPLEX 6d O resultado é un número complexo, que é devolto a partir dun coeficiente real e un coeficiente imaxinario.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_IMLOG10 44 O resultado é o logaritmo común (á base 10) dun número complexo.
13 HID_AAI_FUNC_IMLOG2 38 O resultado é o logaritmo binario dun número complexo.
13 HID_AAI_FUNC_IMREAL 37 O resultado é o coeficiente real dun número complexo.
17 HID_AAI_FUNC_FVSCHEDULE 6d Calculates the accumulated value of the starting capital for a series of periodically varying interest rates.
e HID_FUNC_ZINSZ 6a Calculates the periodic amortizement for an investment with regular payments and a constant interest rate.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_COUPNUM 64 Returns the number of coupons (interest payments) between the settlement date and the maturity date.
16 HID_AAI_FUNC_ODDFPRICE 73 Calcula o prezo por 100 unidades monetarias de valor nominal dun título, se a primeira data de xuros é irregular.
16 HID_AAI_FUNC_COUPDAYBS 6f Devolve o número de días desde o primeiro día de pagamento de xuros dun título até a data de liquidación.
c HID_FUNC_ZGZ 4a Calcula a taxa de xuro resultante do beneficio (retorno) dun investimento.
d HID_FUNC_ZINS 44 Devolve a taxa de interese constante por período dunha anualidades.
16 HID_AAI_FUNC_ODDFYIELD 47 Calcula o rendemento dun título a primeira data de xuros é irregular.
17 HID_AAI_FUNC_COUPDAYSNC 55 Devolve o número de días desde a data de liquidación ata a próxima data de xuros.
16 HID_AAI_FUNC_ODDLPRICE 72 Calcula o prezo por 100 unidades monetarias de valor nominal dun título, se a última data de xuros é irregular.
16 HID_AAI_FUNC_ODDLYIELD 46 Calcula o rendemento dun título a última data de xuros é irregular.
c HID_FUNC_VDB 80 Devolve a depreciación dun activo para un período especificado ou parcial usando un método de equilibrio variable en declive.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_COUPNCD 6f Devolve a data da primeira data de xuros a partir da data de liquidación. Formatar o resultado como unha data.
11 HID_AAI_FUNC_XIRR 5c Calcula a taxa interna de retorno dunha lista de pagamentos que ocorren en datas diferentes.
11 HID_AAI_FUNC_XNPV 6c Calculates the capital value (net present value) for a list of payments which take place on different dates.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_INTRATE b1 Calcula a taxa de xuros anual que resulta cando un seguridade (ou outro elemento) é adquirido por un valor de investimento e vendido a un valor de rescate. Sen xuros son pagos.
c HID_FUNC_ZZR 72 Returns the number of periods for an investment based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate.
b HID_FUNC_ZW 7b Returns the future value of an investment based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate (Future Value).
15 HID_AAI_FUNC_COUPDAYS 5d Devolve o número de días do período de interese actual, en que a data de liquidación cae.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_TBILLEQ 30 Calculates the annual return on a treasury bill.
12 HID_AAI_FUNC_YIELD 23 Calculates the yield of a security.
d HID_FUNC_QIKV 4b Calculates the modified internal rate of return of a series of investments.
15 HID_AAI_FUNC_DOLLARDE 55 Converts a quotation that has been given as a decimal fraction into a decimal number.
13 HID_AAI_FUNC_EFFECT 79 Calcula a taxa anual efectiva de interese con base na taxa de interese nominal eo número de pagamentos de xuros por ano.
d HID_FUNC_KAPZ 97 Returns for a given period the payment on the principal for an investment that is based on periodic and constant payments and a constant interest rate.
16 HID_AAI_FUNC_PRICEDISC 5d Calculates the price per 100 currency units of par value of a non-interest- bearing security.
c HID_FUNC_NBW e5 Returns the present value of an investment based on a series of periodic cash flows and a discount rate. To get the net present value, subtract the cost of the project (the initial cash flow at time zero) from the returned value.
c HID_FUNC_RMZ 49 Returns the periodic payment for an annuity with constant interest rates.
15 HID_AAI_FUNC_CUMPRINC 3b Calculates the cumulative redemption of a loan in a period.
11 HID_FUNC_KUMZINSZ 7e Calculates the cumulative interest payments, that is, the total interest, for an investment based on a constant interest rate.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_CUMIPMT 31 Calculates the accumulated interest for a period.
16 HID_AAI_FUNC_ODDLPRICE 72 Calcula o prezo por 100 unidades monetarias de valor nominal dun título, se a última data de xuros é irregular.
17 HID_AAI_FUNC_TBILLPRICE 3f Calculates the price of a treasury bill per 100 currency units.
12 HID_AAI_FUNC_PRICE 84 Calculates the market value of a fixed interest security with a par value of 100 currency units as a function of the forecast yield.
15 HID_AAI_FUNC_DURATION 38 Calcula a duración dun título con xuros fixos en anos.
15 HID_AAI_FUNC_YIELDMAT 61 Calculates the annual yield of a security, the interest of which is paid on the date of maturity.
16 HID_AAI_FUNC_YIELDDISC 3f Calculates the annual yield of a non-interest-bearing security.
11 HID_FUNC_LAUFZEIT 57 Calculates the number of periods required by an investment to attain the desired value.
15 HID_AAI_FUNC_DOLLARFR 5b Converts a quotation that has been given as a decimal number into a mixed decimal fraction.
c HID_FUNC_LIA 42 Returns the straight-line depreciation of an asset for one period.
17 HID_AAI_FUNC_TBILLYIELD 28 Calculates the yield of a treasury bill.
13 HID_FUNC_KUMKAPITAL 5c Returns the cumulative interest paid for an investment period with a constant interest rate.
10 HID_FUNC_NOMINAL 75 Calculates the yearly nominal interest rate, given the effective rate and the number of compounding periods per year.
12 HID_FUNC_BITRSHIFT 20 Shifts a number right by n bits.
12 HID_FUNC_BITLSHIFT 1f Shifts a number left by n bits.
f HID_FUNC_BITXOR 3b Returns a bitwise logical "exclusive or" of the parameters.
e HID_FUNC_BITOR 31 Returns a bitwise logical "or" of the parameters.
f HID_FUNC_BITAND 32 Returns a bitwise logical "and" of the parameters.
14 HID_FUNC_EXP_DIST_MS 24 Devolve a distribución exponencial.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_CHISQDIST 7e Returns the value of the probability density function or the cumulative distribution function for the chi-square distribution.
15 HID_FUNC_CHISQDIST_MS 71 Returns the probability density function or the cumulative distribution function for the chi-square distribution.
10 HID_FUNC_CHITEST 83 Returns the probability of a deviance from a random distribution of two test series based on the chi-squared test for independence.
12 HID_FUNC_CHIINV_MS 52 Returns the inverse of the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared distribution.
f HID_FUNC_CHIINV 52 Returns the inverse of the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared distribution.
14 HID_FUNC_CHISQINV_MS 52 Returns the inverse of the left-tailed probability of the chi-square distribution.
18 HID_FUNC_ACHSENABSCHNITT 66 Calculates the point at which a line will intersect the y-values by using known x-values and y-values.
f HID_FUNC_ANZAHL 35 Counts how many numbers are in the list of arguments.
13 HID_FUNC_CHITEST_MS 83 Returns the probability of a deviance from a random distribution of two test series based on the chi-squared test for independence.
14 HID_FUNC_ZAEHLENWENN 50 Returns the number of cells that meet with certain criteria within a cell range.
13 HID_FUNC_BETAINV_MS 48 Returns the inverse of the cumulative Beta probability density function.
13 HID_FUNC_CHIVERT_MS 5b Returns the probability value from the indicated Chi square that a hypothesis is confirmed.
10 HID_FUNC_CHIVERT 5b Returns the probability value from the indicated Chi square that a hypothesis is confirmed.
10 HID_FUNC_ANZAHL2 34 Counts how many values are in the list of arguments.
1a HID_FUNC_ANZAHLLEEREZELLEN 22 Returns the number of empty cells.
15 HID_FUNC_BINOM_INV_MS 78 Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is greater than or equal to a criterion value.
a HID_FUNC_B 3f Returns the probability of a sample with binomial distribution.
16 HID_FUNC_BINOM_DIST_MS 3e Returns the individual term binomial distribution probability.
1a HID_FUNC_BESTIMMTHEITSMASS 54 Returns the square of the Pearson correlation coefficient based on the given values.
12 HID_FUNC_EXPONVERT 24 Devolve a distribución exponencial.
10 HID_FUNC_BETAINV 48 Returns the inverse of the cumulative Beta probability density function.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_CHISQINV 21 Returns the inverse of CHISQDIST.
e HID_FUNC_TVERT 1a Devolve a distribución t.
12 HID_FUNC_BINOMVERT 3e Returns the individual term binomial distribution probability.
e HID_FUNC_GTEST 66 Calcula a probabilidade de observar unha estatística z maior que unha calculada a partir dun exemplo.
d HID_FUNC_FINV 36 Returns the inverse of the F probability distribution.
17 HID_FUNC_GESTUTZTMITTEL 50 Returns the mean of a data set without the Alpha percent of data at the margins.
10 HID_FUNC_SCHIEFE 29 Devolve a asimetría dunha distribución.
10 HID_FUNC_POISSON 20 Devolve a distribución Poisson.
e HID_FUNC_FTEST 20 Returns the result of an F test.
f HID_FUNC_FISHER 5e Returns the Fisher transformation for x and creates a function close to a normal distribution.
12 HID_FUNC_FISHERINV 6d Returns the inverse of the Fisher transformation for x and creates a function close to a normal distribution.
10 HID_FUNC_WEIBULL 2f Devolve os valores da distribución de Weibull.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_GAMMA 21 Returns the Gamma function value.
11 HID_FUNC_F_INV_LT 35 Returns the inverse of the cumulative F distribution.
12 HID_FUNC_F_TEST_MS 20 Returns the result of an F test.
11 HID_FUNC_GAMMAINV 43 Returns the inverse of the Gamma cumulative distribution GAMMADIST.
14 HID_FUNC_GAMMAINV_MS 43 Returns the inverse of the Gamma cumulative distribution GAMMADIST.
12 HID_FUNC_GEOMITTEL 29 Devolve a media xeométrica dunha mostra.
10 HID_FUNC_GAMMALN 3a Returns the natural logarithm of the Gamma function: G(x).
13 HID_FUNC_GAMMALN_MS 3a Returns the natural logarithm of the Gamma function: G(x).
10 HID_FUNC_WEIBULL 2f Devolve os valores da distribución de Weibull.
d HID_FUNC_KURT 40 Returns the kurtosis of a data set (at least 4 values required).
15 HID_FUNC_COVARIANCE_S 5b Returns the covariance of the product of paired deviations, for a sample of the population.
15 HID_FUNC_COVARIANCE_P 56 Returns the covariance of the product of paired deviations, for the entire population.
e HID_FUNC_KOVAR 3b Returns the covariance of the product of paired deviations.
15 HID_FUNC_CONFIDENCE_N 44 Returns the (1-alpha) confidence interval for a normal distribution.
f HID_FUNC_KORREL 3a Returns the correlation coefficient between two data sets.
15 HID_FUNC_CONFIDENCE_T 49 Returns the (1-alpha) confidence interval for a Student's t distribution.
12 HID_FUNC_KRITBINOM 78 Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is greater than or equal to a criterion value.
12 HID_FUNC_KONFIDENZ 44 Returns the (1-alpha) confidence interval for a normal distribution.
12 HID_FUNC_KKLEINSTE 33 Returns the Rank_c-th smallest value in a data set.
12 HID_FUNC_KGROESSTE 32 Returns the Rank_c-th largest value in a data set.
18 HID_FUNC_PERCENTRANK_EXC 69 Returns the relative position, between 0 and 1 (exclusive), of a specified value within a supplied array.
15 HID_FUNC_QUANTILSRANG 35 Devolve a posición porcentual do valor nunha mostra.
17 HID_FUNC_PERCENTILE_INC 38 Returns the alpha-percentile of data values in an array.
18 HID_FUNC_PERCENTRANK_INC 69 Returns the relative position, between 0 and 1 (inclusive), of a specified value within a supplied array.
17 HID_FUNC_PERCENTILE_EXC 7e Returns the Alpha'th percentile of a supplied range of values for a given value of Alpha, within the range 0 to 1 (exclusive).
10 HID_FUNC_POISSON 20 Devolve a distribución Poisson.
c HID_FUNC_PHI 75 Returns the value of the probability density function for a given value considering the standard normal distribution.
10 HID_FUNC_QUANTIL 38 Returns the alpha-percentile of data values in an array.
c HID_FUNC_MAX 32 Devolve o valor máximo dunha lista de argumentos.
d HID_FUNC_MAXA 7a Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments. In opposite to MAX, here you can enter text. The value of the text is 0.
10 HID_FUNC_PEARSON 3d Returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient r.
10 HID_FUNC_WEIBULL 2f Devolve os valores da distribución de Weibull.
14 HID_FUNC_MITTELWERTA 3f Returns the average of the arguments. The value of a text is 0.
c HID_FUNC_MIN 32 Devolve o valor mínimo dunha lista de argumentos.
12 HID_FUNC_GEOMITTEL 29 Devolve a media xeométrica dunha mostra.
d HID_FUNC_MINA 6b Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments. Here you can also enter text. The value of the text is 0.
15 HID_FUNC_QUARTILE_EXC 6c Returns a requested quartile of a supplied range of values, based on a percentile range of 0 to 1 exclusive.
e HID_FUNC_TVERT 1a Devolve a distribución t.
1a HID_FUNC_MODAL_VALUE_MULTI 7b Returns a vertical array of the statistical modes (the most frequently occurring values) within a list of supplied numbers.
12 HID_FUNC_MITTELABW 4e Returns the average of the absolute deviations of data points from their mean.
f HID_FUNC_MEDIAN 100 Returns the median of a set of numbers. In a set containing an uneven number of values, the median will be the number in the middle of the set and in a set containing an even number of values, it will be the mean of the two values in the middle of the set.
13 HID_FUNC_MITTELWERT 25 Returns the average of the arguments.
12 HID_FUNC_MODALWERT 2c Returns the most common value in a data set.
17 HID_FUNC_MODAL_VALUE_MS 59 Returns the most frequently occurring, or repetitive, value in an array or range of data.
17 HID_FUNC_WAHRSCHBEREICH 46 Returns the probability that values in a range are between two limits.
15 HID_FUNC_VARIATIONEN2 66 Devolve a cantidade de permutacións para un número determinado de elementos (repetición permitida).
11 HID_FUNC_TDIST_2T ac Calculates the two-tailed Student's T Distribution, which is a continuous probability distribution that is frequently used for testing hypotheses on small sample data sets.
e HID_FUNC_TTEST 3b Returns the probability associated with a Student's t-Test.
11 HID_FUNC_TTEST_MS 3b Returns the probability associated with a Student's t-Test.
10 HID_FUNC_TINV_2T 41 Calculates the inverse of the two-tailed Student's T Distribution
13 HID_FUNC_SUMQUADABW 40 Returns the sum of squares of deviations based on a sample mean.
d HID_FUNC_RANG 29 Returns the rank of a number in a sample.
11 HID_FUNC_RANK_AVG 51 Returns the statistical rank of a given value, within a supplied array of values.
11 HID_FUNC_STEIGUNG 30 Returns the slope of the linear regression line.
10 HID_FUNC_RANK_EQ 51 Returns the statistical rank of a given value, within a supplied array of values.
10 HID_FUNC_SCHIEFE 29 Devolve a asimetría dunha distribución.
11 HID_FUNC_TDIST_RT ae Calculates the right-tailed Student's T Distribution, which is a continuous probability distribution that is frequently used for testing hypotheses on small sample data sets.
12 HID_FUNC_SCHAETZER 3c Extrapolates future values based on existing x and y values.
19 HID_FUNC_STANDARDISIERUNG 38 Converte unha variábel aleatoria nun valor normalizado.
e HID_FUNC_TVERT 1a Devolve a distribución t.
10 HID_FUNC_STABWNA 39 Calcula o desvío estándar con base na poboación total.
10 HID_FUNC_WEIBULL 2f Devolve os valores da distribución de Weibull.
16 HID_FUNC_STANDNORMVERT 82 Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution function. The distribution has a mean of zero and a standard deviation of one.
18 HID_FUNC_STD_NORMDIST_MS 82 Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution function. The distribution has a mean of zero and a standard deviation of one.
f HID_FUNC_STABWN 39 Calcula o desvío estándar con base na poboación total.
13 HID_FUNC_STFEHLERYX 51 Returns the standard error of the predicted y value for each x in the regression.
10 .uno%3ANamesMenu 47 Allows you to name the different sections of your spreadsheet document.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinename%2Fcolheader 27 Defines the area as a repeating column.
27 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinename%2Fadd 2f Click the Add button to add a new defined name.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinename%2Frowheader 24 Defines the area as a repeating row.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinename%2Ffilter 3b Defines the selected area to be used in an advanced filter.
28 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinename%2Fmore 41 Allows you to specify the Area type (optional) for the reference.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinename%2Fscope 77 Select the scope of the named range or named formula. Document (Global) means the name is valid for the whole document.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinename%2Frange 4b The reference of the selected area name is shown here as an absolute value.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinename%2Fprintarea 22 Defines the area as a print range.
28 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinename%2Fedit 5c Enter the name of the area for which you want to define a reference or a formula expression.
11 .uno%3ADefineName 84 Abre unha caixa de diálogo na que se pode indicar un nome para unha área seleccionada ou un nome para unha expresión de fórmula.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Finsertname%2Fpaste 64 Inserts the selected named area and the corresponding cell reference at the current cursor position.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Finsertname%2Fpasteall 74 Insire unha lista de todas as áreas con nome e as referencias de cela correspondents na posición actual do cursor.
28 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Finsertname%2Fctrl 82 Lists all defined cell areas. Double-click an entry to insert the named area into the active sheet at the current cursor position.
11 .uno%3AInsertName 60 Inserts a defined named cell range at the current cursor's position with the Paste Names dialog.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcreatenamesdialog%2Fright 58 Creates the range names from the entries in the last column of the selected sheet range.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcreatenamesdialog%2Fbottom 55 Creates the range names from the entries in the last row of the selected sheet range.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcreatenamesdialog%2Fleft 59 Creates the range names from the entries in the first column of the selected sheet range.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcreatenamesdialog%2Ftop 42 Creates the range names from the header row of the selected range.
12 .uno%3ACreateNames 36 Allows you to automatically name multiple cell ranges.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnamerangesdialog%2Fadd 29 Adds the current label range to the list.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnamerangesdialog%2Fedassign2 8a Sets the data range for which the selected label range is valid. To modify it, click in the sheet and select another range with the mouse.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnamerangesdialog%2Frowhead 2f Includes row labels in the current label range.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnamerangesdialog%2Fedassign 30 Displays the cell reference of each label range.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnamerangesdialog%2Fcolhead 32 Includes column labels in the current label range.
17 .uno%3ADefineLabelRange 35 Opens a dialog in which you can define a label range.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ffunctionpanel%2Finsert 30 Inserts the selected function into the document.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ffunctionpanel%2Ffunclist 21 Displays the available functions.
13 HID_SC_FUNCTIONLIST 72 Opens the Function List deck of the Sidebar, which displays all functions that can be inserted into your document.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fexternaldata%2Fdelay 64 Enter the number of seconds to wait before the external data are reloaded into the current document.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fexternaldata%2Fbrowse 4d Open a file dialog to locate the file containing the data you want to insert.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fexternaldata%2Franges 3b Select the table or the data range that you want to insert.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fexternaldata%2Furl 64 Enter the URL or the file name that contains the data that you want to insert, and then press Enter.
1e .uno%3AInsertExternalDataSourc 83 Inserts data from an HTML, Calc, CSV or Excel file into the current sheet as a link. The data must be located within a named range.
17 .uno%3AFormatCellDialog 64 Allows you to specify a variety of formatting options and to apply attributes to the selected cells.
3c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcellprotectionpage%2FcheckHideFormula 25 Hides formulas in the selected cells.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcellprotectionpage%2FcheckProtected 30 Prevents the selected cells from being modified.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcellprotectionpage%2FcheckHideAll 32 Hides formulas and contents of the selected cells.
3d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcellprotectionpage%2FcheckHidePrinting 2c Keeps the selected cells from being printed.
3e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcellprotectionpage%2FCellProtectionPage 2e Defines protection options for selected cells.
e .uno%3ARowMenu 35 Sets the row height and hides or shows selected rows.
11 .uno%3AHideColumn 1e Hides selected rows or columns
e .uno%3AHideRow 1e Hides selected rows or columns
11 .uno%3AShowColumn 3e Choose this command to show previously hidden rows or columns.
e .uno%3AShowRow 3e Choose this command to show previously hidden rows or columns.
11 .uno%3AColumnMenu 3a Sets the column width and hides or shows selected columns.
17 .uno%3ASheetRightToLeft 58 Changes the orientation of the current sheet to Right-To-Left if CTL support is enabled.
10 .uno%3ASheetMenu 37 Sets the sheet name and hides or shows selected sheets.
12 HID_SC_APPEND_NAME 24 Enter a new name for the sheet here.
12 .uno%3ARenameTable 57 This command opens a dialog where you can assign a different name to the current sheet.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fshowsheetdialog%2FShowSheetDialog 42 Displays a list of all hidden sheets in your spreadsheet document.
b .uno%3AShow 49 Displays sheets that were previously hidden with the Hide Sheets command.
3b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmergecellsdialog%2Fempty-cells-radio c2 The actual contents of the hidden cells are concatenated to the first cell, and hidden cells are emptied; the results of formulas referring to the hidden cells or the first cell will be updated.
3c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmergecellsdialog%2Fkeep-content-radio c2 The actual contents of the hidden cells are concatenated to the first cell, and hidden cells are emptied; the results of formulas referring to the hidden cells or the first cell will be updated.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmergecellsdialog%2Fmove-cells-radio c2 The actual contents of the hidden cells are concatenated to the first cell, and hidden cells are emptied; the results of formulas referring to the hidden cells or the first cell will be updated.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmergecellsdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ d9 This is a toggleable control that joins all cells in a rectangular selection into a single cell, or returns merged cells to the original individual cells. When merging it will format the merged cell as center aligned.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmergecellsdialog%2FMergeCellsDialog d9 This is a toggleable control that joins all cells in a rectangular selection into a single cell, or returns merged cells to the original individual cells. When merging it will format the merged cell as center aligned.
17 .uno%3AToggleMergeCells d9 This is a toggleable control that joins all cells in a rectangular selection into a single cell, or returns merged cells to the original individual cells. When merging it will format the merged cell as center aligned.
17 .uno%3APageFormatDialog 51 Opens a dialog where you can define the appearance of all pages in your document.
3b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsheetprintpage%2FspinED_SCALEPAGENUM 30 Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed.
3e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsheetprintpage%2FspinED_SCALEPAGEHEIGHT 43 Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed vertically stacked.
3d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsheetprintpage%2FspinED_SCALEPAGEWIDTH 44 Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed horizontally across.
37 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsheetprintpage%2FspinED_SCALEALL 61 Enter a scaling factor. Factors less than 100 reduce the pages, higher factors enlarge the pages.
39 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsheetprintpage%2FcomboLB_SCALEMODE 5f Select a scaling mode from the list box. Appropriate controls will be shown below the list box.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsheetprintpage%2FSheetPrintPage b6 Specifies the elements to be included in the printout of all sheets with the current Page Style. Additionally, you can set the print order, the first page number, and the page scale.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsheetprintpage%2FcheckBTN_NOTES 30 Prints the comments defined in your spreadsheet.
37 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsheetprintpage%2FcheckBTN_HEADER 44 Specifies whether you want the column and row headers to be printed.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsheetprintpage%2FcheckBTN_GRID 39 Prints out the borders of the individual cells as a grid.
37 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsheetprintpage%2FcheckBTN_CHARTS 40 Prints the charts that have been inserted into your spreadsheet.
39 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsheetprintpage%2FcheckBTN_NULLVALS 33 Specifies that cells with a zero value are printed.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsheetprintpage%2FcheckBTN_OBJECTS 54 Includes all inserted objects (if printable) and graphics with the printed document.
39 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsheetprintpage%2FcheckBTN_FORMULAS 43 Prints the formulas contained in the cells, instead of the results.
39 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsheetprintpage%2FcheckBTN_DRAWINGS 35 Includes all drawing objects in the printed document.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsheetprintpage%2FradioBTN_TOPDOWN 42 Prints vertically from the left column to the bottom of the sheet.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsheetprintpage%2FradioBTN_LEFTRIGHT 46 Prints horizontally from the top row of the sheet to the right column.
37 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsheetprintpage%2FcheckBTN_PAGENO 44 Select this option if you want this style to restart page numbering.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsheetprintpage%2FspinED_PAGENO 28 Enter the number you want to restart at.
16 .uno%3APrintRangesMenu 49 Manages print ranges. Only cells within the print ranges will be printed.
16 .uno%3ADefinePrintArea 40 Defines an active cell or selected cell area as the print range.
16 .uno%3ADeletePrintArea 1f Removes the defined print area.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fprintareasdialog%2Fedrepeatcol 89 Choose one or more columns to print on every page. In the right text box enter the column reference, for example, "A" or "AB" or "$C:$E".
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fprintareasdialog%2Fedrepeatrow 83 Choose one or more rows to print on every page. In the right text box enter the row reference, for example, "1" or "$1" or "$2:$3".
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fprintareasdialog%2Fedprintarea 3a Permítelle modificar un intervalo de impresión definido.
14 .uno%3AEditPrintArea 35 Opens a dialog where you can specify the print range.
13 .uno%3AAddPrintArea 36 Adds the current selection to the defined print areas.
18 SFX2_HID_TEMPLATE_FILTER 21 Lists the available style groups.
15 SFX2_HID_TEMPLATE_FMT 41 Displays the list of the styles from the selected style category.
1e SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_NEWBYEXAMPLE 41 Creates a new style based on the formatting of a selected object.
21 SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_UPDATEBYEXAMPLE 63 Updates the Style selected in the Styles window with the current formatting of the selected object.
1a SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_WATERCAN 6b Turns the Fill Format mode on and off. Use the paint can to assign the Style selected in the Styles window.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconditionalformatdialog%2Fup 2c Increase priority of the selected condition.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconditionalformatdialog%2Fdown 2c Decrease priority of the selected condition.
39 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconditionalformatdialog%2Fedassign 2c Increase priority of the selected condition.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconditionalformatdialog%2Flist 2c Increase priority of the selected condition.
48 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconditionalformatdialog%2FConditionalFormatDialog a0 Use Conditional Formatting to define range-based conditions that determine which cell style will be applied to each cell in a given range based on its contents.
3d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconditionalformatdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ a0 Use Conditional Formatting to define range-based conditions that determine which cell style will be applied to each cell in a given range based on its contents.
1c .uno%3AConditionalFormatMenu a0 Use Conditional Formatting to define range-based conditions that determine which cell style will be applied to each cell in a given range based on its contents.
1e .uno%3AConditionalFormatDialog a0 Use Conditional Formatting to define range-based conditions that determine which cell style will be applied to each cell in a given range based on its contents.
10 .uno%3AHyphenate 5b The Hyphenation command calls the dialog for setting the hyphenation in $[officename] Calc.
15 .uno%3AShowPrecedents 75 This function shows the relationship between the current cell containing a formula and the cells used in the formula.
1b .uno%3AClearArrowPrecedents 5b Deletes one level of the trace arrows that were inserted with the Trace Precedents command.
15 .uno%3AShowDependents 5e Draws tracer arrows to the active cell from formulas that depend on values in the active cell.
1b .uno%3AClearArrowDependents 41 Deletes one level of tracer arrows created with Trace Dependents.
12 .uno%3AClearArrows 2f Removes all tracer arrows from the spreadsheet.
11 .uno%3AShowErrors 59 Draws tracer arrows to all precedent cells which cause an error value in a selected cell.
17 .uno%3AAuditingFillMode 99 Activates the Fill Mode in the Detective. The mouse pointer changes to a special symbol, and you can click any cell to see a trace to the precedent cell.
12 .uno%3AShowInvalid 5a Marca todas as celas da folla que conteñan valores que escapen ás regras de validación.
14 .uno%3ARefreshArrows 62 Redraws all traces in the sheet. Formulas modified when traces are redrawn are taken into account.
18 .uno%3AAutoRefreshArrows 52 Automatically refreshes all the traces in the sheet whenever you modify a formula.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fgoalseekdlg%2Fvaredit 6d Specifies the reference for the cell that contains the value you want to adjust in order to reach the target.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fgoalseekdlg%2Ftarget 38 Specifies the value you want to achieve as a new result.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fgoalseekdlg%2Fformulaedit 78 In the formula cell, enter the reference of the cell which contains the formula. It contains the current cell reference.
15 .uno%3AGoalSeekDialog 3f Opens a dialog where you can solve an equation with a variable.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscenariodialog%2Fpreventchanges a6 Prevents changes to the active scenario. The behavior of the Copy back setting depends on the cell protection, the sheet protection, and the Prevent changes settings.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscenariodialog%2Fcopysheet 3a Copies the entire sheet into an additional scenario sheet.
18 SC_HID_SC_SCENWIN_BOTTOM ab Specifies additional information about the scenario. This information will be displayed in the Navigator when you click the Scenarios icon and select the desired scenario.
15 SC_HID_SC_SCENWIN_TOP 67 Defines the name for the scenario. Use a clear and unique name so you can easily identify the scenario.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscenariodialog%2Fcopyback 11d Copies the values of cells that you change into the active scenario. If you do not select this option, the scenario is not changed when you change cell values. The behavior of the Copy back setting depends on the cell protection, the sheet protection, and the Prevent changes settings.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscenariodialog%2Fname 67 Defines the name for the scenario. Use a clear and unique name so you can easily identify the scenario.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscenariodialog%2Fcomment ab Specifies additional information about the scenario. This information will be displayed in the Navigator when you click the Scenarios icon and select the desired scenario.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscenariodialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 2f Defines a scenario for the selected sheet area.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscenariodialog%2Fbordercolor 84 Highlights the scenario in your table with a border. The color for the border is specified in the field to the right of this option.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscenariodialog%2FScenarioDialog 2f Defines a scenario for the selected sheet area.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscenariodialog%2Fshowframe 84 Highlights the scenario in your table with a border. The color for the border is specified in the field to the right of this option.
16 .uno%3AScenarioManager 2f Defines a scenario for the selected sheet area.
19 SC_HID_PASSWD_DOC_CONFIRM 19 Reescriba o  contrasinal.
11 SC_HID_PASSWD_DOC 64 You can create a password to protect your document against unauthorized or accidental modifications.
1d .uno%3AToolProtectionDocument 82 Protects the sheet structure of your document from modifications. It is impossible to insert, delete, rename, move or copy sheets.
1b .uno%3AAutomaticCalculation 38 Automatically recalculates all formulas in the document.
10 .uno%3ACalculate fa In either mode, with formula cell(s) selected pressing F9 recalculates the currently selected cells and formula cells that depend on them. This can be useful after reading documents with recalculation disabled and individual cells need recalculation.
13 .uno%3AAutoComplete 7d Switches the AutoInput function on and off, which automatically completes entries, based on other entries in the same column.
12 .uno%3ASplitWindow 45 Divides the current window at the top left corner of the active cell.
12 .uno%3AFreezePanes 71 Divides the sheet at the top left corner of the active cell and the area to the top left is no longer scrollable.
37 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinedatabaserangedialog%2Fmore 19 Shows additional options.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinedatabaserangedialog%2Fadd 60 Adds the selected cell range to the database range list, or modifies an existing database range.
39 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinedatabaserangedialog%2Fassign 21 Displays the selected cell range.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinedatabaserangedialog%2Fentry 66 Enter a name for the database range that you want to define, or select an existing name from the list.
13 .uno%3ADefineDBName 43 Defines a database range based on the selected cells in your sheet.
47 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinedatabaserangedialog%2FDontSaveImportedData 4a Only saves a reference to the database, and not the contents of the cells.
46 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinedatabaserangedialog%2FInsertOrDeleteCells 7f Automatically inserts new rows and columns into the database range in your document when new records are added to the database.
41 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinedatabaserangedialog%2FKeepFormatting 5b Applies the existing cell format of headers and first data row to the whole database range.
47 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinedatabaserangedialog%2FContainsColumnLabels 25 Selected cell ranges contains labels.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fselectrange%2Ftreeview 63 Lists the available database ranges. To select a database range, click its name, and then click OK.
f .uno%3ASelectDB 44 Selects a database range that you defined under Data - Define Range.
f .uno%3ADataSort 45 Sorts the selected rows according to the conditions that you specify.
25 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsortkey%2Fdown 77 Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options.
23 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsortkey%2Fup a2 Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value. The sorting rules are given by the locale. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options.
27 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsortkey%2Fsortlb 3f Select the column that you want to use as the primary sort key.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsortcriteriapage%2FSortCriteriaPage 33 Specify the sorting options for the selected range.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsortoptionspage%2Fleftright 45 Sorts columns by the values in the active rows of the selected range.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsortoptionspage%2FSortOptionsPage 20 Sets additional sorting options.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsortoptionspage%2Fsortuser 3f Click here and then select the custom sort order that you want.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsortoptionspage%2Fcase 6c Sorts first by uppercase letters and then by lowercase letters. For Asian locales, special handling applies.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsortoptionspage%2Falgorithmlb 27 Select a sorting option for the locale.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsortoptionspage%2Fheader 47 Omits the first row or the first column in the selection from the sort.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsortoptionspage%2Fnaturalsort ca Natural sort is a sort algorithm that sorts string-prefixed numbers based on the value of the numerical element in each sorted number, instead of the traditional way of sorting them as ordinary strings.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsortoptionspage%2Fformats 26 Preserves the current cell formatting.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsortoptionspage%2Foutarealb 45 Select a named  cell range where you want to display the sorted list.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsortoptionspage%2Fcopyresult 3a Copies the sorted list to the cell range that you specify.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsortoptionspage%2Foutareaed 3f Enter the cell range where you want to display the sorted list.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsortoptionspage%2Fsortuserlb 8c Select the custom sort order that you want to apply. To define a custom sort order, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsortoptionspage%2Ftopdown 45 Sorts rows by the values in the active columns of the selected range.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsortoptionspage%2Flanguage 28 Select the locale for the sorting rules.
11 .uno%3AFilterMenu 23 Shows commands to filter your data.
1b .uno%3ADataFilterAutoFilter 86 Automatically filters the selected cell range, and creates one-row list boxes where you can choose the items that you want to display.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fadvancedfilterdialog%2Funique 35 Excludes duplicate rows in the list of filtered data.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fadvancedfilterdialog%2Fregexp 3f Allows you to use regular expressions in the filter definition.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fadvancedfilterdialog%2Fedcopyarea 62 Select the check box, and then select the cell range where you want to display the filter results.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fadvancedfilterdialog%2Fheader 3c Includes the column labels in the first row of a cell range.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fdestpers 121 Select the Copy results to check box, and then specify the destination range where you want to display the filtered data. If this box is checked, the destination range remains linked to the source range. You must have defined the source range under Data - Define range as a database range.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fadvancedfilterdialog%2Fcase 4e Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters when filtering the data.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fadvancedfilterdialog%2Fmore 20 Shows additional filter options.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fadvancedfilterdialog%2Fedfilterarea 67 Select the named range, or enter the cell range that contains the filter criteria that you want to use.
1e .uno%3ADataFilterSpecialFilter 1a Define un filtro avanzado.
1d .uno%3ADataFilterRemoveFilter 81 Removes the filter from the selected cell range. To enable this command, click inside the cell area where the filter was applied.
1f .uno%3ADataFilterHideAutoFilter 38 Hides the AutoFilter buttons in the selected cell range.
14 .uno%3ADataSubTotals 35 Calculates subtotals for the columns that you select.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsubtotalgrppage%2Ffunctions 51 Select the mathematical function that you want to use to calculate the subtotals.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsubtotalgrppage%2Fcolumns 45 Select the column(s) containing the values that you want to subtotal.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsubtotalgrppage%2Fgroup_by a9 Select the column that you want to control the subtotal calculation process. If the contents of the selected column change, the subtotals are automatically recalculated.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsubtotalgrppage%2FSubTotalGrpPage 53 Specify the settings for up to three subtotal groups. Each tab has the same layout.
37 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsubtotaloptionspage%2Fdescending 5f Sorts beginning with the highest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsubtotaloptionspage%2Fascending 5e Sorts beginning with the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options.
37 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsubtotaloptionspage%2Fbtnuserdef 69 Uses a custom sorting order that you defined in the Options dialog box at %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsubtotaloptionspage%2Flbuserdef 69 Uses a custom sorting order that you defined in the Options dialog box at %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsubtotaloptionspage%2Fsort 72 Sorts the area that you selected in the Group by box of the Group tabs according to the columns that you selected.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsubtotaloptionspage%2Fcase 40 Recalculates subtotals when you change the case of a data label.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsubtotaloptionspage%2Fformats 2d Considers formatting attributes when sorting.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsubtotaloptionspage%2Fpagebreak 37 Inserts a new page after each group of subtotaled data.
39 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsubtotaloptionspage%2F@@nowidget@@ 3e Specify the settings for calculating and presenting subtotals.
40 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsubtotaloptionspage%2FSubTotalOptionsPage 3e Specify the settings for calculating and presenting subtotals.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmultipleoperationsdialog%2Fcol 64 Enter the input cell reference that you want to use as a variable for the columns in the data table.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmultipleoperationsdialog%2Frow 61 Enter the input cell reference that you want to use as a variable for the rows in the data table.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmultipleoperationsdialog%2Fformulas 6f Enter the cell references for the cells containing the formulas that you want to use in the multiple operation.
1b .uno%3ATableOperationDialog 51 Applies the same formula to different cells, but with different parameter values.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Fmore 19 Shows additional options.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Fadd 5b Adds the cell range specified in the Source data range box to the Consolidation ranges box.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Feddestarea 57 Displays the first cell in the range where the consolidation results will be displayed.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Feddataarea f9 Specifies the cell range that you want to consolidate with the cell ranges listed in the Consolidation ranges box. Select a cell range in a sheet, and then click Add. You can also select the name of a predefined cell from the Source data range list.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Fconsareas 36 Displays the cell ranges that you want to consolidate.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Ffunc 41 Select the function that you want to use to consolidate the data.
16 .uno%3ADataConsolidate 76 Combines data from one or more independent cell ranges and calculates a new range using the function that you specify.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Frefs 99 Links the data in the consolidation range to the source data, and automatically updates the results of the consolidation when the source data is changed.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Fbycol 38 Uses the column labels to arrange the consolidated data.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Fbyrow 35 Uses the row labels to arrange the consolidated data.
11 .uno%3AHideDetail ad Hides the details of the grouped row or column that contains the cursor. To hide all of the grouped rows or columns, select the outlined table, and then choose this command.
11 .uno%3AShowDetail bc Shows the details of the grouped row or column that contains the cursor. To show the details of all of the grouped rows or columns, select the outlined table, and then choose this command.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fgroupdialog%2Frows 19 Groups the selected rows.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fgroupdialog%2Fcols 1c Groups the selected columns.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fgroupdialog%2FGroupDialog 3e Defines the selected cell range as a group of rows or columns.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fgroupdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 3e Defines the selected cell range as a group of rows or columns.
c .uno%3AGroup 3e Defines the selected cell range as a group of rows or columns.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnotebookbar%2FMenuData-Group 3e Defines the selected cell range as a group of rows or columns.
e .uno%3AUngroup 6f Ungroups the selection. In a nested group, the last rows or columns that were added are removed from the group.
12 .uno%3AAutoOutline 6f If the selected cell range contains formulas or references, $[officename] automatically outlines the selection.
13 .uno%3AClearOutline 31 Removes the outline from the selected cell range.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fselectsource%2Fdatabase 44 Introduza o nome de usuario necesario para acceder á base de datos.
12 .uno%3ADiagramData 4f Abre a caixa de diálogo Táboa de datos onde pode editar os datos da gráfica.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fselectsource%2Fselection 36 Abre o obxecto seleccionado no último estado gardado.
17 .uno%3ADataDataPilotRun 68 Opens a dialog where you can select the source for your pivot table, and then create or edit your table.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fselectdatasource%2Ftype 36 Click the source type of for the selected data source.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fselectdatasource%2Fdatasource 2c Select the data source that you want to use.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fselectdatasource%2Fdatabase 47 Select the database that contains the data source that you want to use.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fselectdatasource%2F@@nowidget@@ 42 You can only select databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME.
40 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fselectdatasource%2FSelectDataSourceDialog 42 You can only select databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME.
46 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivottablelayoutdialog%2Fcheck-drill-to-details de Seleccione esta opción e prema dúas veces na etiqueta dun elemento da táboa para mostrar ou agochar os detalles do elemento. Desmarque esta opción e prema dúas veces nunha cela da táboa para editar o contido da cela.
16 .uno%3ADataPilotFilter 17 Abre o diálogo Filtro.
40 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivottablelayoutdialog%2Fcheck-add-filter 3c Introduce o nome e camiño do ficheiro de folla de cálculo.
40 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivottablelayoutdialog%2FPivotTableLayout 4b Se a opción é Si, o mecanismo da base de datos xera o valor para o campo.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fshowdetaildialog%2FShowDetails 2e Escolla o campo do que desexe ver os detalles.
3c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivottablelayoutdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 4b Se a opción é Si, o mecanismo da base de datos xera o valor para o campo.
3b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivottablelayoutdialog%2Fsource-edit 22 Seleccione a condición do filtro.
3e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivottablelayoutdialog%2Flistbox-fields b1 Para definir a disposición dunha táboa dinámica, arrastre e solte os botóns dos campos de datos sobre as áreas Filtros, Campos de fila, Campos de columna e Campos de datos.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivottablelayoutdialog%2Fmore 45 Mostra ou agocha opcións adicionais para definir a táboa dinámica.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fshowdetaildialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 2e Escolla o campo do que desexe ver os detalles.
14 .uno%3ADataPilotExec 4b Se a opción é Si, o mecanismo da base de datos xera o valor para o campo.
3d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivottablelayoutdialog%2Fsource-button 22 Seleccione a condición do filtro.
47 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivottablelayoutdialog%2Fcheck-ignore-empty-rows 2c Ignora os campos baleiros da fonte de datos.
49 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivottablelayoutdialog%2Fcheck-identify-categories 4a Asigna automaticamente filas sen etiquetas á categoría da fila superior.
43 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivottablelayoutdialog%2Fcheck-total-columns 36 Calcula e mostra o total xeral do cálculo da columna.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fshowdetaildialog%2FdimsTreeview 2e Escolla o campo do que desexe ver os detalles.
40 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivottablelayoutdialog%2Fdestination-edit 4b Seleccione a área na que desexa mostrar os resultados da táboa dinámica.
40 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivottablelayoutdialog%2Fcheck-total-rows 33 Calcula e mostra o total xeral do cálculo da fila.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfilterdialog%2Fval3 3d Seleccione o valor que desexe comparar co campo seleccionado.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfilterdialog%2Fcond3 47 Seleccione un operador para comparar as entradas Nome do campo e Valor.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfilterdialog%2Fval2 3d Seleccione o valor que desexe comparar co campo seleccionado.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfilterdialog%2Fcond1 47 Seleccione un operador para comparar as entradas Nome do campo e Valor.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfilterdialog%2Ffield3 7a Seleccione o campo que desexe empregar no filtro. Se non dispón de nomes de campo, empréganse as etiquetas das columnas.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfilterdialog%2Ffield2 7a Seleccione o campo que desexe empregar no filtro. Se non dispón de nomes de campo, empréganse as etiquetas das columnas.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfilterdialog%2Fval1 3d Seleccione o valor que desexe comparar co campo seleccionado.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfilterdialog%2Ffield1 7a Seleccione o campo que desexe empregar no filtro. Se non dispón de nomes de campo, empréganse as etiquetas das columnas.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfilterdialog%2Fconnect2 2d Seleccione un operador lóxico para o filtro.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfilterdialog%2Fconnect1 2d Seleccione un operador lóxico para o filtro.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfilterdialog%2Fcond2 47 Seleccione un operador para comparar as entradas Nome do campo e Valor.
37 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfilterdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 2d Seleccione un operador lóxico para o filtro.
3c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfilterdialog%2FPivotFilterDialog 2d Seleccione un operador lóxico para o filtro.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfilterdialog%2Fdbarea 3a Displays the name of the filtered data range in the table.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfilterdialog%2Funique 35 Excludes duplicate rows in the list of filtered data.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfilterdialog%2Fregexp 3f Allows you to use regular expressions in the filter definition.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfilterdialog%2Fcase 36 Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfilterdialog%2Fmore 2f Displays or hides additional filtering options.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdatafielddialog%2Fbasefield 56 Select the field from which the respective value is taken as base for the calculation.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdatafielddialog%2Fbaseitem 67 Select the item of the base field from which the respective value is taken as base for the calculation.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdatafielddialog%2Ftype 49 Select the type of calculating of the displayed value for the data field.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdatafielddialog%2Fexpander 4f Expands or reduces the dialog. The More button is visible for data fields only.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfielddialog%2Foptions 6d Opens the Data Field Options dialog. The Options button is visible for filters and column or row fields only.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfielddialog%2Fshowall 35 Includes empty columns and rows in the results table.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdatafielddialog%2Ffunctions 7c Click the type of subtotal that you want to calculate. This option is only available if the User-defined option is selected.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfielddialog%2Ffunctions 7c Click the type of subtotal that you want to calculate. This option is only available if the User-defined option is selected.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfielddialog%2Fuser 5f Select this option, and then click the type of subtotal that you want to calculate in the list.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfielddialog%2Fauto 23 Automatically calculates subtotals.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfielddialog%2Fnone 1d Does not calculate subtotals.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdatafielddialog%2Fcheckbutton1 35 Includes empty columns and rows in the results table.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivotfielddialog%2FPivotFieldDialog 31 Specify the subtotals that you want to calculate.
39 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdatafieldoptionsdialog%2Fhideitems 3d Select the items that you want to hide from the calculations.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdatafieldoptionsdialog%2Fshow 24 Turns on the automatic show feature.
39 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdatafieldoptionsdialog%2Femptyline 42 Adds an empty row after the data for each item in the pivot table.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdatafieldoptionsdialog%2Fusing 38 Select the data field that you want to sort the data by.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdatafieldoptionsdialog%2Ffrom 3a Shows the top or bottom items in the specified sort order.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdatafieldoptionsdialog%2Flayout 35 Select the layout mode for the field in the list box.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdatafieldoptionsdialog%2Fmanual 1c Sorts values alphabetically.
39 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdatafieldoptionsdialog%2Fhierarchy 83 Select the hierarchy that you want to use. The pivot table must be based on an external source data that contains data hierarchies.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdatafieldoptionsdialog%2Fdescending 10f Sorts the values descending from the highest value to the lowest value. If the selected field is the field for which the dialog was opened, the items are sorted by name. If a data field was selected, the items are sorted by the resultant value of the selected data field.
39 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdatafieldoptionsdialog%2Fascending 104 Sorts the values from the lowest value to the highest value. If the selected field is the field for which the dialog was opened, the items are sorted by name. If a data field was selected, the items are sorted by the resultant value of the selected data field.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdatafieldoptionsdialog%2Fitems 46 Enter the maximum number of items that you want to show automatically.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdatafieldoptionsdialog%2Fsortby 3f Select the data field that you want to sort columns or rows by.
17 .uno%3ARecalcPivotTable 1d Actualiza a táboa dinámica.
17 .uno%3ADeletePivotTable 28 Elimina a táboa dinámica seleccionada.
16 .uno%3ADataAreaRefresh 8e Updates a data range that was inserted from an external database. The data in the sheet is updated to match the data in the external database.
13 .uno%3ADataReImport 8e Updates a data range that was inserted from an external database. The data in the sheet is updated to match the data in the external database.
11 .uno%3AValidation 4d Define que datos son válidos nunha cela ou intervalo de celas seleccionados.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fvalidationcriteriapage%2Fdata 35 Select the comparative operator that you want to use.
37 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fvalidationcriteriapage%2Fminlist 3c Enter the entries that will be valid values or text strings.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fvalidationcriteriapage%2Fmax 5a Enter the maximum value for the data validation option that you selected in the Allow box.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fvalidationcriteriapage%2Fmin 5a Enter the minimum value for the data validation option that you selected in the Allow box.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fvalidationcriteriapage%2Fsortascend 8a Sorts the selection list in ascending order and filters duplicates from the list. If not checked, the order from the data source is taken.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fvalidationcriteriapage%2Fallowempty 8f In conjunction with Tools - Detective - Mark invalid Data, this defines that blank cells are shown as invalid data (disabled) or not (enabled).
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fvalidationcriteriapage%2Fshowlist 8a Shows a list of all valid strings or values to select from. The list can also be opened by selecting the cell and pressing Alt+Down Arrow.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fvalidationcriteriapage%2Fallow 33 Click a validation option for the selected cell(s).
46 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fvalidationcriteriapage%2FValidationCriteriaPage 36 Specify the validation rules for the selected cell(s).
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fvalidationhelptabpage%2Finputhelp 53 Enter the message that you want to display when the cell or cell range is selected.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fvalidationhelptabpage%2Ftitle 51 Enter the title that you want to display when the cell or cell range is selected.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fvalidationhelptabpage%2Ftsbhelp 6d Displays the message that you enter in the Contents box when the cell or cell range is selected in the sheet.
44 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fvalidationhelptabpage%2FValidationHelpTabPage 60 Enter the message that you want to display when the cell or cell range is selected in the sheet.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ferroralerttabpage%2FerrorMsg 52 Enter the message that you want to display when invalid data is entered in a cell.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ferroralerttabpage%2Ftitle 72 Enter the title of the macro or the error message that you want to display when invalid data is entered in a cell.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ferroralerttabpage%2FactionCB 50 Select the action that you want to occur when invalid data is entered in a cell.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ferroralerttabpage%2FbrowseBtn aa Opens the Macro dialog where you can select the macro that is executed when invalid data is entered in a cell. The macro is executed after the error message is displayed.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ferroralerttabpage%2Ftsbshow 66 Displays the error message that you enter in the Contents area when invalid data is entered in a cell.
3c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ferroralerttabpage%2FErrorAlertTabPage 53 Defines the error message that is displayed when invalid data is entered in a cell.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdataform%2F@@nowidget@@ 48 Data Entry Form is a tool to make table data entry easy in spreadsheets.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdataform%2FDataFormDialog 48 Data Entry Form is a tool to make table data entry easy in spreadsheets.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnotebookbar%2FMenuData-DataForm 48 Data Entry Form is a tool to make table data entry easy in spreadsheets.
f .uno%3ADataForm 48 Data Entry Form is a tool to make table data entry easy in spreadsheets.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdataprovider%2F@@nowidget@@ 1e Data Provider for Spreadsheets
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdataprovider%2FDataProviderDialog 1e Data Provider for Spreadsheets
1e .uno%3ANumberFormatIncDecimals 3c Adds one decimal place to the numbers in the selected cells.
1e .uno%3ANumberFormatDecDecimals 41 Removes one decimal place from the numbers in the selected cells.
1b .uno%3ANumberFormatCurrency 3a Applies the default currency format to the selected cells.
1a .uno%3ANumberFormatPercent 34 Applies the percentage format to the selected cells.
1b .uno%3ANumberFormatStandard 38 Applies the default number format to the selected cells.
16 .uno%3ADrawGraphicMenu 44 Abre un submenú para editar as propiedades do obxecto seleccionado.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_AGGREGATE 105 This function returns an aggregate result of the calculations in the range. You can use different aggregate functions listed below. The Aggregate function enables you to omit hidden rows, errors, SUBTOTAL and other AGGREGATE function results in the calculation.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_ARABISCH 4c Returns the numeric value corresponding to a Roman number expressed as text.
f SC_HID_FUNC_ASC 67 Converts double-byte (full-width) characters to single-byte (half-width) ASCII and katakana characters.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_AVERAGEIF d7 Returns the arithmetic mean of all cells in a range that satisfy a given condition. The AVERAGEIF function sums up all the results that match the logical test and divides this sum by the quantity of selected values.
16 SC_HID_FUNC_AVERAGEIFS df Returns the arithmetic mean of all cells in a range that satisfy given multiple criteria. The AVERAGEIFS function sums up all the results that match the logical tests and divides this sum by the quantity of selected values.
11 HID_FUNC_CEIL_ISO 43 Rounds a number up to the nearest multiple of a significance value.
12 HID_FUNC_CEIL_MATH 40 Rounds a number to the nearest multiple of a significance value.
10 HID_FUNC_CEIL_MS 40 Rounds a number to the nearest multiple of a significance value.
13 HID_FUNC_OBERGRENZE 40 Rounds a number to the nearest multiple of a significance value.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_COUNTIFS 41 Returns the count of cells that meet criteria in multiple ranges.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_COLOR 89 Return a numeric value calculated by a combination of three colors (red, green and blue) and the alpha channel, in the RGBA color system.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_CONCAT_MS 20 Concatenates one or more strings
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_CONVERT 68 Converts a value from one unit of measurement to the corresponding value in another unit of measurement.
e HID_FUNC_DATUM 67 This function calculates a date specified by year, month, day and displays it in the cell's formatting.
10 HID_FUNC_DATEDIF 60 This function returns the number of whole days, months or years between Start date and End date.
10 HID_FUNC_DATWERT 34 Returns the internal date number for text in quotes.
c HID_FUNC_TAG 24 Returns the day of given date value.
d HID_FUNC_TAGE 32 Calculates the difference between two date values.
10 HID_FUNC_TAGE360 61 Returns the difference between two dates based on the 360 day year used in interest calculations.
15 HID_FUNC_OSTERSONNTAG 37 Returns the date of Easter Sunday for the entered year.
12 HID_AAI_FUNC_EDATE 89 The result is a date which is a number of months away from the start date. Only months are considered; days are not used for calculation.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_EOMONTH 58 Returns the date of the last day of a month which falls months away from the start date.
1a SC_HID_FUNC_ERROR_TYPE_ODF 63 Returns a number representing a specific Error type, or the error value #N/A, if there is no error.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_FINDB 5d Returns the starting position of a given text, using byte positions. FINDB is case sensitive.
11 HID_FUNC_FLOOR_MS 45 Rounds a number down to the nearest multiple of a significance value.
14 HID_FUNC_UNTERGRENZE 40 Rounds a number to the nearest multiple of a significance value.
19 HID_FUNC_FORECAST_ETS_ADD 6c Calculates the additive forecast(s) (future values) based on the historical data using ETS or EDS algorithms
1a HID_FUNC_FORECAST_ETS_MULT 72 Calculates the multiplicative forecast(s) (future values) based on the historical data using ETS or EDS algorithms
19 HID_FUNC_FORECAST_ETS_STA 48 Returns statistical value(s) that are results of the ETS/EDS algorithms.
19 HID_FUNC_FORECAST_ETS_STM 48 Returns statistical value(s) that are results of the ETS/EDS algorithms.
19 HID_FUNC_FORECAST_ETS_PIA 75 Calculates the prediction interval(s) for additive forecast based on the historical data using ETS or EDS algorithms.
19 HID_FUNC_FORECAST_ETS_PIM 7b Calculates the prediction interval(s) for multiplicative forecast based on the historical data using ETS or EDS algorithms.
19 HID_FUNC_FORECAST_ETS_SEA 85 Returns the number of samples in period as calculated by Calc in case of FORECAST.ETS functions when argument period_length equals 1.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_FOURIER 8e Computes the  Discrete Fourier Transform [DFT] of an input array of complex numbers using a couple of Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) algorithms.
f HID_FUNC_STUNDE 28 Returns the hour for a given time value.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_IFS_MS 1e IFS is a multiple IF-function.
15 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMCOT 61 Returns the cotangent of a complex number. The cotangent of a complex number can be expressed by:
15 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMCOS 5b Returns the cosine of a complex number. The cosine of a complex number can be expressed by:
16 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMCOSH 71 Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a complex number. The hyperbolic cosine of a complex number can be expressed by:
15 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMCSC 60 Returns the cosecant of a complex number.  The cosecant of a complex number can be expressed by:
16 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMCSCH 75 Returns the hyperbolic cosecant of a complex number. The hyperbolic cosecant of a complex number can be expressed by:
15 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMSEC 5c Returns the secant of a complex number.  The secant of a complex number can be expressed by:
16 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMSECH 72 Returns the hyperbolic secant of a complex number.  The hyperbolic secant of a complex number can be expressed by:
15 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMSIN 58 Returns the sine of a complex number.  The sine of a complex number can be expressed by:
16 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMSINH 6d Returns the hyperbolic sine of a complex number. The hyperbolic sine of a complex number can be expressed by:
15 SC_HID_AAI_FUNC_IMTAN 5d Returns the tangent of a complex number. The tangent of a complex number can be expressed by:
13 HID_FUNC_ISOWEEKNUM 4e ISOWEEKNUM calculates the week number of the year for the internal date value.
f SC_HID_FUNC_JIS 66 Converts single-byte (half-width) ASCII or katakana characters to double-byte (full-width) characters.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_MAXIFS 66 Returns the maximum of the values of cells in a range that meets multiple criteria in multiple ranges.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_MINIFS 66 Returns the minimum of the values of cells in a range that meets multiple criteria in multiple ranges.
f HID_FUNC_MINUTE 31 Calculates the minute for an internal time value.
e HID_FUNC_MONAT 2b Returns the month for the given date value.
18 HID_AAI_FUNC_NETWORKDAYS 5e Returns the number of workdays between a start date and an end date. Holidays can be deducted.
1a SC_HID_FUNC_NETWORKDAYS_MS 179 Returns the number of workdays between a start date and an end date. There are options to define weekend days and holidays. The optional weekend parameter (or a string) can be used to define the weekend days (or the non-working days in each week). Also, optionally, the user can define a holiday list. The weekend days and user-defined holidays are not counted as working days.
16 SC_HID_FUNC_WORKDAY_MS ba Returns the date calculated from a start date with a specific number of work days, before or after the start date. The calculation can include week-ends and holidays as non-working days.
14 HID_FUNC_NUMBERVALUE 57 Converts the string representation of a number into a locale-independent numeric value.
e HID_FUNC_JETZT 2a Returns the computer system date and time.
1b SC_HID_PAI_FUNC_OPT_BARRIER 62 Returns the pricing for a barrier option, calculated using the Black-Scholes option pricing model.
1c SC_HID_PAI_FUNC_OPT_PROB_HIT b7 Returns the probability that an asset hits a predetermined barrier price, assuming that the stock price can be modeled as a process S that follows the stochastic differential equation
20 SC_HID_PAI_FUNC_OPT_PROB_INMONEY c7 Returns the probability that an asset will end up between two barrier levels at maturity, assuming that the stock price can be modeled as a process S that follows the stochastic differential equation
19 SC_HID_PAI_FUNC_OPT_TOUCH 6a Returns the pricing of a touch / no-touch option, calculated using the Black-Scholes option pricing model.
15 SC_OPCODE_RAWSUBTRACT 5a Subtracts a set of numbers and gives the result without eliminating small roundoff errors.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_REGEX 4b Matches and extracts or optionally replaces text using regular expressions.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_REPLACEB 51 Returns text where an old text is replaced with a new text, using byte positions.
14 SC_HID_FUNC_ROEMISCH 94 Converts a number into a Roman numeral. The value range must be between 0 and 3999. A simplification mode can be specified in the range from 0 to 4.
11 HID_FUNC_ROUNDSIG 77 Returns a number rounded to a specified number of significant decimal digits of its normalized floating point notation.
13 SC_HID_FUNC_SEARCHB 59 Returns the starting position of a given text, using byte positions (not case sensitive).
10 HID_FUNC_SEKUNDE 2c Returns the second for the given time value.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_SKEWP 54 Calculates the skewness of a distribution using the population of a random variable.
10 HID_FUNC_VORLAGE 33 Applies a style to the cell containing the formula.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_SUMME 1d Suma un conxunto de números.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_SUMMEWENN 127 Determines which values in a range of cells meet a specified criterion, then returns the sum of the matching values. Alternatively the function can determine which values in one range of cells meet a criterion, then return the sum of values in the corresponding cells in a second range of cells.
12 SC_HID_FUNC_SUMIFS 62 Returns the sum of the values of cells in a range that meets multiple criteria in multiple ranges.
15 SC_HID_FUNC_SWITCH_MS c5 SWITCH compares expression with value1 to valuen and returns the result belonging to the first value that equals expression. If there is no match and default_result is given, that will be returned.
17 SC_HID_FUNC_TEXTJOIN_MS 43 Concatenates one or more strings, and uses delimiters between them.
d HID_FUNC_ZEIT 4f TIME returns the current time value from values for hours, minutes and seconds.
11 HID_FUNC_ZEITWERT 7a TIMEVALUE returns the internal time number from a text enclosed by quotes and which may show a possible time entry format.
e HID_FUNC_HEUTE 29 Returns the current computer system date.
11 SC_HID_FUNC_VALUE b2 Converts the string representation of a number to numeric form. If the supplied string is a valid date, time, or date-time, the corresponding date-time serial number is returned.
12 HID_FUNC_WOCHENTAG 35 Returns the day of the week for the given date value.
12 HID_FUNC_FILTERXML 2b Apply a XPath expression to a XML document.
12 HID_FUNC_ENCODEURL 1d Returns a URL-encoded string.
13 HID_FUNC_WEBSERVICE 20 Get some web content from a URI.
16 HID_FUNC_KALENDERWOCHE 9c WEEKNUM calculates the week number of the year for the internal date value as defined in ODF OpenFormula and compatible with other spreadsheet applications.
14 HID_FUNC_WEEKNUM_OOO 4f WEEKNUM_OOO calculates the week number of the year for the internal date value.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_WEEKNUM 40 The result indicates the number of the calendar week for a date.
14 HID_AAI_FUNC_WORKDAY 9a The result is a date number that can be formatted as a date. You then see the date of a day that is a certain number of workdays away from the start date.
d HID_FUNC_JAHR 49 Returns the year as a number according to the internal calculation rules.
15 HID_AAI_FUNC_YEARFRAC 60 The result is the number of the years (including fractional part) between StartDate and EndDate.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdatastreams%2F@@nowidget@@ 2a Create live data streams for spreadsheets.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdatastreams%2FDataStreamDialog 2a Create live data streams for spreadsheets.
39 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnotebookbar%2FMenuData-DataStreams 2a Create live data streams for spreadsheets.
12 .uno%3ADataStreams 2a Create live data streams for spreadsheets.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmanagenamesdialog%2Fnames 4d Select a named range or named formula from the list to modify its properties.
15 .uno%3ANormalViewMode 2d Displays the normal layout view of the sheet.
14 .uno%3AShareDocument 66 Opens the Share Document dialog where you can enable or disable collaborative sharing of the document.
28 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fsolve 7c Click to solve the problem with the current settings. The dialog settings are retained until you close the current document.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Foptions 20 Opens the Solver Options dialog.
27 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fdel3 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
27 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fdel1 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fvar4button 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fvar3button 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fref1edit 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
28 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fvalue 4a Maximum: Try to solve the equation for a maximum value of the target cell.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fvaluebutton 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fvalueedit 4a Maximum: Try to solve the equation for a maximum value of the target cell.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fref1button 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fref2edit 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fvar2button 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
26 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fmax 4a Maximum: Try to solve the equation for a maximum value of the target cell.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fref4edit 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
27 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fdel2 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Ftargetbutton 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fref4button 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
26 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fmin 4a Maximum: Try to solve the equation for a maximum value of the target cell.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Ftargetedit 7e Enter or click the cell reference of the target cell. This field takes the address of the cell whose value is to be optimized.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2F@@nowidget@@ ae Opens the Solver dialog. A solver allows you to solve mathematical problems with multiple unknown variables and a set of constraints on the variables by goal-seeking methods.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fref3edit 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2FSolverDialog ae Opens the Solver dialog. A solver allows you to solve mathematical problems with multiple unknown variables and a set of constraints on the variables by goal-seeking methods.
27 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fdel4 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fchangeedit 29 Enter the cell range that can be changed.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fvar3edit 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fref3button 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
3b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnotebookbar%2FMenuTools-SolverDialog ae Opens the Solver dialog. A solver allows you to solve mathematical problems with multiple unknown variables and a set of constraints on the variables by goal-seeking methods.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fop2list 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fvar1button 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
13 .uno%3ASolverDialog ae Opens the Solver dialog. A solver allows you to solve mathematical problems with multiple unknown variables and a set of constraints on the variables by goal-seeking methods.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fop3list 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fop1list 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fop4list 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fvar1edit 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fvar2edit 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fvar4edit 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fchangebutton 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolverdlg%2Fref2button 37 Cell reference: Enter a cell reference of the variable.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fintegerdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 32 Enter or change the value of the selected setting.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdoubledialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 32 Enter or change the value of the selected setting.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fintegerdialog%2FIntegerDialog 32 Enter or change the value of the selected setting.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdoubledialog%2FDoubleDialog 32 Enter or change the value of the selected setting.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolveroptionsdialog%2Fedit 96 If the current entry in the Settings listbox allows you to edit a value, you can click the Edit button. A dialog opens where you can change the value.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolveroptionsdialog%2Fsettings 96 If the current entry in the Settings listbox allows you to edit a value, you can click the Edit button. A dialog opens where you can change the value.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolveroptionsdialog%2Fengine 57 Select a solver engine. The listbox is disabled if only one solver engine is installed.
39 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolveroptionsdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 57 Select a solver engine. The listbox is disabled if only one solver engine is installed.
40 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsolveroptionsdialog%2FSolverOptionsDialog 57 Select a solver engine. The listbox is disabled if only one solver engine is installed.
4a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fanalysisofvariancedialog%2FAnalysisOfVarianceDialog 3d Produces the analysis of variance (ANOVA) of a given data set
3c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcorrelationdialog%2FCorrelationDialog 40 Calcula a correlación entre dous conxuntos de datos numéricos.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcovariancedialog%2FCovarianceDialog 3b Calcula a covarianza de dous conxuntos de datos numéricos.
50 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdescriptivestatisticsdialog%2FDescriptiveStatisticsDialog 55 Fill a table in the spreadsheet with the main statistical properties of the data set.
4e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fexponentialsmoothingdialog%2FExponentialSmoothingDialog 28 Resultados en series de datos suavizados
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fregressiondialog%2FRegressionDialog be Produces the Fourier analysis of a data set by computing the  Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) of an input array of complex numbers using a couple of Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) algorithms.
40 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmovingaveragedialog%2FMovingAverageDialog 2b Calcula a media móbil dunha serie temporal
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fregressiondialog%2FRegressionDialog 8e Performs linear, logarithmic, or power regression analysis of a data set comprising one dependent variable and multiple independent variables.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsamplingdialog%2FSamplingDialog 34 Create a table with data sampled from another table.
40 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fchisquaretestdialog%2FChiSquareTestDialog 30 Calculates the Chi-square test of a data sample.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fttestdialog%2FTTestDialog 2a Calculates the F-Test of two data samples.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fttestdialog%2FTTestDialog 31 Calculates the paired t-Test of two data samples.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fztestdialog%2FZTestDialog 2a Calculates the z-Test of two data samples.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fxmlsourcedialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 21 Import XML data in a spreadsheet.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fxmlsourcedialog%2FXMLSourceDialog 21 Import XML data in a spreadsheet.
16 .uno%3AManageXMLSource 21 Import XML data in a spreadsheet.
e HID_INSWIN_POS cb Mostra a referencia da cela actual, o intervalo das celas seleccionadas ou o nome da área. Tamén pode seleccionar un intervalo de celas e despois introducir un nome para ese intervalo na caixa de nome.
10 HID_INSWIN_SUMME 195 Insira unha función dun intervalo de celas na cela actual. A función pode ser Suma, Media, Mínimo, Máximo e Conta. Prema nunha cela, prema nesta icona, seleccione a función na lista despregábel e, opcionalmente, axuste o intervalo de celas. Ou seleccione algunhas celas nas que desexe inserir o valor da función e a seguir prema na icona. O resultado da función engádese por debaixo do intervalo.
f HID_INSWIN_FUNC 62 Engade unha fórmula á cela actual. Prema nesta icona e introduza a fórmula na Liña de entrada.
10 HID_INSWIN_INPUT 9e Introduza a fórmula que desexa agregar á cela actual. Tamén pode premer na icona Asistente de funcións para inserir unha función predefinida na fórmula.
11 HID_INSWIN_CANCEL 5b Limpa o contido da Liña de entrada ou cancela as alteracións feitas nunha cela existente.
d HID_INSWIN_OK 43 Acepta o contido da liña de entrada e insire o contido nesta cela.
15 HID_DLGSTYLES_LISTBOX 49 Prema no tema de formatado que desexa aplicar e despois prema en Aceptar.
13 .uno%3AChooseDesign 36 Aplica un estilo de formatado ás celas seleccionadas.
13 .uno%3AStatusDocPos 2f Mostra o número da folla e do total de follas.
15 .uno%3AStateTableCell 72 Mostra información sobre o documento actual. Por omisión, móstrase a SUMA dos contidos das celas seleccionadas.
d .uno%3AZoomIn 6b Aumenta a visualización deste documento en pantalla. O factor de zoom activo móstrase na barra de estado.
e .uno%3AZoomOut 6e Reduce a visualización en pantalla do documento activo. O factor de zoom actual móstrase na barra de estado.
11 .uno%3AInsertCtrl 99 Prema na frecha que hai xunto á icona para abrir a barra de ferramentas Inserir, onde é posíbel engadir imaxes e caracteres especiais á folla activa.
13 .uno%3AInsCellsCtrl 95 Prema na frecha que hai xunto á icona para abrir a barra de ferramentas Inserir celas, coa que pode inserir celas, filas e columnas na folla activa.
17 .uno%3ATableDeselectAll 47 Click to deselect all sheets in the document, except the current sheet.
e FID_TAB_EVENTS 3f Opens a dialog box where you can assign macros to sheet events.
f .uno%3AEditMenu 45 Este menú contén ordes para editar os contidos do documento actual.
f .uno%3AViewMenu 95 Este menú contén ordes para controlar como se mostra o documento na pantalla, cambiar a interface de usuario e acceder aos paneis da barra lateral.
11 .uno%3AInsertMenu 9d O menú Inserir contén ordes para inserir novos elementos, como imaxes, caixas de texto, obxectos, multimedia, nomes de celas e moito máis na folla actual.
11 .uno%3AFormatMenu 6d O menú Formato contén ordes para formatar as celas, obxectos e contidos de cela seleccionados no documento.
11 .uno%3AWindowList 3a Contén ordes para manexar e mostrar xanelas de documento.
f .uno%3ADataMenu be Use as ordes do menú Datos para editar os datos na folla actual. Pode definir intervalos, ordenación e filtrar os datos, calcular os resultados, contornar datos e abrir a táboa dinámica.
10 .uno%3ASheetMenu 53 Este menú contén ordes para modificar e xestionar unha folla e os seus elementos.
11 .uno%3AAlignRight 24 Aliña o contido da cela á dereita.
10 .uno%3AAlignLeft 25 Aliña o contido da cela á esquerda.
11 .uno%3AAlignBlock 32 Aliña o contido da cela á esquerda e á dereita.
16 .uno%3AParaRightToLeft 65 O texto formatado nunha lingua de disposición complexa de texto introdúcese da dereita á esquerda.
1c .uno%3AAlignHorizontalCenter 29 Centra horizontalmente o contido da cela.
16 .uno%3AParaLeftToRight 2c O texto introdúcese da esquerda á dereita.
14 HID_SC_TOOLBOX_TABLE 51 A barra Formatado contén as ordes básicas para aplicar manualmente o formatado.
13 HID_SC_TOOLBOX_DRAW 7d A barra Propiedades de obxecto de debuxo contén ordes de formatado e de aliñamento para os obxectos seleccionados na folla.
15 HID_SC_TOOLBOX_DRTEXT a9 A barra Formato de texto que aparece cando o cursor está nun obxecto de texto, como unha caixa de texto ou un obxecto de debuxo, contén ordes de formato e aliñamento.
f HID_SC_INPUTWIN 2d Utilice esta barra para introducir fórmulas.
12 HID_SC_WIN_PREVIEW 5c A barra Visualización da impresión móstrase ao escoller Ficheiro - Visualizar impresión.
14 HID_SC_TOOLBOX_TOOLS 3f Use a barra de ferramentas para acceder ás ordes máis usados.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATA_SERIES_LABEL 29 Introducir nomes para as series de datos.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FMoveDownRow 30 Alterna a fila actual coa adxacente por debaixo.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FMoveLeftColumn 3a Switches the current column with its neighbor at the left.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FMoveRightColumn 30 Alterna a fila actual coa adxacente por debaixo.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FRemoveRow 43 Elimina a fila actual. Non é posíbel eliminar a fila da etiqueta.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FInsertColumn 26 Insire unha columna despois da actual.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FInsertRow 23 Insire unha fila debaixo da actual.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FMoveUpRow 31 Switches the current row with its neighbor above.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FRemoveColumn 49 Elimina a columna actual. Non é posíbel eliminar a columna da etiqueta.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FChartDataDialog 56 Abre a caixa de diálogo Táboa de datos, na que se poden editar os datos da gráfica.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 56 Abre a caixa de diálogo Táboa de datos, na que se poden editar os datos da gráfica.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fchartdatadialog%2FInsertTextColumn 5b Insire unha columna nova despois da columna actual para descricións xerárquicas de eixes.
12 .uno%3ADiagramData 56 Abre a caixa de diálogo Táboa de datos, na que se poden editar os datos da gráfica.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finserttitledlg%2FsecondaryYaxis 44 Introduza o título secundario que desexe para o eixe Y da gráfica.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finserttitledlg%2FprimaryZaxis 39 Introduza o título que desexe para o eixe Z da gráfica.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finserttitledlg%2FprimaryYaxis 39 Introduza o título que desexe para o eixe Y da gráfica.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finserttitledlg%2FsecondaryXaxis 44 Introduza o título secundario que desexe para o eixe X da gráfica.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finserttitledlg%2FprimaryXaxis 39 Introduza o título que desexe para o eixe X da gráfica.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finserttitledlg%2Fmaintitle 2f Introduza o título que desexe para a gráfica.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finserttitledlg%2FInsertTitleDialog 49 Abre un diálogo para introducir ou modificar os títulos dunha gráfica.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finserttitledlg%2F@@nowidget@@ 49 Abre un diálogo para introducir ou modificar os títulos dunha gráfica.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finserttitledlg%2Fsubtitle 32 Introduza o subtítulo que desexe para a gráfica.
17 .uno%3AInsertMenuTitles 49 Abre un diálogo para introducir ou modificar os títulos dunha gráfica.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_LegendPosition%2FLB_LEGEND_TEXTDIR b8 Especifica a dirección do texto dun parágrafo que usa o esquema de texto complexo (CTL). Esta función só está dispoñible se o soporte de esquema de texto complexo está activado.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_LegendPosition%2Fbottom 2d Coloca a lenda na parte inferior da gráfica.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_LegendPosition%2Fright 2c Coloca a lenda na parte dereita da gráfica.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_LegendPosition%2Fleft 2d Coloca a lenda na parte esquerda da gráfica.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fshow 38 Especifica se a lenda da gráfica debe mostrarse ou non.
13 .uno%3AToggleLegend 56 Para mostrar ou ocultar a lenda, prema en Activar/Desactivar lenda na barra Formatado.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_LegendPosition%2FCB_NO_OVERLAY 36 Specifies whether the legend should overlap the chart.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_LegendPosition%2Ftop 2d Coloca a lenda na parte superior da gráfica.
17 .uno%3AInsertMenuLegend 80 Abre o diálogo Lenda, que permite cambiar a posición das lendas na gráfica, así como indicar se se mostran as lendas ou non.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_DataLabel%2FNF_LABEL_DEGREES 4f Introduza o ángulo de rotación en sentido antihorario das etiquetas de datos.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FNF_LABEL_DEGREES 4f Introduza o ángulo de rotación en sentido antihorario das etiquetas de datos.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_DataLabel%2FCT_DIAL 4a Prema no dial para definir a orientación do texto das etiquetas de datos.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FCT_DIAL 4a Prema no dial para definir a orientación do texto das etiquetas de datos.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FLB_LABEL_TEXTDIR d2 Especifica a dirección do texto dun parágrafo que usa o esquema de texto complexo (CTL). Esta función só está dispoñíbel se a compatibilidade con disposición complexa de texto complexo estiver activada.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FCB_VALUE_AS_NUMBER 30 Mostra os valores absolutos dos puntos de datos.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_DataLabel%2FLB_LABEL_TEXTDIR d2 Especifica a dirección do texto dun parágrafo que usa o esquema de texto complexo (CTL). Esta función só está dispoñíbel se a compatibilidade con disposición complexa de texto complexo estiver activada.
3e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FPB_PERCENT_NUMBERFORMAT 39 Abre un diálogo para escoller o formato das porcentaxes.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_DataLabel%2FPB_NUMBERFORMAT 36 Abre un diálogo para seleccionar o formato numérico.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FCB_VALUE_AS_PERCENTAGE 38 Mostra a porcentaxe dos puntos de datos en cada columna.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FLB_LABEL_PLACEMENT 47 Escolle a colocación das etiquetas de datos en relación aos obxectos.
3f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_DataLabel%2FPB_PERCENT_NUMBERFORMAT 39 Abre un diálogo para escoller o formato das porcentaxes.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FCB_SYMBOL 42 Mostra as iconas de lenda xunto a cada etiqueta de punto de datos.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FCB_CATEGORY 2f Mostra as etiquetas de texto do punto de datos.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuDataLabels 52 Abre o diálogo Etiquetas de datos, que permite estabelecer as etiquetas de datos.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FLB_TEXT_SEPARATOR 46 Escolle o separador entre varias cadeas de texto para o mesmo obxecto.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataLabel%2FPB_NUMBERFORMAT 36 Abre un diálogo para seleccionar o formato numérico.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_DataLabel%2FLB_TEXT_SEPARATOR 46 Escolle o separador entre varias cadeas de texto para o mesmo obxecto.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_DataLabel%2FLB_LABEL_PLACEMENT 47 Escolle a colocación das etiquetas de datos en relación aos obxectos.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertaxisdlg%2FsecondaryX 28 Mostra un eixe X secundario na gráfica.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertaxisdlg%2FprimaryZ 34 Mostra o eixe Z en forma de liña con subdivisións.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertaxisdlg%2FprimaryY 34 Mostra o eixe Y en forma de liña con subdivisións.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertaxisdlg%2FsecondaryY 87 O eixe principal e o secundario poden ter escalas diferentes. Por exemplo, pode alterar a escala dun eixe a 5 cm e a do outro a 3,75 cm
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertaxisdlg%2FprimaryX 34 Mostra o eixe Y en forma de liña con subdivisións.
15 .uno%3AInsertMenuAxes 2b Indica os eixos que se mostran na gráfica.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_NEGATIVE 2d Mostrar barras de erro positivas e negativas.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FRB_POSITIVE 2d Mostrar barras de erro positivas e negativas.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_POSITIVE 2d Mostrar barras de erro positivas e negativas.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FCB_SYN_POS_NEG bf Enable to use the positive error values also as negative error values. You can only change the value of the "Positive (+)" box. That value gets copied to the "Negative (-)" box automatically.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FRB_NEGATIVE 2d Mostrar barras de erro positivas e negativas.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FRB_FUNCTION 39 Seleccione unha función para calcular as barras de erro.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_CONST 46 Mostra os valores constantes que vostede indique na área Parámetros.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FRB_CONST 46 Mostra os valores constantes que vostede indique na área Parámetros.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_NONE 22 Non mostra ningunha barra de erro.
41 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars 5e Empregue o diálogo de Barras de erro X ou Y para mostrar barras de erro para gráficas en 2D.
3f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FIB_RANGE_POSITIVE 9f Click a button to shrink the dialog, then use the mouse to select the cell range in the spreadsheet. Click the button again to restore the dialog to full size.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2Ftp_ErrorBars 5e Empregue o diálogo de Barras de erro X ou Y para mostrar barras de erro para gráficas en 2D.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2F@@nowidget@@ 5e Empregue o diálogo de Barras de erro X ou Y para mostrar barras de erro para gráficas en 2D.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_RANGE 6d Click Cell Range and then specify a cell range from which to take the positive and negative error bar values.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_FUNCTION 39 Seleccione unha función para calcular as barras de erro.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FED_RANGE_NEGATIVE 7c Enter the address range from where to get the negative error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet.
1f CHART2_SCH_ERROR_BARS_FROM_DATA cc For a chart with its own data, the error bar values can be entered in the chart data table. The Data Table dialog shows additional columns titled Positive X or Y-Error-Bars and Negative X or Y-Error-Bars.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FRB_BOTH 2d Mostrar barras de erro positivas e negativas.
3c modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FCB_SYN_POS_NEG bf Enable to use the positive error values also as negative error values. You can only change the value of the "Positive (+)" box. That value gets copied to the "Negative (-)" box automatically.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FMF_POSITIVE 4a Enter the value to add to the displayed value as the positive error value.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuYErrorBars 5e Empregue o diálogo de Barras de erro X ou Y para mostrar barras de erro para gráficas en 2D.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_BOTH 2d Mostrar barras de erro positivas e negativas.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FLB_FUNCTION 39 Seleccione unha función para calcular as barras de erro.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FRB_RANGE 6d Click Cell Range and then specify a cell range from which to take the positive and negative error bar values.
3f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FIB_RANGE_NEGATIVE 9f Click a button to shrink the dialog, then use the mouse to select the cell range in the spreadsheet. Click the button again to restore the dialog to full size.
3f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FED_RANGE_POSITIVE 7c Enter the address range from where to get the positive error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FRB_NONE 22 Non mostra ningunha barra de erro.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FRB_PERCENT 7b Mostra unha porcentaxe. O que aparece refírese ao punto de datos correspondente. Axuste o percentaxe na área Parámetros.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FIB_RANGE_POSITIVE 9f Click a button to shrink the dialog, then use the mouse to select the cell range in the spreadsheet. Click the button again to restore the dialog to full size.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FIB_RANGE_NEGATIVE 9f Click a button to shrink the dialog, then use the mouse to select the cell range in the spreadsheet. Click the button again to restore the dialog to full size.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FMF_NEGATIVE 51 Enter the value to subtract from the displayed value as the negative error value.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FLB_FUNCTION 39 Seleccione unha función para calcular as barras de erro.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FED_RANGE_POSITIVE 7c Enter the address range from where to get the positive error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FMF_NEGATIVE 51 Enter the value to subtract from the displayed value as the negative error value.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FMF_POSITIVE 4a Enter the value to add to the displayed value as the positive error value.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2F@@nowidget@@ 5e Empregue o diálogo de Barras de erro X ou Y para mostrar barras de erro para gráficas en 2D.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ErrorBars%2FRB_PERCENT 7b Mostra unha porcentaxe. O que aparece refírese ao punto de datos correspondente. Axuste o percentaxe na área Parámetros.
3f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fdlg_InsertErrorBars%2FED_RANGE_NEGATIVE 7c Enter the address range from where to get the negative error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2FmovingAverage 39 A moving average trend line is shown with a given period.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flabel9 2a Name of Y variable in trend line equation.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Fpolynomial 39 Unha liña de tendencia polinomial aparece cun grao dado.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Fdegree 26 Grao de liña de tendencia polinomial.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2FTP_TRENDLINE 70 Pódense engadir liñas de tendencia a todos os tipos de gráficas en 2D, excepto as de sector e de cotizacións
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flabel3 26 Grao de liña de tendencia polinomial.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2FsetIntercept 5f For linear, polynomial and exponential trend lines, intercept value is forced to a given value.
23 .uno%3AInsertTrendlineEquationAndR2 91 To show the trend line equation, select the trend line in the chart, right-click to open the context menu, and choose Insert Trend Line Equation.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Fperiod 43 Number of points to calculate average of moving average trend line.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Fexponential 16 Definir a resolución.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flinear 16 Definir a resolución.
2c modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Fpower 16 Definir a resolución.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flabel5 24 Nome da liña de tendencia na lenda.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flabel4 43 Number of points to calculate average of moving average trend line.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuTrendlines 70 Pódense engadir liñas de tendencia a todos os tipos de gráficas en 2D, excepto as de sector e de cotizacións
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Fentry_name 24 Nome da liña de tendencia na lenda.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flabel7 40 A liña de tendéncia extrapólase para valores superiores de x.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2FshowEquation 48 Mostra a ecuación da liña de tendencia a carón da liña de tendencia.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flabel8 40 A liña de tendéncia extrapólase para valores inferiores de x.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Fextrapolate_Forward 40 A liña de tendéncia extrapólase para valores superiores de x.
3b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Fextrapolate_Backward 40 A liña de tendéncia extrapólase para valores inferiores de x.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flogarithmic 16 Definir a resolución.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2FinterceptValue 23 Value of intercept if it is forced.
1e .uno%3AInsertTrendlineEquation 91 To show the trend line equation, select the trend line in the chart, right-click to open the context menu, and choose Insert Trend Line Equation.
41 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2FshowCorrelationCoefficient 46 Mostra o coeficiente de determinación a carón da liña de tendencia.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flabel6 2a Name of X variable in trend line equation.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Fentry_Yname 2a Name of Y variable in trend line equation.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuMeanValues 91 To show the trend line equation, select the trend line in the chart, right-click to open the context menu, and choose Insert Trend Line Equation.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2F@@nowidget@@ 70 Pódense engadir liñas de tendencia a todos os tipos de gráficas en 2D, excepto as de sector e de cotizacións
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Fentry_Xname 2a Name of X variable in trend line equation.
43 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataPointOption%2FCB_LEGEND_ENTRY_HIDDEN 44 Do not show legend entry for the selected data series or data point.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FRBT_OPT_AXIS_1 6b Esta opción está activada como predefinida. Todas as series de datos están aliñadas no eixe Y primario.
3b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_PolarOptions%2FNF_STARTING_ANGLE 70 Enter the starting angle between 0 and 359 degrees. You can also click the arrows to change the displayed value.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FRB_CONTINUE_LINE 75 For a missing value, the interpolation from the neighbor values will be shown. This is the default for chart type XY.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FRB_DONT_PAINT 67 For a missing value, no data will be shown. This is the default for chart types Column, Bar, Line, Net.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FMT_GAP 37 Define, en porcentaxe, o espazamento entre as columnas.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FMT_OVERLAP 40 Define a configuración necesaria para sobrepor series de datos.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FCB_CONNECTOR a3 Nas gráficas de columnas "amontoadas" e "porcentuais" (barra vertical), marque esta caixa de verificación para conectar as capas de columna asociadas ás liñas.
3e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FCB_BARS_SIDE_BY_SIDE 58 The bars from different data series are shown as if they were attached only to one axis.
41 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FCB_INCLUDE_HIDDEN_CELLS 51 Check to also show values of currently hidden cells within the source cell range.
40 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FCB_LEGEND_ENTRY_HIDDEN 44 Do not show legend entry for the selected data series or data point.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_PolarOptions%2FCB_CLOCKWISE ab The default direction in which the pieces of a pie chart are ordered is counterclockwise. Enable the Clockwise direction checkbox to draw the pieces in opposite direction.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_PolarOptions%2FCT_ANGLE_DIAL 151 Drag the small dot along the circle or click any position on the circle to set the starting angle of a pie or donut chart. The starting angle is the mathematical angle position where the first piece is drawn. The value of 90 degrees draws the first piece at the 12 o'clock position. A value of 0 degrees starts at the 3 o'clock position.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FRBT_OPT_AXIS_2 9d Modifica a escala do eixe Y. Este eixe só é visíbel se ten polo menos unha serie de datos atribuída e se o modo de visualización do eixe está activado.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FRB_ASSUME_ZERO 60 For a missing value, the y-value will be shown as zero. This is the default for chart type Area.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FsecondaryY 48 Engade liñas de grade que dividen o eixe Y en seccións máis pequenas.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FsecondaryX 48 Agrega liñas de grade que dividen o eixe X en seccións máis pequenas.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FprimaryZ 2d Engade liñas de grade ao eixe Z da gráfica.
1b .uno%3AToggleGridHorizontal 6a The Horizontal Grids icon on the Formatting bar toggles the visibility of the grid display for the Y axis.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FprimaryY 2d Engade liñas de grade ao eixe Y da gráfica.
19 .uno%3AToggleGridVertical 68 The Vertical Grids icon on the Formatting bar toggles the visibility of the grid display for the X axis.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FprimaryX 2d Agrega liñas de grade ao eixe X da gráfica.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2F@@nowidget@@ ad You can divide the axes into sections by assigning gridlines to them. This allows you to get a better overview of the chart, especially if you are working with large charts.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FsecondaryZ 48 Engade liñas de grade que dividen o eixe Z en seccións máis pequenas.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FInsertGridDialog ad You can divide the axes into sections by assigning gridlines to them. This allows you to get a better overview of the chart, especially if you are working with large charts.
16 .uno%3AInsertMenuGrids ad You can divide the axes into sections by assigning gridlines to them. This allows you to get a better overview of the chart, especially if you are working with large charts.
16 .uno%3AFormatSelection 1c Formats the selected object.
d .uno%3AZTitle 30 Modifica as propiedades do título seleccionado.
d .uno%3AYTitle 5e Modifica as propiedades do título seleccionado ou as propiedades de todos os títulos xuntos.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2FtextdirLB 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2Fauto 2c Dispón automaticamente os números no eixe.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2FbreakCB 1d Permite unha quebra de texto.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftitlerotationtabpage%2FtextdirLB 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2FoverlapCB 40 Especifica que o texto das celas pode sobreporse a outras celas.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2Feven 4f Dispón os números nos eixes, cos números impares debaixo dos números pares.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2Ftile 33 Coloca os números no eixe, uns ao lado dos outros.
3b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftitlerotationtabpage%2FOrientDegree 36 Permite inserir manualmente o ángulo de orientación.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftitlerotationtabpage%2FstackedCB 42 Atribúe unha orientación de texto vertical aos contidos da cela.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftitlerotationtabpage%2FdialCtrl 53 A variábel de orientación de texto defínese ao premer en calquera lugar da roda.
16 .uno%3AToggleAxisDescr 31 Define a orientación do texto contido nas celas.
2a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2Fodd 4d Dispón os números no eixe, cos números pares debaixo dos números impares.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2FshowlabelsCB 42 Especifica se as etiquetas dos eixes deben mostrarse ou ocultarse.
d .uno%3ALegend 41 Define os atributos de bordo, de área e de carácter das lendas.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisB aa Abre unha caixa de diálogo na cal é posíbel editar as propiedades do eixe Y secundario. Para inserir un eixe Y secundario, escolla Inserir - Eixes e seleccione Eixe Y.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisA aa Abre unha caixa de diálogo na cal é posíbel editar as propiedades do eixe X secundario. Para inserir un eixe X secundario, escolla Inserir - Eixes e seleccione Eixe X.
15 .uno%3ADiagramAxisAll 47 Opens a dialog, where you can edit the properties of the selected axis.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisZ 47 Opens a dialog, where you can edit the properties of the selected axis.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisX 47 Opens a dialog, where you can edit the properties of the selected axis.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisY 3c Opens the Y Axis dialog, to change properties of the Y axis.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FLB_HELP_TIME_UNIT 44 Seleccione esta opción para mostrar todos os rexistros da consulta.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FLB_TIME_RESOLUTION 44 Seleccione esta opción para mostrar todos os rexistros da consulta.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FLB_AXIS_TYPE 6e For some types of axes, you can select to format an axis as text or date, or to detect the type automatically.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FLB_MAIN_TIME_UNIT 44 Seleccione esta opción para mostrar todos os rexistros da consulta.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FCBX_LOGARITHM 42 Specifies that you want the axis to be subdivided logarithmically.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FMT_MAIN_DATE_STEP 44 Seleccione esta opción para mostrar todos os rexistros da consulta.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FCBX_AUTO_ORIGIN 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FEDT_ORIGIN 41 Specifies at which position to display the values along the axis.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FMT_STEPHELP 35 Defines the interval for the subdivision of the axes.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FEDT_STEP_MAIN 37 Defines the interval for the main division of the axes.
2a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FEDT_MAX 32 Defines the maximum value for the end of the axis.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FCBX_REVERSE 81 Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unchecked state is the mathematical direction.
2a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FEDT_MIN 38 Defines the minimum value for the beginning of the axis.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FLB_PLACE_TICKS 4b Select where to place the marks: at labels, at axis, or at axis and labels.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FCB_TICKS_INNER 3e Specifies that marks are placed on the inner side of the axis.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FCB_TICKS_OUTER 43 Especifica que as marcas deben colocarse na parte exterior do eixe.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FLB_PLACE_LABELS 63 Select where to place the labels: near axis, near axis (other side), outside start, or outside end.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FRB_BETWEEN 9a Specifies that the axis is positioned between the tickmarks. This makes the data points visual representation begin/end at a distance from the value axis.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FRB_ON 90 Specifies that the axis is positioned on the first/last tickmarks. This makes the data points visual representation begin/end at the value axis.
4d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FEDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT_CATEGORY 44 Select the category where the axis line should cross the other axis.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FCB_MINOR_INNER 5b Especifica que as marcas de intervalo secundario deben colocarse na parte interior do eixe.
44 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FEDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 40 Enter the value where the axis line should cross the other axis.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FCB_MINOR_OUTER 5b Especifica que as marcas de intervalo secundario deben colocarse na parte exterior do eixe.
43 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2FLB_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 5f Select where to cross the other axis: at start, at end, at a specified value, or at a category.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_AxisPositions%2F@@nowidget@@ 5f Select where to cross the other axis: at start, at end, at a specified value, or at a category.
15 .uno%3ADiagramGridAll 4b Abre a caixa de diálogo Grade para a definición das propiedades de grade.
12 .uno%3ADiagramWall b1 Abre a caixa de diálogo Paredes da gráfica, onde pode modificar as propiedades o fondo da gráfica. Trátase do fondo "vertical" situado detrás da área de datos da gráfica.
13 .uno%3ADiagramFloor bb Abre a caixa de diálogo Base da gráfica, onde pode modificar as propiedades da base da gráfica. É a parte inferior das gráficas 3D. Esta función só é válida para as gráficas 3D.
12 .uno%3ADiagramArea ae Abre a caixa de diálogo Área da gráfica, onde pode modificar as propiedades da área da gráfica. A área da gráfica é o fondo situado detrás dos elementos da gráfica.
f .uno%3ABackward 41 Move a serie de datos seleccionada cara a atrás (e á esquerda).
e .uno%3AForward 41 Move a serie de datos seleccionada cara a adiante (e á dereita).
3e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsmoothlinesdlg%2FPolynomialsSpinButton 16 Definir a resolución.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsmoothlinesdlg%2FResolutionSpinbutton 16 Definir a resolución.
3b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsmoothlinesdlg%2FSplineTypeComboBox 1b Aplicar un modelo spline B.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsmoothlinesdlg%2FSmoothLinesDialog 1b Aplicar un modelo spline B.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsmoothlinesdlg%2F@@nowidget@@ 1b Aplicar un modelo spline B.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsteppedlinesdlg%2Fstep_center_y_rb 7f Start to step up vertically to the middle of the Y values, draw a horizontal line and finish by stepping vertically to the end.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsteppedlinesdlg%2Fstep_end_rb 6a Start with horizontal line, step up vertically in the middle of the X values and end with horizontal line.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsteppedlinesdlg%2Fstep_center_x_rb 39 Start to step up vertically and end with horizontal line.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsteppedlinesdlg%2Fstep_start_rb 3d Start with horizontal line and step up vertically at the end.
43 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_AMBIENT_COLOR 2d Select a color using the Pick a Color dialog.
39 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneAppearance%2FLB_SCHEME 60 Seleccione un esquema da caixa de lista ou prema calquera das seguintes caixas de verificación.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneGeometry%2F@@nowidget@@ c6 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para editar as propiedades dunha vista tridimensional das gráficas de columnas, barras, pizza, e de área. Para gráficas de liña e XY (Dispersión) pode ver liñas 3D.
40 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FLB_LIGHTSOURCE 35 Seleccione unha cor para a fonte de luz seleccionada.
47 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHTSOURCE_COLOR 2d Select a color using the Pick a Color dialog.
41 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneGeometry%2FMTR_FLD_PERSPECTIVE bc Mark the Perspective box to view the chart as through a camera lens. Use the spin button to set the percentage. With a high percentage nearer objects look bigger than more distant objects.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneGeometry%2FCBX_PERSPECTIVE bc Mark the Perspective box to view the chart as through a camera lens. Use the spin button to set the percentage. With a high percentage nearer objects look bigger than more distant objects.
3e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2F@@nowidget@@ c6 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para editar as propiedades dunha vista tridimensional das gráficas de columnas, barras, pizza, e de área. Para gráficas de liña e XY (Dispersión) pode ver liñas 3D.
40 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneGeometry%2FMTR_FLD_Z_ROTATION 5e Define a rotación da gráfica no eixe z. A previsualización responde á nova configuración.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_4 39 Prema para activar ou desactivar a fonte de luz uniforme.
40 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneGeometry%2FMTR_FLD_Y_ROTATION 5e Define a rotación da gráfica no eixe y. A previsualización responde á nova configuración.
3e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneAppearance%2FCB_OBJECTLINES 4d Mostra bordos arredor das áreas configurando o estilo de liña como Sólido.
43 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneGeometry%2FCBX_RIGHT_ANGLED_AXES 101 If Right-angled axes is enabled, you can rotate the chart contents only in X and Y direction, that is, parallel to the chart borders. Right-angled axes is enabled by default for newly created 3D charts. Pie and Donut charts do not support right-angled axes.
d .uno%3AView3D c6 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para editar as propiedades dunha vista tridimensional das gráficas de columnas, barras, pizza, e de área. Para gráficas de liña e XY (Dispersión) pode ver liñas 3D.
40 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneGeometry%2FMTR_FLD_X_ROTATION 5e Define a rotación da gráfica no eixe x. A previsualización responde á nova configuración.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_1 4c Prema para alternar entre o modelo de iluminación dunha esfera ou dun cubo.
3c modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneAppearance%2F@@nowidget@@ c6 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para editar as propiedades dunha vista tridimensional das gráficas de columnas, barras, pizza, e de área. Para gráficas de liña e XY (Dispersión) pode ver liñas 3D.
3e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneAppearance%2FCB_ROUNDEDEDGE 24 Os bordos están arredondados ao 5%.
41 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FLB_AMBIENTLIGHT 2b Seleccione unha cor para a luz de ambiente.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_2 39 Prema para activar ou desactivar a fonte de luz uniforme.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneAppearance%2FCB_SHADING 5c Aplica o sombreamento Gouraud se está marcado ou o sombreamento plano se non está marcado.
49 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination 26 Set the light sources for the 3D view.
16 SVX_HID_CTRL3D_VSCROLL 71 Arrastre o control deslizante dereito para definir a altura e a dirección vertical da fonte de luz seleccionada.
16 SVX_HID_CTRL3D_HSCROLL 77 Arrastre o control deslizante inferior para definir a posición e a dirección horizontal da fonte de luz seleccionada.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_7 39 Prema para activar ou desactivar a fonte de luz uniforme.
17 SVX_HID_CTRL3D_SWITCHER 47 Prema para alternar un modelo de iluminación dunha esfera ou dun cubo.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_3 39 Prema para activar ou desactivar a fonte de luz uniforme.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_5 39 Prema para activar ou desactivar a fonte de luz uniforme.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_6 39 Prema para activar ou desactivar a fonte de luz uniforme.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_3D_SceneIllumination%2FBTN_LIGHT_8 39 Prema para activar ou desactivar a fonte de luz uniforme.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fmaintitle 26 Introducir un título para a gráfica.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fsubtitle 29 Introducir un subtítulo para a gráfica.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2FprimaryXaxis 34 Introducir unha etiqueta para o eixe X (horizontal).
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Ftop 30 Posiciona a lenda na parte superior da gráfica.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fbottom 30 Posiciona a lenda na parte inferior da gráfica.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2FprimaryZaxis 6e Introducir unha etiqueta para o eixe Z. Esta opción só está dispoñíbel para as gráficas tridimensionais.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2FsecondaryXaxis 71 Enter a label for the secondary y-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary y-axis.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fshow 1e Mostra unha lenda na gráfica.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fleft 2a Posiciona a lenda á esquerda da gráfica.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fright 29 Posiciona a lenda á dereita da gráfica.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fy 39 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the y-axis.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2FprimaryYaxis 32 Introducir unha etiqueta para o eixe Y (vertical).
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fx 39 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the x-axis.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fwizelementspage%2Fz 6e Introducir unha etiqueta para o eixe Z. Esta opción só está dispoñíbel para as gráficas tridimensionais.
12 .uno%3ADiagramType 2a Abre a caixa de diálogo Tipo de gráfica.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2F@@nowidget@@ 33 Prema para ir á páxina do asistente especificada.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fcharttype 27 Seleccione un tipo de gráfica básico.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Ftp_ChartType 33 Prema para ir á páxina do asistente especificada.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_WIZARD_ROADMAP 33 Prema para ir á páxina do asistente especificada.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fnolines 49 Definir o número de liñas para o tipo de gráfica de Columnas e liñas.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fsubtype 32 Seleccione un subtipo do tipo de gráfica básico.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2F3dscheme 22 Seleccione o tipo de aparencia 3D.
2c modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fontop 3e As series amontoadas mostran os valores uns enriba dos outros.
2c modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fstack 31 Mostra series amontoadas para gráficas de liña.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fpercent 36 As series amontoadas mostran valores como porcentaxes.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fsort 73 Conecta puntos por valores X ascendentes, mesmo se a orde dos valores é diferente, nun diagrama de dispersión XY.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2F3dlook 32 Activa unha aparencia 3D para os valores de datos.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Flinetype 22 Seleccione o tipo de aparencia 3D.
2c modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fshape 1f Selecciona unha forma da lista.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_ChartType%2Fproperties 33 Opens a dialog to set the line or curve properties.
3f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_RangeChooser%2FCB_FIRST_ROW_ASLABELS 14c Para series de datos en columnas: A primeira fila do intervalo utilízase como nomes para series de datos. Para series de datos en filas: A primeira fila no intervalo utilízase como categorías. As filas restantes abranguen a serie de datos. Se esta caixa de verificación non está seleccionada, todas as filas son serie de datos.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_RangeChooser%2FRB_DATACOLS 100 A serie de datos toma datos das columnas consecutivas no intervalo seleccionado. Para gráficas de dispersión, a primeira columna de datos conterá valores x para todas as seires. As demais columnas de datos utilízanse como valores y, un para cada serie.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_RangeChooser%2FRB_DATAROWS f7 A serie de datos toma datos das filas consecutivas no intervalo seleccionado. Para gráficas de dispersión, a primeira serie de datos conterá valores x en todas as series. As demais series de datos utilízanse como valores y, un para cada serie.
42 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_RangeChooser%2FCB_FIRST_COLUMN_ASLABELS 151 Para series de datos en columnas: A primeira columna do intervalo utilízase como nomes para series de datos. Para serie de datos en filas: A primeira columna utilízase como categorías. As columnas restantes abranguen as columnas de datos. Se esta caixa de verificación non está seleccionada, todas as columnas son columnas de datos.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_RangeChooser%2FIB_RANGE c5 Introduza o intervalo de datos que desexa incluír na gráfica. Para minimizar esta caixa de diálogo mentres selecciona o intervalo de datos en Calc, prema no botón Seleccionar intervalo de datos
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_RangeChooser%2FED_RANGE c5 Introduza o intervalo de datos que desexa incluír na gráfica. Para minimizar esta caixa de diálogo mentres selecciona o intervalo de datos en Calc, prema no botón Seleccionar intervalo de datos
11 .uno%3ADataRanges 5b Abre a caixa de diálogo Intervalos de datos onde pode editar Intervalos e Series de datos.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_RangeChooser%2F@@nowidget@@ 5b Abre a caixa de diálogo Intervalos de datos onde pode editar Intervalos e Series de datos.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FBTN_DOWN 42 Move cara a abaixo a entrada seleccionada na lista Serie de datos.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FBTN_REMOVE 37 Elimina a entrada seleccionada da lista Serie de datos.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FEDT_CATEGORIES 144 Shows the source range address of the categories (the texts you can see on the x-axis of a category chart). For an XY-chart, the text box contains the source range of the data labels which are displayed for the data points. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FIMB_RANGE_MAIN 123 Mostra o intervalo de orixe desde a segunda columna da caixa de lista Intervalo de datos. Pode modificar o intervalo na caixa de texto ou arrastrar no documento. Para minimizar esta caixa de diálogo ao seleccionar o intervalo de datos en Calc, prema no botón Seleccionar intervalo de datos
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FLB_ROLE c4 Mostra todos os intervalos de datos utilizados pola serie de datos seleccionada na caixa de lista Serie de datos. Cada intervalo de datos mostra o nome do papel e o enderezo do intervalo de orixe.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FLB_SERIES ce Mostra unha lista de todas as series de datos na gráfica. Prema nunha entrada para ver e editar esas series de datos. Prema en Engadir para inserir na lista unha nova serie despois da entrada seleccionada.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FBTN_ADD 9d Engade unha entrada debaixo da seleccionada na lista Serie de datos. Se hai unha entrada seleccionada, a nova serie de datos obtén o mesmo tipo de gráfica.
31 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FEDT_RANGE 123 Mostra o intervalo de orixe desde a segunda columna da caixa de lista Intervalo de datos. Pode modificar o intervalo na caixa de texto ou arrastrar no documento. Para minimizar esta caixa de diálogo ao seleccionar o intervalo de datos en Calc, prema no botón Seleccionar intervalo de datos
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2Ftp_DataSource ce Mostra unha lista de todas as series de datos na gráfica. Prema nunha entrada para ver e editar esas series de datos. Prema en Engadir para inserir na lista unha nova serie despois da entrada seleccionada.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FBTN_UP 42 Move cara a arriba a entrada seleccionada na lista Serie de datos.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2FIMB_RANGE_CAT 144 Shows the source range address of the categories (the texts you can see on the x-axis of a category chart). For an XY-chart, the text box contains the source range of the data labels which are displayed for the data points. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_DataSource%2F@@nowidget@@ ce Mostra unha lista de todas as series de datos na gráfica. Prema nunha entrada para ver e editar esas series de datos. Prema en Engadir para inserir na lista unha nova serie despois da entrada seleccionada.
11 .uno%3ADataInRows 2e Modifica a disposición dos datos da gráfica.
14 .uno%3ADataInColumns 2e Modifica a disposición dos datos da gráfica.
10 .uno%3AScaleText 38 Redimensiona o texto ao modificar o tamaño da gráfica.
15 .uno%3ANewArrangement c3 Move todos os elementos para a súa posición predefinida dentro da gráfica actual. Esta función non altera o tipo de gráfica nin ningún dos outros atributos alén da posición dos elementos.
12 .uno%3AContextType 29 Mostra o nome do tipo de gráfica actual.
19 .uno%3AResetAllDataPoints 3c Restabelece todos os puntos de datos ao formato predefinido.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMeanValue 1f Elimina a liña de valor medio.
14 .uno%3ADeleteR2Value 14 Elimina o valor R².
1e .uno%3ADeleteTrendlineEquation 2a Elimina a ecuación de liña de tendencia.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMinorGrid 14 Borra a grade menor.
11 .uno%3ADeleteAxis 1c Elimina o eixe seleccionado.
17 .uno%3ADeleteDataLabels 22 Borra todas as etiquetas de datos.
13 .uno%3ADeleteLegend 1a Borra a lenda da gráfica.
14 .uno%3AInsertR2Value 32 Insire valor de coeficiente de determinación R².
15 .uno%3AResetDataPoint 41 Restabelece o punto de datos seleccionado ao formato predefinido.
23 .uno%3AInsertTrendlineEquationAndR2 52 Insire unha ecuación de liña de tendencia e o coeficiente de determinación R².
1e .uno%3AFormatTrendlineEquation 21 Formata a ecuación de tendencia.
16 .uno%3AFormatDataPoint 26 Formata o punto de datos seleccionado.
12 .uno%3AFormatTitle 1f Formata o título seleccionado.
12 .uno%3AFormatFloor 1d Formata a planta da gráfica.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMajorGrid 18 Borra a grade principal.
17 .uno%3AFormatYErrorBars 1c Formata as barras de erro Y.
16 .uno%3AInsertDataLabel 22 Insire unha soa etiqueta de datos.
16 .uno%3AStarChartDialog 123 Crea unha gráfica no documento actual. Para usar un intervalo regular de celas como orixe de datos para a gráfica, prema dentro do intervalo de celas e logo escolla esta orde. Alternativamente, seleccione algunhas celas e escolla esta orde para crear unha gráfica das celas seleccionadas.
11 .uno%3AFormatWall 1d Formata a parede da gráfica.
16 .uno%3AFormatChartArea 1c Formata a área da gráfica.
10 .uno%3ADrawChart 123 Crea unha gráfica no documento actual. Para usar un intervalo regular de celas como orixe de datos para a gráfica, prema dentro do intervalo de celas e logo escolla esta orde. Alternativamente, seleccione algunhas celas e escolla esta orde para crear unha gráfica das celas seleccionadas.
16 .uno%3AInsertAxisTitle 31 Abre un diálogo para inserir un título de eixe.
16 .uno%3AFormatDataLabel 29 Formata a etiqueta de datos seleccionada.
16 .uno%3AFormatTrendline 1d Formata a liña de tendencia.
16 .uno%3ADeleteDataLabel 27 Elimina a etiqueta de datos selecciona.
13 .uno%3AFormatLegend 1c Formata a lenda da gráfica.
16 .uno%3AFormatStockGain 33 Formata os indicadores de ganancia de cotizacións.
16 .uno%3AFormatMajorGrid 1a Formata a grade principal.
17 .uno%3AFormatDataSeries 19 Formata a serie de datos.
16 .uno%3AFormatStockLoss 30 Formata os indicadores de perda de cotizacións.
11 .uno%3AFormatAxis 1c Formata o eixe seleccionado.
18 .uno%3AInsertObjectChart 123 Crea unha gráfica no documento actual. Para usar un intervalo regular de celas como orixe de datos para a gráfica, prema dentro do intervalo de celas e logo escolla esta orde. Alternativamente, seleccione algunhas celas e escolla esta orde para crear unha gráfica das celas seleccionadas.
17 .uno%3AFormatDataLabels 1e Formata as etiquetas de datos.
16 .uno%3AFormatMeanValue 1f Formata a liña de valor medio.
17 .uno%3ADeleteYErrorBars 1c Elimina as barras de erro Y.
13 .uno%3AInsertTitles 33 Abre un diálogo para inserir títulos de gráfica.
17 .uno%3AInsertRemoveAxes 30 Abre un diálogo para inserir ou eliminar eixes.
11 .uno%3AInsertAxis 26 Abre un diálogo para inserir un eixe.
16 .uno%3AInsertMajorGrid 1c Insire unha grade principal.
1b CHART2_HID_SCH_WIN_DOCUMENT 123 Crea unha gráfica no documento actual. Para usar un intervalo regular de celas como orixe de datos para a gráfica, prema dentro do intervalo de celas e logo escolla esta orde. Alternativamente, seleccione algunhas celas e escolla esta orde para crear unha gráfica das celas seleccionadas.
16 .uno%3AInsertMinorGrid 1d Insire unha grade secundaria.
16 .uno%3AFormatMinorGrid 1b Formata a grade secundaria.
17 .uno%3AInsertDataLabels 1a Insire etiquetas de datos.
1b .uno%3AChartElementSelector dd Seleccionar o elemento da gráfica que quere formatar. O elemento queda seleccionado na previsualización da gráfica. Prema sobre Formatado de selección para abrir o diálogo de propiedades para o elemento seleccionado.
17 HID_TABDLG_STANDARD_BTN 8c Prema no botón Máis para expandir a caixa de diálogo e mostrar máis opcións. Prema novamente para volver á caixa de diálogo orixinal.
14 HID_TABDLG_RESET_BTN bf Desfai as alteracións realizadas na lapela, restabelecendo a configuración existente antes de abrir a caixa de diálogo. Non se solicitará confirmación cando se peche a caixa de diálogo.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fautocorrectdialog%2Fok 2a Garda todos os cambios e pecha o diálogo.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fautocorrectdialog%2Freset 44 Restaura os valores modificados para os valores da páxina anterior.
17 DBACCESS_HID_DBWIZ_NEXT ab Prema no botón Seguinte e o asistente usa a configuración do diálogo actual e continúa para o paso seguinte. Se estiver no derradeiro paso, este botón tórnase Crear.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDNEXT ab Prema no botón Seguinte e o asistente usa a configuración do diálogo actual e continúa para o paso seguinte. Se estiver no derradeiro paso, este botón tórnase Crear.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDNEXT ab Prema no botón Seguinte e o asistente usa a configuración do diálogo actual e continúa para o paso seguinte. Se estiver no derradeiro paso, este botón tórnase Crear.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Fpreviewinstable 33 Mostra unha previsualización da selección actual.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fpreview 33 Mostra unha previsualización da selección actual.
2e modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fdialogpage%2Flibrary 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fdelete 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
23 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Fdelete 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Frbdestarea 10d Prema na icona Encoller para reducir o diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada. Así é máis doado marcar a referencia requirida na folla. As iconas convértense automaticamente na icona Expandir. Prémaa para restaurar a caixa de diálogo para o seu tamaño orixinal.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fdelete 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
15 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fdeldouble 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
39 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinedatabaserangedialog%2Fdelete 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmanagenamesdialog%2Fdelete 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
1c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_NEXT ab Prema no botón Seguinte e o asistente usa a configuración do diálogo actual e continúa para o paso seguinte. Se estiver no derradeiro paso, este botón tórnase Crear.
2a modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Flibpage%2Fdelete 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnamerangesdialog%2Fdelete 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
19 DBACCESS_HID_DBWIZ_FINISH 26 Aplica os cambios e pecha o asistente.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3APB_DELETE 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fremove 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
17 DBACCESS_HID_DBWIZ_HELP 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
1e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_NEXT ab Prema no botón Seguinte e o asistente usa a configuración do diálogo actual e continúa para o paso seguinte. Se estiver no derradeiro paso, este botón tórnase Crear.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDCANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_CANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDCANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2Fdelete 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fimagetabpage%2FBTN_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
19 DBACCESS_HID_DBWIZ_CANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
1e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CREATE 26 Aplica os cambios e pecha o asistente.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fpreview 33 Mostra unha previsualización da selección actual.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_CANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
2c modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fmacropage%2Fdelete 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDCANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
2d modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fcatalogdialog%2Finsert 4e Aplica os valores modificados ou seleccionados sen pechar a caixa de diálogo.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpage%2Fdelete 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fgoalseekdlg%2Fvarbutton 10d Prema na icona Encoller para reducir o diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada. Así é máis doado marcar a referencia requirida na folla. As iconas convértense automaticamente na icona Expandir. Prémaa para restaurar a caixa de diálogo para o seu tamaño orixinal.
3d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmultipleoperationsdialog%2Fformulasref 10d Prema na icona Encoller para reducir o diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada. Así é máis doado marcar a referencia requirida na folla. As iconas convértense automaticamente na icona Expandir. Prémaa para restaurar a caixa de diálogo para o seu tamaño orixinal.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_0_CMDCANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_NEXT ab Prema no botón Seguinte e o asistente usa a configuración do diálogo actual e continúa para o paso seguinte. Se estiver no derradeiro paso, este botón tórnase Crear.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Fdelete 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnamerangesdialog%2Frbassign2 10d Prema na icona Encoller para reducir o diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada. Así é máis doado marcar a referencia requirida na folla. As iconas convértense automaticamente na icona Expandir. Prémaa para restaurar a caixa de diálogo para o seu tamaño orixinal.
33 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomslideshows%2Fdelete 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
11 WIZARDS_HID0_NEXT ab Prema no botón Seguinte e o asistente usa a configuración do diálogo actual e continúa para o paso seguinte. Se estiver no derradeiro paso, este botón tórnase Crear.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fselectpathdialog%2Fdelete 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_CANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fmultipathdialog%2Fdelete 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fdelabbrev 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fautocorrectdialog%2Fcancel 2d Pecha o diálogo e descarta todos os cambios.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FbuttonBTN_DEL 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
39 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconditionalformatdialog%2Frbassign 10d Prema na icona Encoller para reducir o diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada. Así é máis doado marcar a referencia requirida na folla. As iconas convértense automaticamente na icona Expandir. Prémaa para restaurar a caixa de diálogo para o seu tamaño orixinal.
42 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpivottablelayoutdialog%2Fdestination-button 10d Prema na icona Encoller para reducir o diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada. Así é máis doado marcar a referencia requirida na folla. As iconas convértense automaticamente na icona Expandir. Prémaa para restaurar a caixa de diálogo para o seu tamaño orixinal.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptionsdialog%2Frevert 62 Restaura os cambios feitos na lapela actual para os que se aplicaban cando se abriu este diálogo.
1b CUI_HID_MEASURE_CTL_PREVIEW 33 Mostra unha previsualización da selección actual.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmultipleoperationsdialog%2Fcolref 10d Prema na icona Encoller para reducir o diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada. Así é máis doado marcar a referencia requirida na folla. As iconas convértense automaticamente na icona Expandir. Prémaa para restaurar a caixa de diálogo para o seu tamaño orixinal.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmultipleoperationsdialog%2Frowref 10d Prema na icona Encoller para reducir o diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada. Así é máis doado marcar a referencia requirida na folla. As iconas convértense automaticamente na icona Expandir. Prémaa para restaurar a caixa de diálogo para o seu tamaño orixinal.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fgoalseekdlg%2Fformulabutton 10d Prema na icona Encoller para reducir o diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada. Así é máis doado marcar a referencia requirida na folla. As iconas convértense automaticamente na icona Expandir. Prémaa para restaurar a caixa de diálogo para o seu tamaño orixinal.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnamerangesdialog%2Frbassign 10d Prema na icona Encoller para reducir o diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada. Así é máis doado marcar a referencia requirida na folla. As iconas convértense automaticamente na icona Expandir. Prémaa para restaurar a caixa de diálogo para o seu tamaño orixinal.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Frbdataarea 10d Prema na icona Encoller para reducir o diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada. Así é máis doado marcar a referencia requirida na folla. As iconas convértense automaticamente na icona Expandir. Prémaa para restaurar a caixa de diálogo para o seu tamaño orixinal.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fprintareasdialog%2Frbprintarea 10d Prema na icona Encoller para reducir o diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada. Así é máis doado marcar a referencia requirida na folla. As iconas convértense automaticamente na icona Expandir. Prémaa para restaurar a caixa de diálogo para o seu tamaño orixinal.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fprintareasdialog%2Frbrepeatrow 10d Prema na icona Encoller para reducir o diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada. Así é máis doado marcar a referencia requirida na folla. As iconas convértense automaticamente na icona Expandir. Prémaa para restaurar a caixa de diálogo para o seu tamaño orixinal.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmanagenamesdialog%2Fassign 10d Prema na icona Encoller para reducir o diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada. Así é máis doado marcar a referencia requirida na folla. As iconas convértense automaticamente na icona Expandir. Prémaa para restaurar a caixa de diálogo para o seu tamaño orixinal.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fprintareasdialog%2Frbrepeatcol 10d Prema na icona Encoller para reducir o diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada. Así é máis doado marcar a referencia requirida na folla. As iconas convértense automaticamente na icona Expandir. Prémaa para restaurar a caixa de diálogo para o seu tamaño orixinal.
3b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinedatabaserangedialog%2Fassignrb 10d Prema na icona Encoller para reducir o diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada. Así é máis doado marcar a referencia requirida na folla. As iconas convértense automaticamente na icona Expandir. Prémaa para restaurar a caixa de diálogo para o seu tamaño orixinal.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Frbcopyarea 10d Prema na icona Encoller para reducir o diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada. Así é máis doado marcar a referencia requirida na folla. As iconas convértense automaticamente na icona Expandir. Prémaa para restaurar a caixa de diálogo para o seu tamaño orixinal.
13 WIZARDS_HID0_CANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDFINISH 26 Aplica os cambios e pecha o asistente.
17 SVX_HID_GALLERY_PREVIEW 33 Mostra unha previsualización da selección actual.
1a SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_RENAME 30 Habilita un obxecto seleccionado para renomealo.
1b SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_DESTROY b3 Elimina a selección actual. De haber varios obxectos seleccionados, elimínanse todos. Na maioría dos casos aparece unha pregunta de confirmación antes de eliminar os obxectos.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryupdateprogress%2FGalleryUpdateProgress 40 Actualiza a visualización da xanela ou do obxecto seleccionado.
1f SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN_OBJECT 45 Use a orde Abrir para abrir o obxecto seleccionado nunha nova tarefa.
18 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_COPY 2d Copia no portapapeis o elemento seleccionado.
19 HID_GALLERY_MN_BACKGROUND 27 Insire a imaxe seleccionada como fondo.
19 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_PASTE 3c Insire no documento o elemento que moveu para o portapapeis.
17 HID_DID_SAVE_PACKED_XML 52 $[officename] carga e garda os ficheiros no formato OpenDocument por por omisión.
11 .uno%3AActiveHelp 58 Activa a visualización dunha descrición breve de menús e iconas no apuntador do rato.
e .uno%3AHelpTip 5d Activa a visualización dos nomes de iconas no apuntador do rato e noutros contidos da Axuda.
26 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompresslzw 31 Lista as páxinas principais usadas recentemente.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcolor1rb 1d Formata a planta da gráfica.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Flevel1rb 89 Neste nivel non se dispón de compresión. Seleccione a opción Nivel 1 se a súa impresora PostScript non ofrece os recursos do nivel 2.
28 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Ftiffpreviewcb 5d Especifica se se exporta unha previsualización no formato TIFF xunto co ficheiro PostScript.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Flevel2rb 8a Seleccione a opción Nivel 2 se o seu dispositivo de saída ofrece soporte a mapas de bits a cores, imaxes da paleta e imaxes comprimidas.
2d svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fsavetransparencycb b8 Especifica se restaurar ou non a visualización do último documento utilizado. Restauraranse moitas das propiedades de visualización válidas a última vez que se gardou o documento.
22 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fwidthlb 11 Indica a largura.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fheightmf 10 Indica a altura.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcolor2rb 1f Formata a liña de valor medio.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fresolutionmf 4b Inclúe unha fórmula cordial de despedida, seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fresolutionlb 4b Inclúe unha fórmula cordial de despedida, seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcolordepthlb 35 Seleccione unha cor para a fonte de luz seleccionada.
20 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Frlecb 24 Aliña o contido da cela á dereita.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fbinarycb 2a Seleccione un formato para mostrar a data.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompressnone 41 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para definir as propiedades da curva.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2F@@nowidget@@ 2d Define as opcións de exportación de imaxes.
22 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fwidthmf 1d Indica as unidades de medida.
2b svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompressionpngnf 84 Estabelece a compresión da exportación. Unha compresión alta significa unha imaxe máis pequena mais que leva máis tempo cargar.
28 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fepsipreviewcb b9 Especifica se se exporta unha previsualización monocromática en formato EPSI xunto co ficheiro PostScript. Este formato só contén caracteres imprimíbeis do código ASCII de 7 bits.
2b svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompressionjpgnf 92 Estabelece a calidade da exportación. Escolla entre calidade baixa cun tamaño de ficheiro mínimo e calidade alta con tamaño de ficheiro grande
21 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Ftextcb 29 Posiciona a lenda á dereita da gráfica.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Finterlacedcb 22 Definir a orde de puntos de datos.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fimoptdialog%2Fcharsetlist 53 Seleccione o conxunto de caracteres das opcións empregadas para importar/exportar.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fimoptdialog%2Ffixedwidth 34 Exporta todos os campos de datos cunha largura fixa.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fimoptdialog%2Fasshown db Activado por omisión, os datos gárdanse tal e como se mostran, incluídos os formatos numéricos aplicados. Se esta opción non estiver marcada gárdase o contido de datos crus, como nas versións antigas do software.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fimoptdialog%2Fquoteall f2 Exporta todas as celas de texto cos caracteres de aspas iniciais e finais tal e como se indica naa opción de delimitadores de texto. Se non se escolle, só se rodean de aspas as celas de texto que conteñan o carácter delimitador de campos.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fimoptdialog%2Ftext 52 Escolla ou introduza o delimitador de texto, que inclúe todos os campos de datos.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fimoptdialog%2Ffield 48 Escolla ou introduza o delimitador de campo, que separa campos de datos.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fimoptdialog%2Fcharsetdropdown 4c Especifica o conxunto de caracteres utilizados para a exportación de texto.
3f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fscrolledwindowcolumntype 109 Mostra a aparencia que terá o texto importado unha vez separado en columnas. Para aplicar un formato a unha columna ao importar, prema nunha columna e seleccione un tipo de columna. Ao seleccionar un tipo de columna, o título da columna mostra o formato aplicado.
3e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fdetectscientificnumbers 6f When this option is enabled, Calc will automatically detect numbers with scientific notation, like 5E2 for 500.
3b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fdetectspecialnumbers f9 When this option is enabled, Calc will automatically detect all number formats, including special number formats such as dates and time. Scientific notation will also be detected as Detect scientific notation option must be enabled at the same time.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fremovespace 42 Retira dos campos de datos os espazos en branco iniciais e finais.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2FTextImportCsvDialog 3b Configura as opcións de importación de datos delimitados.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fsemicolon 39 Separa en columnas os datos delimitados por punto e coma.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ftextdelimiter 58 Select a character to delimit text data. You can also enter a character in the text box.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fmergedelimiters 47 Combina delimitadores consecutivos e elimina campos de datos en branco.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Flanguage 30 Determina como se importan as cadeas numéricas.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ffromrow 36 Especifica a liña onde desexa iniciar a importación.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fother 9f Separa os datos en columnas empregando o separador personalizado que vostede indique. Nota: O separador personalizado debe estar contido tamén nos seus datos.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fcolumntype 77 Escolla unha columna na xanela de visualización e seleccione o tipo de datos a que desexa aplicar os datos importados.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ftofixedwidth 4a Separa en columnas os datos de largura fixa (igual número de caracteres).
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ftoseparatedby 2b Seleccione o separador utilizado nos datos.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ftab 38 Separa en columnas os datos delimitados por tabuladores.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fspace 34 Separa en columnas os datos delimitados por espazos.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fskipemptycells b5 Available when using Paste Special: when this option is enabled, Calc preserves previous content of cells when pasting empty ones. Otherwise, Calc deletes content of previous cells.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fquotedfieldastext c6 Cando esta opción está activada, os campos ou celas cuxos valores van enteiramente entre aspas (o primeiro e último caracteres do valor son iguais ao delimitador de texto) impórtanse como texto.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Finputother 9f Separa os datos en columnas empregando o separador personalizado que vostede indique. Nota: O separador personalizado debe estar contido tamén nos seus datos.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fcharset 44 Especifica o conxunto de caracteres utilizado no ficheiro importado.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fcomma 32 Separa en columnas os datos delimitados por comas.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Flf 45 Aplica unha "quebra de liña con sangría" como quebra de parágrafo.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Fcr 37 Aplica un "retorno de carro" como quebra de parágrafo.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Fcrlf 62 Aplica un "retorno de carro" e unha "quebra de liña con sangría". Esta é a opción predefinida.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Flanguage 76 Especifica o idioma do texto, se aínda non foi definido. Esta configuración só está dispoñíbel cando se importa.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Ffont bc Configurando un tipo de letra predefinido está a especificar que o texto debe mostrarse nun tipo de letra específico. Os tipos de letra predefinidos só se poden seleccionar ao importar.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Fcharset 59 Especifica o conxunto de caracteres do ficheiro para a súa exportación ou importación.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fgallerytitledialog%2FGalleryTitleDialog 3a Atribúe un título a un obxecto seleccionado da Galería.
15 HID_GALLERY_MN_DELETE 38 Elimina o gráfico selecionado despois da confirmación.
16 HID_GALLERY_MN_PREVIEW 39 A orde Previsualización  mostra o gráfico seleccionado.
17 HID_GALLERY_MN_ADD_LINK 32 Insire o gráfico seleccionado como unha ligazón.
12 HID_GALLERY_MN_ADD 55 Insire unha copia do obxecto gráfico seleccionado, directamente dentro do documento.
16 HID_GALLERY_MN_ADDMENU 41 Define como é inserido un obxecto gráfico dentro dun documento.
1e HID_MN_READONLY_SAVEBACKGROUND 29 Permite gardar o fondo dunha páxina web.
1a HID_MN_READONLY_GRAPHICOFF 3e Define todos os gráficos para seren invisíbeis no documento.
1b HID_MN_READONLY_COPYGRAPHIC 2d Copia unha imaxe seleccionada no portapapeis.
18 HID_MN_READONLY_COPYLINK 42 Copia no portapapeis a ligazón situada baixo o apuntador do rato.
1b HID_MN_READONLY_LOADGRAPHIC 5e Se desactivou a visualización de imaxes, escolla a ordeCargar imaxes para as facer visíbeis.
1b HID_MN_READONLY_SAVEGRAPHIC 47 Abre unha caixa de diálogo en que se pode gardar a imaxe seleccionada.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fgallerygeneralpage%2Fname 16 Mostra o nome do tema.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fgallerygeneralpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 47 The General tab page lists the general properties of the current theme.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fgallerygeneralpage%2FGalleryGeneralPage 47 The General tab page lists the general properties of the current theme.
d .uno%3ANewDoc 49 Se desexa crear un documento a partir dun modelo, escolla Novo - Modelos.
16 HID_TBXCONTROL_FILENEW 5e Crea un novo documento de $[officename]. Prema na frecha para seleccionar o tipo de documento.
10 .uno%3AAddDirect 28 Crea un novo documento de $[officename].
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeldialog%2Fok 23 Crea un documento novo para editar.
13 .uno%3AInsertLabels 46 Permite crear etiquetas. As etiquetas créanse nun documento de texto.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Fbrand 2d Escolla a marca de papel que desexe empregar.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Fsheet 28 Imprime etiquetas en follas individuais.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Ffield 84 Seleccione a base de datos que desexe e prema na frecha para a esquerda desta caixa para inserir o campo na caixa Texto da etiqueta.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Ftype 103 Seleccione o formato de tamaño que desexa empregar. Os formatos dispoñíbeis dependen da marca seleccionada na lista Marca. Se desexa empregar un formato de etiqueta personalizado, seleccione [User] e a seguir prema na lapela Formato para definir o formato.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Ftable 60 Seleccione a táboa da base de datos que conteña o(s) campo(s) que desexe empregar na etiqueta.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Finsert 84 Seleccione a base de datos que desexe e prema na frecha para a esquerda desta caixa para inserir o campo na caixa Texto da etiqueta.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Fdatabase 4f Seleccione a base de datos que desexe empregar como fonte de datos da etiqueta.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Fcontinuous 24 Imprime etiquetas en papel continuo.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Faddress 6d Crea unha etiqueta co seu enderezo de remitente. O texto que haxa na caixa Texto da etiqueta é substituído.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Ftextview 67 Introduza o texto que desexe que apareza na etiqueta. Tamén pode inserir un campo dunha base de datos.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2FCardMediumPage 3d Indique o texto da etiqueta e escolla o seu tamaño de papel.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fhori 9e Mostra a distancia entre os bordos esquerdos de etiquetas adxacentes en tarxetas de visita. Se vai definir un formato personalizado, introduza aquí un valor.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fvert 8a Displays the distance between the top edges of adjacent labels or business cards. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fwidth 78 Mostra a largura da etiqueta ou da tarxeta de visita. Se vai definir un formato personalizado, introduza aquí un valor.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsavelabeldialog%2Fbrand 2b Introduza ou seleccione a marca que desexe.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fheight 77 Mostra a altura da etiqueta ou da tarxeta de visita. Se vai definir un formato personalizado, introduza aquí un valor.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fleft b1 Mostra a altura desde o bordo esquerdo da páxina ao bordo esquerdo da primeira etiqueta ou tarxeta de visita. Se vai definir un formato personalizado, introduza aquí un valor.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fpageheight 75 Mostra a algura do formato de papel seleccionado. Para definir un formato personalizado, introduza unha altura aquí.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fsave 38 Garda o formato da etiqueta ou tarxeta de visita actual.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Ftop b1 Mostra a altura desde o bordo superior da páxina ao bordo superior da primeira etiqueta ou tarxeta de visita. Se vai definir un formato personalizado, introduza aquí un valor.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsavelabeldialog%2Ftype 2c Introduza ou seleccione un tipo de etiqueta.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2FLabelFormatPage 28 Definir as opcións de formato de papel.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fcols 64 Introduza o número de etiquetas ou de tarxetas de visita que desexen que ocupen o largo da páxina.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Frows 65 Introduza o número de etiquetas ou de tarxetas de visita que desexen que ocupen a altura da páxina.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fpagewidth 77 Mostra a largura do formato de papel seleccionado. Para definir un formato personalizado, introduza unha largura aquí.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fsetup 35 Abre a caixa de diálogo Configuración da impresora.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffloatingsync%2Fsync 7b Copia o contido da etiqueta ou tarxeta de visita superior esquerda no resto das etiquetas ou tarxetas de visita da páxina.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fsynchronize b0 Permite editar unha única etiqueta ou tarxeta de visita e actualiza o contido das etiquetas ou tarxetas de visita restantes na páxina ao premer no botón Sincronizar lapelas.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Frows 4f Introduza a fila na que desexe colocar a etiqueta ou tarxeta de visita únicas.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fsinglelabel 40 Imprime unha única etiqueta ou tarxeta de visita nunha páxina.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fentirepage 3e Crea unha páxina completa de etiquetas ou tarxetas de visita.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fcols 51 Introduza a columna na que desexe colocar a etiqueta ou tarxeta de visita única.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2FLabelOptionsPage 89 Define opcións adicionais para as súas etiquetas ou tarxetas de visita, incluíndo as opcións de sincronización de texto e impresora.
19 .uno%3AInsertBusinessCard 33 Deseñe e cree as súas propias tarxetas de visita.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Fformatinfo 64 O tipo de papel e as dimensións da tarxeta de visita móstranse na parte inferior da área Formato.
1d SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_TYPE 101 Seleccione o formato de tamaño que desexe empregar. Os formatos dispoñíbeis dependen do que seleccionase na lista Marca. Se desexa empregar un formato de etiqueta personalizado, seleccione [User] e a seguir prema na lapela Formato para definir o formato.
1e SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_BRAND 2d Escolla a marca de papel que desexe empregar.
1e SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_SHEET 31 Imprime tarxetas de visita en follas individuais.
1d SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_CONT 2d Imprime tarxetas de visita en papel continuo.
18 SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE 94 Seleccione o tamaño da tarxeta de visita de entre diversos formatos de tamaño predefinidos, ou o formato de tamaño que indique na lapela Formato.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardformatpage%2Fautotext 42 Seleccione unha categoría de tarxetas de visita na lista Contido.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardformatpage%2Ftreeview 83 Seleccione unha categoría de tarxetas de visita na caixa Texto automático - Sección e prema nunha disposición na lista Contido.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardformatpage%2FCardFormatPage 36 Permite definir o aspecto dos seus tarxetas de visita.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fmobile 22 Introduza o seu número de móbil.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Furl 35 Introduza o enderezo da súa páxina web na Internet.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fjob 2f Introduza o nome descritivo da súa profesión.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fshortname2 4d Introduza as iniciais da persoa a quen desexe empregar como segundo contacto.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Flastname2 4d Introduza os apelidos da persoa a quen desexe empregar como segundo contacto.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Ffirstname2 48 Introduza o nome da persoa a quen desexe empregar como segundo contacto.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fphone 25 Introduza o seu teléfono particular.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2FPrivateUserPage 90 Contén información de contacto persoal para tarxetas de visita. Esquemas de tarxetas de visita son seleccionados na guía Tarxetas de visita .
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 90 Contén información de contacto persoal para tarxetas de visita. Esquemas de tarxetas de visita son seleccionados na guía Tarxetas de visita .
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Furl 40 Introduza o enderezo da páxina web na Internet da súa empresa.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fphone 26 Introduza o teléfono da súa empresa.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fslogan 21 Introduza o lema da súa empresa.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fcompany2 2e Introduza detalles adicionais sobre a empresa.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fmobile 22 Introduza o seu número de móbil.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2F@@nowidget@@ c5 Contén información de contacto para tarxetas de visita que usan un esquema dun 'tarxeta de visita, Work' categoría. Esquemas de tarxetas de visita son seleccionados na guía Tarxetas de visita .
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2FBusinessDataPage c5 Contén información de contacto para tarxetas de visita que usan un esquema dun 'tarxeta de visita, Work' categoría. Esquemas de tarxetas de visita son seleccionados na guía Tarxetas de visita .
28 fpicker%2Fui%2Fexplorerfiledialog%2Fopen 27 Abre o(s) documento(s) seleccionado(s).
15 .uno%3AOpenFromWriter 45 Abre un ficheiro local ou remoto. É posíbel abrir varios ficheiros.
21 svt%2Fui%2Fquerydeletedialog%2Fno 59 Prema para cancelar a eliminación do ficheiro cuxo nome aparece nesta caixa de diálogo.
13 .uno%3AOpenFromCalc 45 Abre un ficheiro local ou remoto. É posíbel abrir varios ficheiros.
32 fps%2Fui%2Fexplorerfiledialog%2FExplorerFileDialog 45 Abre un ficheiro local ou remoto. É posíbel abrir varios ficheiros.
22 svt%2Fui%2Fquerydeletedialog%2Fyes 49 Prema para eliminar o ficheiro cuxo nome aparece nesta caixa de diálogo.
2c fps%2Fui%2Fexplorerfiledialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 45 Abre un ficheiro local ou remoto. É posíbel abrir varios ficheiros.
14 HID_FILEDLG_STANDARD 3d Displays the files and folders in the folder that you are in.
2d fpicker%2Fui%2Fexplorerfiledialog%2Ffile_name 3b Introduza un nome de ficheiro ou unha ruta até o ficheiro.
b .uno%3AOpen 45 Abre un ficheiro local ou remoto. É posíbel abrir varios ficheiros.
22 svt%2Fui%2Fquerydeletedialog%2Fall 34 Prema para eliminar todos os ficheiros sleccionados.
2d fpicker%2Fui%2Fexplorerfiledialog%2Ffile_type 82 Seleccione o tipo que desexe abrir ou seleccione Todos os ficheiros (*) para mostrar unha lista de todos os ficheiros do cartafol.
14 HID_FILEOPEN_VERSION 59 Se hai varias versións do ficheiro seleccionado, seleccione a versión que desexe abrir.
15 HID_FILEOPEN_READONLY 32 Abre o ficheiro en modo que só permite a lectura.
11 .uno%3AOpenRemote 32 Opens a document located in a remote file service.
19 HID_FILEDLG_PATH_FILENAME 28 Escriba a ruta ou selecciónea da lista.
14 HID_FILEDLG_PATH_BTN 1b Selecciona a ruta indicada.
3c SFX2%3A%20listbox%3A%20DLG_FILTER_SELECT%3A%20LB_DLG_LISTBOX 45 . Seleccione o filtro de importación para o ficheiro que quere abrir
f .Uno%3ACloseDoc 2e Pecha o documento actual sen saír do programa
10 .uno%3A%20Gardar 1a . Salva o documento actual
13 .uno%3ASaveAsRemote 32 Saves a document located in a remote file service.
10 .uno%3ASaveACopy 44 Garda unha copia do documento actual con outro nome ou noutro lugar.
16 HID_FILESAVE_SELECTION 9a Exports only the selected graphic objects in %PRODUCTNAME Draw and Impress to another format. If this box is not checked, the entire document is exported.
1c HID_FILESAVE_CUSTOMIZEFILTER 4e Allows you to set the spreadsheet saving options for some types of data files.
1d HID_FILESAVE_SAVEWITHPASSWORD 57 Protects the file with a password that must be entered before a user can open the file.
24 SW_HID_SEND_HTML_CTRL_LISTBOX_FILTER 3c Select the file format for the document that you are saving.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILETYPE 3c Select the file format for the document that you are saving.
17 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_DIALOG 57 Garda o documento actual nun lugar diferente ou cun nome ou tipo de ficheiro diferente.
26 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_LISTBOX_FILTER 3c Select the file format for the document that you are saving.
d .uno%3ASaveAs 57 Garda o documento actual nun lugar diferente ou cun nome ou tipo de ficheiro diferente.
d SID_SAVEASDOC 57 Garda o documento actual nun lugar diferente ou cun nome ou tipo de ficheiro diferente.
12 .uno%3A%20ExportTo 53 Salva o documento actual cun nome diferente e formato a un lugar que se especifica.
13 .uno%3AExportAsMenu 2b Export the document in PDF or EPUB formats.
1f .uno%3A%20SetDocumentProperties 7c Mostra as propiedades do ficheiro actual, incluso estatísticas, como conta de palabras ea data na que o arquivo foi creado.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2Fkeywords c8 Introduza as palabras que desexe empregar para indexar o contido do documento. As palabras clave deben estar separadas por comas. Unha palabra clave pode conter caracteres de espazo ou puntos e comas.
28 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2Fsubject 76 Introduza un asunto para o documento. Pode empregar un asunto para agrupar documentos que teñan contidos semellantes.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2Fcomments 3c Introduza comentarios para axudar a identificar o documento.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2Ftitle 26 Introduza un título para o documento.
34 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2FDescriptionInfoPage 32 Contén información descritiva sobre o documento.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentinfopage%2Freset af repón o tempo de edición a cero, a data de creación para a data actual e tempo, eo número de versión para 1. As datas de modificación e impresión tamén son excluídas.
28 sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentinfopage%2Fuserdatacb 86 Garda o nome completo do usuario co ficheiro. Pode editar o nome escollendo Ferramentas - Opcións - $[officename] - Datos de usuario.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentinfopage%2Fnameed 1a Mostra o nome do ficheiro.
2e sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentinfopage%2FDocumentInfoPage 35 Contén información básica sobre o ficheiro actual.
1f sfx%2Fui%2Fcustominfopage%2Fadd 37 Prema para engadir unha fila nova á lista Propiedades.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fcustominfopage%2Fproperties be Introduza o seu contido personalizado. Pode cambiar o nome, tipo e contido de cada fila. Pode engadir ou retirar filas. Os elementos expórtanse como metadatos a outros formatos de ficheiro.
2a sfx%2Fui%2Fcustominfopage%2FCustomInfoPage 45 Permite asignarlle campos de información personalizada ao documento.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fstatisticsinfopage%2FStatisticsInfoPage 29 Displays statistics for the current file.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fstatisticsinfopage%2F@@nowidget@@ 29 Displays statistics for the current file.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstatisticsinfopage%2F@@nowidget@@ 29 Displays statistics for the current file.
3e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstatisticsinfopage%2FStatisticsInfoPage 29 Displays statistics for the current file.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2Fprotexer eb Protexe o cambio de gravación en estado cunha contrasinal. Se a gravación cambio é protexido ao documento actual, o botón é nomeado Desprotexer . Prema Desprotexer  e introduza o contrasinal correcto para desactivar a protección.
2b sfx%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2Frecordchanges 56 Select to enable recording changes. This is the same as Edit - Track Changes - Record.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2Freadonly 45 Seleccione para permitir que este documento se abra só para lectura.
2e sfx%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2FSecurityInfoPage 3a Define as opcións de contrasinal para o documento actual.
2a sfx%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2F@@nowidget@@ 3a Define as opcións de contrasinal para o documento actual.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentfontspage%2FembedFonts 71 Mark this box to embed document fonts into the document file, for portability between different computer systems.
30 sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentfontspage%2FDocumentFontsPage 29 Embed document fonts in the current file.
13 .uno%3ATemplateMenu 56 Permite organizar e editar os modelos, así como gardar o ficheiro actual como modelo.
29 SVT%2Fui%2Faddresstemplatedialog%2Fassign 58 Seleccione o campo da táboa de datos que corresponde á entrada da axenda de enderezos.
28 svt%2Fui%2Faddresstemplatedialog%2Fadmin 36 Add a new data source to the Address Book Source list.
2d svt%2Fui%2Faddresstemplatedialog%2Fdatasource 2c Seleccione a táboa de datos da súa axenda.
1b .uno%3A%20AddressBookSource 51 . Edita as atribucións de campo e a fonte de datos para o seu libro de enderezos
29 sfx%2Fui%2Fsaveastemplatedlg%2Fcategorylb 34 Select a category in which to save the new template.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Fsaveastemplatedlg%2Fname_entry 1e Enter a name for the template.
2b sfx%2Fui%2Fsaveastemplatedlg%2F@@nowidget@@ 25 Garda o documento actual como modelo.
33 sfx%2Fui%2Fsaveastemplatedlg%2FSaveAsTemplateDialog 25 Garda o documento actual como modelo.
28 sfx%2Fui%2Fsaveastemplatedlg%2Fdefaultcb 36 The new template will be used as the default template.
15 .uno%3ASaveAsTemplate 25 Garda o documento actual como modelo.
13 .uno%3AOpenTemplate 42 Abre un diálogo no que se pode seleccionar un modelo para editar.
3d .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsSuppressEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 52 If checked empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed.
25 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagemarginsb 3e Select margin between individual pages on each sheet of paper.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagecols 19 Select number of columns.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagerows 16 Select number of rows.
26 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fsheetmarginsb 37 Select margin between the printed pages and paper edge.
29 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagespersheetbox 28 Print multiple pages per sheet of paper.
2b vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpageorientationbox 24 Select the orientation of the paper.
25 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Forderpreview 82 Change the arrangement of pages to be printed on every sheet of paper. The preview shows how every final sheet of paper will look.
25 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Freverseorder 26 Check to print pages in reverse order.
3a .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintRange%3ARadioButton%3A0 42 Prints only the pages or slides that you specify in the Pages box.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Forderbox 2e Select order in which pages are to be printed.
1f vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fstatus 2f Shows the availability of the selected printer.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspect%3ACheckBox 44 Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format.
24 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fprintersbox 5e The list box shows the installed printers. Click the printer to use for the current print job.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A1 42 Prints only the pages or slides that you specify in the Pages box.
23 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2FrbAllPages 1b Prints the entire document.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpageedit 78 Enter the number of page to be shown in the preview in the box or use the arrow buttons to display pages in the preview.
23 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpreviewbox 2c Turn on or off display of the print preview.
20 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpreview 83 The preview shows how each sheet of paper will look. You can browse through all sheets of paper with the buttons below the preview.
29 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagespersheetbtn 28 Print multiple pages per sheet of paper.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A3 29 Prints only odd numbered pages or slides.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fbackward 28 🡄 Shows preview of the previous page.
20 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fforward 24 🡆 Shows preview of the next page.
3a .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintRange%3ARadioButton%3A2 2a Prints only even numbered pages or slides.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fbordercb 28 Check to draw a border around each page.
c .uno%3APrint 83 Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the current document.
22 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fcopycount 32 Enter the number of copies that you want to print.
25 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2FrbRangePages 42 Prints only the pages or slides that you specify in the Pages box.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A0 42 Prints only the pages or slides that you specify in the Pages box.
1e vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fsetup 6a Opens the Printer Properties dialog. The printer properties vary according to the printer that you select.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A4 46 Prints only the selected area(s) or object(s) in the current document.
2e .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageRange%3AEdit c3 To print a range of pages, use a format like 3-6. To print single pages, use a format like 7;9;11. You can print a combination of page ranges and single pages, by using a format like 3-6;8;10;12.
24 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2FrbEvenPages 2a Prints only even numbered pages or slides.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A2 2a Prints only even numbered pages or slides.
20 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fcollate 32 Preserves the page order of the original document.
23 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2FrbOddPages 29 Prints only odd numbered pages or slides.
25 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpapersizebox 79 Set the paper size you would like to use. The preview will show how the document would look on a paper of the given size.
3a .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintRange%3ARadioButton%3A1 42 Prints only the pages or slides that you specify in the Pages box.
3a .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintRange%3ARadioButton%3A3 29 Prints only odd numbered pages or slides.
22 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagerange c3 To print a range of pages, use a format like 3-6. To print single pages, use a format like 7;9;11. You can print a combination of page ranges and single pages, by using a format like 3-6;8;10;12.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fsidesbox 76 If the printer is capable of duplex printing it's possible to choose between using only one side of the paper or both.
34 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3AListBox 31 Select the source of sheet content to be printed.
29 vcl%2Fui%2Fmoreoptionsdialog%2Fsinglejobs 68 Check to not rely on the printer to create collated copies but create a print job for each copy instead.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fprintersetupdialog%2Foptions a9 Opens the Printer Options dialog where you can override the global printer options set on the Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print panel for the current document.
2a svt%2Fui%2Fprintersetupdialog%2Fproperties 4f Changes the printer settings of your operating system for the current document.
24 svt%2Fui%2Fprintersetupdialog%2Fname 7a Lists the installed printers on your operating system. To change the default printer, select a printer name from the list.
32 svt%2Fui%2Fprintersetupdialog%2FPrinterSetupDialog 50 Select the default printer for the current document and change printing options.
16 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsMS 7f Opens a new window in your default email program with the current document as an attachment. The Microsoft file format is used.
17 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsOOo 82 Opens a new window in your default email program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used.
d .uno%3ASendTo 3f Envía unha copia do documento actual a diferentes aplicativos.
f .uno%3ASendMail 7d Opens a new window in your default email program with the current document as an attachment. The current file format is used.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_TEMPLATE 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
28 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_LISTBOX_TEMPLATE 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
29 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_PUSHBUTTON_CANCEL b1 Creates a master document from the current Writer document. A new sub-document is created at each occurrence of a chosen paragraph style or outline level in the source document.
13 .uno%3ANewGlobalDoc b1 Creates a master document from the current Writer document. A new sub-document is created at each occurrence of a chosen paragraph style or outline level in the source document.
b .uno%3AQuit 46 Closes all %PRODUCTNAME programs and prompts you to save your changes.
e .uno%3ASaveAll 37 Garda todos os documentos de $[officename] modificados.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fcompare 33 Compare the changes that were made in each version.
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fshow 31 Amosa todo o comentario da versión seleccionada.
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fopen 31 Opens the selected version in a read-only window.
2b sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fversi%C3%B3ns 7b Lista as versións existentes do documento actual, a data ea hora en que foron creados, o autor e os comentarios asociados.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fsempre 73 Se ten feito cambios no documento, $[officename] garda automaticamente unha nova versión cando pechar o documento.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fborrar 20 Exclúe a versión seleccionada.
36 sfx%2Fui%2Fversioncommentdialog%2FVersionCommentDialog 7d Enter a comment here when you are saving a new version. If you clicked Show to open this dialog, you cannot edit the comment.
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fsave a8 Saves the current state of the document as a new version. If you want, you can also enter comments in the Insert Version Comment dialog before you save the new version.
14 .uno%3AVersionDialog 88 Saves and organizes multiple versions of the current document in the same file. You can also open, delete and compare previous versions.
15 .uno%3ARecentFileList 62 Lista os ficheiros abertos máis recentemente. Para abrir un ficheiro da lista, prema no seu nome.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_UNDO a1 Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar.
b .uno%3AUndo a1 Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_REDO 9a Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar.
b .uno%3ARedo 9a Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar.
10 .uno%3A%20Repita 47 Repite a última orde. Este comando está dispoñible no Writer e Calc.
d .uno%3A%20Cut 33 Elimina e copiar a selección para o portarretallos
f .uno%3A%20Copia 2a . Copia a selección para o portarretallos
e .uno%3A%20Cole 73 . Insire o contido do portapapeis na localización do cursor, e substitúe calquera texto ou obxectos seleccionados
3e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcheckwarningdialog%2FCheckWarningDialog 0 
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fmove_down 4b Target cells are shifted downward when you insert cells from the clipboard.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Ftranspose 9d The rows of the range in the clipboard are pasted to become columns of the output range. The columns of the range in the clipboard are pasted to become rows.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fdivide 4c Divides the values in the target cells by the values in the clipboard cells.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fmultiply 51 Multiplies the values in the clipboard cells with the values in the target cells.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fsubtract 50 Subtracts the values in the clipboard cells from the values in the target cells.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fmove_right 4f Target cells are shifted to the right when you insert cells from the clipboard.
16 .uno%3A%20PasteSpecial 55 . Insire o contido do portapapeis no ficheiro actual nun formato que pode especificar
1f cui%2Fui%2FPasteSpecial%2Ffonte 2b Presenta a fonte do contido do portapapeis.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Flist 83 Select a format for the clipboard contents that you want to paste. The available format depends on the copied or cut source format.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Ftext 1e Inserts cells containing text.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fskip_empty e3 Empty cells from the clipboard do not replace target cells. If you use this option in conjunction with the "Multiply" or the "Divide" operation, the operation is not applied to the target cell of an empty cell in the clipboard.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fadd 9f Adds the values in the clipboard cells to the values in the target cells. Also, if the clipboard only contains comments, adds the comments to the target cells.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fpaste_all 53 Pastes all cell contents, comments, formats, and objects into the current document.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fnumbers 21 Inserts cells containing numbers.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fdatetime 2e Inserts cells containing date and time values.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Flink 109 Inserts the cell range as a link, so that changes made to the cells in the source file are updated in the target file. To ensure that changes made to empty cells in the source file are updated in the target file, ensure that the "Paste All" option is also selected.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fobjects 76 Inserts objects contained within the selected cell range. These can be OLE objects, chart objects, or drawing objects.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fformats 1f Inserts cell format attributes.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fno_shift 28 Inserted cells replace the target cells.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fformulas 22 Inserts cells containing formulae.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fcomments 2c Inserts comments that are attached to cells.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fnone 91 Does not apply an operation when you insert the cell range from the clipboard. The contents of the clipboard will replace existing cell contents.
d .uno%3ASelect 46 Selects the entire content of the current file, frame, or text object.
10 .uno%3ASelectAll 46 Selects the entire content of the current file, frame, or text object.
2b svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fcalcsearchin 97 Buscas para os caracteres que especifica en fórmulas e en valores fixos (non calculados). Por exemplo, podería buscar fórmulas que conteñen "suma".
23 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fcols 31 Enquisas de arriba abaixo a través das columnas.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fregexp 41 Allows you to search for advanced patterns using meta characters.
30 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Freplace_backwards 5d Search starts at the current cursor position and goes backwards to the beginning of the file.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsoundslike a5 Lets you specify the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. Select this checkbox, and then click the Sounds button to specify the search options.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fselection 29 Searches only the selected text or cells.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Flabel3 5f Shows more or fewer search options. Click this label again to hide the extended search options.
2d svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fmatchcharwidth 40 Distinguishes between half-width and full-width character forms.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Freplaceall 4f Replaces all of the occurrences of the text or format that you want to replace.
23 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Frows 3b Investigacións de esquerda a dereita a través das liñas.
2e svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsubstitu%C3%ADr 5c Substitúe o texto seleccionado ou o formato que buscou, e logo busca a próxima aparición.
13 .uno%3ASearchDialog 3a Finds or replaces text or formats in the current document.
2c svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsoundslikebtn 43 Sets the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text.
f .uno%3AFindText 50 Type the text to search in the current document. Press Enter to search the text.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsearchlist 50 Enter the text that you want to find, or select a previous search from the list.
f .uno%3AUpSearch 3e Prema para buscar a seguinte ocorrencia no sentido ascendente.
2a svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Freplacelist 66 Introduza o texto de substitución ou seleccione un texto de substitución recente ou estilo da lista.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fbacksearch 6b Finds and selects the previous occurrence of the text or format that you are searching for in the document.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fmatchcase 66 Matches the exact character provided in the Find box without considering any alternative case matches.
2e svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsearchformatted 34 Includes number formatting characters in the search.
27 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fnoformat 70 Click in the Find or the Replace box, and then click this button to remove the search criteria based on formats.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Flayout c4 Searches for text formatted with the style that you specify. Select this checkbox, and then select a style from the Find list. To specify a replacement style, select a style from the Replace list.
11 .uno%3ADownSearch 3f Prema para buscar a seguinte ocorrencia no sentido descendente.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsearch 67 Finds and selects the next occurrence of the text or format that you are searching for in the document.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsearchall 32 Aliña o contido da cela á esquerda e á dereita.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fwholewords 48 Searches for whole words or cells that are identical to the search text.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fallsheets 4c Buscas a través de todas as follas no ficheiro de folla de cálculo actual.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2Frelaxbox 64 Busca por un termo que combina con calquera combinación da configuración de busca de similaridade.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2Fshorterfld 61 Introduza o número de caracteres por que unha palabra pode ser máis curto que o termo de busca.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2Flongerfld 77 Introduza o número máximo de caracteres polo cal unha palabra pode superar o número de caracteres no termo de busca.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2Fotherfld 48 Enter the number of characters in the search term that can be exchanged.
2c svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsimilaritybtn 2a Set the options for the similarity search.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsimilarity 8c Find terms that are similar to the Find text. Select this checkbox, and then click the Similarities button to define the similarity options.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fsearchattrdialog%2FSearchAttrDialog 14e Choose the text attributes that you want to search for. For example, if you select the Outline attribute, then all characters formatted manually with an Outline effect are found. If you also want to find characters with an Outline effect as part of a style, then select Including styles in the Other Options section, before searching.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fformat 84 Atopa recursos de formato de texto específicos, tales como tipo de letra, efectos de fonte e as características do fluxo de texto.
10 HID_GLBLTREE_DEL 45 Deletes the selection from the Navigator list and the master document
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fmovedown 3c Moves the selection down one position in the Navigator list.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fmoveup 3a Moves the selection up one position in the Navigator list.
1b HID_NAVIGATOR_GLOB_TREELIST b8 The Navigator lists the main components of the master document. If you rest the mouse pointer over a name of a sub-document in the list, the full path of the sub-document is displayed.
19 HID_GLBLTREE_INS_NEW_FILE 27 Creates and inserts a new sub-document.
11 HID_GLBLTREE_EDIT b8 Edit the contents of the component selected in the Navigator list. If the selection is a file, the file is opened for editing. If the selection is an index, the Index dialog is opened.
14 HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_SEL 26 Updates the contents of the selection.
14 HID_GLBLTREE_INS_IDX 29 Insire un índice no documento principal.
13 HID_GLBLTREE_UPDATE 36 Click and choose the contents that you want to update.
14 HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_IDX 14 Updates all indexes.
15 HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_LINK 12 Updates all links.
13 HID_GLBLTREEUPD_ALL 15 Updates all contents.
15 HID_GLBLTREE_INS_FILE 3c Inserts one or more existing files into the master document.
16 HID_GLBLTREE_EDIT_LINK 32 Changes the link properties for the selected file.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnavigatorpanel%2Fsave a7 Saves a copy of the contents of the linked files in the master document. This ensures that the current contents are available when the linked files cannot be accessed.
15 HID_GLBLTREE_INS_TEXT 90 Inserts a new paragraph in the master document where you can enter text. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.
3d SO3%3A%20pulsador%3A%20MD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3A%20PB_UPDATE_NOW 84 . Actualiza a ligazón seleccionada para que a versión máis recentemente gardada do ficheiro vinculado aparece no documento actual
3d SO3%3A%20pulsador%3A%20MD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3A%20PB_BREAK_LINK 99 rompe o vínculo entre o ficheiro de orixe eo documento actual. O recentemente actualizado contido do ficheiro de orixe se manteñen no documento actual.
40 SO3%3A%20pulsador%3A%20MD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3A%20PB_CHANGE_SOURCE 37 . Cambie o ficheiro de orixe para o enlace seleccionado
23 cui%2Fui%2Fbaselinksdialog%2FMANUAL 37 Only updates the link when you click the Update button.
3f SO3%3A%20RadioButton%3A%20MD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3A%20RB_AUTOMATIC ee actualiza automaticamente o contido da ligazón cando abrir o ficheiro. Todas as modificacións feitas no ficheiro de orixe se amosan no arquivo que contén a ligazón. Arquivos gráficos vinculados só poden ser actualizados manualmente.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fbaselinksdialog%2FTB_LINKS 82 Prema dúas veces nunha ligazón da lista para abrir un diálogo de ficheiro onde pode seleccionar outro obxecto para este enlace.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fbaselinksdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 13b You can change or break each link to external files in the current document. You can also update the content of the current file to the most recently saved version of linked external file. This command does not apply to hyperlinks, and is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fbaselinksdialog%2FBaseLinksDialog 13b You can change or break each link to external files in the current document. You can also update the content of the current file to the most recently saved version of linked external file. This command does not apply to hyperlinks, and is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
12 .uno%3AManageLinks 13b You can change or break each link to external files in the current document. You can also update the content of the current file to the most recently saved version of linked external file. This command does not apply to hyperlinks, and is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
10 .uno%3AEditLinks 13b You can change or break each link to external files in the current document. You can also update the content of the current file to the most recently saved version of linked external file. This command does not apply to hyperlinks, and is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
11 .uno%3ALinkDialog 13b You can change or break each link to external files in the current document. You can also update the content of the current file to the most recently saved version of linked external file. This command does not apply to hyperlinks, and is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Flinkeditdialog%2Fcategory 80 Lists the section or object that the link refers to in the source file. If you want, you can enter a new section or object here.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Flinkeditdialog%2Ffile 61 Path to the source file. Relative paths must be expressed by full URI, for example, with file://.
1f sfx%2Fui%2Flinkeditdialog%2Fapp 6e Lists the application that last saved the source file. %PRODUCTNAME applications have the server name soffice.
12 .uno%3AObjectMenue 5b Lets you edit a selected OLE object that you inserted from the Insert - OLE Object submenu.
2e cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fdefaultheight 25 Applies the default vertical spacing.
27 cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fheight dc Enter the amount of vertical space that you want to leave between the top and bottom edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents.
26 cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fwidth e2 Enter the amount of horizontal space that you want to leave between the right and the left edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents.
2a cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fborderoff 27 Hides the border of the floating frame.
2e cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fscrollbarauto 59 Mark this option if the currently active floating frame can have a scrollbar when needed.
2d cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fdefaultwidth 27 Applies the default horizontal spacing.
2d cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fscrollbaroff 2b Hides the scrollbar for the floating frame.
2c cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fscrollbaron 2e Displays the scrollbar for the floating frame.
2d cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fbuttonbrowse 5d Locate the file that you want to display in the selected floating frame, and then click Open.
27 cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fedname 79 Enter a name for the floating frame. The name cannot contain spaces, special characters, or begin with an underscore (_).
29 cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fborderon 2a Displays the border of the floating frame.
26 cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2Fedurl aa Enter the path and the name of the file that you want to display in the floating frame. You can also click the Browse button and locate the file that you want to display.
3a cui%2Fui%2Finsertfloatingframe%2FInsertFloatingFrameDialog a9 Changes the properties of the selected floating frame. Floating frames work best when they contain an html document, and when they are inserted in another html document.
1c svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2Ftext 59 Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.
1b svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2Furl 55 Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot.
21 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_MACRO 53 Lets you assign a macro that runs when you click the selected hotspot in a browser.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FImapDialog 93 Allows you to attach URLs to specific areas, called hotspots, on a graphic or a group of graphics. An image map is a group of one or more hotspots.
21 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_APPLY 33 Applies the changes that you made to the image map.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_PROPERTY 3c Allows you to define the properties of the selected hotspot.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_OPEN 5b Loads an existing image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_SELECT 2f Selects a hotspot in the image map for editing.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_SAVEAS 53 Saves the image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_RECT bf Draws a rectangular hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text Alternative for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
21 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2Fcontainer 44 Displays the image map, so that you can click and edit the hotspots.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_CIRCLE bf Draws an elliptical hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text Alternative for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_ACTIVE 5e Disables or enables the hyperlink for the selected hotspot. A disabled hotspot is transparent.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_POLY 1c7 Draws a polygonal hotspot in the graphic. Click this icon, drag in the graphic, and then click to define one side of the polygon. Move to where you want to place the end of the next side, and then click. Repeat until you have drawn all of the sides of the polygon. When you are finished, double-click to close the polygon. After, you can enter the Address and the Text Alternative for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_FREEPOLY 12e Draws a hotspot that is based on a freeform polygon. Click this icon and move to where you want to draw the hotspot. Drag a freeform line and release to close the shape. After, you can enter the Address and the Text Alternative for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_POLYEDIT 4f Lets you change the shape of the selected hotspot by editing the anchor points.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_POLYMOVE 43 Lets you move the individual anchor points of the selected hotspot.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_POLYDELETE 22 Deletes the selected anchor point.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fimapdialog%2FTBI_POLYINSERT 43 Adds an anchor point where you click on the outline of the hotspot.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2FdescTV 32 Introduza unha descrición para o punto de acceso.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2FnameEntry 1f Introduza un nome para a imaxe.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2Ftextentry 59 Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2Furlentry 55 Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2FframeCB a1 Introduza o nome do marco de destino que quere abrir o URL. Tamén pode seleccionar un nome de marco estándar que é recoñecido por todos os navegadores lista.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2FIMapDialog 39 Lista as propiedades para o punto de acceso seleccionado.
12 .uno%3AChangesMenu 50 Lista os comandos que están dispoñibles para controlar cambios no seu arquivo.
16 .uno%3ATraceChangeMode 4b Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date.
13 .uno%3ATrackChanges 4b Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date.
1d .uno%3AProtectTraceChangeMode 87 Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password.
12 SC_HID_CHG_PROTECT 87 Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password.
37 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fshowchangesdialog%2Fshowrejected 2e Shows or hides the changes that were rejected.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fshowchangesdialog%2Fshowchanges 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
12 .uno%3AShowChanges 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
37 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fshowchangesdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
3c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fshowchangesdialog%2FShowChangesDialog 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
37 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fshowchangesdialog%2Fshowaccepted 2e Shows or hides the changes that were accepted.
19 .uno%3AShowTrackedChanges 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
19 cui%2Fui%2Fcomment%2Fedit 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fcomment%2F@@nowidget@@ 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fcomment%2FCommentDialog 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
14 .uno%3ACommentChange 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
1c .uno%3ACommentChangeTracking 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinecontrol%2Ftabcontrol 22 Accept or reject recorded changes.
13 SW_HID_REDLINE_CTRL 22 Accept or reject recorded changes.
35 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinecontrol%2Ftabcontrol%2F@@nowidget@@ 22 Accept or reject recorded changes.
1b SIDEBAR_SWMANAGECHANGESDECK 22 Accept or reject recorded changes.
14 .uno%3AAcceptChanges 22 Accept or reject recorded changes.
33 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fcalcposition 82 Sorts the list in a descending order according to the position of the changes in the document. This is the default sorting method.
33 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fwriteraction 2f Sorts the list according to the type of change.
30 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Facceptall 38 acepta todos os cambios e elimina o realce do documento.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fredlineviewpage%2FRedlineViewPage 28 Aceptar ou rexeitar cambios individuais.
31 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fcalcaction 31 Lists the changes that were made in the document.
2d svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Freject 59 Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
1a .uno%3ARejectTrackedChange 59 Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
2f svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fcalcdate 31 Lists the date and time that the change was made.
2f svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fcalcdesc 33 Lists the comments that are attached to the change.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fredlineviewpage%2Fchanges b0 Lists the changes that were recorded in the document. When you select an entry in the list, the change is highlighted in the document. To sort the list, click a column heading.
2f svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fcalcedit 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
31 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fwriterdate 2e Sorts the list according to the date and time.
31 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fcalcauthor 23 Lists the user who made the change.
2d svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Faccept 59 Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
33 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fwriterauthor 27 Sorts the list according to the author.
1a .uno%3AAcceptTrackedChange 59 Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
31 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fwriterdesc 4a Sorts the list according to the comments that are attached to the changes.
30 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Frejectall 40 Rexeita todas as modificacións e elimina o realce do documento.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fcommentedit 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsimplerefdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 9d Filters the list of changes according to the range of cells that you specify. To select a range of cells in your sheet, click the Set Reference button (...).
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsimplerefdialog%2FSimpleRefDialog 7a Seleccione o intervalo de celas que desexa usar como un filtro, e logo prema neste botón para volver á lista de filtros.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fcomment 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Frange 9d Filters the list of changes according to the range of cells that you specify. To select a range of cells in your sheet, click the Set Reference button (...).
26 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fendtime 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
30 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2FRedlineFilterPage 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fdate 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Frangeedit 9d Filters the list of changes according to the range of cells that you specify. To select a range of cells in your sheet, click the Set Reference button (...).
1b SVX_HID_REDLINE_CTRL_FILTER 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fdatecond 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fstartdate 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fstarttime 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fauthorlist 5e Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fenddate 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fstartclock 3e Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fendclock 3e Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fauthor 5e Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list.
18 .uno%3A%20MergeDocuments a8 Importacións cambios feitos en copias do mesmo documento ao documento orixinal. Os cambios feitos nas notas ao pé de páxina, cabeceiras, marcos e campos ignoraranse.
1a .uno%3A%20CompareDocuments 3d . Compara o documento actual con un documento que seleccionar
19 .uno%3ABib%2FInsertRecord 29 Insire un novo rexistro na táboa actual.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FDeleteRecord 16 Definir a resolución.
3c modules%2Fsbibliography%2Fui%2Fmappingdialog%2FMappingDialog b7 Seleccione o campo de datos que quere mapear a cadea Nome da columna . Para cambiar os campos de datos dispoñibles, seleccione unha fonte de datos diferente para a súa bibliografia.
14 .uno%3ABib%2FMapping bf Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record's Object bar.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FremoveFilter 58 Para mostrar todos os rexistros nunha táboa, prema no botón Restablecer Filtro  icona.
1b .uno%3ABib%2FstandardFilter 5e Utilice o filtro estándar para refinar e combinar as opcións de busca do filtro automático.
1a .uno%3A%20Bib%2FautoFilter 8b Long-clic para seleccionar o campo de datos que quere buscar a usar o termo que entrou Busca Key  caixa. Só pode buscar un campo de datos.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_URL_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_SERIES_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_SCHOOL_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_HOWPUBLISHED_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ISBN_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_AUTHORITYTYPE_POS 9f Seleccione o tipo de rexistro que quere crear. $[officename] insire un número na Introduza  columna do rexistro que corresponde ao tipo que seleccionar aquí.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_PAGES_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_YEAR_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
13 HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEW 29 Insire un rexistro novo na táboa actual.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEXT 22 Ir ao seguinte rexistro na táboa.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_ABSOLUTE 53 Introduza o número do rexistro que desexe exhibir e, a continuación, prema Intro.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_EDITION_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_AUTHOR_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
19 .uno%3A%20Bib%2Fsdbsource 3e Seleccione a fonte de datos para a base de datos bibliografía
13 .uno%3ABib%2Fsource 77 Lista as táboas dispoñibles na base de datos actual. Prema nun nome da lista para exhibir os rexistros para a táboa.
12 .uno%3ABib%2Fquery 17e Type the information that you want to search for, and then press Enter. To change the filter options for the search, long-click the AutoFilter icon, and then select a different data field. You can use wildcards such as % or * for any number of characters, and _ or ? for one character in your search. To display all of the records in the table, clear this box, and then press Enter.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_LAST 21 Ir ao último rexistro na táboa.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ANNOTE_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_IDENTIFIER_POS 6e Introduza un nome curto para o rexistro. O nome curto aparece na columna Identificador  na lista de rexistros.
3a modules%2Fsbibliography%2Fui%2Ftoolbar%2FTBC_BT_COL_ASSIGN 48 Insert, delete, edit, and organize records in the bibliography database.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_PUBLISHER_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_JOURNAL_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_CHAPTER_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
11 SID_FM_DELETEROWS 20 Exclúe o rexistro seleccionado.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_EDITOR_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_BOOKTITLE_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_INSTITUTION_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_PREV 22 Ir ao rexistro anterior na táboa.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ORGANIZATIONS_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_REPORTTYPE_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
19 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_FIRST 22 Ir ao primeiro rexistro na táboa.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_NOTE_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_TITLE_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ADDRESS_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_VOLUME_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_MONTH_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_NUMBER_POS 92 Introduza información adicional para o rexistro seleccionado. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir a información no campo correspondente na táboa.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2FZoomDialog 63 Opens the Zoom & View Layout dialog to let you set the zoom factor to display the current document.
1b svx%2Fui%2Fzoommenu%2Fwidth 6a Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 63 Opens the Zoom & View Layout dialog to let you set the zoom factor to display the current document.
b .uno%3AZoom 63 Opens the Zoom & View Layout dialog to let you set the zoom factor to display the current document.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Foptimal 64 Resizes the display to fit the width of the selected cell area at the moment the command is started.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fzoommenu%2F@@nowidget@@ 63 Opens the Zoom & View Layout dialog to let you set the zoom factor to display the current document.
1d svx%2Fui%2Fzoommenu%2Foptimal 64 Resizes the display to fit the width of the selected cell area at the moment the command is started.
1c cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Ffitw 6a Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Ffitwandh 6f Resizes the display to fit the width and height of the selected cell area at the moment the command is started.
19 svx%2Fui%2Fzoommenu%2F100 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
1a svx%2Fui%2Fzoommenu%2Fpage 6f Resizes the display to fit the width and height of the selected cell area at the moment the command is started.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2F100pc 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fzoomsb 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fvariable 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
19 .uno%3AFunctionBarVisible 20 Shows or hides the Standard bar.
15 .uno%3AToolBarVisible 1d Shows or hides the Tools bar.
17 .uno%3AStatusBarVisible 3f Shows or hides the Status bar at the bottom edge of the window.
15 .uno%3ATaskBarVisible 3f Shows or hides the Status bar at the bottom edge of the window.
15 HID_FULLSCREENTOOLBOX 76 In Writer and Calc, you can also use the shortcut keys Ctrl+Shift+J to switch between the normal and full screen mode.
11 .uno%3AFullScreen 89 Shows or hides the menus and toolbars in Writer or Calc. To exit the full screen mode, click the Full Screen button or press the Esc key.
14 HID_COLOR_CTL_COLORS 11f To change the fill color of an object in the current file, select the object and then click a color. To change the line color of the selected object, right-click a color. To change the color of text in a text object, double-click the text-object, select the text, and then click a color.
13 .uno%3AColorControl 8a Show or hide the Color bar. To modify or change the color table that is displayed, choose Format - Area, and then click on the Colors tab.
18 .cmd%3ARestoreVisibility db Escolla Ver - Barras de ferramentas - Restabelecer para restabelecer o comportamento sensíbel ao contexto das barras de ferramentas. Desta forma, xa será posíbel que se mostren automaticamente dependendo do contexto.
18 .uno%3AAvailableToolbars 3e Abre un submenú para mostrar e ocultar barras de ferramentas.
1a .uno%3ADeleteAllAnnotation 16 Definir a resolución.
13 .uno%3ADeleteAuthor 16 Definir a resolución.
14 .uno%3ADeleteComment 16 Definir a resolución.
17 .uno%3ADeleteAnnotation 16 Definir a resolución.
22 .uno%3ADeleteAllAnnotationByAuthor 16 Definir a resolución.
15 .uno%3AEditAnnotation 9e Insire un comentario arredor do texto, diapositiva de presentación, páxina de debuxo seleccionados ou na posición actual do cursor nunha folla de cálculo.
17 .uno%3AInsertAnnotation 9e Insire un comentario arredor do texto, diapositiva de presentación, páxina de debuxo seleccionados ou na posición actual do cursor nunha folla de cálculo.
e .uno%3A%20Scan 31 . Insire unha imaxe dixitalizada no seu documento
12 .uno%3ATwainSelect 28 Selecciona o escáner que quere empregar
14 .uno%3ATwainTransfer 85 Dixitalizar unha imaxe, e logo inserir o resultado no documento. O diálogo de dixitalización fornecida polo fabricante do escáner.
17 HID_CHARMAP_CTL_SHOWSET 4e Click the special character(s) that you want to insert, and then click Insert.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2Fsubsetlb 2c Select a Unicode block for the current font.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2F@@nowidget@@ 5a Allows a user to insert characters from the range of symbols found in the installed fonts.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2FSpecialCharactersDialog 5a Allows a user to insert characters from the range of symbols found in the installed fonts.
d .uno%3ABullet 5a Allows a user to insert characters from the range of symbols found in the installed fonts.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2Ffontlb 57 Seleccione unha fonte para mostrar os caracteres especiais que están asociados con el.
13 .uno%3AInsertSymbol 5a Allows a user to insert characters from the range of symbols found in the installed fonts.
16 HID_FILEDLG_PREVIEW_CB 30 Displays a preview of the selected graphic file.
13 HID_FILEDLG_LINK_CB 2c Inserts the selected graphic file as a link.
14 .uno%3AInsertGraphic 4b Opens a file selection dialog to insert an image into the current document.
11 .uno%3AObjectMenu 67 Inserts an embedded or linked object into your document, including formulas, QR codes, and OLE objects.
22 cui%2Fui%2Finsertoleobject%2Furled 5e Enter the name of the file that you want to link or embed, or click Search to locate the file.
2b cui%2Fui%2Finsertoleobject%2Fcreatefromfile 34 Crea un obxecto OLE a partir dun ficheiro existente.
26 cui%2Fui%2Finsertoleobject%2Ftipo%20de 30 Seleccione o tipo de documento que desexa crear.
26 cui%2Fui%2Finsertoleobject%2Fcreatenew 44 Crea un novo obxecto OLE baseado no tipo de obxecto que seleccionar.
13 .uno%3AInsertObject 6c Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object.
27 cui%2Fui%2Finsertoleobject%2Flinktofile ae Activar esta opción para inserir o obxecto OLE como unha ligazón ao ficheiro orixinal. Se esta opción non está activada, o obxecto OLE será incorporado no seu documento.
23 cui%2Fui%2Finsertoleobject%2Furlbtn 4a Localice o ficheiro que quere inserir e, a continuación, prema en Abrir .
29 cui%2Fui%2Finsertoleobject%2F@@nowidget@@ 6c Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object.
32 cui%2Fui%2Finsertoleobject%2FInsertOLEObjectDialog 6c Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object.
1b .uno%3AInsertObjectStarMath 2c Inserts a formula into the current document.
11 .uno%3AInsertMath 2c Inserts a formula into the current document.
20 .uno%3AInsertObjectFloatingFrame 5f Insire unha nova capa no documento. Só é posíbel utilizar esta orde en Draw, non en Impress.
1c .uno%3AViewDataSourceBrowser 76 Lista as bases de datos que están rexistrados no %PRODUCTNAME e permite que administre o contido dos bancos de datos.
11 .uno%3ADataImport 76 Lista as bases de datos que están rexistrados no %PRODUCTNAME e permite que administre o contido dos bancos de datos.
12 .uno%3AGraphicMenu 56 The submenu presents various sources that an image, audio or video can be insert from.
1d .uno%3AStandardTextAttributes 2d Removes direct formatting from the selection.
11 .uno%3ASetDefault 2d Removes direct formatting from the selection.
16 .uno%3AResetAttributes 2d Removes direct formatting from the selection.
14 .uno%3A%20FontDialog 4d . Cambia a fonte ea formato do tipo de letra para os caracteres seleccionados
23 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctllanglb ba Define o idioma que o verificador ortográfico emprega para o texto seleccionado ou o texto que escribe. Módulos de idiomas dispoñibles teñen unha marca de verificación diante deles.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlsizelb 7f Introduza ou seleccione o tamaño da fonte que quere aplicar. Para fontes escalabades, tamén se pode inserir valores decimais.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlstylelb 28 Seleccione o formato que desexa aplicar.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlfontnamelb 5c Introduza o nome dunha fonte instalada que quere utilizar ou seleccione unha fonte da lista.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2FCharNamePage 31 Especifique o formato ea fonte que quere aplicar.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fpositionlb 2d Especifique onde amosar as marcas de énfase.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Femphasislb 59 Escolla un personaxe para mostrar máis ou menos toda a extensión do texto seleccionado.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2FEffectsPage 2f Especifique os efectos de fonte que quere usar.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Funderlinelb 8a Seleccione o estilo de subliñado que desexa aplicar. Para aplicar o subliñado só as palabras, seleccione a palabras individuais  caixa.
c .uno%3AColor cf Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar.
21 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fshadowcb 4e Engade unha sombra que lanza abaixo e á dereita dos caracteres seleccionados.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Foverlinelb 86 Seleccione o estilo overlining que quere aplicar. Para aplicar o overlining só as palabras, seleccione a caixa palabras individuais .
10 .uno%3AFontColor cf Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar.
2a cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Findividualwordscb 40 Aplica o efecto seleccionado só a palabras e ignora os espazos.
28 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Foverlinecolorlb 23 Seleccione a cor para o overlining.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Ffontcolorlb 96 Sets the color for the selected text. If you select Automatic, the text color is set to black for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fstrikeoutlb 3a Seleccione un estilo de tachado para o texto seleccionado.
29 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Funderlinecolorlb 23 Seleccione a cor para o subliñado.
21 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Frelieflb e1 Select a relief effect to apply to the selected text. The embossed relief makes the characters appear as if they are raised above the page. The engraved relief makes the characters appear as if they are pressed into the page.
22 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Feffectslb 31 Seleccione os efectos de fonte que quere aplicar.
22 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Foutlinecb 5d Mostra o contorno dos caracteres seleccionados. Este efecto non funciona con todas as fontes.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fborrar 29 Exclúe o formato numérico seleccionado.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Feditar 38 Engade un comentario ao formato de número seleccionado.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fengadir 56 Engade o código de formato de número que entrou na categoría definida polo usuario.
1e .uno%3ATableNumberFormatDialog 38 Specify the formatting options for the selected cell(s).
2c cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fengineering 56 With scientific format, Engineering notation ensures that exponent is a multiple of 3.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fcategorylb 56 Select a category from the list, and then select a formatting style in the Format box.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fdecimalsed 3b Introduza o número de lugares decimais que desexe mostrar.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fformatlb 4a Select how you want the contents of the selected cell(s)  to be displayed.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fcurrencylb 7b Seleccione unha moeda, e despois a carón da parte superior da Formato  lista para ver as opcións de formato para a moeda.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fnegnumred 32 Changes the font color of negative numbers to red.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fcomentou 58 Introduza un comentario para o formato numérico seleccionado e prema fóra desta caixa.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fthousands 6a Inserts a separator between thousands. The type of separator that is used depends on your locale settings.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fdenominatored 5e With fraction format, enter the number of places for the denominator that you want to display.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fleadzerosed 48 Introduza o número máximo de ceros para amosar diante da casa decimal.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fsourceformat 57 Usa o mesmo formato de número como as células que conteñen os datos para a gráfica.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Flanguagelb 36 Specifies the language setting for the selected cells.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fformatted 5c Displays the number format code for the selected format. You can also enter a custom format.
e .uno%3ASpacing 42 Specifies the spacing between the characters of the selected text.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fkerningsb 42 Specifies the spacing between the characters of the selected text.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fscalewidthsb 65 Introduza a porcentaxe do ancho da fonte pola que horizontal tramo ou comprimir o texto seleccionado.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fraiselowersb 96 Introduza o valor polo cal desexa aumentar ou diminuír o texto seleccionado en relación á liña de base. Cen por cento equivale á altura da fonte.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fsubscrito 64 Reduce o tamaño do tipo de letra do texto seleccionado e descende o texto debaixo da liña de base.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fnohyphenation 5e It prevents hyphenation of the selected word or words in a paragraph hyphenated automatically.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fautomatic 74 Define automaticamente o valor polo cal o texto seleccionado é aumentado ou reducido en relación á liña de base.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fnormal 2b Elimina o formato sobrescrito ou subscrito.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fpairkerning 61 Axustar automaticamente o espazamento entre caracteres para combinacións de letras específicas.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Ffontsizesb 5b Introduza o valor polo cal desexa reducir o tamaño do tipo de letra do texto seleccionado.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fsobrescrito 62 Reduce o tamaño do tipo de letra do texto seleccionado e eleva o texto por riba da liña de base.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2FPositionPage 47 Especifique a posición, escala, rotación e espazamento de caracteres.
24 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2Fendbracket 8f Seleccione o personaxe para definir o fin da área de liña dupla. Se quere escoller un personaxe personalizado, seleccione Outros Personaxes .
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2Fstartbracket 92 Seleccione o personaxe para definir o inicio da área de liña dupla. Se quere escoller un personaxe personalizado, seleccione Outros Personaxes .
22 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2Ftwolines 4f Permite escribir en liñas duplas na área que seleccionou no documento actual.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2F@@nowidget@@ 8a Define as opcións para a liña dobre escrita para idiomas asiáticos. Seleccione os caracteres no seu texto, e logo escolla este comando.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2FTwoLinesPage 8a Define as opcións para a liña dobre escrita para idiomas asiáticos. Seleccione os caracteres no seu texto, e logo escolla este comando.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fasiantypography%2FcheckApplySpacing 38 Inserts a space between ideographic and alphabetic text.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fasiantypography%2FcheckHangPunct 86 Evita que comas e puntos de quebra da liña. Pola contra, estes caracteres son engadidas ó final da liña, mesmo na marxe da páxina.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fasiantypography%2FcheckForbidList 89 Prevents the characters in the list from starting or ending a line. The characters are relocated to either the previous or the next line.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fasiantypography%2F@@nowidget@@ fb Set the typographic options for cells or paragraphs in Asian language files. To enable Asian language support, choose Languages and Locales - General in the Options dialog box, and then select the Asian box in the Default Languages for Documents area.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fasiantypography%2FAsianTypography fb Set the typographic options for cells or paragraphs in Asian language files. To enable Asian language support, choose Languages and Locales - General in the Options dialog box, and then select the Asian box in the Default Languages for Documents area.
16 .uno%3AParagraphDialog 4c Modifies the format of the current paragraph, such as indents and alignment.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FcomboLB_LINEDIST 53 Especifique a cantidade de espazo a deixar entre as liñas de texto nun parágrafo.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FcheckCB_CONTEXTUALSPACING 9b Fai calquera espazo especificado antes ou despois deste apartado non se aplican cando os números anteriores e seguintes son do mesmo estilo de parágrafo.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_BOTTOMDIST 57 Insire a cantidade de espazo que quere deixar por baixo do parágrafo (s) seleccionado.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_LINEDISTMETRIC 42 Introduza o valor a ser empregado para o espazamento entre liñas.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_TOPDIST 55 Insire a cantidade de espazo que desexa deixar enriba do parágrafo (s) seleccionado.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FcheckCB_AUTO 80 Automatically indents a paragraph according to the font size and the line spacing. The setting in the First Line box is ignored.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_FLINEINDENT 12a Indents the first line of a paragraph by the amount that you enter. To create a hanging indent enter a positive value for "Before text" and a negative value for "First line". To indent the first line of a paragraph that uses numbering or bullets, choose "Format - Bullets and Numbering - Position".
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_RIGHTINDENT 196 Insire a cantidade de espazo que quere recuar o parágrafo a partir da marxe da páxina. Se desexa que o parágrafo se estenda á marxe da páxina, insira un número negativo. En idiomas de esquerda a dereita, o bordo dereita do parágrafo recuada en relación á marxe dereita da páxina. En idiomas da dereita á esquerda, a marxe esquerda do parágrafo recuada en relación á marxe esquerda da páxina.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_LEFTINDENT 19f Insire a cantidade de espazo que quere recuar o parágrafo a partir da marxe da páxina. Se desexa que o parágrafo se estenda á marxe da páxina, insira un número negativo. En idiomas de esquerda a dereita, a marxe esquerda do parágrafo recuada en relación á marxe esquerda da páxina. En idiomas escritos da dereita á esquerda, o bordo dereita do parágrafo recuada en relación á marxe dereita da páxina.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FParaIndentSpacing 41 Define a retirada e as opcións de espazamento para o parágrafo.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FbuttonBTN_DELALL 9f Elimina todas as paradas de tabulación que marcou en Posición . Conxuntos esquerda  guía para en intervalos regulares como paradas de tabulación estándar.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FED_TABPOS fa Select a tab stop type, enter a new measurement, and then click New. If you want, you can also specify the measurement units to use for the tab (cm for centimeter, or " for inches). Existing tabs to the left of the first tab that you set are removed.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_NO 66 Insire sen caracteres de recheo, ou elimina existente caracteres de recheo á esquerda da tabulación.
3c cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_UNDERSCORE 54 Debuxa unha liña para encher o espazo baleiro á esquerda da parada de tabulación.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FbuttonBTN_NEW 35 Engade a tabulación que marcou ao parágrafo actual.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_TABTYPE_RIGHT 67 aliñar a bordo dereita do texto á parada de tabulación e estende o texto á esquerda da tabulación.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_TABTYPE_LEFT 5d aliñar a bordo esquerda do texto á parada de tabulación e estende o texto cara á dereita.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_TABTYPE_DECIMAL 65 aliñar o punto decimal dun número ao centro da parada de tabulación eo texto á esquerda da guía.
37 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_OTHER 67 Permite que especifique un carácter para encher o espazo baleiro á esquerda da parada de tabulación.
37 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_TABTYPE_CENTER 33 aliñar o centro do texto á parada de tabulación.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FentryED_TABTYPE_DECCHAR 5c Introduza un personaxe que quere que a tabulación decimal para usar como separador decimal.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_POINTS 47 Enche o espazo baleiro á esquerda da parada de tabulación con puntos.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FParagraphTabsPage 47 Permite definir a posición dunha parada de tabulación nun parágrafo.
3a cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_DASHLINE 47 Enche o espazo baleiro á esquerda da parada de tabulación con trazos.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fshadows 38 Prema nun estilo de sombra para os bordos seleccionados.
1c cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fsync 53 Applies the same padding setting to all four borders when you enter a new distance.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fdistancemf 1e Introduza a largura da sombra.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Ftopmf 55 Introduza a distancia que quere ter entre o bordo superior e o contido da selección.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Frightmf 54 Introduza a distancia que quere ter entre o bordo dereito e o contido da selección.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fleftmf 55 Introduza a distancia que quere ter entre o bordo esquerdo e o contido da selección.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fshadowcolorlb 22 Seleccione unha cor para a sombra.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Flinecolorlb 4b Seleccione a cor de liña que desexa utilizar para os bordos seleccionados.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Flinestylelb 62 Prema no estilo de bordo que desexa aplicar. O estilo aplícase aos bordos seleccionados na vista.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fbottommf 55 Introduza a distancia que quere ter entre o bordo inferior e o contido da selección.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fpresets 37 Seleccione un estilo de bordo predefinido para aplicar.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2FBorderPage 4d Define as opcións de bordo para os obxectos seleccionados en Writer ou Calc.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Ftextdirectionlb b9 Especifique a dirección do texto dun parágrafo que usa o esquema de texto complexo (CTL). Esta función só está dispoñible se o soporte de esquema de texto complexo está activado.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FcheckCB_SNAP 67 Aligns the paragraph to a text grid. To activate the text grid, choose Format - Page Style - Text Grid.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FradioBTN_JUSTIFYALIGN 3f aliñar o parágrafo á esquerda e á marxe dereita da páxina.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FradioBTN_CENTERALIGN 2c Centros de contido do parágrafo na páxina.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FradioBTN_RIGHTALIGN 31 aliñar o parágrafo á marxe dereita da páxina.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FradioBTN_LEFTALIGN 32 aliñar o parágrafo á marxe esquerda da páxina.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FcomboLB_VERTALIGN 9d Seleccione unha opción de aliñamento para caracteres de grandes dimensións ou subdimensionados no parágrafo en relación ao resto do texto no parágrafo.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FParaAlignPage 46 Define o aliñamento do parágrafo en relación ás marxes da páxina.
1c cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Faltura 30 Insire unha altura para o gráfico seleccionado.
1b cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fancho 29 Insire un ancho ao gráfico seleccionado.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fheightzoom 41 Introduza a altura da gráfica seleccionado como unha porcentaxe.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fwidthzoom 46 Introduza a largura para a gráfica seleccionado como unha porcentaxe.
1c cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fbottom 18c Se o Manter escala  opción for seleccionada, introduza un valor positivo para recortar a parte inferior da gráfica, é dicir, un valor negativo para engadir branco espazo debaixo da gráfica. Se o Manter tamaño da imaxe  opción for seleccionada, introduza un valor positivo para aumentar a escala vertical da gráfica, é dicir, un valor negativo para diminuír a escala vertical da gráfica.
19 cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Ftop 188 Se o Manter escala opción  for seleccionado, introduza un valor positivo para recortar a parte superior do gráfico, ou un valor negativo para engadir branco espazo por enriba da gráfica. Se o Manter tamaño da imaxe  opción for seleccionada, introduza un valor positivo para aumentar a escala vertical da gráfica, é dicir, un valor negativo para diminuír a escala vertical da gráfica.
1a cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fleft 195 O Manter escala  opción for seleccionada, introduza un valor positivo para recortar o bordo esquerda da gráfica, é dicir, un valor negativo para engadir un espazo baleiro á esquerda da gráfica. Se o Manter tamaño da imaxe  opción for seleccionada, introduza un valor positivo para aumentar a escala horizontal da gráfica, é dicir, un valor negativo para diminuír a escala horizontal da gráfica.
1b cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fright 194 Se o Manter escala opción for seleccionada, introduza un valor positivo para recortar o bordo dereita da gráfica, é dicir, un valor negativo para engadir un espazo baleiro á dereita da gráfica. Se o Manter tamaño da imaxe opción for seleccionada, introduza un valor positivo para aumentar a escala horizontal da gráfica, é dicir, un valor negativo para diminuír a escala horizontal da gráfica.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fkeepsize 12b Mantén o tamaño orixinal da gráfica cando recorta, polo que só a dimensión dos cambios gráficas. Para reducir a escala da gráfica, seleccione esta opción e introduza valores negativos nas caixas de cultivo. Para aumentar a escala da gráfica, escriba valores positivos nas caixas de cultivo.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Fkeepscale 62 Mantén a escala orixinal da gráfica cando recorta, polo que só o tamaño dos cambios gráficas.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2Forigsize 38 Devolve a gráfica seleccionado ao seu tamaño orixinal.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2F@@nowidget@@ 64 Trims ou muda o tamaño o gráfico seleccionado. Tamén pode dar a gráfica ao seu tamaño orixinal.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fcroppage%2FCropPage 64 Trims ou muda o tamaño o gráfico seleccionado. Tamén pode dar a gráfica ao seu tamaño orixinal.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fdesc 36 Describe o formatado relevante usado no estilo actual.
2b sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fcategor%C3%ADa 85 Mostra a categoría para o estilo actual. Se está creando ou modificando un novo estilo, seleccione 'Estilo Personalizado "na lista.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fname a7 Displays the name of the selected style. If you are creating or modifying a custom style, enter a name for the style. You cannot change the name of a predefined style.
27 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Flinkedwith 89 Select an existing style (or - None -) to provide its definitions to the current style. Use the other tabs to modify the inherited style.
2c sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2FManageStylePage 2e Define as opcións para o estilo seleccionado.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcheckbuttonVert 31 Centers the cells vertically on the printed page.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboRegisterStyle 32 Centros de células horizontal na páxina impresa.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcheckRegisterTrue 32 Centros de células horizontal na páxina impresa.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboTextFlowBox 40 Select the text direction that you want to use in your document.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboPageLayout 60 Specify whether the current style should show odd pages, even pages, or both odd and even pages.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboPageFormat 80 Select a predefined paper size, or create a custom format by entering the dimensions for the paper in the Height and Widthboxes.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinWidth 73 Mostra a largura do formato de papel seleccionado. Para axustar un formato personalizado, introduza un ancho aquí.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcheckbuttonHorz 33 Centers the cells horizontally on the printed page.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinHeight 75 Mostra a altura do formato de papel seleccionado. Para axustar un formato personalizado, introduza unha altura aquí.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FPageFormatPage 81 Permite definir esquemas de páxina para documentos únicos e de varias páxinas, así como unha numeración e formatos de papel.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FradiobuttonLandscape 47 Mostra e imprime o documento actual co papel orientado horizontalmente.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboLayoutFormat 5f Seleccione o formato de numeración de páxina que desexa usar para o estilo de páxina actual.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FradiobuttonPortrait 45 Mostra e imprime o documento actual co papel orientado verticalmente.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinMargLeft e7 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the inner text margin and the inner edge of the page.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinMargTop 5e Insire a cantidade de espazo a deixar entre o bordo superior da páxina eo texto do documento.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboPaperTray fb Seleccione a orixe do papel á impresora. Se quere, pode asignar diferentes bandexas de papel a diferentes estilos de páxina. Por exemplo, atribúa unha bandexa diferente ao estilo Primeira páxina e cargar a bandexa con papel timbre da súa empresa.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinMargBot 5e Insire a cantidade de espazo a deixar entre o bordo inferior da páxina eo texto do documento.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinMargRight e8 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the outer text margin and the outer edge of the page.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinMargGut e5 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left margin. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the inner page margin and the inner edge of the page.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FspinHeight 2e Introduza a altura que quere para a cabeceira.
2f svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckDynSpacing 7e Substitúe o Espazamento  definición, e permite que a cabeceira para ampliar a área entre a cabeceira eo texto do documento.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FspinSpacing 7a Insire a cantidade de espazo que quere manter entre o bordo inferior da cabeceira eo bordo superior do texto do documento.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FspinMargRight 65 Insire a cantidade de espazo a deixar entre o bordo dereita da páxina eo bordo dereita da cabeceira.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FspinMargLeft 67 Insire a cantidade de espazo a deixar entre o bordo esquerdo da páxina eo bordo esquerda da cabeceira.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckSameFP 3c Primeiro e mesmo/páxinas impares comparten o mesmo contido.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckAutofit 4d axusta automaticamente a altura da cabeceira para caber o contido que entrar.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckSameLR 86 Even and odd pages share the same content. To assign a different header to even and odd pages, clear this option, and then click Edit.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckHeaderOn 28 Adds a header to the current page style.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FbuttonEdit 18 Add or edit header text.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FbuttonMore 4c Define un bordo, unha cor de fondo, ou un patrón de fondo para a cabeceira.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FHFormatPage 78 Adds a header to the current page style. A header is an area in the top page margin, where you can add text or graphics.
1b SVX_HID_FOOTER_CHECKAUTOFIT 4c Automatically adjusts the height of the footer to fit the content you enter.
19 SVX_HID_FOOTER_SPINHEIGHT 29 Enter the height you want for the footer.
1a SVX_HID_FOOTER_SPINSPACING 80 Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the document text and the top edge of the footer.
19 SVX_HID_FOOTER_BUTTONMORE 4d Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the footer.
1b SVX_HID_FOOTER_SPINMARGLEFT 65 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the footer.
15 SC_HID_SC_FOOTER_EDIT 25 Engadir ou editar o texto de rodapé.
1c SVX_HID_FOOTER_SPINMARGRIGHT 67 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the footer.
1a SVX_HID_FOOTER_CHECKSAMEFP 30 First and even/odd pages share the same content.
1a SVX_HID_FOOTER_CHECKSAMELR 86 Even and odd pages share the same content. To assign a different footer to even and odd pages, clear this option, and then click Edit.
12 HID_SC_FOOTER_EDIT 18 Add or edit footer text.
1e SVX_HID_FOOTER_CHECKDYNSPACING 71 Overrides the Spacing setting and allows the footer to expand into the area between the footer and document text.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckFooterOn 28 Adds a footer to the current page style.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FFFormatPage 7b Adds a footer to the current page style. A footer is an area in the bottom page margin, where you can add text or graphics.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2Fstyles 5e Opens the Styles deck of the Sidebar where you can select a character style for the ruby text.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2Fstylelb 30 Seleccione un estilo de carácter ao texto Ruby.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2Fadjustlb 32 Select the horizontal alignment for the ruby text.
30 svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2Fpositionlb 2a Seleccione onde quere poñer o texto Ruby.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FRight4ED 51 Introduza o texto que desexa usar como unha guía de pronuncia para o texto base.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FLeft4ED 7d Mostra o texto base que seleccionou no ficheiro actual. Se quere, pode modificar o texto base, inserindo un novo texto aquí.
11 .uno%3ARubyDialog 56 Allows you to add comments next to Asian characters to serve as a pronunciation guide.
38 .uno%3AAvailableToolbars%3FToolbar%3Astring=alignmentbar 36 Aliñar obxectos seleccionados con relación ao outro.
15 .uno%3AAlignFrameMenu 36 Aliñar obxectos seleccionados con relación ao outro.
10 .uno%3AAlignLeft a1 Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.
16 .uno%3AObjectAlignLeft a1 Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.
1c .uno%3AAlignHorizontalCenter a7 Horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page.
12 .uno%3AAlignCenter a7 Horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page.
11 .uno%3AAlignRight a4 Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Impress or Draw, the right edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
17 .uno%3AObjectAlignRight a4 Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Impress or Draw, the right edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
f .uno%3AAlignTop ab Vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin.
e .uno%3AAlignUp ab Vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin.
15 .uno%3ACommonAlignTop 40 Vertically aligns the selected text to the top of the container.
1a .uno%3AAlignVerticalCenter a3 Vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the vertical center of the page.
12 .uno%3AAlignMiddle a3 Vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the vertical center of the page.
20 .uno%3ACommonAlignVerticalCenter 36 Vertically centers the selected text in the container.
12 .uno%3AAlignBottom c8 Aliñar verticalmente os bordos inferiores dos obxectos seleccionados. Se só un obxecto é seleccionado no Draw ou Impress, o bordo inferior do obxecto está vencellada coa marxe inferior da páxina.
10 .uno%3AAlignDown c8 Aliñar verticalmente os bordos inferiores dos obxectos seleccionados. Se só un obxecto é seleccionado no Draw ou Impress, o bordo inferior do obxecto está vencellada coa marxe inferior da páxina.
18 .uno%3ACommonAlignBottom 43 Vertically aligns the selected text to the bottom of the container.
f .uno%3ALeftPara 3e Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the container left margin.
10 .uno%3ARightPara 3f Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the container right margin.
11 .uno%3ACenterPara 3f Centers the selected paragraph(s) on the surrounding container.
12 .uno%3AJustifyPara d2 Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left and the right container margins. If you want, you can also specify the alignment options for the last line of a paragraph by choosing Format - Paragraph - Alignment.
11 .uno%3AMergeCells 7c Combines the contents of the selected cells into a single cell, retaining the formatting of the first cell in the selection.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fsplitcellsdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 91 Divides previously merged cells back to the original cells. If the original cells had content that was kept when merged that content is restored.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fsplitcellsdialog%2FSplitCellsDialog 91 Divides previously merged cells back to the original cells. If the original cells had content that was kept when merged that content is restored.
10 .uno%3ASplitCell 91 Divides previously merged cells back to the original cells. If the original cells had content that was kept when merged that content is restored.
15 .uno%3A%20CellVertTop 35 . Aliñar o contido da cela á beira superior da cela
15 .uno%3ACellVertCenter 44 Reescala o texto da gráfica cando lle cambie o tamaño da gráfica.
18 .uno%3A%20CellVertBottom 35 . Aliñar o contido da cela á beira inferior da cela
16 .uno%3A%20Negri%C3%B1a ae Fai o texto seleccionado en negra. Se o cursor está nunha palabra, a palabra está feita en negra. Se a selección ou a palabra xa está en negra, o formato será eliminada.
11 .uno%3A%20Cursiva b3 Fai o cursiva o texto seleccionado. Se o cursor está nunha palabra, a palabra está feita en cursiva. Se a selección ou a palabra xa está en cursiva, o formato será eliminada.
16 .uno%3AUnderlineDouble 2c Underlines the selected text with two lines.
10 .uno%3AUnderline 30 Underlines the selected text with a single line.
10 .uno%3AStrikeout 5e Debuxa unha liña ao longo do texto seleccionado ou se o cursor está nunha palabra, a palabra
13 .uno%3A%20sombreado 5d Engade unha sombra ao texto seleccionado ou se o cursor está nunha palabra, a toda a palabra
15 .uno%3ADistributeRows 5f Adjust the height of the selected rows to match the height of the tallest row in the selection.
15 .uno%3A%20SuperScript 63 . Reduce o tamaño do tipo de letra do texto seleccionado e eleva o texto por riba da liña de base
13 .uno%3A%20SubScript 65 . Reduce o tamaño do tipo de letra do texto seleccionado e descende o texto debaixo da liña de base
12 .uno%3ALineSpacing 50 Indique  a cantidade de espazo a deixar entre as liñas de texto nun parágrafo.
11 .uno%3ASpacePara1 63 Aplica espazamento entre liñas simple ao parágrafo actual. Esta é a configuración por omisión.
12 .uno%3ASpacePara15 4d Define o espazamento entre liñas do parágrafo actual a unha e media liñas.
11 .uno%3ASpacePara2 46 Define o espazamento entre liñas do parágrafo actual a dúas liñas.
18 .uno%3ADistributeColumns 52 Adjust the width of selected table columns so that each column has the same width.
1f sfx%2Fui%2Fnewstyle%2Fstylename 25 Introduza un nome para o novo estilo.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fobjectnamedialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 50 Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fobjectnamedialog%2FObjectNameDialog 50 Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator.
1b SD_HID_SD_NAMEDIALOG_OBJECT 50 Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator.
13 .uno%3ARenameObject 6c . Atribúese un nome para o obxecto seleccionado, de modo que pode rapidamente atopar o obxecto no navegador
2d cui%2Fui%2Fobjecttitledescdialog%2Fdesc_entry 9d Enter a longer description of the object, especially if the object is too complex or contains too much detail to be described adequately with the short Text.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fobjecttitledescdialog%2Fobject_title_entry ab Enter a short description of the essential details of the selected object for a person who cannot see the object. This text is available for use by assistive technologies.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fobjecttitledescdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ de Assigns a text and an alt text to the selected object. These texts are available as alternative tags in your document for use by accessibility tools. They are also available as tags for images when you export the document.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fobjecttitledescdialog%2FObjectTitleDescDialog de Assigns a text and an alt text to the selected object. These texts are available as alternative tags in your document for use by accessibility tools. They are also available as tags for images when you export the document.
1d .uno%3AObjectTitleDescription de Assigns a text and an alt text to the selected object. These texts are available as alternative tags in your document for use by accessibility tools. They are also available as tags for images when you export the document.
11 .uno%3AFormatLine 38 Define as opcións de formato para a liña seleccionada.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_CAP_STYLE 56 Seleccione o estilo das tapas de liña. As tapas son engadidos trazos internos tamén.
26 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_EDGE_STYLE 9b Seleccione o formato a empregar nas esquinas da liña. No caso dun pequeno ángulo entre as liñas, dunha forma mitrada substitúese cunha forma chanfrada.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FCBX_SYNCHRONIZE ae actualiza automaticamente a ambas opcións de punta de frecha cando entra en un ancho diferente, seleccione un estilo de frecha diferente, ou centraliza unha punta de frecha.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FTSB_CENTER_END 55 Coloca o centro da punta de frecha (s) no punto de extrema (s) da liña seleccionada.
24 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLineTabPage a8 Definir as opcións de formato para a liña seleccionada ou a liña que quere debuxar. Tamén pode engadir puntas de frecha a unha liña, ou cambiar símbolos da carta.
2b cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_LINE_WIDTH a5 Select the thickness for the line. You can append a measurement unit. A zero line thickness results in a hairline with a thickness of one pixel of the output medium.
11 .uno%3AXLineStyle 2b Select the line style that you want to use.
11 .uno%3AXLineColor 1c Select a color for the line.
21 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_COLOR 1c Select a color for the line.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMF_SYMBOL_WIDTH 20 Insire un ancho para o símbolo.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FCB_SYMBOL_RATIO 51 Mantén as proporcións do símbolo cando entra nun novo nivel ou valor de ancho.
2a cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_END_WIDTH 27 Insire un ancho para a punta da frecha.
26 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_LINE_STYLE 2b Select the line style that you want to use.
10 .uno%3ALineWidth a5 Select the thickness for the line. You can append a measurement unit. A zero line thickness results in a hairline with a thickness of one pixel of the output medium.
29 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMB_SYMBOL_BITMAP 44 Seleccione o estilo de símbolo que desexa utilizar no seu gráfico.
2d cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMTR_LINE_TRANSPARENT 6f Introduza a transparencia da liña, onde 100% corresponde a totalmente transparente e 0% a completamente opaco.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_END_STYLE 3d Seleccione a frecha que desexa aplicar á liña seleccionada.
29 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMF_SYMBOL_HEIGHT 23 Insire unha altura para o símbolo.
26 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_SAVE 57 Garda a lista actual de estilos de liña, de modo que pode cargalo de novo máis tarde.
26 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_LOAD 24 Importa a lista de estilos de liña.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_MODIFY a3 Actualiza o estilo de liña seleccionado usando a configuración actual. Para cambiar o nome do estilo de liña seleccionado, introduza un novo nome cando proceda.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_ADD 34 Creates a new line style using the current settings.
2d cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FCBX_SYNCHRONIZE 43 axusta automaticamente as entradas relativas á lonxitude da liña.
2e cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 46 Insire a cantidade de espazo que desexa deixar entre puntos ou trazos.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FLB_TYPE_2 37 Seleccione a combinación de trazos e puntos que quere.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FNUM_FLD_2 5b Introduza o número de veces que quere que un punto ou un trazo a aparecer nunha secuencia.
2b cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FLB_LINESTYLES 2e Seleccione o estilo de liña que desexa crear.
2e cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FMTR_FLD_LENGTH_2 1f Introduza a lonxitude da liña.
c HID_LINE_DEF 2c Edit or create dashed or dotted line styles.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_LOAD 25 Importa a lista de estilos de frecha.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_MODIFY 2f Cambia o nome do estilo de frecha seleccionado.
24 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_ADD 74 Para definir un estilo de frecha personalizado, seleccione un obxecto de debuxo no documento, e despois preme aquí.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FLB_LINEENDS 43 Escolla un símbolo estilo de frecha predefinido na caixa de lista.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FEDT_NAME 2f Mostra o nome do estilo de frecha seleccionado.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_SAVE 54 Garda a lista actual de estilos de dirección, de modo que pode cargalo máis tarde.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FLineEndPage 22 editar ou crear estilos de frecha.
11 .uno%3AFormatArea 42 Define as propiedades de recheo do obxecto de debuxo seleccionado.
10 .uno%3AFillStyle 50 Seleccione o tipo de recheo que quere aplicar ao obxecto de debuxo seleccionado.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2Fbtnnone 20 Do not fill the selected object.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FAreaTabPage 49 Set the fill options for the selected drawing object or document element.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcolortomtr 76 Enter the intensity for the color in the To Color box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcolorfrommtr 78 Enter the intensity for the color in the From Color box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcolorfromlb 38 Seleccione unha cor para o punto de inicio do gradiente.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fbordermtr a2 Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the area of the endpoint color on the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To Color box.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcolortolb 34 Seleccione unha cor para o punto final do gradiente.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcenterymtr ce Enter the vertical offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current vertical location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To Color box.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fmodificar 7b Aplica as propiedades do gradiente actuais ao gradiente seleccionado. Se quere, pode gardar o gradiente cun nome diferente.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fanglemtr 3c Introduza un ángulo de rotación ao gradiente seleccionado.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fadd 73 Engade un gradiente personalizado á lista actual. Especifique as propiedades do seu gradiente e prema neste botón
24 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcenterxmtr d2 Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current horizontal location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To Color box.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fgradienttypelb 29 Seleccione o gradiente que quere aplicar.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2FGradientPage 4f Select a gradient, modify the properties of a gradient, or save a new gradient.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Flinecolorlb 27 Seleccione a cor das liñas de hachura.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Flinetypelb 37 Seleccione o tipo de liñas de hachura que desexa usar.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fanglemtr 6a Introduza o ángulo de rotación para as liñas de hachura, ou prema nunha posición na grella de ángulo.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fdistancemtr 46 Insire a cantidade de espazo que quere ter entre as liñas de hachura.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fmodificar 89 Aplica as propiedades de incubación actuais ao patrón de incubación seleccionados. Se quere, pode gardar o patrón cun nome diferente.
1a cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fadd 9e Engade un estándar personalizado incubación á lista actual. Especifique as propiedades do seu patrón de eclosión, e, a continuación, prema neste botón.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2FHatchPage 49 Set the properties of a hatching pattern, or save a new hatching pattern.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fimagetabpage%2FBTN_IMPORT 7d Locate the image that you want to import, and then click Open. The image is added to the end of the list of available images.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fimagetabpage%2FImageTabPage 54 Select an image that you want to use as a fill image, or add your own image pattern.
14 .uno%3A%20FillShadow da Engade unha sombra ao obxecto seleccionado. Se o obxecto xa ten unha sombra, a sombra é eliminado. Se fai clic nesta icona cando ningún obxecto está seleccionado, a sombra engádese ao seguinte obxecto que deseñar.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fshadowtabpage%2FLB_SHADOW_COLOR 22 Seleccione unha cor para a sombra.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fshadowtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 52 Enter the distance that you want the shadow to be offset from the selected object.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fshadowtabpage%2FCTL_POSITION 28 Click where you want to cast the shadow.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fshadowtabpage%2FMTR_SHADOW_TRANSPARENT 64 Enter a percentage from 0% (opaque) to 100% (transparent) to specify the transparency of the shadow.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fshadowtabpage%2FTSB_SHOW_SHADOW 2d Adds a shadow to the selected drawing object.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fshadowtabpage%2FShadowTabPage 55 Add a shadow to the selected drawing object, and define the properties of the shadow.
33 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_END_VALUE 7c Insire un valor de transparencia ao punto final do gradiente, onde 0% é totalmente opaco e 100% é totalmente transparente.
35 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_START_VALUE 84 Insire un valor de transparencia para o punto de inicio do gradiente, onde 0% é totalmente opaco e 100% é totalmente transparente.
30 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_BORDER 6d Introduza o valor polo cal desexa axustar a área transparente do gradiente. O valor predeterminado é de 0%.
32 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_CENTER_Y 34 Introduza o desprazamento vertical para o gradiente.
37 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FLB_TRGR_GRADIENT_TYPES 43 Seleccione o tipo de gradiente de transparencia que desexa aplicar.
33 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FRBT_TRANS_GRADIENT 93 Aplica-se un gradiente de transparencia á cor de recheo actual. Seleccione esta opción e, a continuación, estableza as propiedades do gradiente.
31 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FRBT_TRANS_LINEAR a6 Activa a transparencia da cor. Seleccione esta opción e, a continuación, escriba un número na caixa, onde 0% é totalmente opaco e 100% é totalmente transparente.
2e cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FRBT_TRANS_OFF 21 Desactiva a transparencia da cor.
32 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_CENTER_X 32 Introduza o desprazamento ao gradiente horizontal.
2d cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 57 Definir as opcións de transparencia para o recheo que aplicar ao obxecto seleccionado.
2f cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_ANGLE 2f Introduza un ángulo de rotación ao gradiente.
30 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRANSPARENT 6d Axusta a transparencia da cor de enchido actual. Introduza un número entre 0% (opaco) e 100% (transparente).
34 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FTransparencyTabPage 57 Definir as opcións de transparencia para o recheo que aplicar ao obxecto seleccionado.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fpatterntabpage%2FLB_BACKGROUND_COLOR 30 Set the color of the deactivated pattern pixels.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fpatterntabpage%2FLB_COLOR 2e Set the color of the activated pattern pixels.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpatterntabpage%2FCTL_PIXEL 71 Draw the pattern in the 8 x 8 pixel board. Click on a pattern pixel to activate it, click again to deactivate it.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpatterntabpage%2FBTN_MODIFY 7d Applies the current pattern properties to the selected pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpatterntabpage%2FBTN_ADD 6f Adds a custom  pattern to the current list. Specify the properties of your pattern, and then click this button.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2Fbtnpattern 47 Fills the object with a simple two color pattern selected on this page.
29 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FCTL_POSITION 30 Prema onde quere colocar a áncora para o texto.
2b cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_BOTTOM 76 Insire a cantidade de espazo a deixar entre o bordo inferior do obxecto de debuxo ou texto ea bordo inferior do texto.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_TOP 76 Insire a cantidade de espazo a deixar entre o bordo superior do obxecto de debuxo ou texto ea bordo superior do texto.
2a cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_RIGHT 74 Insire a cantidade de espazo a deixar entre o bordo dereita do obxecto de debuxo ou texto ea bordo dereita do texto.
29 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_LEFT 76 Insire a cantidade de espazo a deixar entre o bordo esquerda do obxecto de debuxo ou texto ea bordo esquerda do texto.
2e cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_SIZE 72 Redimensiona unha forma personalizada para axustar o texto que escribir despois de facer clic dúas veces a forma.
2e cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_WORDWRAP_TEXT 70 Quebra o texto que engade despois de facer clic dúas veces unha forma personalizada para caber dentro da forma.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_CONTOUR 5c Adapta o fluxo de texto de xeito que combine os contornos do obxecto de debuxo seleccionado.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_FIT_TO_SIZE 46 Resizes the text to fit the entire area of the drawing or text object.
30 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_HEIGHT 52 Expande a altura do obxecto á altura do texto, se o obxecto é menor que o texto.
2f cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_WIDTH 59 Expande a largura do obxecto segundo o ancho do texto, se o obxecto é menor que o texto.
2b cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_FULL_WIDTH 3f Introduza a ruta ao cartafol que contén os ficheiros de texto.
2f cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTextAttributesPage 66 Configura o deseño e as propiedades de ancoraxe de texto dun debuxo ou obxecto de texto seleccionado.
16 .uno%3ATransformDialog 3b Redimensiona, move, xira ou inclina o obxecto seleccionado.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FPositionAndSize 2c Redimensiona ou move o obxecto seleccionado.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FCTL_SIZERECT 93 Prema nun punto base na reixa e, a continuación, escriba as novas dimensións de tamaño para o obxecto seleccionado en Largura  e Altura  caixas.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 2c Redimensiona ou move o obxecto seleccionado.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FTSB_POSPROTECT 41 Prevents changes to the position and size of the selected object.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_HEIGHT 52 Expande a altura do obxecto á altura do texto, se o obxecto é menor que o texto.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fswpossizepage%2FSwPosSizePage 2c Redimensiona ou move o obxecto seleccionado.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fswpossizepage%2F@@nowidget@@ 2c Redimensiona ou move o obxecto seleccionado.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_WIDTH 59 Expande a largura do obxecto segundo o ancho do texto, se o obxecto é menor que o texto.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fpositionsizedialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 2c Redimensiona ou move o obxecto seleccionado.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_POS_X 4f Enter the horizontal coordinate where the selected base point should be placed.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_HEIGHT 2f Insire unha altura para o obxecto seleccionado.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_POS_Y 4e Enter the vertical  coordinate where the selected base point should be placed.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_WIDTH 2c Insire un ancho para o obxecto seleccionado.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FCTL_POSRECT 51 The selected base point will be moved to the specified Position Y and Position X.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FTSB_SIZEPROTECT 26 Impide o redimensionamento do obxecto.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FCBX_SCALE 61 Maintains the width and height ratio when changing the width or height setting in the dialog box.
26 cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FCTL_ANGLE 48 Prema para especificar o ángulo de rotación en múltiplos de 45 graos.
25 cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FNF_ANGLE 45 Introduza o número de graos que desexa rotar o obxecto seleccionado.
25 cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FCTL_RECT 22 Prema onde quere colocar o pivote.
2a cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_POS_Y 4e Introduza a distancia vertical entre o bordo superior da páxina ata o pivote.
2a cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_POS_X 50 Introduza a distancia horizontal desde o bordo esquerdo da páxina ata o pivote.
2a cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FRotaci%C3%B3n 1c Xira o obxecto seleccionado.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fslantcornertabpage%2FMTR_FLD_ANGLE 22 Enter the angle of the slant axis.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fslantcornertabpage%2FMTR_FLD_RADIUS 49 Introduza o raio do círculo que quere empregar para redondear os cantos.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fslantcornertabpage%2FSlantAndCornerRadius 4f inclina o obxecto seleccionado, ou arredonda os cantos dun obxecto rectangular.
1e cui%2Fui%2FCallOutPage%2Fideal 4a Prema aquí para ver unha soa liña en ángulo recto dun xeito optimizada.
22 cui%2Fui%2FCallOutPage%2Flonxitude 8c Introduza a lonxitude do segmento de liña de chamada que se estende desde a caixa de texto explicativo para o punto de inflexión da liña.
26 cui%2Fui%2FCallOutPage%2Fposici%C3%B3n 58 Seleccione onde desexa estender a liña de chamada de, en relación á caixa de chamada.
24 cui%2Fui%2FCallOutPage%2Fespazamento 67 caixa de chamada Introduza a cantidade de espazo que quere deixar entre o final da liña de chamada, e.
21 cui%2Fui%2FCallOutPage%2FValueSet 55 Prema no botón Chamadas  estilo que quere aplicar ao texto explicativo seleccionado.
11 .uno%3AMirrorMenu 39 Inverte o obxecto seleccionado en horizontal ou vertical.
1b .uno%3AObjectMirrorVertical 3b Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom.
11 .uno%3AMirrorVert 3b Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom.
1d .uno%3AObjectMirrorHorizontal 3d Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right.
11 .uno%3AMirrorHorz 3d Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right.
12 .uno%3AArrangeMenu 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
17 .uno%3AArrangeFrameMenu 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
15 .uno%3AObjectPosition 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
13 .uno%3ABringToFront 65 Move o obxecto seleccionado ao comezo da orde de empilhado, de xeito que é diante de outros obxectos
17 .uno%3AObjectForwardOne 6c Move o obxecto seleccionado un nivel arriba, de xeito que é máis preto para o inicio da orde de empilhado.
e .uno%3AForward 6c Move o obxecto seleccionado un nivel arriba, de xeito que é máis preto para o inicio da orde de empilhado.
14 .uno%3AObjectBackOne 70 Move o obxecto seleccionado un nivel abaixo, de xeito que é máis preto da parte inferior da orde de empilhado.
f .uno%3ABackward 70 Move o obxecto seleccionado un nivel abaixo, de xeito que é máis preto da parte inferior da orde de empilhado.
11 .uno%3ASendToBack 76 Move o obxecto seleccionado cara á parte inferior da orde de empillado, de xeito que quede atrás dos outros obxectos
1f .uno%3A%20SetObjectToForeground 2d . Move o obxecto seleccionado diante do texto
1f .uno%3A%20SetObjectToBackground 32 . Move o obxecto seleccionado cara atrás do texto
11 .uno%3AAnchorMenu 30 Shows anchoring options for the selected object.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToPage 4a Anchors the selected object so that it always remains on the current page.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToPara 35 Anchors the selected object to the current paragraph.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToCell 33 As ligazóns o elemento seleccionado a unha célula
17 .uno%3ASetAnchorToFrame 33 Anchors the selected object to a surrounding frame.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorAsChar e5 Anchors the selected object as a character in the current text. The height of the current line of text is extended, if the object is above (and/or below) the border for the highest character or object in the current line of text.
20 .uno%3A%20ToggleObjectBezierMode 3b . Permite cambiar a forma do obxecto de debuxo seleccionado
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fdistancey 96 Enter the vertical distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow, or the size of the shadow in percent values of the character size.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fnoshadow 38 Removes the shadow effects that you applied to the text.
f .uno%3AFontWork 45 Simple tool for putting text along a curve without any fancy effects.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Ftextcontour 44 Shows or hides the borders of the individual characters in the text.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Foff 1c Removes baseline formatting.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fcolor 23 Select a color for the text shadow.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fslant a2 Adds a slant shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fdistance 75 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the text baseline and the base of the individual characters.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Frotate 4c Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fcenter 26 Centers the text on the text baseline.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fcontour 46 Shows or hides the text baseline, or the edges of the selected object.
21 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fvert 34 Vertically slants the characters in the text object.
21 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fhori 36 Horizontally slants the characters in the text object.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Forientation 9c Reverses the text flow direction, and flips the text horizontally or vertically. To use this command, you must first apply a different baseline to the text.
21 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fleft 35 Aligns the text to the left end of the text baseline.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fupright 97 Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline and preserves the original vertical alignment of the individual characters.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fright 36 Aligns the text to the right end of the text baseline.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fautosize 38 Resizes the text to fit the length of the text baseline.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fdistancex 84 Enter the horizontal distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow or the angle of the shadow slant from vertical.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Fvertical 9c Adds a shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingfontwork%2Findent 6d Enter the amount of space to leave between the beginning of the text baseline, and the beginning of the text.
10 .uno%3AGroupMenu 7a Grupos de manter obxectos seleccionados en conxunto, de xeito que poden ser movidos ou formateadas como un único obxecto.
12 .uno%3AFormatGroup 58 Grupos dos obxectos seleccionados, de xeito que poden ser movidos como un único obxecto
14 .uno%3AFormatUngroup 33 divide o grupo seleccionado en obxectos individuais
11 .uno%3AEnterGroup a2 Abre o grupo seleccionado, para que poida editar os obxectos individuais. Se o grupo seleccionado contén grupo aniñado, pode repetir este comando nos subgrupos.
11 .uno%3ALeaveGroup 55 Sae do grupo, de xeito que non pode máis modificar os obxectos individuais do grupo.
2a cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_DELAY 3f Introduza o valor de tempo de espera antes de repetir o efecto.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FLB_EFFECT 9b Seleccione o efecto de animación que desexa aplicar ao texto no obxecto de debuxo seleccionado. Para eliminar un efecto de animación, escolla No Effect .
2d cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_START_INSIDE 4c O texto é visible e dentro do obxecto de debuxo cando o efecto é aplicado.
2b cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_AMOUNT 42 Introduza o número de incrementos por que para percorrer o texto.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FBTN_LEFT 21 texto Rola de dereita a esquerda.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_STOP_INSIDE 3e O texto permanece visible despois de que o efecto é aplicado.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FBTN_RIGHT 24 texto Scrolls de esquerda a dereita.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_ENDLESS be Reproduce o efecto de animación continuamente. Para especificar o número de veces para reproducir o efecto, desmarque esta caixa de verificación e introduza un número na Continuo  caixa.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FBTN_DOWN 1f texto Scrolls de arriba abaixo.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_AUTO c5 $[officename] automatically determines the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. To manually assign the delay period, clear this checkbox, and then enter a value in the Automatic box.
23 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FBTN_UP 24 texto Scrolls de abaixo cara arriba.
2a cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTextAnimation 4a Engade un efecto de animación ao texto no obxecto de debuxo seleccionado.
2a cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FNUM_FLD_COUNT 4f Introduza o número de veces que quere que o efecto de animación para repetir.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_PIXEL 26 Medidas incrementar valor en píxeles.
2f cui%2Fui%2Ftextcolumnstabpage%2FTextColumnsPage 38 Adds columns to the text in the selected drawing object.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fthemetabpage%2FThemePage 28 Adds colors to the selected master page.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Frowheightdialog%2Fdefault ca Axusta a altura da liña para o tamaño en base ao modelo estándar. Contidos existentes poden ser mostradas en vertical cortada. A altura non aumenta automaticamente cando entra contidos máis grandes.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Frowheightdialog%2Fvalor 30 Introduza a altura da liña que desexa utilizar.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Frowheightdialog%2FRowHeightDialog 3c Cambia a altura da liña actual, ou as liñas seleccionadas.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcolwidthdialog%2Fdefault 45 Axusta automaticamente a largura da columna con base na fonte actual.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcolwidthdialog%2Fvalue 2e Introduza a largura da columna que quere usar.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcolwidthdialog%2FColWidthDialog 3f Cambia o ancho da columna actual ou das columnas seleccionadas.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckHyphActive 52 Permite a hifenização palabra para rompe automática de texto á seguinte liña.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckWrapTextAuto 5a texto Wraps noutra liña no bordo da cela. O número de liñas depende da largura da cela.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckAsianMode 143 aliñar caracteres asiáticos un abaixo do outro na cela seleccionada (s). Se a cela contén máis dunha liña de texto, as liñas son convertidas en columnas que están dispostas da dereita á esquerda texto. Caracteres occidentais no texto convertido son rodados 90 graos á dereita. Caracteres asiáticos non son roldas.
11 .uno%3AAlignBlock 4a Aliñar o contido da cela á esquerda e para os bordos da célula dereita.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcomboboxHorzAlign 54 Seleccione a opción de aliñamento horizontal que quere aplicar ao contido da cela.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FspinIndentFrom 47 Sangra a partir do bordo esquerdo da cela pola cantidade que introduza.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FCellAlignPage 5e Define as opcións de aliñamento para o contido da cela actual, ou as células seleccionadas.
11 .uno%3AAlignRight 25 Aliñar o contido da cela á dereita.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcomboboxVertAlign 34 aliñar o contido da cela á parte inferior da cela.
16 .uno%3A%20AlignVCenter 31 Define a orientación do texto do contido da cela
31 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckShrinkFitCellSize b4 Reduce o tamaño aparente da fonte de xeito que o contido da cela para o axuste do ancho de célula corrente. Non pode aplicar este comando a unha cela que contén saltos de liña.
12 .uno%3A%20AlignTop 33 aliñar o contido da cela á beira superior da cela
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckVertStack 1d Aliña o texto verticalmente.
13 .uno%3AAlignVCenter 22 Centros vertical o contido da cela
13 .uno%3A%20AlignLeft 27 . Aliñar o contido da cela á esquerda
26 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2Fdialcontrol 33 Prema no dial para definir a orientación do texto.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FspinDegrees 4c Enter the rotation angle from 0 to 360 for the text in the selected cell(s).
25 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2Freferences 46 Especifique o bordo da cela a partir da cal a escribir o texto xirado.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_NUMBEROFRECORDS b7 Displays the number of records. For example, "Record 7 of 9(2)" indicates that two records (2) are selected in a table containing 9 records, and that the cursor is in record number 7.
17 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEW 29 Insire un rexistro novo na táboa actual.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_LAST 21 Ir ao último rexistro na táboa.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEXT 22 Ir ao seguinte rexistro na táboa.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_ABSOLUTE 53 Introduza o número do rexistro que desexa exhibir e, a continuación, prema Intro.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_PREV 22 Ir ao rexistro anterior na táboa.
19 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_FIRST 22 Ir ao primeiro rexistro na táboa.
1b DBACCESS_HID_CTL_TABBROWSER ba Seleccionar rexistros de base de datos. Liñas de arrastrar-e-soltar ou células ao documento para introducir contidos. Cabeceiras das columnas de arrastrar-e-soltar para inserir campos.
17 HID_BROWSER_TABLEFORMAT 1c Formats the selected row(s).
18 HID_BROWSER_COLUMNFORMAT 1f Formats the selected column(s).
29 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fperspective 32 Click here to turn the perspective view on or off.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fupdate 3d Use this icon to convert a selected 2D object to a 3D object.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fto3d 3d Use this icon to convert a selected 2D object to a 3D object.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fassign 3d Use this icon to convert a selected 2D object to a 3D object.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftolathe 43 Click here to convert a selected 2D object to a 3D rotation object.
f .uno%3AWindow3D 5f Specifies the properties of 3D object(s) in the current document or converts a 2D object to 3D.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fdoublesided 60 Closes the shape of a 3D object that was created by extruding a freeform line (Convert - To 3D).
2e svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fdoublesidedillum 8f Lights the object from the outside and the inside. To use an ambient light source, click this button, and then click the Invert Normals button.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fflat 23 Renders the 3D surface as polygons.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fveri 4f Enter the number of vertical segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object
2b svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Finvertnormals 19 Inverts the light source.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fhori 52 Enter the number of horizontal segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fspherical 1c Renders a smooth 3D surface.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fdepth 67 Enter the extrusion depth for the selected 3D object. This option is not valid for 3D rotation objects.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fobjspecific 80 Renders the 3D surface according to the shape of the object. For example, a circular shape is rendered with a spherical surface.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fangle 45 Enter the angle in degrees to rotate the selected 3D rotation object.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fscaleddepth 67 Enter the amount by which to increase or decrease the area of the front side of the selected 3D object.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fdiagonal 52 Enter the amount by which you want to round the corners of the selected 3D object.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fgeometry 108 Adjusts the shape of the selected 3D object. You can only modify the shape of a 3D object that was created by converting a 2D object. To convert a 2D object to 3D, select the object, right-click, and then choose Convert - To 3D, or Convert - To 3D Rotation Object.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ffocal 81 Enter the focal length of the camera, where a small value corresponds to a "fisheye" lens, and a large value to a telephoto lens.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fdistance 55 Enter the distance to leave between the camera and the center of the selected object.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fslant 3b Enter an angle from 0 to 90 degrees for casting the shadow.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fshadow 35 Adds or removes a shadow from the selected 3D object.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fmode 135 Select the shading method that you want to use. Flat shading assigns a single color to a single polygon on the surface of the object. Gouraud shading blends colors across the polygons. Phong shading averages the color of each pixel based on the pixels that surround it, and requires the most processing power.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Frepresentation 3f Sets the shading and shadow options for the selected 3D object.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Flightcolor1 2c Select a color for the current light source.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fambientcolor 2b Seleccione unha cor para a luz de ambiente.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Flight8 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Flight 33 Define the light source for the selected 3D object.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexfilter 37 Blurs the texture slightly to remove unwanted speckles.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexparallely 32 Applies the texture parallel to the vertical axis.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexcircley 3f Wraps the vertical axis of the texture pattern around a sphere.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexobjy 4c Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexcirclex 41 Wraps the horizontal axis of the texture pattern around a sphere.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexmodulate 79 Applies the texture with shading. To define the shading options for the texture, click the Shading button in this dialog.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexparallelx 34 Applies the texture parallel to the horizontal axis.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexreplace 24 Applies the texture without shading.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexcolor 1e Converts the texture to color.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexobjx 4c Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftextype 28 Converts the texture to black and white.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ftexture 11f Sets the properties of the surface texture for the selected 3D object. This feature is only available after you apply a surface texture to the selected object. To quickly apply a surface texture, open the Gallery, hold down Shift+Ctrl, and then drag an image onto the selected 3D object.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fillumcolor 2a Select the color to illuminate the object.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fspeccolor 35 Select the color that you want the object to reflect.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fobjcolor 36 Select the color that you want to apply to the object.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Ffavorites 59 Select a predefined color scheme, or select User-defined to define a custom color scheme.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fintensity 2b Enter the intensity of the specular effect.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fdocking3deffects%2Fmaterial 2f Changes the coloring of the selected 3D object.
1b .uno%3ADistributeVertCenter 71 Distributes the selected objects, so that the vertical centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
18 .uno%3ADistributeVertTop 6a Distributes the selected objects, so that the top edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
1d .uno%3ADistributeVertDistance 64 Distributes the selected objects vertically, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
1a .uno%3ADistributeHorzRight 6c Distributes the selected objects, so that the right edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
1d .uno%3ADistributeHorzDistance 66 Distributes the selected objects horizontally, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
1b .uno%3ADistributeHorzCenter 73 Distributes the selected objects, so that the horizontal centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
19 .uno%3ADistributeHorzLeft 6b Distributes the selected objects, so that the left edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
1b .uno%3ADistributeVertBottom 6d Distributes the selected objects, so that the bottom edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
1a .uno%3ADistributeSelection 9d Distributes three or more selected objects evenly along the horizontal axis or the vertical axis. You can also evenly distribute the spacing between objects.
15 .uno%3ATextAttributes 66 Configura o deseño e as propiedades de ancoraxe de texto dun debuxo ou obxecto de texto seleccionado.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Foptions 87 Abre un diálogo onde pode seleccionar os dicionarios definidos polo usuario, e establecer as regras para a verificación ortográfica.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fcheckgrammar 48 Enable to work first on all spelling errors, then on all grammar errors.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fundo 7d Prema para desfacer a última modificación na sentenza actual. Prema de novo para desfacer o cambio anterior na mesma frase.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fautocorrect 48 Enable to work first on all spelling errors, then on all grammar errors.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fchangeall 4f Substitúe todas as ocorrencias da palabra descoñecida pola suxestión actual.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fcambio 85 Substitúe a palabra descoñecida pola suxestión actual. Se cambiou máis que a palabra incorrecta, a frase enteira é substituído.
f .uno%3ASpelling 9a Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialog also checks for grammar errors.
1f .uno%3ASpellingAndGrammarDialog 9a Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialog also checks for grammar errors.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Flanguagelb 3c Especifica o idioma a empregar para comprobar a ortografía.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fengadir 44 Engade a palabra descoñecida a un dicionario definido polo usuario.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnotebookbar%2FSpellDialogD 9a Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialog also checks for grammar errors.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 9a Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialog also checks for grammar errors.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fignorerule 82 Ao realizar unha comprobación de gramática, prema Ignorar Regra de ignorar a regra que está sinalizada como un erro gramatical.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fsuggestionslb 91 Listas de palabras suxeridas para substituír a palabra incorrecta. Seleccione a palabra que desexa usar e prema en correcto  ou Corrixir Todos .
2a cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2FSpellingDialog 9a Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialog also checks for grammar errors.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fsentence 95 Mostra a frase coa palabra grafada incorrectamente destacado. Edite a palabra ou a frase, ou prema nunha das suxestións no cadro de texto de abaixo.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fignore 49 Ignora a palabra descoñecida e continúa coa verificación ortográfica.
12 .uno%3ASpellDialog 9a Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialog also checks for grammar errors.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fspellingdialog%2Fignoreall 8a Ignora todas as ocorrencias da palabra descoñecida ata o final da sesión %PRODUCTNAME actual e continúa coa verificación ortográfica.
17 .uno%3AMoreDictionaries 49 Abre o navegador predeterminado na páxina de extensións de dicionarios.
13 .uno%3ALanguageMenu 44 Abre un submenú onde pode escoller comandos específicos do idioma.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fchineseconversiondialog%2Feditterms 52 Abre o  Editar dicionario , na cal pode editar a lista de palabras de conversión.
30 svx%2Fui%2Fchineseconversiondialog%2Fcommonterms b4 Converte palabras con dous ou máis personaxes que están na lista de termos comúns. Despois de que a lista é dixitalizado, o texto restante se converter carácter por carácter.
32 svx%2Fui%2Fchineseconversiondialog%2Ftotraditional d0 Converte caracteres de texto Chinés simplificada a caracteres tradicionais chineses texto. Prema Aceptar  para converter o texto seleccionado. Se ningún texto é seleccionado, todo o documento se converter.
31 svx%2Fui%2Fchineseconversiondialog%2Ftosimplified d7 Converte caracteres de texto chinés tradicional para caracteres de texto en chinés simplificado. Prema Aceptar  para converter o texto seleccionado. Se ningún texto é seleccionado, todo o documento se converter.
31 svx%2Fui%2Fchineseconversiondialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 8a Converts the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is converted.
3c svx%2Fui%2Fchineseconversiondialog%2FChineseConversionDialog 8a Converts the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is converted.
18 .uno%3AChineseConversion 8a Converts the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is converted.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2Fmodify 3c Garda a entrada modificada para o ficheiro de base de datos.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2Fdelete 43 Elimina a entrada definida polo usuario seleccionado do dicionario.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2Fproperty 25 Define a clase do termo seleccionado.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2Fadd 73 Engade o termo ao dicionario de conversión. Se o prazo xa está no dicionario, o novo término recibe precedencia.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2Fmapping 35 Introduza o texto que desexa substituír o termo con.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2Fterm 3a Introduza o texto que desexa substituír co termo Mapping.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2Freverse 64 Engade automaticamente a dirección cartografía reverso á lista para cada modificación que entra.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2Fsimpletotrad 37 Converte chinés simplificado para chinés tradicional.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2Ftradtosimple 37 Converte chinés tradicional para chinés simplificado.
36 svx%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2FChineseDictionaryDialog 25 Edite o  conversión chinés  termos.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fchinesedictionary%2F@@nowidget@@ 25 Edite o  conversión chinés  termos.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Flangcb 24 Select a language for the thesaurus.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Freplaceed af The word or words in the "Replace with" text box will replace the original word in the document when you click the Replace button. You can also type text directly in this box.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Falternatives c8 Click an entry in the Alternatives list to copy the related term to the "Replace with" text box. Double-click an entry to copy the related term to the "Current word" text box and to look up that term.
1b cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Fleft 3d Recalls the previous contents of the "Current word" text box.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Fwordcb c5 Mostra a palabra actual, é o termo relacionado que seleccionou premendo dúas veces nunha liña na lista de alternativas. Tamén pode teclear o texto directamente no cadro para buscar o seu texto.
10 .uno%3AThesaurus 66 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para substituír a palabra actual por un sinónimo ou un termo relacionado
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Fcbx5 4f Replaces transparent areas in the current image with the color that you select.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Fcolor2 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Fcolor1 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Ftol4 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Ftol3 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
e .uno%3ABmpMask 5f Opens the Color Replacer dialog, where you can replace colors in bitmap and meta file graphics.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Fcolor4 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Fcbx3 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Ftol1 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Fcolor5 47 Select the color to replace the transparent areas in the current image.
34 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2FDockingColorReplace 5f Opens the Color Replacer dialog, where you can replace colors in bitmap and meta file graphics.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Fpipette 9a Seleccione unha das catro caixas de cor fonte. Move o punteiro do rato sobre a imaxe seleccionada e, a continuación, prema na cor que desexa substituír.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Ftoolgrid b1 Mostra a cor na imaxe seleccionada que subxace directamente a posición do punteiro do rato actual. Isto caracteriza só funciona se a ferramenta Color Replacer é seleccionado.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Freplace 74 Replaces the selected source colors in the current image with the colors that you specify in the Replace with boxes.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Fcbx1 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Fcolor3 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Fcbx2 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2F@@nowidget@@ 5f Opens the Color Replacer dialog, where you can replace colors in bitmap and meta file graphics.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Ftol2 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdockingcolorreplace%2Fcbx4 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
1a SVX_HID_BMPMASK_CTL_QCOL_1 a2 Mostra a cor na imaxe seleccionada que quere substituír. Para axustar a cor de orixe, prema aquí, preme na cor Replacer e prema nunha cor na imaxe seleccionada.
18 .uno%3A%20AutoCorrectDlg 4d . Define as opcións para substituír automaticamente o texto mentres escribe
22 cui%2Fui%2Fapplyautofmtpage%2Fedit 32 Modifica a opción de AutoCorreção seleccionado.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fapplyautofmtpage%2FApplyAutoFmtPage 67 Seleccione as opcións para corrixir erros automaticamente mentres escribe, e entón preme en Aceptar .
21 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Fnovo 3d Engade ou substitúe unha entrada na táboa de substitución.
24 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Fnewtext f3 Enter the replacement text, graphic, frame, or OLE object that you want to replace the text in the Replace box. If you have selected text, a graphic, a frame, or an OLE object in your document, the relevant information is already entered here.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Ftextonly 82 Garda a entrada na Co  caixa sen formato. Cando a substitución está feita, o texto usa o mesmo formato que o texto do documento.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Forigtext 52 Enter the word, abbreviation or word part that you want to replace while you type.
24 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Ftabview 13b Lists the entries for automatically replacing words, abbreviations or word parts while you type. To add an entry, enter text in the Replace and With boxes, and then click New. To edit an entry, select it, change the text in the With box, and then click Replace. To delete an entry, select it, and then click Delete.
2c cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2FAcorReplacePage 71 Edita táboa de substitución para resolver ou substituír palabras ou abreviaturas no documento automaticamente.
26 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fautodouble b0 Adds autocorrected abbreviations or autocorrected words that start with two capital letters to the corresponding list of exceptions, if the autocorrection is immediately undone
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fnewdouble 30 Engade a entrada actual na lista de excepcións.
26 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fdoublelist d5 Lists the words or abbreviations that start with two initial capitals or small initial that are not automatically corrected. All words which start with two capital letters or small initial are listed in the field.
22 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fdouble 116 Type the word or abbreviation that starts with two capital letters or a small initial that you do not want $[officename] to change to one initial capital. For example, enter PC to prevent $[officename] from changing PC to Pc. Enter eBook to prevent an automatic change to Ebook.
26 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fabbrevlist 3d Lista as abreviaturas que non son corrixidos automaticamente.
21 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fabrev be Introduza unha abreviatura seguida por un período e prema en Nova . Isto evita $[officename] de capitalizar a primeira letra da palabra que vén despois do período ao final da abreviatura.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fautocorrectdialog%2Flang 4a Seleccione Idioma ao que quere crear ou editar as regras de substitución.
2a cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2FAcorExceptPage 71 Especifique as abreviaturas ou combinacións de letras que non quere $[officename] para corrixir automaticamente.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fdefaultsingle 32 Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fenddouble 9d Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fendsingle 9d Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fstartdouble 9d Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fstartsingle 9d Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fdoublereplace 83 Automatically replaces the default system symbol for the given type of quotation marks with the special character that you specify.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fsinglereplace 83 Automatically replaces the default system symbol for the given type of quotation marks with the special character that you specify.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fdefaultdouble 32 Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fchecklist 68 Seleccione para aplicar as substitucións mentres escribe [T], ou cando modificar o texto existente [M].
24 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Flist 68 Seleccione para aplicar as substitucións mentres escribe [T], ou cando modificar o texto existente [M].
2c cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 72 Specify the AutoCorrect options for quotation marks and for options that are specific to the language of the text.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2FApplyLocalizedPage 72 Specify the AutoCorrect options for quotation marks and for options that are specific to the language of the text.
17 HID_LINGU_PARA_LANGUAGE 7e Changes the language setting for the paragraph that contains the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary.
17 HID_LINGU_WORD_LANGUAGE 63 Changes the language settings for the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fspellmenu%2Fignoreall 46 Ignores all instances of the highlighted word in the current document.
12 HID_LINGU_AUTOCORR ad To always replace the highlighted word, click a word in the list. The word pair is stored in the replacement table under Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Replace.
28 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fspellmenu%2Fadd 37 Adds the highlighted word to a user-defined dictionary.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fspellmenu%2Fspelldialog 1a Opens the Spelling dialog.
11 HID_LINGU_REPLACE 66 Click the word to replace the highlighted word. Use the AutoCorrect submenu for permanent replacement.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fborrar 3a Elimina a palabra ou palabras da lista Completar palabras.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fentries ed Lists the collected words. The list is valid until you close the current document. To make the list available to other documents in the current session, disable "When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list".
2a cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fmaxentries 5e Introduza o número máximo de palabras que desexa almacenar na lista Conclusión de palabras.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fminwordlen 6f Introduza a lonxitude mínima palabra para a palabra para facer elegível para o recurso de completar palabras.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Facceptwith 59 Seleccione a clave que quere empregar para aceptar a conclusión automática de palabras.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fwhenclosing 103 Cando está activado, a lista fica limpo ao pechar o documento actual. Cando desactivada, fai que a lista actual de conclusión do Word dispoñible para outros documentos tras pechar o documento actual. A lista permanece dispoñible ata que saia %PRODUCTNAME.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fcollectwords 87 Adds the frequently used words to a list. To remove a word from the Word Completion list, select the word, and then click Delete Entry.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fshowastip 36 Mostra a palabra rematada como unha Consello de axuda.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fappendspace 50 Se non engadir a puntuación despois da palabra, $[officename] engade un espazo.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fwordcompletionpage%2Fenablewordcomplete b6 Tendas frecuentemente utilizadas palabras, e automaticamente completa unha palabra despois de escribir tres cartas que corresponden as tres primeiras letras dunha palabra almacenada.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fsmarttagoptionspage%2Fproperties b1 Para configurar unha etiqueta intelixente, seleccione o nome da etiqueta intelixente, a continuación, prema en Propiedades. Non todas as marcas intelixentes poden configurarse.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fsmarttagoptionspage%2Fmain 47 Activa Smart Tags para ser avaliado e mostra no seu documento de texto.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fsmarttagoptionspage%2F@@nowidget@@ 61 Cando instalou polo menos unha extensión de marca intelixente, ve a marcas intelixentes páxina.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fsmarttagoptionspage%2FSmartTagOptionsPage 61 Cando instalou polo menos unha extensión de marca intelixente, ve a marcas intelixentes páxina.
14 .uno%3AOutlineBullet 83 Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph or to selected paragraphs, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
20 .uno%3ABulletsAndNumberingDialog 83 Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph or to selected paragraphs, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fbulletandposition%2F@@nowidget@@ 83 Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph or to selected paragraphs, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fbulletandposition%2FBulletAndPosition 83 Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph or to selected paragraphs, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fpickbulletpage%2Fvalueset 2b Click the bullet type that you want to use.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fpickbulletpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 3d Displays different bullet types that you can apply to a list.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpickbulletpage%2FPickBulletPage 3d Displays different bullet types that you can apply to a list.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpicknumberingpage%2Fvalueset 29 Click the numbering that you want to use.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpicknumberingpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 38 Displays different numbering schemes that you can apply.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fpicknumberingpage%2FPickNumberingPage 38 Displays different numbering schemes that you can apply.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpickoutlinepage%2Fvalueset 2e Click the outline format that you want to use.
11 .uno%3ASetOutline 8f Displays the different formats that you can apply to a hierarchical list. $[officename] supports up to nine outline levels in a list hierarchy.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpickoutlinepage%2F@@nowidget@@ 8f Displays the different formats that you can apply to a hierarchical list. $[officename] supports up to nine outline levels in a list hierarchy.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fpickoutlinepage%2FPickOutlinePage 8f Displays the different formats that you can apply to a hierarchical list. $[officename] supports up to nine outline levels in a list hierarchy.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpickgraphicpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 51 Displays the different graphics that you can use as bullets in an unordered list.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpickgraphicpage%2Fvalueset 3b Prema os elementos gráficos que quere empregar como balas.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fpickgraphicpage%2FPickGraphicPage 51 Displays the different graphics that you can use as bullets in an unordered list.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fkeepratio 2f Mantén as proporcións de tamaño da gráfica.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fbitmap 58 Seleccione gráfico, ou localice o ficheiro gráfico que desexa utilizar como unha bala.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fsuffix a0 Enter a character or the text to display behind the number in the list. If you want to create an ordered list that uses the style "1.)", enter ".)" in this box.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fprefixo 4c Introduza un carácter ou o texto a ser exhibido diante do número da lista.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fstartat 38 Introduza un novo número de inicio para o nivel actual.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Forientlb 34 Seleccione a opción de aliñamento para a gráfica.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fheightmf 23 Insire unha altura para a gráfica.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fnumfmtlb 32 Select a numbering scheme for the selected levels.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fwidthmf 20 Insire un ancho para a gráfica.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Flevellb 43 Seleccione o nivel (s) que quere establecer as opcións de formato.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Fstandard 4c Restaura o sangrado e os valores de espazamento aos valores predeterminados.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Findentatmf 87 Introduza a distancia da marxe esquerda da páxina para o inicio de todas as liñas do parágrafo numerado que seguen a primeira liña.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Fatmf 84 Se selecciona unha tabulación para seguir a numeración, pode introducir un valor que non negativo como a posición de tabulación.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Fnumalignlb 125 Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centered" to center the symbol around the "Aligned at" position.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Falignedatmf 63 Introduza a distancia da marxe esquerda da páxina en que o símbolo de numeración será aliñado.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Fnumfollowedbylb 63 Introduza a distancia da marxe esquerda da páxina en que o símbolo de numeración será aliñado.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Flevellb 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
36 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fnewmodule 27 Garda a macro gravada nun novo módulo.
37 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fnewlibrary 2c Garda a macro gravada nunha nova biblioteca.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Feditar 5d Inicia o [officename] editor Básico $ e abre a macro seleccionada ou diálogo para edición.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fassign 8b Abre o  Personalizar  de diálogo, onde pode atribuír a macro seleccionada a un comando de menú, unha barra de ferramentas, ou un evento.
2f modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fok 20 Runs or saves the current macro.
2d BASCTL_PUSHBUTTON_RID_MACROCHOOSER_RID_PB_ORG 9e Abre a caixa de diálogo Organizador de diálogos, onde pode engadir, editar ou eliminar calquera módulo, caixa de diálogo ou biblioteca de macro existente.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fdelete 5b Creates a new macro, creates a new module or deletes the selected macro or selected module.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fmacros 4f Lista as macros que están contidos no módulo seleccionado na Macro de  lista.
3a modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fmacronameedit 69 Mostra o nome da macro seleccionada. Para crear ou modificar o nome dunha macro, introduza un nome aquí.
11 HID_BASICIDE_LIBS c4 Mostra as bibliotecas e módulos nos cales pode abrir ou gardar as súas macros. Para gardar unha macro cun documento específico, abra o documento e, a continuación, abra esta caixa de diálogo.
15 .uno%3A%20MacroDialog 28 . Abre un diálogo para organizar macros
11 .uno%3AMacrosMenu 7b Engade e elimina sinaturas dixitais para e das súas macros. Tamén pode usar a caixa de diálogo para amosar certificados.
17 .uno%3A%20StopRecording 1d Para a gravación dunha macro
14 .uno%3AMacroRecorder 14 Records a new macro.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fscriptorganizer%2Fedit 3a Opens the default script editor for your operating system.
35 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fnewlibdialog%2FNewLibDialog 1c Enter a name for the script.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fscriptorganizer%2Frename 44 Opens a dialog where you can change the name of the selected script.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fscriptorganizer%2Fcreate 15 Creates a new script.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fscriptorganizer%2Fdelete 2a Prompts you to delete the selected script.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fscriptorganizer%2Frun 41 To run a script, select a script in the list, and then click Run.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fscriptorganizer%2FScriptOrganizerDialog 91 Select a macro or script from My Macros, Application Macros, or an open document. To view the available macros or scripts, double-click an entry.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fpasswd%2FconfirmpassEntry 3f Introduza de novo o contrasinal para a biblioteca seleccionada.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fpasswd%2FnewpassEntry 3d Introduza un novo contrasinal para a biblioteca seleccionada.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fpasswd%2FoldpassEntry 3a Introduza o contrasinal actual da biblioteca seleccionada.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fpasswd%2FPasswordDialog 32 Protexe cun contrasinal a biblioteca seleccionada.
41 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer%3FScriptOrganizer.Language%3Astring=Python 30 Opens a dialog where you can run Python scripts.
44 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer%3FScriptOrganizer.Language%3Astring=BeanShell 33 Opens a dialog where you can organize Java scripts.
45 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer%3FScriptOrganizer.Language%3Astring=JavaScript 39 Opens a dialog where you can organize Javascript scripts.
16 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer 52 Abre un submenú con enlaces a diálogos onde podes organizar as macros e scripts.
35 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fnewlibdialog%2FNewLibDialog 2b Enter a name for the new library or module.
2c modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Flibpage%2Fpassword 37 Assigns or edits the password for the selected library.
28 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Flibpage%2Fedit 51 Opens the $[officename] Basic editor so that you can modify the selected library.
27 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Flibpage%2Fnew 16 Creates a new library.
2d modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fdialogpage%2Fdelete 57 Lets you manage the macro libraries for the current application and any open documents.
2a modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Flibpage%2Fimport 66 Locate that $[officename] Basic library that you want to add to the current list, and then click Open.
2b modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Flibpage%2Flibrary 56 Lists the existing macro libraries for the current application and any open documents.
30 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fdialogpage%2Fnewdialog 2a Opens the editor and creates a new dialog.
30 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fmodulepage%2Fnewmodule 2a Opens the editor and creates a new module.
2b modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fmodulepage%2Fedit 30 Opens the selected module or dialog for editing.
2e modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fmodulepage%2Flibrary 26 Lists the existing modules or dialogs.
2c modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Flibpage%2Flocation 60 Select the application or the document containing the macro libraries that you want to organize.
35 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Forganize 28 Lets you manage modules or dialog boxes.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fimportlibdialog%2Freplace 40 Substitúe unha biblioteca do mesmo nome pola biblioteca actual.
2f modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fimportlibdialog%2Fref 7e Engade a biblioteca seleccionada como ficheiro só de lectura. A biblioteca cárgase de novo cada vez que inicia %PRODUCTNAME.
3b modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fimportlibdialog%2FImportLibDialog 71 Introduza un nome ou o camiño á biblioteca que desexa anexar. Tamén pode seleccionar unha biblioteca da lista.
12 .uno%3ALoadToolBox 68 Customizes $[officename] menus, context menus, shortcut keys, toolbars, and macro assignments to events.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fdefaultsbtn 31 Deletes all changes previously made to this menu.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2FMenuAssignPage 46 Permite personalizar os menús do %PRODUCTNAME para todos os módulos.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fup 83 Click on the Up or Down arrows on the right to move the selected command upward or downward in the list of displayed menu commands.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2FsearchEntry 40 Enter a string in the text box to narrow the search of commands.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fadd 9e Click on the right arrow button to select a command on the left display box and copy to the right display box. This will add the command to the selected menu.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fcommandcategorylist ad Select the menu command category in the drop-down list to restrict the search of commands or scroll the list below. Macros and styles commands are in the bottom of the list.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fsavein f4 Select the location where the menu is to be attached. If attached to a %PRODUCTNAME module, the menu is available for all files opened in that module. If attached to the file, the menu will be available only when that file is opened and active.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Ftoplevellist 39 Select the menu where the customization is to be applied.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fplusbtn 42 Click on the hamburger icon and then choose Add to add a new menu.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fdown 83 Click on the Up or Down arrows on the right to move the selected command upward or downward in the list of displayed menu commands.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fremove 9e Click on the right arrow button to select a command on the left display box and copy to the right display box. This will add the command to the selected menu.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fdesc 42 The text box contains a short description of the selected command.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Ffunctions 61 Displays the results of the combination of the search string and category of the desired command.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2Fminusbtn 46 Click on the hamburger icon and then choose Delete to delete the menu.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fmovemenu%2Fmenuname 7d Introduza un nome para o menú. Para especificar unha letra no nome dunha tecla de atallo, escriba un til (~) antes da letra.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fmovemenu%2F@@nowidget@@ 7a Move o elemento de menú seleccionado unha posición ou unha posición abaixo no menú cando fai clic no botón de frecha.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fmovemenu%2FMoveMenuDialog 7a Move o elemento de menú seleccionado unha posición ou unha posición abaixo no menú cando fai clic no botón de frecha.
22 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fcarga 53 Substitúe a configuración de atallo de teclado cun que foi gardado anteriormente.
23 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fdelete 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
23 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fgardar 5a Garda a configuración de atallos de teclado actual, de modo que pode cargalo máis tarde.
23 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fcambio 79 Atribúe a combinación de teclas seleccionada na lista Teclas de atallo  para o comando seleccionado na Función  lista.
28 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fm%C3%B3dulo 46 Mostra as teclas de atallo para a aplicación actual de $[officename].
23 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Foffice 51 Mostra as teclas de atallo que son comúns a todos os $[officename] aplicacións.
25 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Ffunction 37 Lists functions that can be assigned to a shortcut key.
25 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fcategory 63 Lists the available function categories. To assign shortcuts to Styles, open the "Styles" category.
29 %2F%20claves%20cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage 46 Mostra as teclas de atallo que son asignados á función seleccionada.
26 cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2Fshortcuts 76 Lists the shortcut keys and the associated commands. When inside this panel, use a shortcut key to quickly jump to it.
2c cui%2Fui%2Faccelconfigpage%2FAccelConfigPage 66 Atribúe ou edita as teclas de atallo por US $[officename] comandos, ou $[officename] macros básicas.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fmenuassignpage%2FMenuAssignPage 46 Permite personalizar os menús do %PRODUCTNAME para todos os módulos.
1a CUI_HID_SVX_CONFIG_TOOLBAR 3f Permite personalizar as barras de ferramentas do $[officename].
2c cui%2Fui%2Ficonselectordialog%2FdeleteButton 65 Prema para eliminar a icona seleccionada na lista. Só ícones definidos polo usuario poden eliminar.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ficonselectordialog%2FimportButton 96 Adds new icons to the list of icons. You see the Open dialog that imports the selected icon or icons into the internal icon directory of %PRODUCTNAME.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ficonselectordialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 96 Adds new icons to the list of icons. You see the Open dialog that imports the selected icon or icons into the internal icon directory of %PRODUCTNAME.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ficonselectordialog%2FIconSelector 96 Adds new icons to the list of icons. You see the Open dialog that imports the selected icon or icons into the internal icon directory of %PRODUCTNAME.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fmacroassignpage%2Fdelete 41 Deletes the macro or component assignment for the selected event.
2e cui%2Fui%2Feventsconfigpage%2FEventsConfigPage 83 Atribúe macros para programar eventos. A macro atribuída é executada automaticamente cada vez que o evento seleccionado ocorrer.
32 %20cui%2Fui%2Fassigncomponentdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 41 Deletes the macro or component assignment for the selected event.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fmacroassignpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 83 Atribúe macros para programar eventos. A macro atribuída é executada automaticamente cada vez que o evento seleccionado ocorrer.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fmacroassigndialog%2FMacroAssignDialog 83 Atribúe macros para programar eventos. A macro atribuída é executada automaticamente cada vez que o evento seleccionado ocorrer.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fmacroassigndialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 83 Atribúe macros para programar eventos. A macro atribuída é executada automaticamente cada vez que o evento seleccionado ocorrer.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feventsconfigpage%2Fdelete 41 Deletes the macro or component assignment for the selected event.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feventsconfigpage%2Fsavein 59 Select first where to save the event binding, in the current document or in %PRODUCTNAME.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fmacroassignpage%2Fassignments b1 The big list box lists the events and the assigned macros. After you selected the location in the Save In list box, select an event in the big list box. Then click Assign Macro.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feventsconfigpage%2Fmacro 48 Opens the Macro Selector dialog to assign a macro to the selected event.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fmacroassignpage%2FMacroAssignPage 83 Atribúe macros para programar eventos. A macro atribuída é executada automaticamente cada vez que o evento seleccionado ocorrer.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feventsconfigpage%2Fevents b1 The big list box lists the events and the assigned macros. After you selected the location in the Save In list box, select an event in the big list box. Then click Assign Macro.
1e CUI_HID_MACRO_HEADERTABLISTBOX b1 The big list box lists the events and the assigned macros. After you selected the location in the Save In list box, select an event in the big list box. Then click Assign Macro.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fmacroassignpage%2Fassign 48 Opens the Macro Selector dialog to assign a macro to the selected event.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fclose 10 Pecha o diálogo
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fopen 5f Mostra unha caixa de diálogo Abrir  para abrir un filtro dun paquete de filtros XSLT (* .jar).
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fhelp 2d Mostra a páxina de axuda para este diálogo.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fgardar 6f Mostra unha Gardar como  diálogo para gardar o ficheiro seleccionado como un paquete de filtros XSLT (* .jar).
29 filtros%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fborrar 56 Exclúe o ficheiro seleccionado despois de confirmar a caixa de diálogo que se segue.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Ftest 32 Abre un diálogo co nome do ficheiro seleccionado.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Ffilterlist 38 Seleccione un ou máis filtros, prema en un dos botóns.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Feditar 32 Abre un diálogo co nome do ficheiro seleccionado.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fnovo 29 Abre un diálogo co nome dun novo filtro.
1c .uno%3AOpenXMLFilterSettings 7d Opens the XML Filter Settings dialog, where you can create, edit, delete, and test filters to import and to export XML files.
37 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Fdescrici%C3%B3n 23 Introduza un comentario (opcional).
35 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Finterfacename 54 Introduza o nome que quere amosar o Tipo de Ficheiro  caixa de diálogo de ficheiro.
36 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Fextensi%C3%B3n af Introduza a extensión do ficheiro para utilizar cando abrir un ficheiro sen especificar un filtro. $[officename] usa a extensión do ficheiro para determinar o filtro a usar.
32 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Ffiltername 36 Seleccione a aplicación que quere empregar co filtro.
34 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2F@@nowidget@@ 2e Introduza ou edite detalles dunha filtro XML .
3f filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2FXmlFilterTabPageGeneral 2e Introduza ou edite detalles dunha filtro XML .
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fxsltexport 83 Se este é un filtro de exportación, introduza o nome do ficheiro da folla de estilo XSLT que desexa empregar para a exportación.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fbrowsetemp 1e Opens a file selection dialog.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Ftempimport 7e Introduza o nome do modelo que quere empregar para importar. No modelo, os estilos son definidos para amosar as etiquetas XML.
3b filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fbrowseexport 1e Opens a file selection dialog.
32 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fdoc 24 Introduza o DOCTYPE do ficheiro XML.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fxsltimport 7d Se este é un filtro de importación, introduza o nome do ficheiro da folla de estilo XSLT que desexa empregar para importar.
3b filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fbrowseimport 1e Opens a file selection dialog.
3b filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2F@@nowidget@@ 3f Intro ou editar información de ficheiro para un  XML filtrar .
4d filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2FXmlFilterTabPageTransformation 3f Intro ou editar información de ficheiro para un  XML filtrar .
2c filter%2Fui%2Ftestxmlfilter%2Frecentfilename 3c Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialog.
2a filter%2Fui%2Ftestxmlfilter%2Fimportbrowse 5f Opens a file selection dialog. The selected file is opened using the current XML import filter.
30 filter%2Fui%2Ftestxmlfilter%2Fimportxslttemplate 57 Displays the file name of the template that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
2d filter%2Fui%2Ftestxmlfilter%2Fcurrentdocument d9 The front-most open file that matches the XML filter criteria will be used to test the filter. The current XML export filter transforms the file and the resulting XML code is displayed in the XML Filter output window.
2c filter%2Fui%2Ftestxmlfilter%2Fimportxsltfile 46 Mostra o nome do filtro de XSLT introducido na lapela Transformación.
2a filter%2Fui%2Ftestxmlfilter%2Fexportbrowse a0 Locate the file that you want to apply the XML export filter to. The XML code of the transformed file is opened in your default XML editor after transformation.
2b filter%2Fui%2Ftestxmlfilter%2Fdisplaysource 59 Opens the XML source of the selected document in your default XML editor after importing.
2c filter%2Fui%2Ftestxmlfilter%2Fexportxsltfile 57 Mostra o nome do filtro XSLT que entrou no Transformación de ficheiros  páxina guía.
28 filter%2Fui%2Ftestxmlfilter%2Frecentfile 3c Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialog.
2d filter%2Fui%2Ftestxmlfilter%2Fcurrentfilename 51 Mostra o nome do documento que quere empregar para probar o filtro XSLT ficheiro.
2a filter%2Fui%2Ftestxmlfilter%2F@@nowidget@@ 4a Comproba as follas de estilo XSLT utilizadas polo seleccionado filtro XML.
31 filter%2Fui%2Ftestxmlfilter%2FTestXMLFilterDialog 4a Comproba as follas de estilo XSLT utilizadas polo seleccionado filtro XML.
1c HID_XML_SOURCE_FILE_VALIDATE 37 Validates the contents of the XML Filter output window.
1c HID_XML_FILTER_OUTPUT_WINDOW 28 Lists the test results of an XML filter.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaconversiondialog%2Freplacebychar 68 Check to move character-by-character through the selected text. If not checked, full words are replaced.
33 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaconversiondialog%2Freplaceall aa Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options. Every time the same selection is detected it will be replaced automatically.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaconversiondialog%2Fignoreall 81 No changes will be made to the current selection, and every time the same selection is detected it will be skipped automatically.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaconversiondialog%2Fignore 6d No changes will be made to the current selection. The next word or character will be selected for conversion.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaconversiondialog%2Fhanjaonly 33 Check to convert only Hanja. Do not convert Hangul.
33 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaconversiondialog%2Fhangulonly 33 Check to convert only Hangul. Do not convert Hanja.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaconversiondialog%2Freplace 5d Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaconversiondialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 4f Converts the selected Korean text from Hangul to Hanja or from Hanja to Hangul.
44 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaconversiondialog%2FHangulHanjaConversionDialog 4f Converts the selected Korean text from Hangul to Hanja or from Hanja to Hangul.
1c .uno%3AHangulHanjaConversion 4f Converts the selected Korean text from Hangul to Hanja or from Hanja to Hangul.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS_GRID 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaconversiondialog%2Fhangulbracket 43 The Hangul part will be displayed in brackets after the Hanja part.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaconversiondialog%2Fhanja_below 44 The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hanja part.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaconversiondialog%2Foriginalword 1f Displays the current selection.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaconversiondialog%2Fhanja_above 44 The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hanja part.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaconversiondialog%2Fwordinput 3e Displays the first replacement suggestion from the dictionary.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaconversiondialog%2Ffind 57 Finds your Hangul input in the dictionary and replaces it with the corresponding Hanja.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS_LIST 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaconversiondialog%2Fhangul_below 44 The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hangul part.
39 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaconversiondialog%2Fsimpleconversion 41 The original characters are replaced by the suggested characters.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaconversiondialog%2Fhanjabracket 43 The Hanja part will be displayed in brackets after the Hangul part.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaconversiondialog%2Foptions 26 Opens the Hangul/Hanja Options dialog.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaconversiondialog%2Fhangul_above 44 The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hangul part.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaoptdialog%2Fignorepost 57 Ignora caracteres de posición ao final de palabras coreanas cando busca un dicionario.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaoptdialog%2Fborrar 38 Exclúe o dicionario definido polo usuario seleccionado.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaoptdialog%2Fedit 63 Abre o  Editar dicionario personalizado , na cal pode editar calquera usuario dicionario -definida.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaoptdialog%2Fshowrecentfirst 65 Mostra a suxestión de substitución que seleccionou na última vez como a primeira entrada na lista.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaadddialog%2Fentry 24 Introduza un nome para o dicionario.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaoptdialog%2Fnovo 4d Abre a caixa de diálogo Novo Dicionario, onde pode crear un novo dicionario.
33 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaoptdialog%2Fautoreplaceunique 5d Substitúe automaticamente palabras que posúen só unha substitución de palabras suxeridas.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fhangulhanjaadddialog%2FHangulHanjaAddDialog cc Lista todos os dicionarios definidos polo usuario. Marque a caixa de verificación a carón do dicionario que quere usar. Desmarque a caixa de verificación a carón do dicionario que non desexa utilizar.
49 svx%3A%20PushButton%3A%20RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3A%20PB_HHE_DELETE 20 . Exclúe a entrada seleccionada
46 svx%3A%20PushButton%3A%20RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3A%20PB_HHE_NEW 3c . Engade a definición de substitución actual ao dicionario
3a svx%3A%20Edit%3A%20RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3A%20ED_1 ad Introduza unha substitución suxerida para a entrada que está seleccionada na caixa de texto orixinal. A palabra de substitución pode conter un máximo de oito caracteres.
45 svx%3A%20ComboBox%3A%20RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3A%20LB_ORIGINAL 7d Seleccione a entrada no dicionario actual que desexe editar. Se quere, tamén se pode escribir unha nova entrada nesta caixa.
40 svx%3A%20listbox%3A%20RID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3A%20LB_BOOK 41 . Seleccione o dicionario definido polo usuario que desexa editar
13 .uno%3A%20NewWindow 3c . Abrir en nova xanela que mostra o contido da xanela actual
25 cui%2Fui%2Fsignatureline%2Fedit_email 83 Enter the email of the signer. The email is not displayed in the signature line graphic box, but is used for the digital signature.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fsignatureline%2Fedit_title 58 Enter the title of the signer. The title is displayed in the signature line graphic box.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fsignatureline%2Fedit_instructions 7d Insert instructions for the signer. The instructions appears in the Sign Signature Line dialog box, at the time of signature.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fsignatureline%2Fcheckbox_show_sign_date 6b Mark this checkbox to display the date of the signature, at the time when the document is digitally signed.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fsignatureline%2Fedit_name 57 Insert the name of the signer. The name is displayed in the signature line graphic box.
1a .uno%3AInsertSignatureLine 57 Insert the name of the signer. The name is displayed in the signature line graphic box.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fsignatureline%2Fcheckbox_can_add_comments 58 Enable signer to insert comments in the Sign Signature Line dialog at time of signature.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fsignatureline%2F@@nowidget@@ 57 Insert the name of the signer. The name is displayed in the signature line graphic box.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fsignatureline%2FSignatureLineDialog 57 Insert the name of the signer. The name is displayed in the signature line graphic box.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Falignmentcb 32 Includes alignment settings in the selected style.
11 .uno%3AAutoFormat 63 Use this command to apply an AutoFormat to a selected sheet area or to define your own AutoFormats.
3e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2FAutoFormatTableDialog 63 Use this command to apply an AutoFormat to a selected sheet area or to define your own AutoFormats.
16 SC_HID_SC_AUTOFMT_NAME 1a Enter a name and click OK.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2F@@nowidget@@ 63 Use this command to apply an AutoFormat to a selected sheet area or to define your own AutoFormats.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fautofitcb 71 When marked, specifies that you want to retain the width and height of the selected cells of the selected format.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2FAutoFormatTableDialog 63 Use this command to apply an AutoFormat to a selected sheet area or to define your own AutoFormats.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Frename 48 Opens a dialog where you can change the name of the selected AutoFormat.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2F@@nowidget@@ 63 Use this command to apply an AutoFormat to a selected sheet area or to define your own AutoFormats.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fformatlb 1a Enter a name and click OK.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fformatlb 1a Enter a name and click OK.
17 SC_HID_SC_REN_AFMT_NAME 2a Enter the new name of the AutoFormat here.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fadd 1a Enter a name and click OK.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fadd 1a Enter a name and click OK.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fremove 48 Opens a dialog where you can change the name of the selected AutoFormat.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fcertdialog%2FCertDialog%2Fadd 66 Opens the Select Path dialog to add a new Network Security Services Certificate directory to the list.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fcertdialog%2FCertDialog%2Fliststore1 60 Shows the list of Network Security Services Certificate directory to use for digital signatures.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fcertdialog%2FCertDialog 68 Select or add the correct Network Security Services Certificate directory to use for digital signatures.
1b .uno%3AChangeCaseRotateCase 66 Cycles the case of the selected characters between Title Case, Sentence case, UPPERCASE and lowercase.
48 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnotebookbar%2FMenuHome-ChangeCaseToSentenceCase 4e Changes the first letter of the selected characters to an uppercase character.
47 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnotebookbar%2FMenuHome-ChangeCaseToSentenceCase3 4e Changes the first letter of the selected characters to an uppercase character.
49 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fnotebookbar%2FMenuHome-ChangeCaseToSentenceCase 4e Changes the first letter of the selected characters to an uppercase character.
47 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fnotebookbar%2FMenuHome-ChangeCaseToSentenceCase1 4e Changes the first letter of the selected characters to an uppercase character.
1f .uno%3AChangeCaseToSentenceCase 4e Changes the first letter of the selected characters to an uppercase character.
1a SID_TRANSLITERATE_SENTENCE 4e Changes the first letter of the selected characters to an uppercase character.
45 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fnotebookbar%2FMenuHome-ChangeCaseToToggleCase1 28 Toggles case of all selected characters.
47 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fnotebookbar%2FMenuHome-ChangeCaseToToggleCase 28 Toggles case of all selected characters.
46 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnotebookbar%2FMenuHome-ChangeCaseToToggleCase 28 Toggles case of all selected characters.
1d .uno%3AChangeCaseToToggleCase 28 Toggles case of all selected characters.
44 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnotebookbar%2FMenuHome-ChangeCaseToToggleCase 28 Toggles case of all selected characters.
18 SID_TRANSLITERATE_TOGGLE 28 Toggles case of all selected characters.
2e xmlsec%2Fui%2Fdigitalsignaturesdialog%2Fremove 68 Removes the selected signature from the list. Removes all subsequent signatures as well, in case of PDF.
32 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fdigitalsignaturesdialog%2Fsignatures 34 Lista as sinaturas dixitais para o documento actual.
2c xmlsec%2Fui%2Fdigitalsignaturesdialog%2Fsign 2a Abre o  Seleccionar certificado  diálogo.
2c xmlsec%2Fui%2Fdigitalsignaturesdialog%2Fview 22 Abre o  Ver certificado  diálogo.
10 .uno%3ASignature 76 Engade e elimina sinaturas dixitais e ao seu documento. Tamén pode usar a caixa de diálogo para amosar certificados.
3f xmlsec%2Fui%2Fdigitalsignaturesdialog%2FDigitalSignaturesDialog 76 Engade e elimina sinaturas dixitais e ao seu documento. Tamén pode usar a caixa de diálogo para amosar certificados.
34 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fdigitalsignaturesdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 76 Engade e elimina sinaturas dixitais e ao seu documento. Tamén pode usar a caixa de diálogo para amosar certificados.
15 .uno%3AMacroSignature 76 Engade e elimina sinaturas dixitais e ao seu documento. Tamén pode usar a caixa de diálogo para amosar certificados.
f .uno%3ADrawText e1 Draws a text box with horizontal text direction where you drag in the current document. Drag a text box to the size you want anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. Rotate the text box to get rotated text.
28 desktop%2Fui%2Fupdatedialog%2FUPDATE_ALL bb Por omisión, só se mostran as extensións que é posíbel descargar na caixa de diálogo. Marque Mostrar todas as actualizacións  para ver tamén outras extensións e mensaxes de erro.
25 desktop%2Fui%2Fupdatedialog%2FINSTALL 55 Cando fai clic no botón Instalar a descarga ea instalación de diálogo é exhibida.
31 desktop%2Fui%2Fupdateinstalldialog%2F@@nowidget@@ ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extensions dialog to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
38 desktop%2Fui%2Fupdateinstalldialog%2FUpdateInstallDialog ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extensions dialog to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
2a desktop%2Fui%2Fupdatedialog%2F@@nowidget@@ ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extensions dialog to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
2a desktop%2Fui%2Fupdatedialog%2FDESCRIPTIONS c9 Mentres a comprobación de actualizacións, ve un indicador de progreso. Espere por algunhas mensaxes para aparecer no cadro de diálogo, ou prema Cancelar para deter a verificación de actualización.
2a desktop%2Fui%2Fupdatedialog%2FUpdateDialog ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extensions dialog to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
10 .uno%3AInsertLRM ac Insire unha marca de dirección de texto que afecta a dirección do texto de calquera texto seguindo a marca. Dispoñible esquema de texto complexo cando (CTL) é activado.
f .uno%3AInsertWJ b5 Inserts an invisible space within a word to indicate that a line break is not allowed between the adjacent characters. The inserted character, which has no width, is Unicode U+2060.
11 .uno%3AInsertZWSP b7 Inserts an invisible space within a word that indicates a word or line break opportunity, even though no space is shown. The inserted character, which has no width, is Unicode U+200B.
1f .uno%3AInsertNarrowNobreakSpace b7 Inserts an invisible space within a word that indicates a word or line break opportunity, even though no space is shown. The inserted character, which has no width, is Unicode U+200B.
17 .uno%3AInsertSoftHyphen 8b Insire un trazo invisible dentro dunha palabra que aparecerá e crear un salto de liña, xa que pasa a ser o último carácter nunha liña.
17 .uno%3AInsertHardHyphen 54 Insire un trazo que manterá xuntos os caracteres que o bordean nos saltos de liña.
1d .uno%3AInsertNonBreakingSpace 53 Insire un espazo que vai manter na fronteira con personaxes xuntos saltos de liña.
10 .uno%3AInsertRLM ac Insire unha marca de dirección de texto que afecta a dirección do texto de calquera texto seguindo a marca. Dispoñible esquema de texto complexo cando (CTL) é activado.
19 .uno%3AFormattingMarkMenu 6a Opens a submenu to insert special formatting marks like no-break space, soft hyphen, and zero-width space.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ffontfeaturesdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 3b Select and apply font typographical features to characters.
32 cui%2Fui%2Ffontfeaturesdialog%2FFontFeaturesDialog 3b Select and apply font typographical features to characters.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_NEWTHEME 56 Adds a new theme to the Gallery and lets you choose the files to include in the theme.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_LISTVIEW 55 Displays the contents of the Gallery as small icons, with title and path information.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_ICONVIEW 2e Displays the contents of the Gallery as icons.
16 SVX_HID_GALLERY_WINDOW 52 To insert a Gallery object, select the object, and then drag it into the document.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_THEMELIST 3c Click a theme to view the objects associated with the theme.
13 SIDEBAR_GALLERYDECK 70 Opens the Gallery deck of the Sidebar, where you can select images and audio clips to insert into your document.
e .uno%3AGallery 70 Opens the Gallery deck of the Sidebar, where you can select images and audio clips to insert into your document.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryfilespage%2Fimage 28 Displays a preview of the selected file.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryfilespage%2Fpreview 41 Mostra ou oculta unha previsualización do ficheiro seleccionado.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryfilespage%2FAddAll 32 Engade todos os ficheiros da lista ao tema actual.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryfilespage%2Fadd 37 Engade o(s) ficheiro(s) seleccionado(s) ao tema actual.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryfilespage%2Ffindfiles 67 Localice o directorio que contén os ficheiros que quere engadir e, a continuación, prema en Aceptar .
26 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryfilespage%2Farquivos b5 Lista os ficheiros dispoñibles. Seleccione o ficheiro (s) que quere engadir e, a continuación, prema en Engadir . Para engadir todos os ficheiros da lista, prema en Engadir Todo .
26 cui%2Fui%2Fgalleryfilespage%2Ffiletype 30 Seleccione o tipo de ficheiro que quere engadir.
b .uno%3AGrow 2d Increases the font size of the selected text.
f .uno%3AGridMenu 74 Toggle the visibility of grid points and guide lines to help object moving and precise position in the current page.
14 .uno%3ASnapLinesMenu 2e Specifies the display options for snap guides.
2f svx%2Fui%2Fcompressgraphicdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 59 Compress the selected image to reduce its data size and resize the image in the document.
38 svx%2Fui%2Fcompressgraphicdialog%2FCompressGraphicDialog 59 Compress the selected image to reduce its data size and resize the image in the document.
16 .uno%3ACompressGraphic 59 Compress the selected image to reduce its data size and resize the image in the document.
18 .uno%3AInsertObjectChart 4e Inserts a chart based on data from a cell or table range or with default data.
1f AVMEDIA_HID_AVMEDIA_ZOOMLISTBOX 27 Adjusts the size of the movie playback.
24 AVMEDIA_HID_AVMEDIA_TOOLBOXITEM_MUTE 17 Turns sound off and on.
24 AVMEDIA_HID_AVMEDIA_TOOLBOXITEM_LOOP 1a Plays the file repeatedly.
20 AVMEDIA_HID_AVMEDIA_VOLUMESLIDER 13 Adjusts the volume.
24 AVMEDIA_HID_AVMEDIA_TOOLBOXITEM_STOP 27 Stops the playback of the current file.
25 AVMEDIA_HID_AVMEDIA_TOOLBOXITEM_PAUSE 33 Pauses or resumes the playback of the current file.
26 AVMEDIA_HID_AVMEDIA_TOOLBOXITEM_INSERT 59 Inserts the current movie file or sound file as a media object into the current document.
24 AVMEDIA_HID_AVMEDIA_TOOLBOXITEM_OPEN 3c Opens a movie file or a sound file that you want to preview.
24 AVMEDIA_HID_AVMEDIA_TOOLBOXITEM_PLAY 17 Plays the current file.
14 .uno%3AAVMediaPlayer 80 Abre a xanela do Media Player, onde pode ver arquivos de película e son, así como inserir estes ficheiros no documento actual.
25 vnd.sun.star.findbar%3AFocusToFindbar 5f Toggle the visibility of the Find toolbar to search for text or navigate a document by element.
e .uno%3ASidebar a9 The Sidebar is a vertical graphical user interface that primarily provides contextual properties, style management, document navigation, media gallery and more features.
14 .uno%3AInsertAVMedia 31 Inserts a video or audio file into your document.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Frenameobjectdialog%2Fok 2a Enter the new name of the selected object.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Frenameobjectdialog%2Fcancel 2a Enter the new name of the selected object.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Frenameobjectdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 2a Enter the new name of the selected object.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Frenameobjectdialog%2FRenameObjectDialog 2a Enter the new name of the selected object.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Frenameobjectdialog%2Fentry 2a Enter the new name of the selected object.
41 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Frenameobjectdialog%2Fdialog-action_area1 2a Enter the new name of the selected object.
31 cui%2Fui%2Ftoolbarmodedialog%2Fdialog-action_area d8 The notebook bar shows a different way to organize controls and icons than a collection of straight rows of icons, displaying contextual groups of commands and contents for a quicker usage and better user experience.
14 .uno%3AToolbarModeUI d8 The notebook bar shows a different way to organize controls and icons than a collection of straight rows of icons, displaying contextual groups of commands and contents for a quicker usage and better user experience.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_CANCEL 41 Interrompe a descarga e borra o ficheiro parcialmente descargado.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_PAUSE 4c Pausa a descarga. Máis tarde, prema en Continuar para continuar a descarga.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DOWNLOAD bc Transferencias e salva os arquivos de actualización para o escritorio ou un cartafol da túa elección. Seleccione o cartafol en %PRODUCTNAME -. Actualización Online no diálogo Opcións
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_RESUME 21 Continúa unha descarga en pausa.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_INSTALL 20 Instalar actualización baixada.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DOWNLOAD2 bc Transferencias e salva os arquivos de actualización para o escritorio ou un cartafol da túa elección. Seleccione o cartafol en %PRODUCTNAME -. Actualización Online no diálogo Opcións
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DLG 118 Comproba se hai actualizacións dispoñibles para a súa versión do %PRODUCTNAME. Se unha nova versión está dispoñible, pode optar por descargar a actualización. Tras a descarga, se ten permisos de gravación para o directorio de instalación, pode instalar a actualización.
21 SFX2_HID_DLG_CHECKFORONLINEUPDATE 118 Comproba se hai actualizacións dispoñibles para a súa versión do %PRODUCTNAME. Se unha nova versión está dispoñible, pode optar por descargar a actualización. Tras a descarga, se ten permisos de gravación para o directorio de instalación, pode instalar a actualización.
2c DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_ENABLE 44 Select the extension that you want to enable, and then click Enable.
2b desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Fremovebtn 44 Select the extension that you want to remove, and then click Remove.
34 desktop%2Fui%2Fshowlicensedialog%2FShowLicenseDialog 87 Read the license. Click the Scroll Down button to scroll down if necessary. Click Accept to continue the installation of the extension.
2d DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_DISABLE 46 Select the extension that you want to disable, and then click Disable.
28 desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Faddbtn 1e Click Add to add an extension.
26 desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Fuser 42 Filter extensions only available for the currently logged in user.
2c desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Foptionsbtn 77 Seleccione unha extensión instalada, a continuación, prema para abrir a caixa de diálogo Opcións para a extensión.
2c desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Fextensions 7b Select the extension that you want to remove, enable, or disable. For some extensions, you can also open an Options dialog.
28 desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Fshared 3b Filter extensions available for all users of this computer.
29 desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Fbundled a9 Bundled extensions are installed by the system administrator using the operating system specific installer packages. These can not be installed, updated or removed here.
2b desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Fupdatebtn de Click to check for online updates of all installed extensions. To check for updates of the selected extension only, choose the Update command from the context menu. The check for availability of updates starts immediately.
2f desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Fgetextensions 33 You can find a collection of extensions on the Web.
38 desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2FExtensionManagerDialog 5c The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables, and updates %PRODUCTNAME extensions.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fconfirm2ed 19 Re-escriba o contrasinal.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fconfirm1ed 19 Re-escriba o contrasinal.
27 uui%2Fui%2Fmasterpassworddlg%2Fpassword 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
22 uui%2Fui%2Fpassword%2FnewpassEntry 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fexpander 33 Prema para ir á páxina do asistente especificada.
13 SC_HID_PASSWD_TABLE 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
1d sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fpass2ed 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
1d sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fpass1ed 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fpassword%2F@@nowidget@@ 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
26 uui%2Fui%2Fpassword%2FconfirmpassEntry 19 Re-escriba o contrasinal.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2FPasswordDialog 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
22 uui%2Fui%2Fpassword%2F@@nowidget@@ 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2F@@nowidget@@ 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
2b IUU%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2Fpassword2 20 Re-escriba o contrasinal mestre.
2b IUU%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2Fpassword1 6d Introduza un contrasinal mestre para impedir que os usuarios non autorizados access contrasinais almacenadas.
39 uui%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2FSetMasterPasswordDialog 4e Asignar un contrasinal mestra para protexer o acceso a un contrasinal gardada.
2e uui%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2F@@nowidget@@ 4e Asignar un contrasinal mestra para protexer o acceso a un contrasinal gardada.
15 .uno%3APasteOnlyValue 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
14 .uno%3APasteOnlyText 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
17 .uno%3APasteOnlyFormula 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
10 .uno%3APasteOnly 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
17 .uno%3APasteSpecialMenu 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
17 .uno%3APasteUnformatted 35 Paste only the text contents, without any formatting.
17 .uno%3APasteNestedTable a8 Paste clipboard content (including native tables or tables copied from Calc or other spreadsheets) as nested tables in empty cells and at cell starting cursor position.
16 .uno%3APasteRowsBefore 80 Insert clipboard table data in a table as new rows instead of overwriting the content of the original cells of the target table.
19 .uno%3APasteColumnsBefore 8a Insert clipboard table data in a table as new columns before instead of overwriting the content of the original cells of the target table.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fsafemodedialog%2F@@nowidget@@ b0 Safe mode is a mode where %PRODUCTNAME temporarily starts with a fresh user profile and disables hardware acceleration. It helps to restore a non-working %PRODUCTNAME instance.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fsafemodedialog%2FSafeModeDialog b0 Safe mode is a mode where %PRODUCTNAME temporarily starts with a fresh user profile and disables hardware acceleration. It helps to restore a non-working %PRODUCTNAME instance.
f .uno%3ASafeMode b0 Safe mode is a mode where %PRODUCTNAME temporarily starts with a fresh user profile and disables hardware acceleration. It helps to restore a non-working %PRODUCTNAME instance.
e .uno%3AProtect 3c Protects the cells in the current sheet from being modified.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fexport 29 Exporta o ficheiro actual en formato PDF.
12 .uno%3AExportToPDF 45 Saves the current file to Portable Document Format (PDF) version 1.4.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Fcontact 13d These three fields allow you to optionally enter additional information about the digital signature that will be applied to the PDF (Where, by whom and why it was made). It will be embedded in the appropriate PDF fields and will be visible to anyone viewing the PDF. Each or all of the three fields may be left blank.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Flocation 13d These three fields allow you to optionally enter additional information about the digital signature that will be applied to the PDF (Where, by whom and why it was made). It will be embedded in the appropriate PDF fields and will be visible to anyone viewing the PDF. Each or all of the three fields may be left blank.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Fpassword 60 Enter the password used for protecting the private key associated with the selected certificate.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Fselect 24 Opens the Select Certificate dialog.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Freason 13d These three fields allow you to optionally enter additional information about the digital signature that will be applied to the PDF (Where, by whom and why it was made). It will be embedded in the appropriate PDF fields and will be visible to anyone viewing the PDF. Each or all of the three fields may be left blank.
20 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Fcert 4a Allows you to select a certificate to be used for signing this PDF export.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 4a Allows you to select a certificate to be used for signing this PDF export.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsignpage%2Fpdfsignpage 4a Allows you to select a certificate to be used for signing this PDF export.
2f filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fsinglepagesheets 191 If switched on, automatically inserted blank pages are exported to the PDF file. This is best if you are printing the pdf file double-sided. Example: In a book a chapter paragraph style is set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to export that even numbered page or not.
2f filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fcommentsinmargin 191 If switched on, automatically inserted blank pages are exported to the PDF file. This is best if you are printing the pdf file double-sided. Example: In a book a chapter paragraph style is set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to export that even numbered page or not.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Femptypages 191 If switched on, automatically inserted blank pages are exported to the PDF file. This is best if you are printing the pdf file double-sided. Example: In a book a chapter paragraph style is set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to export that even numbered page or not.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fcomments 4a Select to export comments of Writer and Calc documents as PDF annotations.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fbookmarks 43 Select to export all headings in Writer documents as PDF bookmarks.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fallowdups 9c Allows you to use the same field name for multiple fields in the generated PDF file. If disabled, field names will be exported using generated unique names.
25 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fformat 3f Select the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fforms 60 Choose to create a PDF form. This can be filled out and printed by the user of the PDF document.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Frange 26 Exports the pages you type in the box.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fselection 1e Exports the current selection.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fjpegcompress c5 Select a JPEG compression level. With a high quality level, almost all pixels are preserved. With a low quality level, some pixels are lost and artifacts are introduced, but file sizes are reduced.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fquality 2d Enter the quality level for JPEG compression.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fall 5c Exports all defined print ranges. If no print range is defined, exports the entire document.
32 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fusereferencexobject 20d This option affects how PDF images are exported back to PDF. When this option is disabled, then the first page of the PDF data is included in the output. The PDF export merges the used images, fonts and other resources during export. This is a complex operation, but the result can be viewed in various viewers. When the option is enabled, then the reference XObject markup is used: this is a simple operation, but viewers have to support this markup to show vector images. Otherwise a fallback bitmap is shown in the viewer.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fembed 68 This setting enables you to export the document as a .pdf file containing two file formats: PDF and ODF.
2f filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Freduceresolution 50 Select to resample or down-size the images to a lower number of pixels per inch.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fresolution 2c Select the target resolution for the images.
2f filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Flosslesscompress 43 Selects a lossless compression of images. All pixels are preserved.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fpdfa 13e Converts to the PDF/A-1b, PDF/A-2b, or PDF/A-3b format. All fonts used in the source document are embedded in the generated PDF file, and PDF tags are written. The primary purpose is to create an electronic document whose appearance is device and application independent, making it suitable for long term preservation.
31 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fexportplaceholders 4a Select to export comments of Writer and Calc documents as PDF annotations.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fpages 26 Exports the pages you type in the box.
25 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Ftagged 46 Select to write PDF tags. This can increase file size by huge amounts.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fcontlayout 4f Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages in a continuous vertical column.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fsinglelayout 3c Select to generate a PDF file that shows one page at a time.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2FPdfViewPage 40 Select to generate a PDF file that shows only the page contents.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Foutline 53 Select to generate a PDF file that shows a bookmarks palette and the page contents.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fpageonly 40 Select to generate a PDF file that shows only the page contents.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitwidth 61 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fcontfacinglayout 96 Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the right.
20 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fpage 41 Select to show the given page when the reader opens the PDF file.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitwin 62 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit entirely into the reader's window.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffirstonleft 103 Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the left. You must enable support for complex text layout on Languages and Locales - General in the Options dialog box.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitdefault b7 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page contents without zooming. If the reader software is configured to use a zoom factor by default, the page shows with that zoom factor.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 40 Select to generate a PDF file that shows only the page contents.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fthumbs 54 Select to generate a PDF file that shows a thumbnails palette and the page contents.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitvis 7a Select to generate a PDF file that shows the text and graphics on the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fdefaultlayout 6a Select to generate a PDF file that shows the pages according to the layout setting of the reader software.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitzoom 3e Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file.
20 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fzoom 3e Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fopeninternet 94 Cross-document links are opened with the Internet browser. The Internet browser must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fopenpdf c2 Cross-document links are opened with the PDF reader application that currently shows the document. The PDF reader application must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fdefault 6c Links from your PDF document to other documents will be handled as it is specified in your operating system.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fexporturl 82 Enable this checkbox to export URLs to other documents as relative URLs in the file system. See "relative hyperlinks" in the Help.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fconvert d2 Enable this checkbox to convert the URLs referencing other ODF files to PDF files with the same name. In the referencing URLs the extensions .odt, .odp, .ods, .odg, and .odm are converted to the extension .pdf.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2F@@nowidget@@ 100 Enable the checkbox to export bookmarks in your document as named destinations in the PDF document. The destinations correspond to the location of your bookmarks. Use these destinations to create URL links that point to these locations in the PDF document.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2FPdfLinksPage 100 Enable the checkbox to export bookmarks in your document as named destinations in the PDF document. The destinations correspond to the location of your bookmarks. Use these destinations to create URL links that point to these locations in the PDF document.
2a filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangeform 29 Only filling in form fields is permitted.
2a filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangenone 28 No changes of the content are permitted.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fprinthigh 2f The document can be printed in high resolution.
2a filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fenablecopy 35 Select to enable copying of content to the clipboard.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fprintlow 65 The document can only be printed in low resolution (150 dpi). Not all PDF readers honor this setting.
2a filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fenablea11y 35 Select to enable text access for accessibility tools.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangeany 33 All changes are permitted, except extracting pages.
2d filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangecomment 38 Only commenting and filling in form fields is permitted.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangeinsdel 3a Only inserting, deleting, and rotating pages is permitted.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fprintnone 27 Printing the document is not permitted.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fsetpassword 35 Click to open a dialog where you enter the passwords.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2F@@nowidget@@ 35 Click to open a dialog where you enter the passwords.
2f filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2FPdfSecurityPage 35 Click to open a dialog where you enter the passwords.
34 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fvisiblebookmark 57 Select to show bookmarks down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Feffects 4c Select to export Impress slide transition effects to respective PDF effects.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fwindow 41 Select to hide the reader's controls when the document is active.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Ftoolbar 40 Select to hide the reader's toolbar when the document is active.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fdisplay 5e Select to generate a PDF file that is shown with the document title in the reader's title bar.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fopen 69 Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window in front of all other windows.
31 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fvisiblelevel 57 Select to show bookmarks down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fmenubar 41 Select to hide the reader's menu bar when the document is active.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fcenter 52 Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a reader window centered on screen.
31 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fallbookmarks 52 Select to show all outline levels as bookmarks when the reader opens the PDF file.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fresize 5a Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a window displaying the whole initial page.
31 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2F@@nowidget@@ 5a Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a window displaying the whole initial page.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2FPdfUserInterfacePage 5a Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a window displaying the whole initial page.
17 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsPDF a5 Shows the Export as PDF dialog, exports the current document to Portable Document Format (PDF), and then opens an email sending window with the PDF as an attachment.
1f uui%2Fui%2Fmacrowarnmedium%2Fok 25 Allows macros in the document to run.
33 uui%2Fui%2Fmacrowarnmedium%2FalwaysTrustCheckbutton 3d Adds the current macro source to the list of trusted sources.
2c uui%2Fui%2Fmacrowarnmedium%2FviewSignsButton 30 Opens a dialog where you can view the signature.
2c uui%2Fui%2Fmacrowarnmedium%2FMacroWarnMedium 6a Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialog box to set the options.
23 uui%2Fui%2Fmacrowarnmedium%2Fcancel 2d Does not allow macros in the document to run.
29 uui%2Fui%2Fmacrowarnmedium%2F@@nowidget@@ 6a Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialog box to set the options.
23 SFX2_HID_WARNING_SECURITY_HYPERLINK 6a Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialog box to set the options.
33 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fselectcertificatedialog%2Fdescription 21 Type a purpose for the signature.
30 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fselectcertificatedialog%2Fviewcert 4a Abre o  Ver certificado , na cal pode examinar o certificado seleccionado.
32 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fselectcertificatedialog%2Fsignatures 4f Seleccione o certificado que desexa asinar dixitalmente o documento actual con.
3f xmlsec%2Fui%2Fselectcertificatedialog%2FSelectCertificateDialog 52 Seleccione o certificado que desexa  asinar dixitalmente  do documento actual con.
34 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fselectcertificatedialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 52 Seleccione o certificado que desexa  asinar dixitalmente  do documento actual con.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptimalcolwidthdialog%2Fdefault 57 Defines the optimal column width in order to display the entire contents of the column.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptimalcolwidthdialog%2Fvalue 61 Defines additional spacing between the longest entry in a column and the vertical column borders.
37 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptimalrowheightdialog%2Fdefault 36 Restores the default value for the optimal row height.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptimalrowheightdialog%2Fvalue 57 Sets additional spacing between the largest character in a row and the cell boundaries.
1a .uno%3ASetOptimalRowHeight 38 Determines the optimal row height for the selected rows.
13 .uno%3ACommandPopup 58 Allows to search and execute all commands available in application menus by their names.
d .uno%3AShrink 2b Reduces the font size of the selected text.
13 .uno%3ASpacePara115 3d Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to 1.15 lines.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fsignsignatureline%2Fedit_comment 6b Enter comments about the signature. The comments are displayed in the Description field of the certificate.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fsignsignatureline%2Flabel_hint_text 63 This area displays the instructions entered by the document creator when adding the signature line.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fsignsignatureline%2Fbtn_select_certificate af Click on the Select Certificate button to open the Select Certificate dialog box, where your certificates are listed. Select the certificate suitable for signing the document.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fsignsignatureline%2Fedit_name 6a Enter your name as signer of the document. Your name will be inserted above the signature horizontal line.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fsignatureline%2F@@nowidget@@ 6a Enter your name as signer of the document. Your name will be inserted above the signature horizontal line.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fsignatureline%2FSignSignatureLineDialog 6a Enter your name as signer of the document. Your name will be inserted above the signature horizontal line.
21 SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_UPDATEBYEXAMPLE 96 The manually formatted attributes of the text at the cursor position in the document will be added to the style that is selected in the Styles window.
1b .uno%3AStyleUpdateByExample 96 The manually formatted attributes of the text at the cursor position in the document will be added to the style that is selected in the Styles window.
e .uno%3AWebHtml 96 Crea unha copia temporal do documento actual no formato HTML, abre o navegador web por omisión do sistema, e mostra o ficheiro HTML no navegador web.
22 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_REMOVE 4a Exclúe o elemento seleccionado (elemento, atributo, envío ou conexión).
24 svx%2Fui%2Fxformspage%2FTBI_ITEM_ADD 87 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para engadir un novo elemento (elemento, atributo, envío ou conexión) como un subitem do elemento actual.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fxformspage%2FTBI_ITEM_ADD_ATTRIBUTE 87 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para engadir un novo elemento (elemento, atributo, envío ou conexión) como un subitem do elemento actual.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fxformspage%2FTBI_ITEM_ADD_ELEMENT 87 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para engadir un novo elemento (elemento, atributo, envío ou conexión) como un subitem do elemento actual.
27 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD_ELEMENT 87 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para engadir un novo elemento (elemento, atributo, envío ou conexión) como un subitem do elemento actual.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fxformspage%2FTBI_ITEM_EDIT 5f Abre un diálogo para editar o elemento seleccionado (elemento, atributo, envío ou conexión).
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Finstancesedit 38 Abre un diálogo onde pode modificar a instancia actual.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Finstancesadd 37 Abre un diálogo onde pode engadir unha nova instancia.
18 .uno%3AShowDataNavigator 3c Especifica a estrutura de datos do documento XForms actuais.
29 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD_ATTRIBUTE 87 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para engadir un novo elemento (elemento, atributo, envío ou conexión) como un subitem do elemento actual.
28 svx%2Fui%2Faddmodeldialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 4b Abre a caixa de diálogo Engadir modelo onde podes engadir un modelo XForm.
1f SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD 87 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para engadir un novo elemento (elemento, atributo, envío ou conexión) como un subitem do elemento actual.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Finstancesdetails 39 Cambia a visualización para mostrar ou ocultar detalles.
1f svx%2Fui%2Fxformspage%2Ftoolbar 3c Especifica a estrutura de datos do documento XForms actuais.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Fmodelsremove 46 Exclúe o modelo XForm seleccionado. Non pode borrar o último modelo.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fxformspage%2F@@nowidget@@ 3c Especifica a estrutura de datos do documento XForms actuais.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Fmodelsbutton 2b Engade, renomear e eliminar modelos XForms.
20 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_EDIT 5f Abre un diálogo para editar o elemento seleccionado (elemento, atributo, envío ou conexión).
2a svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Finstancesremove 42 Exclúe a instancia actual. Non pode eliminar a última instancia.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Fmodelsedit 26 Redenomina o modelo Xform seleccionado
24 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Finstances 46 Este botón ten submenús para engadir, editar ou eliminar instancias.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2F@@nowidget@@ 3c Especifica a estrutura de datos do documento XForms actuais.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2FDataNavigator 3c Especifica a estrutura de datos do documento XForms actuais.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Fmodelslist 2b Selecciona o modelo XForms que desexa usar.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fxformspage%2FTBI_ITEM_REMOVE 4a Exclúe o elemento seleccionado (elemento, atributo, envío ou conexión).
24 svx%2Fui%2Fdatanavigator%2Fmodelsadd 4b Abre a caixa de diálogo Engadir modelo onde podes engadir un modelo XForm.
20 svx%2Fui%2Faddmodeldialog%2Fname 16 Definir a resolución.
22 svx%2Fui%2Faddmodeldialog%2Fmodify d4 When enabled, the document status will be set to "modified" when you change any form control that is bound to any data in the model. When not enabled, such a change does not set the document status to "modified".
2c svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Fcalculatecond 58 The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can enter the calculation.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Fcalculate 24 Declara que o elemento é calculado.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 53 Engade un novo elemento ou edita o elemento seleccionado na XForms Datos Navigator.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Frequired 35 Especifica se o elemento debe ser incluído no XForm.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Fname 1d Introduza o nome do elemento.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Fdatatype 38 Seleccione o tipo de datos para o elemento seleccionado.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Frelevantcond 2a Declara o elemento como unha restricción.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Fvalue 3c Insire un valor predeterminado para o elemento seleccionado.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Fconstraint 2a Declara o elemento como unha restricción.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Frelevant 22 Declara o elemento como relevante.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Fconstraintcond 63 The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can specify the constraint condition.
30 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2FAddDataItemDialog 53 Engade un novo elemento ou edita o elemento seleccionado na XForms Datos Navigator.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Freadonlycond 24 Declara que o elemento é calculado.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Frequiredcond 73 The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can enter used namespaces and full XPath expressions.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fadddataitemdialog%2Freadonly 22 Declara o elemento só de lectura.
24 svx%2Fui%2Faddconditiondialog%2Fedit 61 Abre a caixa de diálogo Form Namespaces onde podes engadir, editar ou eliminar espazos de nomes.
26 svx%2Fui%2Faddconditiondialog%2Fresult 2b Mostra unha previsualización do resultado.
29 svx%2Fui%2Faddconditiondialog%2Fcondition 1a Introduza unha condición.
32 svx%2Fui%2Faddconditiondialog%2FAddConditionDialog 5b Add a condition in this subdialog of the Add Item / Edit Item dialog of the Data Navigator.
2c svx%2Fui%2Faddconditiondialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 5b Add a condition in this subdialog of the Add Item / Edit Item dialog of the Data Navigator.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fnamespacedialog%2Fdelete 20 Elimina o namespace seleccionado
21 svx%2Fui%2Fnamespacedialog%2Fedit 1e Edita o namespace escollido(s)
20 svx%2Fui%2Fnamespacedialog%2Fadd 28 Engade un novo espazo de nomes á lista.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fnamespacedialog%2Fnamespaces 3d Lista os espazos de nomes actualmente definidas para a forma.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fnamespacedialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 8d Use este diálogo para organizar espazos de nomes. Pode acceder a este diálogo mediante o diálogo Engadir condición do Navegador de datos.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_LENGTH 2f Especifica o número de caracteres dunha cadea.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MIN_INCLUSIVE 30 Especifica un ata límite inferior para valores.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_EXCLUSIVE 33 Especifica un superior exclusivo destino a valores.
27 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_FRACTION_DIGITS 6e Especifica o número máximo total de díxitos fracionários que os valores do tipo de datos decimal pode ter.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XML_DATA_MODEL 4f Seleccione un modelo a partir da lista de todos os modelos no documento actual.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_PATTERN 124 Specifies a regular expression pattern. Strings validated against the data type must conform to this pattern to be valid. The XSD data type syntax for regular expressions is different from the regular expression syntax used elsewhere in %PRODUCTNAME, for example in the Find & Replace dialog.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_LENGTH 3b Especifica o número máximo de caracteres para unha cadea.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BINDING_NAME d9 Seleccione ou introduza un nome de conexión. Seleccionar o nome dunha asociados vinculantes a conexión co control de formulario. Introducir un novo nome crea unha nova conexión e asocia-lo co control de formulario.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MIN_LENGTH 3b Especifica o número mínimo de caracteres para unha cadea.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_READONLY 22 Declara o elemento só de lectura.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_REQUIRED 35 Especifica se o elemento debe ser incluído no XForm.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_INCLUSIVE 33 Especifica un ata límite superior para os valores.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BIND_EXPRESSION 71 Enter the DOM node to bind the control model to. Click the ... button for a dialog to enter the XPath expression.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_RELEVANT 22 Declara o elemento como relevante.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CONSTRAINT 2a Declara o elemento como unha restricción.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CALCULATION 24 Declara que o elemento é calculado.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MIN_EXCLUSIVE 36 Especifica un exclusivo límite inferior para valores.
24 EXTENSIONS_UID_PROP_REMOVE_DATA_TYPE 75 Seleccione un tipo de datos definido polo usuario e prema o botón para borrar o tipo de datos definido polo usuario.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_DATA_TYPE 3c Seleccione un tipo de datos que o control debe ser validado.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_TOTAL_DIGITS 60 Especifica o número máximo total de díxitos que os valores do tipo de datos decimal pode ter.
21 EXTENSIONS_UID_PROP_ADD_DATA_TYPE c6 Prema no botón para abrir unha caixa de diálogo onde pode introducir o nome dun novo tipo de datos definido polo usuario. O novo tipo de datos herda todas as facetas do tipo de datos seleccionado.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_WHITESPACES fa Specifies how whitespaces are to be handled when a string of the current data type is being processed. Possible values are "Preserve", "Replace", and "Collapse". The semantics follow the definition at https://www.w3.org/TR/xmlschema-2/#rf-whiteSpace.
13 .uno%3APrintDefault 65 Prema a icona Imprimir para imprimir o documento activo coa configuración de impresión predefinida.
11 .uno%3AInsertDraw 7e Prema para abrir o pechar a barra Debuxo, na que pode engadir formas, liñas, texto e textos explicativos ao documento actual.
12 .uno%3ADrawCaption 169 Debuxa, desde onde se arrastra, unha liña que remata nun texto explicativo rectangular con dirección horizontal. Para redimensionar un texto explicativo arrastre unha das súas agarradoiras. Para engadirlle texto, prema no seu bordo e escriba ou pegue o texto. Pode arredondalo arrastrando a agarradoira do canto maior cando o apuntador se converte nunha man.
b .uno%3ALine 8b Debuxa unha liña recta ao arrastrar o rato no documento. Para restrinxir a liña a 45 graos, manteña premida a tecla Maiús ao arrastrar.
e .uno%3AEllipse ad Draws an oval where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the oval, and drag to the size you want. To draw a circle, hold down Shift while you drag.
13 .uno%3AVerticalText 15d Debuxa unha caixa de texto con dirección vertical ao premer ou arrastrar o cursor. Prema calquera lugar do documento e escriba ou pegue o seu texto. Tamén pode mover o cursor ata o lugar onde desexa engadir o texto, arrastrar unha caixa de texto e escribir ou pegar o texto. Só dispoñíbel cando está activado o soporte para idiomas asiáticos.
b .uno%3ARect c3 Draws a rectangle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rectangle, and drag to the size you want. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag.
17 .uno%3APolygon_Unfilled 12a Debuxa unha liña composta dunha serie de segmentos en liña recta. Arrastre para debuxar un segmento da liña, prema para definir o seu punto final e arrastre para debuxar un novo segmento. Prema dúas veces para rematar o debuxo da liña. Se o fai no seu punto inicial creará unha forma pechada.
16 .uno%3ABezier_Unfilled 15c Draws a smooth Bezier curve. Click where you want the curve to start, drag, release, and then move the pointer to where you want the curve to end and click. Move the pointer and click again to add a straight line segment to the curve. Double-click to finish drawing the curve. To create a closed shape, double click the starting point of the curve.
a .uno%3AArc 16d Debuxa un arco no documento. Para debuxar un arco, arrastre a forma oval ata conseguir o tamaño desexado e a seguir prema para definir o punto inicial do arco. Mova o punteiro ata o lugar en que vai colocar o extremo do arco e prema. Non é necesario premer na forma oval. Para debuxar un arco circular, manteña premida a tecla Maiús mentres arrastra o punteiro.
a .uno%3APie 1bb Debuxa unha forma chea e definida polo arco dunha forma oval e dúas liñas de raio no documento. Para debuxar un sector elíptico, arrastre unha forma oval ata conseguir o tamaño desexado e despois prema para definir a primeira liña de raio. Mova o apuntador ata o lugar en que quere colocar a segunda liña de raio e prema. Non é preciso premer na forma oval. Para debuxar un sector circular, manteña premida a tecla Maiús ao arrastrar.
10 .uno%3ACircleCut 1e2 Debuxa unha forma chea, definida no documento polo arco dun círculo e unha liña de diámetro. Para debuxar un segmento circular, arrastre un círculo ata conseguir o tamaño desexado e despois prema para definir o punto inicial da liña de diámetro. Mova o apuntador ata o lugar onde queira colocar o punto final da liña de diámetro e prema. Non é preciso premer no círculo. Para debuxar un segmento elíptico, manteña premida a tecla Maiús ao arrastrar o punteiro do rato.
18 .uno%3AFreeline_Unfilled be Draws a freeform line where you drag in the current document. To end the line, release the mouse button. To draw a closed shape, release the mouse button near the starting point of the line.
13 .uno%3AText_Marquee c8 Inserts animated text with horizontal text direction into the current document. Drag a text box, and then type or paste your text. To assign an animation effect, choose Format - Text - Text Animation.
16 .uno%3AVerticalCaption 1aa Debuxa, desde onde se arrastra, unha liña que remata nun texto explicativo rectangular con dirección vertical. Para redimensionar o texto explicativo arrastre unha das súas agarradoiras. Para engadir texto prema o seu bordo e escriba ou pegue o texto. Pode arredondalo arrastrando a agarradoira do canto maior cando o apuntador se converte nunha man. Só dispoñíbel cando está activado o soporte para idiomas asiáticos.
11 .uno%3ASpinButton 19 Crea un botón xiratorio.
12 .uno%3AFileControl 31 Crea un botón que permite seleccionar ficheiros.
13 .uno%3APatternField 19 Crea un campo de patrón.
14 .uno%3ACurrencyField 18 Crea un campo monetario.
10 .uno%3ATimeField 16 Crea un campo de hora.
f .uno%3AGroupBox 33 Creates a frame to visually group several controls.
16 .uno%3AFormDesignTools 32 Abre a barra de ferramentas Deseño de formulario.
d .uno%3AConfig 61 The Form Controls toolbar or sub-menu contains tools that you need to create an interactive form.
b .uno%3AEdit 19 Crea unha caixa de texto.
12 .uno%3AImagebutton 28 Crea un botón que se mostra como imaxe.
f .uno%3ACheckBox 1d Crea caixas de verificación.
c .uno%3ALabel 2d Crea un campo para a visualización de texto.
12 .uno%3ARadioButton 19 Creates an option button.
14 .uno%3ANavigationBar 19 Creates a Navigation bar.
15 .uno%3AFormattedField 18 Crea un campo formatado.
10 .uno%3ADateField 16 Crea un campo de data.
e .uno%3AListBox 13 Creates a list box.
13 .uno%3AImageControl 52 Crea un control de imaxe. Só pode usarse para engadir imaxes dunha base de datos.
f .uno%3AComboBox 20 Crea unha caixa de combinación.
10 .uno%3AScrollBar 21 Crea unha barra de desprazamento.
11 .uno%3APushbutton 18 Crea un botón de ordes.
b .uno%3AGrid 34 Creates a table control to display a database table.
13 .uno%3ANumericField 18 Crea un campo numérico.
18 .uno%3AConvertToCurrency 39 O control seleccionado transfórmase nun campo monetario.
18 .uno%3AChangeControlType 71 Abre un submenú que permite seleccionar un tipo de control para substituír o control seleccionado no documento.
16 .uno%3AConvertToButton 30 O control seleccionado transfórmase nun botón.
18 .uno%3AConvertToCheckBox 42 O control seleccionado transfórmase nunha caixa de verificación.
15 .uno%3AConvertToCombo 41 O control seleccionado transfórmase nunha caixa de combinación.
15 .uno%3AConvertToFixed 34 O control seleccionado transfórmase nunha etiqueta.
19 .uno%3AConvertToFormatted 39 O control seleccionado transfórmase nun campo formatado.
14 .uno%3AConvertToList 3a O control seleccionado transfórmase nunha caixa de lista.
14 .uno%3AConvertToEdit 3a O control seleccionado transfórmase nunha caixa de texto.
14 .uno%3AConvertToDate 38 O control seleccionado transfórmase nun campo de datos.
15 .uno%3AConvertToRadio 3b O control seleccionado transfórmase nun botón de opción.
18 .uno%3AConvertToImageBtn 39 O control seleccionado transfórmase nun botón de imaxe.
1c .uno%3AConvertToImageControl 3a O control seleccionado transfórmase nun control de imaxe.
17 .uno%3AConvertToPattern 3a O control seleccionado transfórmase nun campo de patrón.
17 .uno%3AConvertToNumeric 39 O control seleccionado transfórmase nun campo numérico.
1b .uno%3AConvertToFileControl 43 O control seleccionado transfórmase nunha selección de ficheiros.
14 .uno%3AConvertToTime 37 O control seleccionado transfórmase nun campo horario.
12 SID_FM_SHOWALLCOLS 2a Click All if you want to show all columns.
f SID_FM_SHOWCOLS 3f Calls a submenu where you can select the columns to show again.
e SID_FM_HIDECOL 1e Oculta a columna seleccionada.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fshowcoldialog%2FShowColDialog 7e In the Show Columns dialog you can select the columns to be shown. Hold down the Shift or Ctrl key to select multiple entries.
14 SID_FM_SHOWCOLS_MORE 2a Abre a caixa de diálogo Mostrar columnas.
10 SID_FM_DELETECOL 1f Elimina a columna seleccionada.
10 SID_FM_CHANGECOL 76 Abre un submenú para seleccionar un campo de datos que substitúa o campo de datos seleccionado no control de táboa.
10 SID_FM_INSERTCOL 57 Abre un submenú para seleccionar un campo de datos e incorporalo no control de táboa.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_FM_PROPDLG_TABCTR 40 Opens a dialog for editing the properties of a selected control.
18 .uno%3AControlProperties 40 Opens a dialog for editing the properties of a selected control.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ENABLE_VISIBLE 68 Defines whether the control will be visible in live mode. In design mode, the control is always visible.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ICONSIZE 52 Specifies whether the icons in a selected Navigation bar should be small or large.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_FILTERSORT 5f Specifies to show or hide the filtering and sorting items in a selected Navigation bar control.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_NAVIGATION 54 Specifies to show or hide the navigation items in a selected Navigation bar control.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCALEIMAGE 31 Resizes the image to fit the size of the control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FORMATKEY 5a Specifies the format code for the control. Click the ... button to select the format code.
17 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TAG 4d Specifies additional information or a descriptive text for the control field.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEFORMAT 37 You can define the desired format for the time display.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINEEND_FORMAT 81 Nos campos de texto seleccione o código de fin de liña que se vai utilizar ao escribir un texto nunha columna de base de datos.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ROWHEIGHT 32 Specifies the row height of a table control field.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FONT 3a Select the font for the text that is in the control field.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LITERALMASK 76 Defines the literal mask. The literal mask contains the initial values and is always visible after downloading a form.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOWTHOUSANDSEP 1e Inserts a thousands separator.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TABSTOP 56 The "Tabstop" property determines if a control field can be selected with the Tab key.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_BUTTON 75 The "Default button" property specifies that the corresponding button will be operated when you press the Return key.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_TIME 1e Estabelece a hora predefinida.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BLOCKINCREMENT 6b Especifica o valor que se debe sumar ou subtraer cando o usuario preme na frecha da barra de desprazamento.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MIN 31 Specify the minimum value of a scrollbar control.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEDEFAULT 2d Sets the default value for the control field.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULTVALUE 52 Indica o texto predeterminado dunha caixa de texto ou dunha caixa de combinación.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SPINVALUE 2d Sets the default value for the control field.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SELECT_SEQ 3a Specifies the list box entry to mark as the default entry.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TABINDEX 77 The "Tab order" property determines the order in which the controls are focused in the form when you press the Tab key.
27 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SCROLLVALUE 29 Sets the default value for the scrollbar.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BORDER 62 Determines if the field's border should be displayed "Without frame", with a "3-D look" or "Flat".
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ECHO_CHAR b5 If the text box is used as a password input, enter the ASCII code of the display character. This character is displayed instead of the characters typed by the user for the password.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAVIGATIONBAR 59 Specifies whether to display the Navigation bar on the lower border of the table control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_STRICTFORMAT 5b If the strict format function is activated (Yes), only the allowed characters are accepted.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_AUTOCOMPLETE 2d Assigns the AutoFill function to a combo box.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HELPTEXT 5b Provides the option of entering a help text that will be displayed as a tip on the control.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUEMAX 68 Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HELPURL 83 Specifies a batch label in URL spelling which refers to a help document and which can be called with the help of the control field.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURRSYM_POSITION 65 Determines if the currency symbol is displayed before or after the number when using currency fields.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WHEEL_BEHAVIOR 165 Sets whether the value changes when the user scrolls a mouse wheel. Never: No change of the value. When focused: (default) The value changes when the control has the focus and the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled. Always: The value changes when the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled, no matter which control has the focus.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_POSITIONY 3b Define a posición en Y do control en relación á áncora.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_DATE 1e Estabelece a data predefinida.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WIDTH 1c Define a largura do control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMIN 67 You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEFORMAT 40 Here you can determine the format you want for the date readout.
4d hid%2Fmodules%2Fspropctrlr%2Fui%2Flabelselectiondialog%2FLabelSelectionDialog 32 Specifies the source for the label of the control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HIDDEN_VALUE 3f You can enter the data that is inherited by the hidden control.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINEINCREMENT 5a Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks the Arrow icon on the scrollbar.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUESTEP 21 Determines spin button intervals.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REPEAT_DELAY 3d Specifies the delay in milliseconds between repeating events.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TOGGLE 122 Specifies if a Push button behaves as a Toggle Button. If you set Toggle to "Yes", you can switch between the "selected" and "not selected" control states when you click the button or press the Spacebar while the control has the focus. A button in the "selected" state appears "pressed in".
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUEMIN 67 You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINECOUNT 89 Specifies how many lines should be displayed in the dropdown list. This setting is only active if you chose "Yes" in the Dropdown option.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BUTTONTYPE 53 The "Action" property determines the action that occurs when you activate a button.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_IMAGEPOSITION 4f Specifies the alignment option for text or graphics that are used on a control.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_READONLY 4d Determines if the control is read-only ("Yes") or if it can be edited ("No").
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ENABLED 5d If a control field has the property "Enabled" (Yes), the form user can use the control field.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DROPDOWN 42 Specifies whether the combo box should dropdown (Yes) or not (No).
3f modules%2Fspropctrlr%2Fui%2Flabelselectiondialog%2Fnoassignment 5e Check the No assignment box to remove the link between a control and the assigned label field.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MAX 31 Specify the maximum value of a scrollbar control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_IMAGE_URL 71 The "Graphics" property specifies the graphic's path and file name that you want to have displayed on the button.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REPEAT 7d Specifies if the action of a control such as a spin button repeats when you click the control and hold the mouse button down.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALIGN 4f Specifies the alignment option for text or graphics that are used on a control.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TRISTATE 77 Specifies whether a check box can also represent ZERO values of a linked database apart from the TRUE and FALSE values.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CONTROLLABEL 32 Specifies the source for the label of the control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_RECORDMARKER 73 Specifies whether the first column is displayed with row labels, in which the current record is marked by an arrow.
3f modules%2Fspropctrlr%2Fui%2Flabelselectiondialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 32 Specifies the source for the label of the control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FOCUSONCLICK 5e If you set this option to "Yes", the Push button receives the focus when you click the button.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VISIBLESIZE bb Specifies the size of scrollbar thumb in "value units". A value of ("Scroll value max." minus "Scroll value min." ) / 2 would result in a thumb which occupies half of the background area.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEMIN 32 Determines the minimum time that a user can enter.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_PRINTABLE 50 Specifies whether you want the control field to appear in a document's printout.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TARGET_FRAME 6b Specifies the target frame to display the document that is opened by the "Open document / web page" action.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HEIGHT 1b Define a altura do control.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HSCROLL 37 Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BACKGROUNDCOLOR 2f Sets the background color of the control field.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VSCROLL 37 Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURRENCYSYMBOL 3e You can enter a character or a string for the currency symbol.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_STATE 42 Specifies whether an option or a check box is selected by default.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_SCROLLBARS 37 Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SYMBOLCOLOR 62 Especifica a cor dos símbolos dos controis, por exemplo, as frechas dunha barra de desprazamento.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_POSITIONX 3b Define a posición en X do control en relación á áncora.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPININCREMENT 58 Determines intervals to add or subtract with each activation of the spin button control.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MAXTEXTLEN 41 Defines the maximum number of characters that the user can enter.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPIN 6e The "Yes" option transforms the control field into a spin button, where corresponding arrow buttons are added.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMAX 68 Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPINVALUE_MAX 68 Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MULTISELECTION 36 Allows you to select more than one item in a list box.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MULTILINE cf Allows you to use line breaks and formatting in a control field, such as a text box or label. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. Select "Multi-line with formatting" to enter formatted text.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TEXTTYPE cf Allows you to use line breaks and formatting in a control field, such as a text box or label. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. Select "Multi-line with formatting" to enter formatted text.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WORDBREAK 24 Displays text on more than one line.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_STRINGITEMLIST 105 Defines the list entries visible in the document. Open this list and type your text. Use Shift+Enter for a new line. With list and combo boxes, you can define the list entries that will be visible in the document. Open the List entries field and type your text.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ANCHOR_TYPE 20 Define onde se ancora o control.
29 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HIDEINACTIVESELECTION 6a Specifies whether a text selection on a control remains selected when the focus is no longer on a control.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ORIENTATION 50 Specifies the horizontal or vertical orientation for a scrollbar or spin button.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_POSITION 55 Specifies to show or hide the positioning items in a selected Navigation bar control.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_RECORDACTIONS 50 Specifies to show or hide the action items in a selected Navigation bar control.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEMAX 54 Determines a time which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VISUALEFFECT 65 Specifies whether Check boxes and Option buttons are displayed in a 3D look (default) or a flat look.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LABEL 57 The "Label" property sets the label of the control field that is displayed in the form.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DECIMAL_ACCURACY 4c Determines the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BORDERCOLOR 56 Specifies the border color for controls that have the "Border" property set to "flat".
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEMIN 33 Determines the earliest date that a user can enter.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TARGET_URL 57 Specifies the URL address that opens when you click an Open document / web page button.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEMAX 54 Determines a date which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPINVALUE_MIN 67 You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EDITMASK 75 Defines the edit mask. By specifying a character code you can determine what the user can enter in the control field.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAME 9f On the Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the control field. On the Form Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the form.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CELL_EXCHANGE_TYPE 4a Select the mode of linking a list box with a linked cell on a spreadsheet.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BOUND_CELL 85 Specifies the reference to a linked cell on a spreadsheet. The live state or contents of the control are linked to the cell contents.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FILTERPROPOSAL f9 While designing your form, you can set the "Filter proposal" property for each text box in the Data tab of the corresponding Properties dialog. In subsequent searches in the filter mode, you can select from all information contained in these fields.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EMPTY_IS_NULL cd Defines how an empty string input should be handled. If set to "Yes", an input string of length zero will be treated as a value NULL. If set to "No", any input will be treated as-is without any conversion.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LISTSOURCE b3 With database forms, specifies the data source for the list content of the form-element. This field can be used to define a value list for documents without a database connection.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LISTSOURCETYPE 3e Determines the data to fill the lists in list and combo boxes.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BOUNDCOLUMN a9 Use an index to specify the table field or table SQL query to link to the field that is provided under Data field. Valid values for this property are 1, 2, 3, and so on.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CONTROLSOURCE 49 Specifies the field of the data source table to which the control refers.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REFVALUE d3 You can enter a reference value for the web form, which will be remitted to a server when sending the form. With database forms, the value entered is written in the database field, assigned to the control field.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LIST_CELL_RANGE 5a Enter a cell range that contains the entries for a list box or combo box on a spreadsheet.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_UNCHECKEDREFVALUE 112 Check boxes and radio buttons in spreadsheets can be bound to cells in the current document. If the control is enabled, the value you enter in Reference value (on) is copied to the cell. If the control is disabled, the value from Reference value (off) is copied to the cell.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEEXITED 50 The Mouse outside event takes place when the mouse is outside the control field.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSERELEASED 71 The Mouse button released event occurs if the mouse button is released while the mouse pointer is on the control.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_FOCUSGAINED 51 The When receiving focus event takes place if a control field receives the focus.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ACTIONPERFORMED 3a The Execute action event occurs when an action is started.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_KEYTYPED 5b The Key pressed event occurs when the user presses any key while the control has the focus.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_CHANGED 82 The Changed event takes place when the control loses the focus and the content of the control has changed since it lost the focus.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ITEMSTATECHANGED 51 The When receiving focus event takes place if a control field receives the focus.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_TEXTCHANGED 54 The Text modified event takes place if you enter or modify a text in an input field.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEPRESSED 6f The Mouse button pressed event occurs if the mouse button is pressed while the mouse pointer is on the control.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_FOCUSLOST 4b The When losing focus event takes place if a control field loses the focus.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_KEYUP 5d The Key released event occurs when the user releases any key while the control has the focus.
29 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEACTIONPERFORMED 4d This event takes place before an action is triggered by clicking the control.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEENTERED 4c The Mouse inside event takes place if the mouse is inside the control field.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEDRAGGED 65 The Mouse moved while key pressed event takes place when the mouse is dragged while a key is pressed.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEMOVED 41 The Mouse moved event occurs if the mouse moves over the control.
15 .uno%3AFormProperties 60 In this dialog you can specify, among others, the data source and the events for the whole form.
18 HID_PROP_SUBMIT_ENCODING 3d Especifica o tipo de codificación da transferencia de datos.
16 HID_PROP_SUBMIT_METHOD 4d Especifica o método para transferir a información do formulario completado.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ERROROCCURRED 58 The Error occurred event is activated if an error occurs when accessing the data source.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEPARAMETER 63 The Fill parameters event occurs when the form to be loaded has parameters that must be filled out.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_POSITIONED 60 The After record change event occurs directly after the current record pointer has been changed.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_POSITIONING 62 The Before record change event occurs before the current record pointer - SQL cursor - is changed.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_BEFOREUPDATE 6e The Before update event occurs before the control content changed by the user is written into the data source.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_AFTERUPDATE 72 The After update event occurs after the control content changed by the user has been written into the data source.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RESETTED 3d The After resetting event occurs after a form has been reset.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVERESETTED 37 The Prior to reset event occurs before a form is reset.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_UNLOADING 67 The Before unloading event occurs before the form is unloaded; that is, separated from its data source.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEROWCHANGE 5a The Before record action event occurs before the current record or record set are changed.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_LOADED 46 The When loading event occurs directly after the form has been loaded.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_UNLOADED 73 The When unloading event occurs directly after the form has been unloaded; that is, separated from its data source.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RELOADED 4a The When reloading event occurs directly after the form has been reloaded.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RELOADING 3e The Before reloading event occurs before the form is reloaded.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_SUBMITTED 40 The Before submitting event occurs before the form data is sent.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_CONFIRMDELETE 51 The Confirm deletion event occurs as soon as data has been deleted from the form.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ROWCHANGE 58 The After record action event occurs directly after the current record has been changed.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SLAVEFIELDS 6b If you create a subform, enter the variable where possible values from the parent form field can be stored.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATASOURCE 37 Defines the data source to which the form should refer.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATAENTRY 70 Determines if the form only allows the addition of new data (Yes) or if it allows other properties as well (No).
19 HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCETYPE 94 Define se a fonte de datos vai ser unha táboa ou consulta existente na base de datos ou se o formulario vai xerarse a partir dunha instrución SQL.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ESCAPE_PROCESSING 46 Specifies whether the SQL statement is to be analyzed by %PRODUCTNAME.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_ADDITIONS 20 Determines if data can be added.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCE fd Determines the content to be used for the form. The content can be an existing table or a query (previously created in the database), or it can be defined by an SQL-statement. Before you enter a content you have to define the exact type in Content type.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FILTER 9e Introduza as condicións requiridas para filtrar os datos no formulario. As especificacións do filtro seguen as regras de SQL sen empregar a cláusula WHERE.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_EDITS 27 Determines if the data can be modified.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAVIGATION 4d Specifies whether the navigation functions in the lower form bar can be used.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SORT_CRITERIA 9c Specifies the conditions to sort the data in the form. The specification of the sorting conditions follows SQL rules without the use of the ORDER BY clause.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MASTERFIELDS 80 If you create a subform, enter the data field of the parent form responsible for the synchronization between parent and subform.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CYCLE 3f Determines how the navigation should be done using the tab key.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_DELETIONS 26 Determines if the data can be deleted.
2c modules%2Fspropctrlr%2Fui%2Ftaborder%2FautoB 7b Prema no botón Ordenación automática para ordenar automaticamente os controis de acordo coa súa posición no documento.
2c modules%2Fspropctrlr%2Fui%2Ftaborder%2FdownB 7b Para mover o control seleccionado unha posición cara a abaixo na orde de tabulación, prema no botón Mover cara a abaixo.
2a modules%2Fspropctrlr%2Fui%2Ftaborder%2FupB 7b Para mover o control seleccionado unha posición cara a arriba na orde de tabulación, prema no botón Mover cara a arriba.
2f modules%2Fspropctrlr%2Fui%2Ftaborder%2FCTRLtree 7b Lista os controis do formulario, que se poden seleccionar coa tecla de tabulación na orde especificada de arriba a abaixo.
10 .uno%3ATabDialog 7f Opens the Tab Order dialog so you can modify the order in which control fields get the focus when the user presses the tab key.
d HID_FIELD_SEL 88 The field selection window lists all database fields of the table or query that was specified as the data source in the Form Properties.
f .uno%3AAddField 52 Opens a window where you can select a database field to add to the form or report.
1d .uno%3ASwitchXFormsDesignMode b1 Toggles the Design mode on or off. This function is used to switch quickly between Design and User mode. Activate to edit the form controls, deactivate to use the form controls.
1e .uno%3ASwitchControlDesignMode b1 Toggles the Design mode on or off. This function is used to switch quickly between Design and User mode. Activate to edit the form controls, deactivate to use the form controls.
14 SID_FM_RENAME_OBJECT 1f Renomea o obxecto seleccionado.
d SID_FM_DELETE 1f Elimina a entrada seleccionada.
11 SID_FM_NEW_HIDDEN a6 Creates a hidden control in the selected form that is not displayed on the screen. A hidden control serves to include data that is transmitted together with the form.
f SID_FM_NEW_FORM 23 Creates a new form in the document.
a SID_FM_NEW 8f Engade novos elementos ao formulario. A función Engadir só pode seleccionarse se hai un formulario seleccionado no Explorador de formularios.
16 SVX_HID_FORM_NAVIGATOR 68 The Form Navigator contains a list of all created (logical) forms with the corresponding control fields.
1a .uno%3AShowPropertyBrowser 3d Abre a caixa de diálogo Propiedades da entrada seleccionada.
15 .uno%3AShowFmExplorer 97 Abre o Navegador de formularios. O Navegador de formularios mostra todos os formularios e subformularios do documento actual, cos respectivos controis.
34 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Ftableselectionpage%2Ftable 1d Especifica a táboa desexada.
39 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Ftableselectionpage%2Fdatasource 3a Especifica a fonte de datos que contén a táboa desexada.
38 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fcontentfieldpage%2Fselectfield 3b Mostra os campos de datos aceptados no campo de formulario.
32 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fcontenttablepage%2Ftable 71 Seleccione no campo Táboa a táboa que contén o campo de datos cuxo contido se vai mostrar no campo de control.
3e DBP_EDIT_RID_PAGE_LCW_CONTENTSELECTION_FIELD_ET_DISPLAYEDFIELD 56 Especifica o campo cuxos datos deben mostrarse nas caixas de lista ou de combinación.
3e DBP_LISTBOX_RID_PAGE_LCW_CONTENTSELECTION_FIELD_LB_SELECTFIELD 47 Mostra os campos de táboa escollidos na páxina anterior do asistente.
33 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Ffieldlinkpage%2Flisttable 6e Especifica o campo de datos da táboa ligada que está relacionado co campo da táboa de valores especificado.
34 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Ffieldlinkpage%2Fvaluefield 62 Especifica o campo de datos do formulario actual que debe relacionarse cun campo da táboa ligada.
42 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptiondbfieldpage%2FstoreInFieldCombobox 4b Specifies the data field where the combination field value should be saved.
3b modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptiondbfieldpage%2FnoRadiobutton 7a Specifies that the value of this combination field will not be written in the database and will only be saved in the form.
3c modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptiondbfieldpage%2FyesRadiobutton 6d Specifies whether the user's entered or selected combination field value should be saved in a database field.
13 .uno%3AOpenReadOnly 3a Opens forms in Design Mode so that the form can be edited.
11 .uno%3AUseWizards 59 Especifica se o asistente debe iniciarse de forma automática ao inserir un novo control.
15 .uno%3ADesignerDialog 67 Specifies whether to show or hide the Styles window, which is where you can assign and organize styles.
11 .uno%3AStyleApply 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
16 .uno%3AStyleApplyState 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
15 SVX_HID_STYLE_LISTBOX 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
13 .uno%3ACharFontName 58 Permítelle seleccionar un nome de tipo de letra na lista ou introducir un directamente.
11 .uno%3AFontHeight 6f Permítelle introducir un tamaño de tipo de letra ou escoller entre os diferentes tamaños presentes na lista.
1f .uno%3ATextdirectionLeftToRight 2f Specifies the horizontal direction of the text.
1f .uno%3ATextdirectionTopToBottom 2d Specifies the vertical direction of the text.
16 .uno%3ADecrementIndent 72 Reduces the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and sets it to the previous default tab position.
16 .uno%3AIncrementIndent 70 Increases the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and sets it to the next default tab position.
10 .uno%3ABackColor 3a Applies current highlighting color to the  text selection.
16 .uno%3ABackgroundColor 9a Prema para abrir a barra de ferramentas onde pode escoller unha cor de fondo para aplicala ao fondo do parágrafo actual ou dos parágrafos seleccionados.
18 .uno%3AParaspaceIncrease 3d Increases the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph.
18 .uno%3AParaspaceDecrease 3d Decreases the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph.
15 .uno%3ASetBorderStyle 7f Premendo na icona Bordos aparece a barra de ferramentas Bordos onde pode modificar o bordo da área dunha folla ou dun obxecto.
10 .uno%3ALineStyle 78 Prema nesta icona para abrir a barra de ferramentas Estilo de liña, a cal permite modificar o estilo de liña do bordo.
15 .uno%3AFrameLineColor 86 Prema na icona Cor de liña (do bordo) para abrir a barra de ferramentas Cor de bordo, que permite cambiar a cor do bordo dun obxecto.
17 .uno%3AToggleAnchorType 2f Allows you to switch between anchoring options.
14 .uno%3AOptimizeTable 6c Abre unha barra de ferramentas que contén funcións para a optimización das filas e columnas dunha táboa.
13 .uno%3ALineEndStyle 80 Abre a barra de ferramentas Puntas de frecha. Use os símbolos mostrados para definir o estilo do extremo da liña seleccionada.
1d .uno%3AToggleObjectRotateMode 1c Roda o obxecto seleccionado.
12 .uno%3AObjectAlign 32 Modifica o aliñamento dos obxectos seleccionados.
15 .uno%3ADecrementLevel 65 Moves a list paragraph where the cursor is located, or selected list paragraphs, down one list level.
13 .uno%3AOutlineRight 65 Moves a list paragraph where the cursor is located, or selected list paragraphs, down one list level.
15 .uno%3AIncrementLevel 63 Moves a list paragraph where the cursor is located, or selected list paragraphs, up one list level.
12 .uno%3AOutlineLeft 63 Moves a list paragraph where the cursor is located, or selected list paragraphs, up one list level.
d .uno%3AMoveUp 6a Moves the paragraph where the cursor is located, or selected paragraphs, to before the previous paragraph.
10 .uno%3AOutlineUp 6a Moves the paragraph where the cursor is located, or selected paragraphs, to before the previous paragraph.
f .uno%3AMoveDown 65 Moves the paragraph where the cursor is located, or selected paragraphs, to after the next paragraph.
12 .uno%3AOutlineDown 65 Moves the paragraph where the cursor is located, or selected paragraphs, to after the next paragraph.
14 .uno%3ADefaultBullet 4d Atribúe viñetas aos parágrafos seleccionados ou elimínallas se as teñen.
e .uno%3AOpenURL 9f Loads a document specified by an entered URL. You can type a new URL, edit an URL, or select one from the list. Displays the full path of the current document.
d .uno%3AReload 3c Substitúe o documento actual pola última versión gardada.
e .uno%3AEditDoc 3b Enables you to edit a read-only document or database table.
11 .uno%3ADSBEditDoc 3f Activa ou desactiva o modo edición da táboa de base de datos.
b .uno%3AStop 5e Click to interrupt the current loading process, Ctrl+click to interrupt all loading processes.
18 .uno%3AExportDirectToPDF 4a Exports the current document directly as PDF. No settings dialog is shown.
15 .uno%3AStatusGetTitle 42 Exhibe información sobre o documento activo de %PRODUCTNAMEBasic.
18 .uno%3AStatusGetPosition 7d Displays the current cursor position in the %PRODUCTNAME Basic document. The row number is specified, then the column number.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdialog%2Freset 39 Resets the entries in the dialog to their original state.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdialog%2Fcancel 21 Closes the dialog without saving.
1c .uno%3ACopyHyperlinkLocation 20 Copies the URL to the clipboard.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdialog%2Fapply 22 Applies the data to your document.
1c .uno%3AOpenHyperlinkOnCursor 30 Opens the hyperlink in your default web browser.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdialog%2Ficon_control 2c Select the type of hyperlink to be inserted.
14 .uno%3AEditHyperlink 1b Opens the Hyperlink dialog.
16 .uno%3ARemoveHyperlink 2a Removes the hyperlink, leaving plain text.
16 .uno%3AHyperlinkDialog 33 Opens a dialog that enables you to edit hyperlinks.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkinternetpage%2Fname 27 Introduza un nome para a hiperligazón.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2Fname 27 Introduza un nome para a hiperligazón.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmailpage%2Findication 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkinternetpage%2Findication 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2Fscript 87 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2Fscript 87 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmailpage%2Fscript 87 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2Fform 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2Fform 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkinternetpage%2FHyperlinkInternetPage 54 Use the Internet page of the Hyperlink dialog to edit hyperlinks with WWW addresses.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkinternetpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 54 Use the Internet page of the Hyperlink dialog to edit hyperlinks with WWW addresses.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2Fname 27 Introduza un nome para a hiperligazón.
33 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkinternetpage%2Flinktyp_internet 1f Creates an "http://" hyperlink.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2Findication 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmailpage%2Fform 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmarkdialog%2FTreeListBox 40 Especifica a posición no documento de destino á cal desexa ir.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmarkdialog%2Fapply 45 Insire o destino no campo Destino da caixa de diálogo Hiperligazón.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkinternetpage%2Fscript 87 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmarkdialog%2Fclose 63 Tras introducir a hiperligazón, prema Pechar para definir a ligazón e saír da caixa de diálogo.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmailpage%2Fname 27 Introduza un nome para a hiperligazón.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkinternetpage%2Fframe c4 Introduza o nome do marco en que desexa abrir o ficheiro ligado ou seleccione un marco predefinido da lista. Se deixa esta caixa está en branco, o ficheiro ligado ábrese na xanela do explorador.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmailpage%2Fframe c4 Introduza o nome do marco en que desexa abrir o ficheiro ligado ou seleccione un marco predefinido da lista. Se deixa esta caixa está en branco, o ficheiro ligado ábrese na xanela do explorador.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2Fframe c4 Introduza o nome do marco en que desexa abrir o ficheiro ligado ou seleccione un marco predefinido da lista. Se deixa esta caixa está en branco, o ficheiro ligado ábrese na xanela do explorador.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2Findication 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkinternetpage%2Ftarget a1 Introduza un URL para o ficheiro que desexe abrir ao premer na hiperligazón. Se non indica un marco de destino, o ficheiro ábrese no documento ou marco actual.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2Fframe c4 Introduza o nome do marco en que desexa abrir o ficheiro ligado ou seleccione un marco predefinido da lista. Se deixa esta caixa está en branco, o ficheiro ligado ábrese na xanela do explorador.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkinternetpage%2Fform 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmailpage%2Fsubject 57 Specifies the subject that is inserted in the subject line of the new message document.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmailpage%2Fadressbook 27 Hides or shows the data source browser.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmailpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 55 On the Mail page in the Hyperlink dialog you can edit hyperlinks for email addresses.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmailpage%2Freceiver 35 Assigns the specified email address to the hyperlink.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkmailpage%2FHyperlinkMailPage 55 On the Mail page in the Hyperlink dialog you can edit hyperlinks for email addresses.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2Fbrowse 24 Opens the Target in Document dialog.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2Ftarget 4c Specifies a target for the hyperlink into the document specified under Path.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2Ffileopen 33 Opens the Open dialog, where you can select a file.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2Fpath a1 Introduza un URL para o ficheiro que desexe abrir ao premer na hiperligazón. Se non indica un marco de destino, o ficheiro ábrese no documento ou marco actual.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2Furl 45 Specifies the URL, which results from the entries in Path and Target.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 72 Hyperlinks to any document or targets in documents can be edited using the Document tab from the Hyperlink dialog.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinkdocpage%2FHyperlinkDocPage 72 Hyperlinks to any document or targets in documents can be edited using the Document tab from the Hyperlink dialog.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2Ftypes 2d Specifies the file type for the new document.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2Fpath 4c Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2Feditlater 48 Specifies that the document is created but it is not immediately opened.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2Feditnow 4e Specifies that the new document is created and immediately opened for editing.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2Fcreate 3a Opens the Select Path dialog, where you can select a path.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 86 Use the New Document tab from the Hyperlink dialog to set up a hyperlink to a new document and create the new document simultaneously.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fhyperlinknewdocpage%2FHyperlinkNewDocPage 86 Use the New Document tab from the Hyperlink dialog to set up a hyperlink to a new document and create the new document simultaneously.
13 .uno%3APreviousPage 30 Moves back to the previous page in the document.
d .uno%3APageUp 30 Moves back to the previous page in the document.
f .uno%3ANextPage 2f Moves forward to the next page in the document.
f .uno%3APageDown 2f Moves forward to the next page in the document.
10 .uno%3AFirstPage 28 Moves to the first page of the document.
15 .uno%3AGoToStartOfDoc 28 Moves to the first page of the document.
f .uno%3ALastPage 27 Moves to the last page of the document.
13 .uno%3AGoToEndOfDoc 27 Moves to the last page of the document.
f .uno%3ACloseWin 1a Closes the current window.
16 .uno%3ADSBAdministrate b3 Opens a dialog to add/edit/remove a database file from the list of registered databases. The same dialog opens by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases in the Options dialog box.
10 .uno%3ADSBEditDB 37 Abre a base de datos seleccionada para a súa edición.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_RENAME_ENTRY c5 To rename an entry, call this command and enter the new name. You can also do this by selecting the entry and pressing F2. The database must support renaming, otherwise this command is not enabled.
19 .uno%3ADSBCloseConnection 68 Closes the connection to the data source. See %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections in the Options dialog box.
18 .uno%3ADSBrowserExplorer 36 Turns on and off the view of the data source explorer.
14 .uno%3ASortAscending 46 Sorts the data of the selected field or cell range in ascending order.
f .uno%3ASortDown 47 Sorts the data of the selected field or cell range in descending order.
11 .uno%3AAutoFilter 4f Filters the records, based on the content of the currently selected data field.
17 .uno%3ARemoveFilterSort 49 Cancela a configuración de filtro e exhibe todos os rexistros da táboa.
1f HID_BROWSER_REFRESH_REBUILDVIEW 4d Reconstrúe a visualización da táboa despois de modificar a súa estrutura.
e .uno%3ARefresh 1d Actualiza os datos mostrados.
13 .uno%3ASbaBrwInsert 49 Insire na posición do cursor os campos do rexistro marcado no documento.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fautoformat 79 Opens the AutoFormat dialog, in which you can select format styles that are immediately applied when inserting the table.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fastable 5b Insire no documento datos en forma de táboa seleccionados do explorador de fonte de datos.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftableformat 8f Abre a caixa de diálogo Formato de táboa, que permite a definición das propiedades da táboa, isto é, bordos, fondo e largura das columnas.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftabledbcols 50 Especifica as columnas da base de datos que se deben inserir na táboa de texto.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftablecols 44 Lista as columnas da base de datos que deben inserirse no documento.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Foneright 44 Move o campo seleccionado ata a caixa de lista Columna(s) da táboa.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fallright 50 Move os campos listados da base de datos á caixa de lista Columna(s) da táboa.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Foneleft 44 Elimina o campo seleccionado da caixa de lista Columna(s) da táboa.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fallleft 50 Elimina todos os campos de base de datos da caixa de lista Columna(s) da táboa.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ffromdatabase 24 Acepta os formatos da base de datos.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fnumformat 6a Especifica un formato da lista se non se acepta a información de formato de determinados campos de datos.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fcolumnname 63 Utiliza os nomes de campo da táboa de base de datos como títulos das columnas da táboa de texto.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftableheading 53 Especifica se debe inserirse unha liña de título nas columnas da táboa de texto.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Frowonly 32 Inserts an empty heading line into the text table.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fastext 56 Insire como texto no documento os datos seleccionados no explorador da fonte de datos.
17 .uno%3ADSBInsertContent 4b Updates the contents of the existing database fields by the marked records.
28 .uno%3ADataSourceBrowser%2FInsertContent 4b Updates the contents of the existing database fields by the marked records.
11 .uno%3AFilterCrit 28 Permite definir as opcións de filtraxe.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fval2 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fval1 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Fcond2 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fcond2 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Fvalue3 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fcond1 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Ffield3 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Ffield2 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Fvalue2 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Fcond1 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Ffield1 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Fcond3 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fcond3 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
1f .uno%3ADataFilterStandardFilter 3b Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data.
42 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2FStandardFilterDialog 3b Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 3b Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data.
30 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 3b Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data.
46 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnotebookbar%2FMenuData-DataFilterStandardFilter 3b Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data.
35 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2FQueryFilterDialog 3b Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fconnect1 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fval3 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fconnect2 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
27 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Fop2 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Fvalue1 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
27 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fqueryfilterdialog%2Fop3 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Ffield1 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Ffield2 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Ffield3 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
10 .uno%3AOrderCrit 2e Especifica a orde (ascendente ou descendente).
21 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2Fclose 61 Pecha a caixa de diálogo. A configuración da última busca gárdase ata que peche %PRODUCTNAME.
29 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FpbSearchAgain 1a Inicia ou cancela a busca.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FcbRegular 22 Searches with regular expressions.
10 .uno%3ARecSearch 23 Searches database tables and forms.
27 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FcbStartOver 6d Reinicia a busca. As buscas cara a adiante recomezan no primeiro rexistro e as cara a atrás fano no último.
2b cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FrbSearchForNull 2d Indica que se van localizar campos sen datos.
27 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FcbUseFormat 5e Especifica que se teñen en conta os formatos de campo ao efectuar buscas no documento actual.
2e cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FrbSearchForNotNull 2d Indica que se van localizar campos con datos.
22 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FlbForm 3b Indica o formulario lóxico en que desexa realizar a busca.
22 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FcbCase 56 Especifica que durante a busca se teñan en conta as letras maiúsculas e minúsculas.
2b cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FrbSearchForText 3d Introduza na caixa o termo de busca ou seleccióneo na lista.
29 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FrbSingleField 22 Busca nun campo de datos concreto.
27 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FrbAllFields 19 Busca en todos os campos.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FlbPosition 43 Especifica a relación entre o termo de busca e o contido do campo.
27 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FcbBackwards 5e Especifica que a busca se realiza na dirección inversa, do último rexistro cara ao primeiro.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ffmsearchdialog%2FcbWildCard 27 Allows a search with a * or ? wildcard.
11 .uno%3AFormFilter 60 Solicita ao servidor da base de datos que filtre os datos visíbeis cos criterios especificados.
13 .uno%3AFormFiltered 41 Alterna entre a visualización filtrada e non-filtrada da táboa.
15 .uno%3AViewFormAsGrid 39 Activates an additional table view when in the form view.
1c .uno%3ADSBDocumentDataSource 57 Displays, in the data source browser, the table that is linked to the current document.
2d .uno%3ADataSourceBrowser%2FDocumentDataSource 57 Displays, in the data source browser, the table that is linked to the current document.
14 .uno%3ASbaExecuteSql 2c Executa a consulta SQL e mostra o resultado.
13 .uno%3ADBClearQuery 40 Limpa a consulta e retira todas as táboas da xanela de deseño.
28 dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftablesjoindialog%2Fclose 2a Pecha a caixa de diálogo Engadir táboas.
26 dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftablesjoindialog%2Fadd 1d Insire a táboa seleccionada.
2a dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftablesjoindialog%2Fqueries 15 Só mostra consultas.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftablesjoindialog%2Ftables 13 Só mostra táboas.
2c dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftablesjoindialog%2Ftablelist 1f Lista as táboas dispoñíbeis.
2f dbaccess%2Fui%2Ftablesjoindialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 3b Specifies the tables to be inserted into the design window.
f .uno%3AAddTable 3b Specifies the tables to be inserted into the design window.
19 .uno%3ADBChangeDesignMode 47 Mostra a visualización de deseño ou a visualización SQL da consulta.
13 .uno%3ASbaNativeSql 8c In Native SQL mode you can enter SQL commands that are not interpreted by $[officename], but are instead passed directly to the data source.
16 .uno%3ADBViewFunctions 5a Displays the Function row in the lower part of the design view of the Query Design window.
17 .uno%3ADBViewTableNames 3d Displays the Table row in the lower part of the Query Design.
14 .uno%3ADBViewAliases 3d Displays the Alias row in the lower part of the Query Design.
17 .uno%3ADBDistinctValues 66 Expands the created select statement of the SQL Query in the current column by the parameter DISTINCT.
13 .uno%3ASelectObject 2e Permite escoller obxectos do documento actual.
11 .uno%3ASourceView 8b Displays the source text of the current HTML document. This view is available when creating a new HTML document or opening an existing one.
11 SW_HID_SOURCEVIEW 8b Displays the source text of the current HTML document. This view is available when creating a new HTML document or opening an existing one.
13 .uno%3ALayoutStatus 65 Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style.
16 .uno%3AStatusPageStyle 65 Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style.
14 .uno%3APageStyleName 65 Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style.
10 .uno%3AStateZoom 39 Especifica o factor de zoom da visualización da páxina.
11 .uno%3AInsertMode 5d Displays the current insert mode. You can toggle between INSRT = insert and OVER = overwrite.
1a .uno%3AStatusSelectionMode 2b Switches between different selection modes.
14 .uno%3ASelectionMode 2b Switches between different selection modes.
13 .uno%3AModifyStatus 9a If changes to the document have not yet been saved, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
f .uno%3AModified 9a If changes to the document have not yet been saved, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
15 .uno%3AModifiedStatus 9a If changes to the document have not yet been saved, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
12 .uno%3ACurrentTime 15 Mostra a hora actual.
12 .uno%3ACurrentDate 15 Mostra a data actual.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterPopart 26 Converts an image to a pop-art format.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fsolarizedialog%2Fvalue 5b Especifica o nivel de brillo, en porcentaxe, por riba do cal deben solarizarse os píxeles.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fsolarizedialog%2FSolarizeDialog c4 Opens a dialog for defining solarization. Solarization refers to an effect that looks like what can happen when there is too much light during photo development. The colors become partly inverted.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fmosaicdialog%2Fedges 33 Mellora ou aumenta a nitidez dos bordos do obxecto.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fsmoothdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 39 Softens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fsmoothdialog%2FSmoothDialog 39 Softens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fagingdialog%2FAgingDialog a0 All pixels are set to their gray values, and then the green and blue color channels are reduced by the amount you specify. The red color channel is not changed.
1c .uno%3AGraphicFilterSolarize c4 Opens a dialog for defining solarization. Solarization refers to an effect that looks like what can happen when there is too much light during photo development. The colors become partly inverted.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterSmooth 39 Softens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter.
1f .uno%3AGraphicFilterRemoveNoise 28 Elimina ruido aplicando un filtro medio.
1b .uno%3AGraphicFilterSharpen 31 Aumenta a imaxe aplicando un filtro de paso alto.
19 .uno%3AGraphicFilterSepia a0 All pixels are set to their gray values, and then the green and blue color channels are reduced by the amount you specify. The red color channel is not changed.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterMosaic 46 Joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same color.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fposterdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 38 Opens a dialog to determine the number of poster colors.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fposterdialog%2Fvalue 3c Especifica o número de cores a que se debe reducir a imaxe.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterInvert 8e Inverte os valores da cor dunha imaxe en cor ou os de brillo dunha imaxe en escala de grises. Aplique o filtro de novo para reverter o efecto.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fagingdialog%2Fvalue 99 Define a intensidade de envellecemento en porcentaxe. Ao 0% verá os valores de gris de todos os píxeles. Ao 100% só permanece a canle de cor vermella.
19 .uno%3AGraphicFilterSobel 7e Displays the image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the image are drawn in black, and the original colors are suppressed.
1b .uno%3AGraphicFilterToolbox 71 This icon on the Image bar opens the Image Filter bar, where you can use various filters on the selected picture.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fagingdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ a0 All pixels are set to their gray values, and then the green and blue color channels are reduced by the amount you specify. The red color channel is not changed.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterPoster 38 Opens a dialog to determine the number of poster colors.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fposterdialog%2FPosterDialog 38 Opens a dialog to determine the number of poster colors.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fsolarizedialog%2Finvert 32 Especifica tamén para inverter todos os píxeles.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterRelief 27 Displays a dialog for creating reliefs.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fmosaicdialog%2Fheight 27 Define a altura das pezas dos mosaicos.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fembossdialog%2FEmbossDialog 27 Displays a dialog for creating reliefs.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fsolarizedialog%2F@@nowidget@@ c4 Opens a dialog for defining solarization. Solarization refers to an effect that looks like what can happen when there is too much light during photo development. The colors become partly inverted.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fmosaicdialog%2FMosaicDialog 46 Joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same color.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fmosaicdialog%2Fwidth 28 Define a largura das pezas dos mosaicos.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fembossdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 27 Displays a dialog for creating reliefs.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fmosaicdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 46 Joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same color.
f .uno%3AGrafMode ad Lista os atributos de visualización do obxecto gráfico seleccionado. O obxecto gráfico incorporado ou ligado ao ficheiro non se modifica, só a visualización do obxecto.
e .uno%3AGrafRed 55 Specifies the proportion of red RGB color components for the selected graphic object.
10 .uno%3AGrafGreen 57 Specifies the proportion of green RGB color components for the selected graphic object.
f .uno%3AGrafBlue 4f Specifies the proportion of blue RGB color components for the selected graphic.
14 .uno%3AGrafLuminance 35 Especifica o brillo do obxecto gráfico seleccionado.
13 .uno%3AGrafContrast 48 Especifica o contraste da visualización da imaxe gráfica seleccionada.
10 .uno%3AGrafGamma 72 Specifies the gamma value for the view of the selected object, which affects the brightness of the midtone values.
17 .uno%3AGrafTransparence 31 Specifies the transparency in the graphic object.
b .uno%3ACrop 3b Drag any of the eight cropping handles to crop the picture.
13 .uno%3AGrafAttrCrop 76 Allows to crop the display of an inserted picture. Only the display gets cropped, the inserted picture is not changed.
18 .uno%3ABasicShapes.frame 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ABasicShapes.paper 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
16 .uno%3ABasicShapes.can 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ABasicShapes.cross 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.octagon 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1c .uno%3ABasicShapes.rectangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3ABasicShapes.round-rectangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3ABasicShapes.cube 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
12 .uno%3ABasicShapes 55 Abre a barra de ferramentas Formas básicas, que permite inserir imaxes no documento.
20 .uno%3ABasicShapes.round-quadrat 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
19 .uno%3ABasicShapes.circle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.ellipse 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1c .uno%3ABasicShapes.trapezoid 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1c .uno%3ABasicShapes.block-arc 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3ABasicShapes.ring 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1b .uno%3ABasicShapes.pentagon 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ABasicShapes.parallelogram 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3ABasicShapes.circle-pie 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.hexagon 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3ABasicShapes.isosceles-triangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ABasicShapes.right-triangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.quadrat 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.diamond 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3AArrowShapes.s-sharped-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
24 .uno%3AArrowShapes.split-round-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.quad-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-right-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3AArrowShapes.chevron 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AArrowShapes.pentagon-right 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.notched-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3AArrowShapes.split-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2b .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-right-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.down-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3AArrowShapes.right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1b .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AArrowShapes.down-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-down--arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-right-down-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-down-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AArrowShapes.circular-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.right-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AArrowShapes.quad-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-down-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
12 .uno%3AArrowShapes 54 Abre a barra de ferramentas Frechas largas, que permite inserir imaxes no documento.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.corner-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.striped-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.line-callout-2 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.line-callout-3 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.line-callout-1 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.cloud-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.round-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2e .uno%3ACalloutShapes.round-rectangular-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.rectangular-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
14 .uno%3ACalloutShapes 66 Abre a barra de ferramentas Textos explicativos, que permite inserir elementos gráficos no documento.
14 .uno%3AColorSettings 4f Opens the Color toolbar so you can edit some properties of the selected object.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-display 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
36 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-direct-access-storage 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2e .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-magnetic-disk 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-extract 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-or 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
31 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-summing-junction 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-card 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2a .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-connector 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2d .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-punched-tape 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2e .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-multidocument 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2c .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-preparation 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
33 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-off-page-connector 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
16 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes 54 Abre a barra de ferramentas Frechas largas, que permite inserir imaxes no documento.
32 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-alternate-process 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-decision 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-data 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
32 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-sequential-access 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-delay 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2d .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-manual-input 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2c .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-stored-data 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
33 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-predefined-process 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-merge 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-collate 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
31 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-internal-storage 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-document 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-sort 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-process 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2b .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-terminator 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
31 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-manual-operation 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AFontworkGalleryFloater 81 Opens the Fontwork dialog from which you can insert styled text not possible through standard font formatting into your document.
10 .uno%3AGridFront 45 Displays the grid lines in front of the objects on the slide or page.
e .uno%3ADBLimit 4b Expands the created select statement of the SQL Query by the LIMIT X clause
17 .uno%3AFormatPaintbrush 93 First select some text or an object, then click this icon. Then click on or drag across other text or click an object to apply the same formatting.
36 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fquerypropertiesdialog%2F___object_1___ 3c Adds a Limit to set the maximum number of records to return.
30 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fquerypropertiesdialog%2Flimitbox 3c Adds a Limit to set the maximum number of records to return.
33 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fquerypropertiesdialog%2Fnondistinct 21 Not use distinct values in query.
30 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fquerypropertiesdialog%2Fdistinct 1d Use distinct values in query.
1e .uno%3ADBQueryPropertiesDialog 98 In the Query Properties dialog you can set two properties of the SQL Query, i.e. whether to return distinct values, and whether to limit the result set.
3d dbaccess%2Fui%2Fquerypropertiesdialog%2FQueryPropertiesDialog 98 In the Query Properties dialog you can set two properties of the SQL Query, i.e. whether to return distinct values, and whether to limit the result set.
1b .uno%3AStarShapes.doorplate 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3AStarShapes.signet 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AStarShapes.horizontal-scroll 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AStarShapes.vertical-scroll 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1f .uno%3AStarShapes.concave-star6 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3AStarShapes.star12 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star8 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star6 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3AStarShapes.star24 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star5 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star4 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
16 .uno%3AStarShapes.bang 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
11 .uno%3AStarShapes 4f Abre a barra de ferramentas Símbolos, que permite inserir imaxes no documento.
21 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.diamond-bevel 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.octagon-bevel 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3ASymbolShapes.quad-bevel 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3ASymbolShapes.left-brace 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ASymbolShapes.smiley 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3ASymbolShapes.brace-pair 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.sun 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ASymbolShapes.puzzle 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
13 .uno%3ASymbolShapes 4f Abre a barra de ferramentas Símbolos, que permite inserir imaxes no documento.
1a .uno%3ASymbolShapes.flower 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3ASymbolShapes.lightning 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3ASymbolShapes.forbidden 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.bracket-pair 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.right-bracket 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
19 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.heart 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.left-bracket 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1f .uno%3ASymbolShapes.right-brace 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.moon 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
19 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.cloud 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1f sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpcontrol%2Factive 66 Na caixa de lista situada na parte superior pode seleccionar outros módulos da Axuda de %PRODUCTNAME.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpcontrol%2Ftabcontrol 6a O panel de navegación da xanela da Axuda contén os separadores Contido, Índice, Localizar e Marcadores.
1e sfx%2Fui%2Fsearchdialog%2Fwrap 47 Busca en toda a páxina da Axuda, comeza na posición actual do cursor.
11 .uno%3AHelpOnHelp 2d Fornece unha vista xeral do sistema de axuda.
22 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_BACKWARD 1c Retorna á páxina anterior.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fsearchdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 2d Fornece unha vista xeral do sistema de axuda.
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_PRINT 19 Imprime a páxina actual.
26 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_SEARCHDIALOG 2e Abre a caixa de diálogo Atopar nesta páxina.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fsearchdialog%2FSearchDialog 2d Fornece unha vista xeral do sistema de axuda.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fsearchdialog%2Fsearchterm 51 Introduza o texto que desexa buscar ou seleccione unha entrada de texto da lista.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fsearchdialog%2Fbackwards 37 Busca cara a atrás desde a posición actual do cursor.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fsearchdialog%2Fmatchcase 3c Distingue entre texto en maiúsculas e texto en minúsculas.
15 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOX 56 A barra de ferramentas contén funcións importantes para controlar o sistema de axuda
20 sfx%2Fui%2Fsearchdialog%2Fsearch 30 Localiza a seguinte ocorrencia do termo buscado.
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_INDEX 27 Agocha e mostra o panel de navegación.
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_START 34 Vai para a primeira páxina do tema de axuda actual.
23 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_BOOKMARKS 28 Engade esta páxina aos seus marcadores.
21 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_FORWARD 1f Avanza para a páxina seguinte.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fsearchdialog%2Fwholewords 20 Só localiza palabras completas.
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpindexpage%2Fdisplay 23 Prema para ver o tema seleccionado.
28 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpindexpage%2FHelpIndexPage 54 Prema dúas veces nunha entrada ou teclee a palabra que desexa localizar no índice.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpsearchpage%2Fdisplay 27 Mostra a entrada seleccionada da lista.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpsearchpage%2Fcompletewords 6b Especifica se vai realizarse unha busca exacta da palabra inserida. Non se localizarán partes de palabras.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpsearchpage%2Fheadings 4b Especifica se a busca dun termo se realiza só nos títulos dos documentos.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpsearchpage%2Ffind 2b Prema para iniciar a busca en todo o texto.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpsearchpage%2Fresults 7d Lista os títulos das páxinas localizadas na Busca en todo o texto. Para ver unha páxina prema dúas veces na súa entrada.
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpsearchpage%2Fsearch 58 Introduza aquí o termo de busca. A busca non distingue entre maiúsculas e minúsculas.
19 HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_DELETE 20 elimina o marcador seleccionado.
19 HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_RENAME 4b abre unha caixa de diálogo onde pode introducir outro nome para o marcador
17 HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_OPEN 23 mostra o tema de axuda seleccionado
2e sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpbookmarkpage%2FHelpBookmarkPage 93 Premer dúas veces nun marcador ou premer a tecla Intro abre a páxina correspondente na Axuda. Un clic co botón dereito abre o menú de contexto.
2a sfx%2Fui%2Fbookmarkdialog%2FBookmarkDialog 58 Mostra o nome da páxina marcada. Se o desexa pode teclear un novo nome para o marcador.
2c sfx%2Fui%2Fhelpcontentpage%2FHelpContentPage 6e Mostra os temas principais da axuda, organizados de maneira semellante aos cartafoles dun xestor de ficheiros.
11 .uno%3AHelpOnHelp 2f Fornece unha visión xeral do sistema de axuda.
14 .uno%3AAutoPilotMenu 54 Guides you through creating business and personal letters, faxes, agendas, and more.
14 HID_LTRWIZARD_CREATE 74 O asistente crea un novo modelo de documento a partir das opcións seleccionadas e despois gárdao no disco ríxido.
12 HID_LTRWIZARD_BACK 3b Permítelle ver as seleccións feitas nos pasos anteriores.
12 HID_LTRWIZARD_NEXT 39 Garda a configuración actual e pasa á seguinte páxina.
16 .uno%3AAutoPilotLetter 27 Inicia o asistente de modelos de carta.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKBUSINESSPAPER a2 Especifica se vai usarse papel con logotipos impresos, enderezos ou liñas de pés de páxina. O asistente mostra a seguir a páxina de deseño do papel timbrado.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTPRIVOFFICIALSTYLE 28 Seleccione o deseño do modelo de carta.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTBUSINESSSTYLE 28 Seleccione o deseño do modelo de carta.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTPRIVATELETTER 31 Especifica que pretende crear unha carta persoal.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTPRIVATESTYLE 28 Seleccione o deseño do modelo de carta.
28 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTPRIVOFFICIALLETTER 38 Especifica que pretende crear unha carta persoal formal.
24 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTBUSINESSLETTER 39 Especifica que se vai crear un modelo de carta comercial.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE1 3b Especifica se se vai crear unha carta persoal ou comercial.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE2 45 Permítelle especificar os elementos presentes no seu papel timbrado.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOHEIGHT 1b Define a altura do obxecto.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERCOMPANYLOGO 6b Especifica que xa hai un logotipo impreso no seu papel timbrado. %PRODUCTNAME non imprime ningún logotipo.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSHEIGHT 1b Define a altura do obxecto.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSX 41 Define a distancia entre o obxecto e a marxe esquerda da páxina.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMFOOTERHEIGHT 78 Introduza a altura da área do rodapé que xa está impresa no papel timbrado. O %PRODUCTNAME non imprimirá nesa área.
1f WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOWIDTH 1c Define a largura do obxecto.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSWIDTH 1c Define a largura do obxecto.
29 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERCOMPANYADDRESS 6d Especifica que xa hai un enderezo impreso no seu papel timbrado. O %PRODUCTNAME non imprime ningún enderezo.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOY 41 Define a distancia entre o obxecto e a marxe superior da páxina.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERFOOTER 80 Especifica que xa hai unha área de rodapé impresa no seu papel timbrado. O %PRODUCTNAME non imprime ningunha área de rodapé.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOX 41 Define a distancia entre o obxecto e a marxe esquerda da páxina.
25 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKCOMPANYRECEIVER a9 Especifica que o enderezo xa está impreso en tamaño reducido por enriba da área do enderezo do destinatario. O %PRODUCTNAME non imprime enderezos en tamaño reducido.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSY 41 Define a distancia entre o obxecto e a marxe superior da páxina.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTGREETING 53 Inclúe unha frase de despedida no modelo de carta. Selecciónea na caixa de lista.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEBENDMARKS 2b Inclúe marcas de dobra no modelo de carta.
1f WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEFOOTER 26 Inclúe un rodapé no modelo de carta.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTSALUTATION 45 Inclúe un saúdo no modelo de carta, seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEGREETING 53 Inclúe unha frase de despedida no modelo de carta. Selecciónea na caixa de lista.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESALUTATION 45 Inclúe un saúdo no modelo de carta, seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESUBJECT 30 Inclúe unha liña de asunto no modelo de carta.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESIGNS 4d Inclúe unha liña con referencias a unha carta comercial no modelo de carta.
28 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEADDRESSRECEIVER 3c Inclúe un enderezo de remite en pequeno no modelo de carta.
1d WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSELOGO 27 Inclúe un logotipo no modelo de carta.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE3 31 Define os elementos a incluír no modelo de carta
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTRECEIVERDATABASE 46 Os campos de base de datos de enderezos insírense no modelo de carta.
29 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTRECEIVERPLACEHOLDER 52 Especifica que se insiran os campos de marcadores de posición no modelo de carta.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERCITY 2d Especifica os dados de enderezo do remitente.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERSTATE_TEXT 2d Especifica os dados de enderezo do remitente.
24 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERPOSTCODE 2d Especifica os dados de enderezo do remitente.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERSTREET 2b Especifica o enderezo da rúa do remitente.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERNAME 1f Especifica o nome do remitente.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTSENDERPLACEHOLDER 5d Utilice os datos de enderzo de %PRODUCTNAME - Datos de usuario na caixa de diálogo Opcións.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTSENDERDEFINE 3b Utiliza os datos de enderezo das seguintes caixas de texto.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE4 2f Define os datos do destinatario e do remitente.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKFOOTERPAGENUMBERS 2f Inclúe números de páxina no modelo de carta.
25 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKFOOTERNEXTPAGES 4b Seleccione esta opción para suprimir o pé de páxina da primeira páxina.
1c WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTFOOTER 2f Introduza o texto das liñas de pé de páxina.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE5 48 Especifica os elementos que se van incluír no espazo do pé de páxina.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTCREATELETTER 59 Garda e pecha o modelo e, a seguir, abre un novo documento sen título baseado no modelo.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTMAKECHANGES 2d Garda o modelo e manteno aberto para editalo.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CMDPATH 5d Introduza o camiño e o nome do ficheiro do modelo ou prema no botón ... para seleccionalos.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTPATH 5d Introduza o camiño e o nome do ficheiro do modelo ou prema no botón ... para seleccionalos.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTTEMPLATENAME 2c Especifica o título do modelo de documento.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE6 38 Especifica onde e baixo que nome se vai gardar o modelo.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_CREATE bd O asistente crea un modelo de documento a partir das opcións seleccionadas e gárdao. Móstrase na área de traballo un novo documento baseado no modelo, co nome de ficheiro "SentítuloX".
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_NEXT 7e O asistente garda a configuración e avanza á seguinte páxina. O botón Seguinte fica inactivo ao chegar á última páxina.
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_BACK e6 Prema no botón Volver para ver o configurado na páxina anterior. A configuración actual non se modifica nin elimina. Este botón móstrase activo a partir da segunda páxina. Atrás estará activado a partir da segunda páxina.
13 .uno%3AAutoPilotFax 18 Abre o Asistente de fax.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LSTPRIVATESTYLE 21 Especifica o deseño predefinido.
20 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_OPTPRIVATEFAX 28 Crea un modelo de fax de estilo persoal.
23 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_LSTBUSINESSSTYLE 21 Especifica o deseño predefinido.
21 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_OPTBUSINESSFAX 2a Crea un modelo de fax de estilo comercial.
d HID_FAX_PAGE1 28 Define o estilo do seu documento de fax.
18 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEFOOTER 1a Inclúe un pé de páxina.
1a WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEGREETING 4b Inclúe unha fórmula cordial de despedida, seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
19 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSESUBJECT 1d Inclúe unha liña de asunto.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LSTCOMMUNICATIONTYPE 46 Inclúe unha liña de tipo de mensaxe, selecciónea na caixa de lista.
17 WIZARDS_HID_LSTGREETING 4b Inclúe unha fórmula cordial de despedida, seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
1c WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSESALUTATION 32 Inclúe un saúdo. Seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
23 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSECOMMUNICATIONTYPE 46 Inclúe unha liña de tipo de mensaxe, selecciónea na caixa de lista.
16 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEDATE 1a Inclúe un campo de datos.
16 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSELOGO 1f Inclúe un logotipo da empresa.
19 WIZARDS_HID_LSTSALUTATION 32 Inclúe un saúdo. Seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
d HID_FAX_PAGE2 2f Especifica os elementos do fax que se imprimen.
19 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERCITY 2c Introduza os datos do enderezo do remitente.
1f WIZARDS_HID_OPTRECEIVERDATABASE 67 Insire campos de base de datos para unha posterior combinación de correspondencia co documento de fax.
1a WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERSTATE 2c Introduza os datos do enderezo do remitente.
1b WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERSTREET 2c Introduza os datos do enderezo do remitente.
22 WIZARDS_HID_OPTRECEIVERPLACEHOLDER 72 Insire marcadores de posición para o enderezo no modelo de fax, onde, máis adiante, introducirá os datos reais.
19 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERNAME 2c Introduza os datos do enderezo do remitente.
18 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERFAX 2c Introduza os datos do enderezo do remitente.
1b WIZARDS_HID_OPTSENDERDEFINE 8b Seleccióneo para introducir os datos de enderezo nas caixas de texto presentes. Os datos insírense como texto normal no documento de fax.
20 WIZARDS_HID_OPTSENDERPLACEHOLDER 72 Insire marcadores de posición para o enderezo no modelo de fax, onde, máis adiante, introducirá os datos reais.
1d WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERPOSTCODE 2c Introduza os datos do enderezo do remitente.
d HID_FAX_PAGE3 40 Especifica a información do remitente e do destinatario do fax.
1e WIZARDS_HID_CHKFOOTERNEXTPAGES 57 Suprime o pé de páxina da primeira páxina nos documentos de fax con varias páxinas.
15 WIZARDS_HID_TXTFOOTER 30 Especifica o texto das liñas de pé de páxina.
20 WIZARDS_HID_CHKFOOTERPAGENUMBERS 39 Imprime un número de páxina na área do pé de páxina.
d HID_FAX_PAGE4 2c Especifica a información do pé de páxina.
1a WIZARDS_HID_OPTMAKECHANGES 3e Crea e garda o modelo de fax e, a seguir, ábreo para editalo.
18 WIZARDS_HID_OPTCREATEFAX 54 Crea e garda o modelo de fax e, a seguir, abre un novo documento de fax baseado nel.
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_CMDPATH 67 Prema para introducir ou seleccionar o camiño completo, incluindo o nome do ficheiro do modelo de fax.
1b WIZARDS_HID_TXTTEMPLATENAME 22 Introduza o nome do modelo de fax.
d HID_FAX_PAGE5 28 Define o nome e localización do modelo.
16 .uno%3AAutoPilotAgenda 3c Inicia o asistente para axudalo a crear un modelo de axenda.
1f WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_1_CHK_MINUTES 53 Imprime unha páxina que pode utilizarse para redactar as actas durante a reunión.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_1_LIST_PAGEDESIGN 32 Seleccione o deseño de páxina na caixa de lista.
10 HID_AGENDA_PAGE1 24 Especifica un deseño para a axenda.
20 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_LOCATION 1f Especifica o sitio de reunión.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_TITLE 1e Especifica o nome da reunión.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_TIME 1e Especifica a hora da reunión.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_DATE 1e Especifica a data da reunión.
10 HID_AGENDA_PAGE2 3a Especifica a data, hora, nome e localización da reunión.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_NOTES 37 Especifica se é necesario imprimir unha liña "Notas".
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_BRING 44 Especifica se é necesario imprimir unha liña "Material necesario".
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_READ 3a Especifica se é necesario imprimir unha liña "Lecturas".
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_MEETING_TYPE 42 Especifica se é necesario imprimir unha liña "Tipo de reunión".
10 HID_AGENDA_PAGE3 35 Especifica os títulos que desexa incluír na axenda.
27 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_RESOURCEPERSONS 5c Especifica se é necesario incluír unha liña para introducir os participantes na reunión.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_OBSERVERS 4f Especifica se é necesario incluír unha liña para introducir os observadores.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_ATTENDEES 5c Especifica se é necesario incluír unha liña para introducir os participantes na reunión.
22 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_TIMEKEEPER 4f Especifica se é necesario incluír unha liña para introducir os observadores.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_NOTETAKER 5c Especifica se é necesario incluír unha liña para introducir os participantes na reunión.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_CALLED_BY 6f Especifica se é necesario incluír unha liña que permita introducir o nome da persoa que convocou a reunión.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_FACILITATOR 4f Especifica se é necesario incluír unha liña para introducir os observadores.
10 HID_AGENDA_PAGE4 32 Especifica os nomes que se van incluír na axenda.
1a WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_UP 21 Move cara a arriba o tema actual.
1e WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_REMOVE 1f Elimina a liña de tema actual.
1e WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_INSERT 38 Insire unha nova liña baleira de tema enriba da actual.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_DOWN 21 Move cara a abaixo o tema actual.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_MINUTES_1 58 Introduza os temas da axenda. Use os botóns Mover arriba e Mover abaixo para ordenalos.
1f WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_TOPIC_1 58 Introduza os temas da axenda. Use os botóns Mover arriba e Mover abaixo para ordenalos.
25 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_RESPONSIBLE_1 58 Introduza os temas da axenda. Use os botóns Mover arriba e Mover abaixo para ordenalos.
10 HID_AGENDA_PAGE5 3c Especifica os temas que desexa imprimir no modelo de axenda.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_OPT_MAKECHANGES 41 Crea e garda o modelo de axenda e, a seguir, ábreo para editalo.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_BTN_TEMPLATEPATH 51 Especifique o camiño completo, incluído o nome de ficheiro do modelo de axenda.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_OPT_CREATEAGENDA 5a Crea e garda o modelo de axenda e, a seguir, abre un novo documento de axenda baseado nel.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_TXT_TEMPLATEPATH 51 Especifique o camiño completo, incluído o nome de ficheiro do modelo de axenda.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_TXT_TEMPLATENAME 26 Especifica o nome do modelo de axenda.
10 HID_AGENDA_PAGE6 37 Escolla o nome e localización para o modelo de axenda.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDFINISH 31 Prema para crear formularios sen máis preguntas.
12 HID_DLGFORM_DIALOG 33 Activa o asistente para a creación de formularios.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_FIELDSSELECTED 32 Mostra os campos dispoñíbeis no novo formulario.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEDOWN 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
2c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEDOWN_PK_SELECTED 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEDOWN 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEDOWN 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVEUP 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEUP_PK_SELECTED 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEUP 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEFIELDUP 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEALL 43 Prema para mover todos os campos para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDREMOVEALL 43 Prema para mover todos os campos para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVESELECTED 51 Prema para mover o(s) campo(s) seleccionado(s) para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVESELECTED 51 Prema para mover o(s) campo(s) seleccionado(s) para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVE_PK_SELECTED 51 Prema para mover o(s) campo(s) seleccionado(s) para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDREMOVESELECTED 51 Prema para mover o(s) campo(s) seleccionado(s) para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVESELECTED 51 Prema para mover o(s) campo(s) seleccionado(s) para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_FIELDSAVAILABLE 50 Enumera os nomes dos campos da base de datos da táboa ou consulta selecionadas.
17 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_DOC_UP 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEUP 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDS 50 Enumera os nomes dos campos da base de datos da táboa ou consulta selecionadas.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEUP 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
2d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVESELECTED 51 Prema para mover o(s) campo(s) seleccionado(s) para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVESELECTED 51 Prema para mover o(s) campo(s) seleccionado(s) para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
24 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDREMOVEALL 43 Prema para mover todos os campos para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_FIELDSAVAILABLE 50 Enumera os nomes dos campos da base de datos da táboa ou consulta selecionadas.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDSAVAILABLE 50 Enumera os nomes dos campos da base de datos da táboa ou consulta selecionadas.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEALL 43 Prema para mover todos os campos para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVE_PK_SELECTED 43 Prema para mover todos os campos para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEALL 43 Prema para mover todos os campos para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVEDOWN 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
2c WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDREMOVESELECTED 51 Prema para mover o(s) campo(s) seleccionado(s) para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEALL 43 Prema para mover todos os campos para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVESELECTED 51 Prema para mover o(s) campo(s) seleccionado(s) para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
19 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_DOC_DOWN 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
2f WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERREMOVESELECTED 51 Prema para mover o(s) campo(s) seleccionado(s) para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEDOWN 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDS 50 Enumera os nomes dos campos da base de datos da táboa ou consulta selecionadas.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDREMOVEALL 43 Prema para mover todos os campos para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEFIELDDOWN 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDREMOVESELECTED 51 Prema para mover o(s) campo(s) seleccionado(s) para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVEALL 43 Prema para mover todos os campos para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_LBTABLES 45 Especifica a táboa ou consulta para a que desexa crear o formulario.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEUP 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTSELECTMANUALLY 4e Prema para engadir un subformulario baseado nunha selección manual de campos.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTONEXISTINGRELATION 46 Prema para engadir un subformulario baseado nunha relación existente.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_lstRELATIONS 37 Seleccione a relación en que se basea o subformulario.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKCREATESUBFORM 36 Seleccione esta opción para engadir un subformulario.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_FIELDSSELECTED 38 Mostra os campos que se van incluír no novo formulario.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_LBTABLES 43 Especifica a táboa ou consulta para a que se crea o subformulario.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK4 80 Seleccione o campo de formulario principal asociado ao campo do subformulario, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK4 80 Seleccione o campo de subformulario asociado co campo do formulario principal, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK3 80 Seleccione o campo de formulario principal asociado ao campo do subformulario, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK3 80 Seleccione o campo de subformulario asociado co campo do formulario principal, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK2 80 Seleccione o campo de formulario principal asociado ao campo do subformulario, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK1 80 Seleccione o campo de formulario principal asociado ao campo do subformulario, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK2 80 Seleccione o campo de subformulario asociado co campo do formulario principal, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK1 80 Seleccione o campo de subformulario asociado co campo do formulario principal, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPJUSTIFIED2 36 Dispón as etiquetas enriba dos datos correspondentes.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPLABELED2 50 Aliña as columnas dos campos da base de datos coas etiquetas enriba dos campos.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTABLESTYLE2 33 Aliña os campos da base de datos en forma tabular.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDLEFTLABELED2 55 Aliña as columnas dos campos da base de datos coas etiquetas á esquerda dos campos.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTABLESTYLE 33 Aliña os campos da base de datos en forma tabular.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPLABELED 50 Aliña as columnas dos campos da base de datos coas etiquetas enriba dos campos.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDLEFTLABELED 55 Aliña as columnas dos campos da base de datos coas etiquetas á esquerda dos campos.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDALIGNRIGHT 29 As etiquetas están aliñadas á dereita.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPJUSTIFIED 36 Dispón as etiquetas enriba dos datos correspondentes.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDALIGNLEFT 2a As etiquetas están aliñadas á esquerda.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNOADDITION 42 Seleccione esta opción para prohibir a inclusión de datos novos.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNODELETION 3e Seleccione esta opción para prohibir a eliminación de datos.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNOMODIFICATION 3a Seleccione esta opción para prohibir a edición de datos.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTDISPLAYALLDATA 68 Crea un formulario que pode usarse tanto para mostrar datos existentes como para introducir datos novos.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTNEWDATAONLY 3e Crea un formulario que só se usa para introducir datos novos.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDSIMPLEBORDER 2f Especifica que os bordos do campo sexan planos.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDNOBORDER 2b Especifica que os campos non teñan bordos.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMD3DBORDER 3b Especifica que os bordos do campo teñan unha aparencia 3D.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LSTSTYLES 2d Especifica o estilo de páxina do formulario.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTMODIFYFORM 44 Garda o formulario e ábreo en modo edición para cambiar o deseño.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTWORKWITHFORM 5c Garda o formulario e ábreo como documento de formulario para introducir e visualizar datos.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_TXTPATH 20 Especifica o nome do formulario.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_DIALOG 25 Seleccione as propiedades do informe.
1b .uno%3ADBNewReportAutoPilot 30 Activa o asistente para a creación de informes.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDREMOVEALL 43 Prema para mover todos os campos para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDREMOVESELECTED 51 Prema para mover o(s) campo(s) seleccionado(s) para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDMOVESELECTED 51 Prema para mover o(s) campo(s) seleccionado(s) para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDMOVEALL 43 Prema para mover todos os campos para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_FIELDSSELECTED 2c Mostra os campos incluídos no novo informe.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_FIELDSAVAILABLE 50 Mostra os nomes dos campos da base de datos da táboa ou consulta seleccionadas.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_LBTABLES 3f Seleccione a táboa ou consulta para a que vai crear o informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_6 8d Mostra os nomes dos campos que van incluírse no informe. Pode introducir á dereita unha etiqueta para cada campo que se imprime no informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_5 8d Mostra os nomes dos campos que van incluírse no informe. Pode introducir á dereita unha etiqueta para cada campo que se imprime no informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_3 8d Mostra os nomes dos campos que van incluírse no informe. Pode introducir á dereita unha etiqueta para cada campo que se imprime no informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_4 8d Mostra os nomes dos campos que van incluírse no informe. Pode introducir á dereita unha etiqueta para cada campo que se imprime no informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_2 8d Mostra os nomes dos campos que van incluírse no informe. Pode introducir á dereita unha etiqueta para cada campo que se imprime no informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_1 8d Mostra os nomes dos campos que van incluírse no informe. Pode introducir á dereita unha etiqueta para cada campo que se imprime no informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_CMDUNGROUP 48 Prema para mover o campo seleccionado para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_CMDGROUP 48 Prema para mover o campo seleccionado para a caixa indicada pola frecha.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_PREGROUPINGDEST cb Lista os campos utilizados para agrupar o informe. Para eliminar un nivel do agrupamento, seleccione o nome do campo e, a seguir, prema no botón <-. Pódense seleccionar ata catro niveis de agrupamento.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_GROUPING d8 Lista os campos seleccionados na páxina anterior do asistente. Para agrupar o informe partindo dun campo, seleccione o nome do campo e, a seguir, prema no botón ->. Pode seleccionar ata catro niveis de agrupamento.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND3 2e Ordena o contido do campo de modo descendente.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND1 2e Ordena o contido do campo de modo descendente.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND3 2d Ordena o contido do campo de modo ascendente.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND4 2e Ordena o contido do campo de modo descendente.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND2 2d Ordena o contido do campo de modo ascendente.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND1 2d Ordena o contido do campo de modo ascendente.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT4 35 Seleccione un campo adicional para ordenar o informe.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND2 2e Ordena o contido do campo de modo descendente.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT3 35 Seleccione un campo adicional para ordenar o informe.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT2 35 Seleccione un campo adicional para ordenar o informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND4 2d Ordena o contido do campo de modo ascendente.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT1 41 Seleccione o primeiro campo que se usará para ordenar o informe.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_PORTRAIT 40 Selecciona unha páxina de orientación vertical para o informe.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_LANDSCAPE 42 Selecciona unha páxina de orientación horizontal para o informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_PAGELAYOUT b1 Define un deseño de páxina para o informe. Os deseños de páxina cárganse a partir de ficheiros modelo, que atribúen unha cabeceira, un pé de páxina e o fondo da páxina.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_DATALAYOUT 74 Define un conxunto de estilos para o informe. Os estilos atribúen tipos de letra, sangrías, fondos de táboa, etc.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTEDITTEMPLATE 3e Se preme en Rematar o modelo gárdase e ábrese para edición.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTDYNTEMPLATE 4d Garda o informe como modelo. Os informes dinámicos mostran os datos actuais.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTSTATDOCUMENT 6a Garda o informe como estático. Se o abre, mostra sempre os mesmos datos que no momento da súa creación.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTUSETEMPLATE 26 Se preme en Rematar o modelo gárdase.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_TITLE 48 Especifica o título que se imprime na liña de título de cada páxina.
15 HID_LISTWIZARD_FINISH f Crea o obxecto.
40 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fgroupradioselectionpage%2Fradiobuttons 43 Mostra os campos de opción que deben incluírse na caixa de grupo.
3b modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fgroupradioselectionpage%2Ftoright 49 Confirma a etiqueta actual e copia a etiqueta á lista Campos de opción.
3a modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fgroupradioselectionpage%2Ftoleft 33 Retira da lista os campos de opción seleccionados.
3f modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fgroupradioselectionpage%2Fradiolabels 63 Especifica a etiqueta de cada campo de opción. No formulario verá a etiqueta do campo de acción.
48 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdefaultfieldselectionpage%2Fdefaultselectionno 50 Especifica que non desexa seleccionar ningún campo de opción como predefinido.
47 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdefaultfieldselectionpage%2Fdefselectionfield 5c Seleccione o campo de opción que desexa que apareza como predefinido ao abrir o formulario.
49 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdefaultfieldselectionpage%2Fdefaultselectionyes 5f Especifica que desexa seleccionar como predefinido un campo de opción tras abrir o formulario.
39 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptionvaluespage%2Fradiobuttons 4c Seleccione o campo de opción ao que desexa atribuír o valor de referencia.
38 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptionvaluespage%2Foptionvalue 5d Seleccione un número ou texto como valor de referencia para o campo de opción seleccionado.
42 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptiondbfieldpage%2FstoreInFieldCombobox 4a Seleccione o campo de datos no que desexe gardar os valores de referencia.
3b modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptiondbfieldpage%2FnoRadiobutton 63 Indica que vostede desexa gardar os valores de referencia só no formulario e non na base de datos.
3c modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptiondbfieldpage%2FyesRadiobutton 4e Indica que vostede desexa gardar os valores de referencia nunha base de datos.
33 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Foptionsfinalpage%2Fnameit 65 Especifica a etiqueta para a caixa de opcións. A etiqueta da caixa de grupo móstrase no formulario.
27 macro%3A%2F%2F%2FImportWizard.Main.Main 53 Copia e converte documentos ao formato XML de OpenDocument usado por $[officename].
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_DIALOG 53 Copia e converte documentos ao formato XML de OpenDocument usado por $[officename].
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDHELP 53 Copia e converte documentos ao formato XML de OpenDocument usado por $[officename].
1a HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKLOGFILE 5a Crea un ficheiro de rexistro no cartafol de traballo que mostra os documentos convertidos.
1d HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKPOWERPOINT 61 Converte documentos en formato *.ppt de Microsoft PowerPoint en documentos *.odp de OpenDocument.
18 HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKEXCEL 5c Converte documentos en formato *.xls de Microsoft Excel en documentos *.ods de OpenDocument.
17 HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKWORD 5b Converte documentos en formato *.doc de Microsoft Word en documentos *.odt de OpenDocument.
25 HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CMDDOCUMENTPATHSELECT 3d Abre unha caixa de diálogo para seleccionar a ruta desexada.
1e HID_DLGIMPORT_2_EDDOCUMENTPATH 43 Indica o directorio no que se han escribir os ficheiros de destino.
1a HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBDOCUMENT 30 Indica que os documentos han de ser convertidos.
1e HID_DLGIMPORT_2_LBDOCUMENTPATH 37 Indica o directorio que contén os ficheiros orixinais.
21 HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBDOCUMENTRECURSE 65 Indica que tamén se han buscar ficheiros coincidentes nos subdirectorios do directorio seleccionado.
1a HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBTEMPLATE 2d Indica que os modelos han de ser convertidos.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_LISTBOX1 32 Displays the ranges to be converted from the list.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON4 5b All currency cells in the range selected before the converter was called will be converted.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON3 3c All currency cells in the active document will be converted.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON2 3f All currency cells in the active spreadsheet will be converted.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBGOON 15 Inicia a conversión.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_COMBOBOX1 32 Specifies the currency to be converted into euros.
14 .uno%3AEuroConverter 99 Converte as cantidades de moeda atopadas nos documentos do Calc do $[officename] e en campos e táboas dos documentos do Writer do $[officename] a euros.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_TBSOURCE 41 Indica o directorio ou o nome do documento que hai que converter.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBBACK 32 Retorna á primeira páxina do Conversor de euros.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_TBTARGET 4a Especifica o cartafol e a ruta nas que se gardan os ficheiros convertidos.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_DIALOG 99 Converte as cantidades de moeda atopadas nos documentos do Calc do $[officename] e en campos e táboas dos documentos do Writer do $[officename] a euros.
31 macro%3A%2F%2F%2FEuro.AutoPilotRun.StartAutoPilot 99 Converte as cantidades de moeda atopadas nos documentos do Calc do $[officename] e en campos e táboas dos documentos do Writer do $[officename] a euros.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBTARGETOPEN 69 Abre unha caixa de diálogo na que pode seleccionar un directorio no que gardar os ficheiros convertidos.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OBFILE 2e Converte un ficheiro do Calc do $[officename].
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHKPROTECT e1 Especifica que a protección da folla estará desactivada durante a conversión e que se reactivará a continuación. Se a protección da folla tiver un contrasinal, verá unha caixa de diálogo para introducir o contrasinal.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBHELP 28 Activa a axuda para a caixa de diálogo.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBSOURCEOPEN 51 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para seleccionar o directorio ou documento desexados.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHECKRECURSIVE 48 Indica se se inclúen todos os subcartafoles do directorio seleccionado.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON1 36 All cells with the selected Cell Styles are converted.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHECKBOX1 1d Converts the entire document.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHKTEXTDOCUMENTS 67 Converte as cantidades de moeda atopadas en campos e táboas dos documentos do Writer do $[officename].
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OBDIR 81 Converte todos os documentos e modelos do Calc do $[officename] e do Writer do $[officename] que haxa no directorio seleccionado.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBCANCEL 1b Pecha o conversor de euros.
13 HID_ABSPILOT_FINISH 46 Estabelece a conexión coa fonte de datos e pecha a caixa de diálogo.
11 HID_ABSPILOT_NEXT 14 Ir ao seguinte paso.
15 HID_ABSPILOT_PREVIOUS 14 Ir ao paso anterior.
13 HID_ABSPILOT_CANCEL 2c Sae do asistente sen aplicar ningún cambio.
39 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2FSelectTypePage 60 Este asistente rexistra unha axenda de enderezos existente como fonte de datos en $[officename].
17 EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT 60 Este asistente rexistra unha axenda de enderezos existente como fonte de datos en $[officename].
c slot%3A10934 60 Este asistente rexistra unha axenda de enderezos existente como fonte de datos en $[officename].
34 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Fgroupwise 4e Seleccione esta opción se xa utiliza unha axenda de enderezos en Thunderbird.
30 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Fother 6b Seleccione esta opción se desexa rexistrar outra fonte de datos como axenda de enderezos en $[officename].
21 .uno%3AAutoPilotAddressDataSource 60 Este asistente rexistra unha axenda de enderezos existente como fonte de datos en $[officename].
2e modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Fkde 4e Seleccione esta opción se xa utiliza unha axenda de enderezos en Thunderbird.
36 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Fthunderbird 4e Seleccione esta opción se xa utiliza unha axenda de enderezos en Thunderbird.
31 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Fmacosx 4c Select this option if you already use an address book in macOS Address book.
34 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Fevolution 4e Seleccione esta opción se xa utiliza unha axenda de enderezos en Thunderbird.
37 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2F@@nowidget@@ 60 Este asistente rexistra unha axenda de enderezos existente como fonte de datos en $[officename].
1c EXTENSIONS_UID_ABSPILOT_HELP 60 Este asistente rexistra unha axenda de enderezos existente como fonte de datos en $[officename].
32 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttypepage%2Fevoldap 4e Seleccione esta opción se xa utiliza unha axenda de enderezos en Thunderbird.
34 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Finvokeadminpage%2Fsettings 47 Abre unha caixa de diálogo en que pode configurar opcións adicionais.
38 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Finvokeadminpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 48 Allows you to enter additional settings for other external data sources.
3b modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Finvokeadminpage%2FInvokeAdminPage 48 Allows you to enter additional settings for other external data sources.
31 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttablepage%2Ftable 5b Especifica a táboa que vai servir de axenda de enderezos para os modelos de $[officename].
38 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttablepage%2F@@nowidget@@ 86 Especifica unha táboa da fonte de axenda de enderezos de Mozilla / Netscape 6.x que se usa como axenda de enderezos en $[officename].
3b modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fselecttablepage%2FSelectTablePage 86 Especifica unha táboa da fonte de axenda de enderezos de Mozilla / Netscape 6.x que se usa como axenda de enderezos en $[officename].
2f modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdatasourcepage%2Fname 24 Especifica o nome da fonte de datos.
34 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdatasourcepage%2Favailable e5 Registers the newly created database file in %PRODUCTNAME. The database will then be listed in the Data sources pane (Ctrl+Shift+F4). If this check box is cleared, the database will be available only by opening the database file.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_BROWSECONN 47 Especifica a localización mediante unha caixa de diálogo de ficheiro.
31 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdatasourcepage%2Fbrowse 47 Especifica a localización mediante unha caixa de diálogo de ficheiro.
33 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdatasourcepage%2Flocation 38 Especifica a localización do ficheiro de base de datos.
37 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdatasourcepage%2F@@nowidget@@ 8e Especifica a localización do ficheiro de axenda de enderezos e o nome co que se vai listar a fonte de datos no explorador de fontes de datos.
39 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Fdatasourcepage%2FDataSourcePage 8e Especifica a localización do ficheiro de axenda de enderezos e o nome co que se vai listar a fonte de datos no explorador de fontes de datos.
32 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Ffieldassignpage%2Fassign 33 Abre a Modelos: Atribución de axenda de enderezos.
38 modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Ffieldassignpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 4b Abre unha caixa de diálogo que permite especificar a atribución do campo.
3b modules%2Fsabpilot%2Fui%2Ffieldassignpage%2FFieldAssignPage 4b Abre unha caixa de diálogo que permite especificar a atribución do campo.
26 .uno%3AFontworkCharacterSpacingFloater 45 Valor: introduza o valor de espazamento entre caracteres de Fontwork.
2f svx%2Fui%2Ffontworkspacingdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 45 Valor: introduza o valor de espazamento entre caracteres de Fontwork.
1f .uno%3AFontworkAlignmentFloater 26 Abre a xanela Aliñamento de Fontwork.
38 svx%2Fui%2Ffontworkspacingdialog%2FFontworkSpacingDialog 45 Valor: introduza o valor de espazamento entre caracteres de Fontwork.
20 .uno%3AFontworkSameLetterHeights 64 Cambia a altura das letras Fontwork dos obxectos seleccionados de normal á mesma altura para todos.
18 .uno%3AFontworkShapeType 70 Abre a barra de ferramentas Forma Fontwork. Prema nunha forma para aplicala aos obxectos Fontwork seleccionados.
3d .uno%3AAvailableToolbars%3FToolbar%3Astring=fontworkobjectbar 70 Abre a barra de ferramentas Forma Fontwork. Prema nunha forma para aplicala aos obxectos Fontwork seleccionados.
1e sfx%2Fui%2Fautoredactdialog%2F 61 Use automatic redaction to define words and patterns that are automatically marked for redaction.
30 fps%2Fui%2Fremotefilesdialog%2FRemoteFilesDialog 2c Guía de uso do Servizo de ficheiros remotos
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconflictsdialog%2Fkeepother 36 Keeps the change of the other user, voids your change.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconflictsdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 89 If the same contents are changed by different users, the Resolve Conflicts dialog opens. For each conflict, decide which changes to keep.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconflictsdialog%2Fkeepallmine 30 Keeps all your changes, voids all other changes.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconflictsdialog%2FConflictsDialog 89 If the same contents are changed by different users, the Resolve Conflicts dialog opens. For each conflict, decide which changes to keep.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsharedocumentdlg%2Fshare 89 If the same contents are changed by different users, the Resolve Conflicts dialog opens. For each conflict, decide which changes to keep.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconflictsdialog%2Fkeepmine 2a Keeps your change, voids the other change.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsharedocumentdlg%2F@@nowidget@@ 89 If the same contents are changed by different users, the Resolve Conflicts dialog opens. For each conflict, decide which changes to keep.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconflictsdialog%2Fkeepallothers 39 Keeps the changes of all other users, voids your changes.
3d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsharedocumentdlg%2FShareDocumentDialog 89 If the same contents are changed by different users, the Resolve Conflicts dialog opens. For each conflict, decide which changes to keep.
15 .uno%3AFormFilterExit 6b Se preme no botón Pechar da barra de ferramentas Filtro de formulario, o formulario móstrase sen filtros.
18 .uno%3AFormFilterExecute 79 Se preme na icona Aplicar filtro baseado en formulario na barra de ferramentas Filtro de formulario, aplicarase o filtro.
12 .uno%3ALoadToolBox 91 Inspects objects in %PRODUCTNAME documents and shows supported UNO services, as well as available methods, properties and implemented interfaces.
1e .uno%3AConfigureToolboxVisible 3d Abre un diálogo onde pode engadir, editar e eliminar iconas.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnewtoolbardialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 3d Abre un diálogo onde pode engadir, editar e eliminar iconas.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fnewtoolbardialog%2FNewToolbarDialog 3d Abre un diálogo onde pode engadir, editar e eliminar iconas.
18 SVX_HID_FILTER_NAVIGATOR 195 The filter conditions that have been set appear in the Filter navigator. As soon as a filter is set, you see a blank filter entry at the bottom of the Filter navigator . You can select this entry by clicking the word "Or". Once you have selected the blank filter entry, you can enter additional filter conditions in the form. These conditions are linked by Boolean OR to the previously defined conditions.
1a .uno%3AFormFilterNavigator 76 Para conectar varias condicións de filtraxe co OU booleano, prema a icona Navegación de filtros na barra de filtros.
1c .uno%3APreviousTrackedChange 41 Jumps to and selects the previous change in the document, if any.
18 .uno%3ANextTrackedChange 3d Jumps to and selects the next change in the document, if any.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fmath_all 4a Cada un dos botóns do documento abrir un documento novo do tipo indicado.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fdatabase_all 4a Cada un dos botóns do documento abrir un documento novo do tipo indicado.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fimpress_all 4a Cada un dos botóns do documento abrir un documento novo do tipo indicado.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2F@@nowidget@@ 67 Prema nun botón do panel esquerdo para abrir un documento novo ou unha caixa de diálogo de ficheiros.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fopen_remote 84 O botón Ficheiros remotos presenta unha caixa de diálogo Ficheiros remotos para abrir ficheiros almacenados en servidores remotos.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fopen_recent 7d Prema no botón Documentos recentes para ver miniaturas dos documentos abertos máis recentemente na parte dereita da xanela.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Ftemplates_all 63 Prema no botón Modelos para mostrar modelos para todas as aplicacións na parte dereita da xanela.
15 FWK_HID_BACKINGWINDOW 67 Prema nun botón do panel esquerdo para abrir un documento novo ou unha caixa de diálogo de ficheiros.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fwriter_all 4a Cada un dos botóns do documento abrir un documento novo do tipo indicado.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fextensions a1 O botón Extensións abre a páxina https://extensions.libreoffice.org/, desde a que se poden descargar modelos e funcionalidades adicionais para o %PRODUCTNAME.
1d sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fhelp 67 Prema nun botón do panel esquerdo para abrir un documento novo ou unha caixa de diálogo de ficheiros.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2FStartCenter 67 Prema nun botón do panel esquerdo para abrir un documento novo ou unha caixa de diálogo de ficheiros.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fdraw_all 4a Cada un dos botóns do documento abrir un documento novo do tipo indicado.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fopen_all 47 O botón Abrir ficheiro presenta unha caixa de diálogo abrir ficheiro.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Flocal_view 7d Prema no botón Documentos recentes para ver miniaturas dos documentos abertos máis recentemente na parte dereita da xanela.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fall_recent 7d Prema no botón Documentos recentes para ver miniaturas dos documentos abertos máis recentemente na parte dereita da xanela.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fcalc_all 4a Cada un dos botóns do documento abrir un documento novo do tipo indicado.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Ftemplatedlg%2Fexport_btn b5 Choose a template in the main window, or use Ctrl+click to select additional templates, and then right-click and select Export to export your selection to a folder on your computer.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Ftemplatedlg%2Fonline_link 98 To browse for more templates online, choose Extensions to open a search window. You can also search for templates at https://extensions.libreoffice.org.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Ftemplatedlg%2Fimport_btn b2 To import one or more templates into the Template Manager, select Import, choose the Category of the template in the Select Category dialog, then select the files to be imported.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Ftemplatedlg%2Faction_menu 3d Press Manage at the top right corner to open the Manage menu.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Ftemplatedlg%2Ffilter_folder 36 Categories are folders where you place your templates.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Ftemplatedlg%2Fsearch_filter 7c You may search for a template by entering text in the search box at the top left. The Main window shows the templates found.
2b sfx%2Fui%2Ftemplatedlg%2Ffilter_application e2 Pode filtrar por todas as aplicacións, documentos de texto, follas de cálculo, presentacións e debuxos escollendo unha opción no menú despregábel da parte central superior. A xanela principal mostra os modelos filtrados.
27 sfx%2Fui%2Ftemplatedlg%2FTemplateDialog 74 The Template Manager dialog makes it easy to manage templates and allows you to start new documents using templates.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Ftemplatedlg%2F@@nowidget@@ 74 The Template Manager dialog makes it easy to manage templates and allows you to start new documents using templates.
19 hid%20path%20or%20command 3c The Tip of the Day dialog displays useful tips for the user.
13 .uno%3AOnlineUpdate 122 Permitir unha conexión á Internet para %PRODUCTNAME. Se precisa dun proxy, prema a configuración de proxy do %PRODUCTNAME en Ferramentas - Opcións - Internet. Alí, escolla Comprobar se hai actualizacións para comprobar a existencia dunha versión máis nova desta suite de ofimática.
12 .uno%3AShowLicense d5 Displays the CREDITS.odt document which lists the names of individuals who have contributed to OpenOffice.org source code (and whose contributions were imported into %PRODUCTNAME) or %PRODUCTNAME since 2010-09-28.
c .uno%3AAbout 57 Mostra información xeral sobre o programa, como o número de versión e os copyrights.
13 .uno%3ASendFeedback 75 Abrir un formulario para enviar comentarios no navegador web no que os usuarios poden informar de fallos do software.
16 .uno%3AQuestionAnswers 3c Abre a páxina de asistencia da comunidade no navegador web.
14 .uno%3ADocumentation a1 Abre a páxina de documentación no navegador web, desde onde os usuarios poden descargar, ler ou comprar guías de uso do %PRODUCTNAME escritas pola comunidade.
10 .uno%3AHelpIndex 64 Abre a páxina principal da Axuda de $[officename] do aplicativo que está a ser usado nese momento.
f .uno%3AHelpMenu 51 O menú da Axuda permite iniciar e controlar o sistema da Axuda de $[officename].
13 .uno%3AExtendedHelp 48 Enables extended help tips under the mouse pointer until the next click.
e RID_ENVTOOLBOX 4b A barra estándar está dispoñíbel en todos os aplicativos $[officename].
12 .uno%3ATableDesign 56 Abre o Deseño de táboa. Prema dúas veces nunha vista previa para formatar a táboa.
18 .HelpId%3Atableobjectbar 7a A barra Táboa contén as funcións necesarias para traballar con táboas. Aparece ao situar o cursor dentro dunha táboa.
14 .uno%3ADSBFormLetter 53 Inicia o asistente de combinación de correspondencia para crear cartas formulario.
17 .uno%3ADSBInsertColumns 49 Insire os campos do rexistro marcado na posición do cursor no documento.
e .uno%3ARecUndo 2b Permítelle desfacer unha entrada de datos.
10 .uno%3ANewRecord 16 Crea un novo rexistro.
11 .uno%3ALastRecord 1b Lévao ao último rexistro.
e .uno%3ARecSave 48 Garda unha nova entrada de datos. O cambio rexístrase na base de datos.
11 .uno%3ANextRecord 1c Lévao ao seguinte rexistro.
13 .uno%3ADeleteRecord 4f Elimina un rexistro. Para eliminar unha consulta é necesario confirmala antes.
11 .uno%3APrevRecord 1c Lévao ao rexistro anterior.
12 .uno%3AFirstRecord 1c Lévao ao primeiro rexistro.
15 .uno%3AAbsoluteRecord 5d Mostra o número do rexistro actual. Introduza un número para ir ao rexistro correspondente.
17 .uno%3AAutoControlFocus 107 If Automatic Control Focus is activated, the first form control will be selected when you open the document. If the button is not activated, the text will be selected after opening. The Tab Order that you have specified determines which is the first form control.
16 .uno%3ABezierSymmetric 44 Esta icona converte un punto de canto ou suave nun punto simétrico.
13 .uno%3ABezierSmooth 38 Converte un punto de canto ou simétrico en punto suave.
14 .uno%3ABezierCutLine 72 A icona Dividir curva divide unha curva. Seleccione o punto ou puntos onde desexa dividir a curva e prema na icona
12 .uno%3ABezierClose 1f Pecha unha liña ou unha curva.
13 .uno%3ABezierDelete ac Utilice a icona Eliminar puntos para eliminar un ou varios puntos seleccionados. Para seleccionar varios puntos, manteña premida a tecla Maiús ao premer en cada un deles.
11 .uno%3ABezierEdge 3c Converte en puntos de canto o punto ou puntos seleccionados.
14 .uno%3ABezierConvert 30 Converte unha curva en liña recta ou viceversa.
13 .uno%3ABezierInsert 32 Activa o modo inserir, que permite inserir puntos.
11 .uno%3ABezierMove 28 Activa un modo en que pode mover puntos.
10 .uno%3AToolsMenu c1 The Tools menu contains commands to check spelling, to trace sheet references, to find mistakes and to define scenarios, as well as tools for configuring menus, and setting program preferences.
1a .uno%3AInsertFrameInteract a5 Este submenú contén controles de formulario, como caixa de texto, caixa de selección, botón de opción e lista de opcións, que poden ser inseridos no documento.
15 .uno%3AShapesLineMenu 48 Este submenú contén formas simples, a man alzada, curvas e poligonais.
11 .uno%3AShapesMenu b5 Este submenú contén formas frecuentes, como liña, círculo, triángulo e cadrado ou formas de símbolo, como cara sorrindo, corazón e flor, que poden ser inseridas no documento.
f .uno%3APickList 7e These commands apply to the current spreadsheet, create a spreadsheet, open an existing spreadsheet, or close the application.
15 .uno%3ASaveBackground 29 Garda a imaxe de fondo da páxina actual.
17 .uno%3ASelectBackground 28 Estabelecer a imaxe de fondo da páxina.
16 .uno%3AFormatImageMenu 43 Opens a submenu where you can choose commands to manipulate images.
18 .uno%3AFormatBulletsMenu 4a Opens a submenu where you can choose commands to create and work on lists.
18 .uno%3AFormatSpacingMenu 3b Opens a submenu where you can choose text spacing commands.
1b .uno%3AChangeCaseToHiragana 3d Changes the selected Asian characters to Hiragana characters.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToFullWidth 3f Changes the selected Asian characters to full-width characters.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToHalfWidth 3f Changes the selected Asian characters to half-width characters.
f .uno%3AWrapText 42 Break text automatically at the right edges of the selected cells.
1b .uno%3AChangeCaseToKatakana 3d Changes the selected Asian characters to Katakana characters.
15 .uno%3AFormatTextMenu 3e Opens a submenu where you can choose text formatting commands.
27 .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Note 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
26 .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Bad 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
2b .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Emphasis 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
2b .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Standard 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
2a uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Citation 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
17 .uno%3AFormatStylesMenu 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
32 .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Numbering%20ABC 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
2d .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Accent%202 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
2e .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Heading%202 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
2d .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Accent%203 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
2e .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Heading%203 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
2e .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Text%20body 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
34 .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Strong%20Emphasis 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
2e .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Heading%201 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
2d .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Accent%201 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
2b .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Subtitle 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
2d .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Quotations 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
2b .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Footnote 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
28 .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Title 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
36 .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Preformatted%20Text 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
30 .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Source%20Text 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
2b .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=List%201 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
32 .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Numbering%20IVX 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
32 .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Numbering%20123 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
32 .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Numbering%20abc 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
2a .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Warning 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
32 .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Numbering%20ivx 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
2a .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Neutral 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
2a .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Default 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
28 .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Error 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
27 .uno%3AStyleApply%3FStyle%3Astring=Good 64 Contains commands to apply, create, edit, update, load, and manage styles in a spreadsheet document.
16 HID_OFADLG_TREELISTBOX 27 Seleccione a entrada que desexa editar.
18 .uno%3AOptionsTreeDialog 5f Esta orde abre unha caixa de diálogo que permite configurar o programa de forma personalizada.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fencryptionkey 51 Seleccione a súa chave OpenPGP da lista despregábel para asinar documentos ODF.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Femail 30 Introduza o seu enderezo de correo electrónico.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Ffax 2b Introduza o seu número de fax neste campo.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fwork 30 Introduza o seu número do traballo neste campo.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Femail 30 Introduza o seu enderezo de correo electrónico.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fhome 39 Introduza o seu número de teléfono privado neste campo.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Ftitle 24 Introduza o seu título neste campo.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fstate 2b Introduza o estado ou comunidade autónoma.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fstate 2b Introduza o estado ou comunidade autónoma.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fstate 2b Introduza o estado ou comunidade autónoma.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fshortname 1c Introduza as súas iniciais.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fencrypttoself 87 Marque esta opción para cifrar tamén o ficheiro coa súa chave pública, de xeito que poida abrir o documento coa súa chave privada.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Frusfirstname 15 Introduza o seu nome.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fsigningkey 51 Seleccione a súa chave OpenPGP da lista despregábel para asinar documentos ODF.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fcountry 16 Introduza o seu país.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fruslastname 18 Introduza o seu apelido.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Feastlastname 18 Introduza o seu apelido.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fposition 2d Introduza o seu cargo na empresa neste campo.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Flastname 18 Introduza o seu apelido.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Ffirstname 15 Introduza o seu nome.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Ftitle 24 Introduza o seu título neste campo.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Ffirstname 15 Introduza o seu nome.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fcompany 2d Introduza o nome da súa empresa neste campo.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Femail 30 Introduza o seu enderezo de correo electrónico.
1c cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Ffax 2b Introduza o seu número de fax neste campo.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Ficity 1f Introduza a cidade na que vive.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Flastname 18 Introduza o seu apelido.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Feastshortname 1c Introduza as súas iniciais.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fcompany 2d Introduza o nome da súa empresa neste campo.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fposition 2d Introduza o seu cargo na empresa neste campo.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fstreet 2d Introduza o nome da súa empresa neste campo.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Ficity 1f Introduza a cidade na que vive.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fizip 2b Introduza o seu código postal neste campo.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fizip 2b Introduza o seu código postal neste campo.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Ffax 2b Introduza o seu número de fax neste campo.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fshortname 1c Introduza as súas iniciais.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Frusshortname 1c Introduza as súas iniciais.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fstreet 2d Introduza o nome da súa empresa neste campo.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fizip 2b Introduza o seu código postal neste campo.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Ficity 1f Introduza a cidade na que vive.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fcountry 16 Introduza o seu país.
1c cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fzip 2b Introduza o seu código postal neste campo.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fstreet 2d Introduza o nome da súa empresa neste campo.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fcity 1f Introduza a cidade na que vive.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Feastfirstname 15 Introduza o seu nome.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2FOptUserPage 40 Empregue esta lapela para introducir ou editar datos de usuario.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fcountry 16 Introduza o seu país.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fwarnalienformat ca Pode escoller recibir unha mensaxe de aviso ao gardar un documento nun formato que non sexa de OpenDocument ou que non sexa o formato por omisión en Cargar/Gardar - Xeral na caixa de diálogo Opcións.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2FOptSavePage 8b Na sección Xeral pode seleccionar opcións predeterminadas para gardar documentos e pode seleccionar formatos de ficheiro predeterminados.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fload_docprinter 1b5 Se estiver activado, as configuracións da impresora cárganse co documento. Isto pode facer que un documento se imprima nunha impresora distante se non cambia de impresora manualmente na caixa de diálogo Imprimir. Se estiver desactivado, a impresora habitual será a que se empregue para imprimir este documento. A configuración de impresión actual almacénase co documento independentemente de que esta opción estea marcada ou non.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fload_anyuser 70 Loads the view position settings saved in a document with the document even if it was saved by a different user.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fload_settings 47 Carga co documento a configuración específica do usuario gardada nel.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fautosave 6e Specifies that %PRODUCTNAME saves the information needed to restore all modified documents in case of a crash.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fuserautosave a1 Specifies that %PRODUCTNAME saves the modified document itself instead of creating a temporary AutoRecovery version. Uses the time interval specified in Minutes.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Falienwarndialog%2Fask ca Pode escoller recibir unha mensaxe de aviso ao gardar un documento nun formato que non sexa de OpenDocument ou que non sexa o formato por omisión en Cargar/Gardar - Xeral na caixa de diálogo Opcións.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fdoctype 5b Especifica o tipo de documento para o que desexa definir o formato de ficheiro predefinido.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fautosave_spin 5f Specifies the time interval in minutes before AutoRecovery information is saved for a document.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fdocinfo 65 Especifica que a caixa de diálogo Propiedades aparecerá cada vez que seleccione a orde Gardar como.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fbackup f6 Garda a versión anterior dun documento como copia de seguranza sempre que se garde un documento. Cada vez que o %PRODUCTNAME crea unha copia de seguranza, substitúese a copia de seguranza anterior. A copia de seguranza recibe a extensión .BAK.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fsaveas cb Especifica que os documentos do tipo seleccionado á esquerda se garden sempre con este tipo de ficheiro. Pode seleccionar outro tipo de ficheiro para o documento actual na caixa de diálogo Gardar como.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Frelative_fsys 3f Select this box for relative saving of URLs in the file system.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Frelative_inet 3c Select this box for relative saving of URLs to the Internet.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fodfversion 10b Some companies or organizations may require ODF documents in the ODF 1.0/1.1, or ODF 1.2 format. You can select these format to save in the listbox. These older formats cannot store all new features, so the new format ODF 1.3 (Extended) is recommended where possible.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptpathspage%2Fedit 4f Prema para acceder á caixa de diálogo Seleccionar camiño ou Editar camiños.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptpathspage%2Fdefault 5d O botón Predefinido restabelece os camiños predefinidos de todas as entradas seleccionadas.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptpathspage%2Fpaths 72 Para modificar unha entrada desta lista, prémaa e a seguir prema Editar. Tamén pode facer duplo clic na entrada.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptpathspage%2FOptPathsPage 8b Esta sección contén as rutas por omisión a algúns cartafoles importantes do $[officename]. Estas rutas poden ser editadas polo usuario.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fselectpathdialog%2Fadd 8b Abre a caixa de diálogo Seleccionar camiños para seleccionar outro cartafol ou a caixa de diálogo Abrir para seleccionar outro ficheiro.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fselectpathdialog%2Fpaths 5e Contén unha lista dos camiños xa engadidos. Marca o camiño predefinido para novos ficheiros
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingudictsdelete 5d Elimina o dicionario seleccionado depois de confirmar, se non está protexido contra escrita.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flinguoptionsedit 44 If you want to change a value, select the entry and then click Edit.
28 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Fdelete 36 Elimina a palabra marcada do dicionario personalizado.
29 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Freplace 279 This input field is only available if you are editing an exception dictionary or a language-dependent custom dictionary. In exception dictionaries, the field shows the alternative suggestion for the current word in the "Word" text box. In language-dependent custom dictionaries, the field contains a known root word, as a model of affixation of the new word or its usage in compound words. For example, in a German custom dictionary, the new word “Litschi” (lychee) with the model word “Gummi” (gum) will result recognition of “Litschis” (lychees), “Litschibaum” (lychee tree), “Litschifrucht” (lychee fruit) etc.
26 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Flang 38 Assigns a new language to the current custom dictionary.
12 .uno%3ASpellOnline 4b Verifica a ortografía e subliña os erros de forma automática ao teclear.
26 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Fbook 20 Specifies the book to be edited.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2FOptLinguPage 5e Indica as propiedades da corrección ortográfica, o dicionario de sinónimos e o guionizador.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingudicts 26 Lists the available user dictionaries.
30 cui%2Fui%2Foptnewdictionarydialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 7a In the Dictionary section you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language.
36 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2FEditDictionaryDialog 65 In the Edit Custom Dictionary dialog you have the option to enter new terms or edit existing entries.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingumodules 29 Contén os módulos de idioma instalados.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fbreaknumberoption%2Fafterbreak 5a Specifies the minimum number of characters of a hyphenated word required at the next line.
26 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Fword 86 You can type a new word for inclusion in the dictionary. In the list below you will see the contents of the current custom dictionary.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingumodulesedit 34 To edit a language module, select it and click Edit.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptnewdictionarydialog%2Flanguage 4f By selecting a certain language you can limit the use of the custom dictionary.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingudictsnew 8a Opens the New Dictionary dialog, in which you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language.
3a cui%2Fui%2Foptnewdictionarydialog%2FOptNewDictionaryDialog 7a In the Dictionary section you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fbreaknumberoption%2Fbeforebreak 6b Sets the minimum number of characters of the word to be hyphenated that must remain at the end of the line.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingudictsedit 71 Opens the Edit custom dictionary dialog, in which you can add to your custom dictionary or edit existing entries.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fbreaknumberoption%2Fwordlength 5c Specifies the minimum number of characters required for automatic hyphenation to be applied.
2c cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Fnewreplace a0 Adds the word in the Word text field to your current custom dictionary. The word in the Suggestion field is also added when working with exception dictionaries.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptnewdictionarydialog%2Fnameedit 30 Specifies the name of the new custom dictionary.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flinguoptions 44 Define as opcións da verificación ortográfica e da guionización.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptnewdictionarydialog%2Fexcept 44 Specifies whether you wish to avoid certain words in your documents.
2e cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 65 In the Edit Custom Dictionary dialog you have the option to enter new terms or edit existing entries.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feditmodulesdialog%2Fback 4a Prema nesta opción para desfacer os cambios realizados na caixa de lista.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feditmodulesdialog%2Fdown 4a Disminúe un nivel a prioridade do módulo seleccionado na caixa de lista.
21 cui%2Fui%2Feditmodulesdialog%2Fup 48 Aumenta un nivel a prioridade do módulo seleccionado na caixa de lista.
27 cui%2Fui%2Feditmodulesdialog%2Flanguage 1f Especifica o idioma do módulo.
29 cui%2Fui%2Feditmodulesdialog%2Flingudicts 8b Especifica o idioma, a ortografía, a guionización e os submódulos do dicionario de sinónimos dispoñíbeis para o módulo seleccionado.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FkeySpinbutton 4e Set the Black color value or key (black) as expressed in the CMYK color model.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FyellowSpinbutton 40 Set the Yellow color value as expressed in the CMYK color model.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FmagSpinbutton 41 Set the Magenta color value as expressed in the CMYK color model.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FcyanSpinbutton 3e Set the Cyan color value as expressed in the CMYK color model.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FbrightSpinbutton 5f Set the Brightness directly in the HSB color model. Values are expressed in percent (0 to 100).
30 cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FbrightRadiobutton c3 Sets the Brightness component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Hue and Saturation components in the two-dimensional color picker field. Values are expressed in percent (0 to 100).
2d cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FsatRadiobutton c3 Sets the Saturation component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Hue and Brightness components in the two-dimensional color picker field. Values are expressed in percent (0 to 100).
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FhueSpinbutton 5b Set the Hue directly in the HSB color model. Values are expressed in degrees from 0 to 359.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FhueRadiobutton c6 Sets the Hue component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Saturation and Brightness components in the two-dimensional color picker field. Values are expressed in degrees from 0 to 359.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 83 %PRODUCTNAME lets you define custom colors using a two-dimensional graphic and numerical gradient chart of the Pick a Color dialog.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FsatSpinbutton 5f Set the Saturation directly in the HSB color model. Values are expressed in percent (0 to 100).
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FcolorField 13c Prema na área colorida grande da esquerda para seleccionar unha cor nova. Mediante este selector pode modificar dous compoñentes da cor tal e como se representan nos modelos de cor RGB e HSB. Teña en conta que estes son os compoñentes non seleccionados cos botóns de radio da parte dereita da caixa de diálogo.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FgreenRadiobutton a9 Sets the Green component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Red and Blue components in the two-dimensional color picker field. Allowed values are 0 to 255.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FblueRadiobutton a9 Sets the Blue component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Green and Red components in the two-dimensional color picker field. Allowed values are 0 to 255.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FcolorSlider 61 With the vertical color component slider you can modify the value of each component of the color.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FblueSpinbutton 3f Set the Blue color value directly. Allowed values are 0 to 255.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2Fprevious 61 In the right part of the bottom bar, you will see the original color from the parent tab, Colors.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2Fpreview 5e In the left part of the bottom bar, the current result of your work in this dialog is visible.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FredRadiobutton a9 Sets the Red component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Green and Blue components in the two-dimensional color picker field. Allowed values are 0 to 255.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FredSpinbutton 3e Set the Red color value directly. Allowed values are 0 to 255.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FColorPicker 83 %PRODUCTNAME lets you define custom colors using a two-dimensional graphic and numerical gradient chart of the Pick a Color dialog.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FhexEntry 5b Displays and sets the color value in the RGB color model expressed as a hexadecimal number.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fcolorpickerdialog%2FgreenSpinbutton 40 Set the Green color value directly. Allowed values are 0 to 255.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fyear 55 Define un intervalo de data, dentro do cal o sistema recoñece anos de dous díxitos.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fdocstatus 41 Especifica se a impresión do documento conta como modificación.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fexthelp 79 Mostra un texto de axuda ao pousar o apuntador sobre unha icona, un menú de ordes ou un control dunha caixa de diálogo.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 33 Especifica a configuración xeral de $[officename].
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fcrashreport 4b Send crash reports to help developers improve the software’s reliability.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2FOptGeneralPage 33 Especifica a configuración xeral de $[officename].
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Ffontheight 5d Seleccione un tamaño de tipo de letra para a visualización dos códigos fonte HTML e Basic.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Ffontname 50 Seleccione o tipo de letra para a visualización dos código fonte HTML e Basic.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fdelete 29 Elimina a substitución de tipo de letra.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Ffont2 41 Insira ou seleccione o nome do tipo de letra que desexa utilizar.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fapply 28 Aplica a substitución de tipo de letra.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Ffont1 44 Teclee ou seleccione o nome do tipo de letra que desexa substituír.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fchecklb 128 Lista o tipo de letra orixinal e o tipo de letra que o substitúe. Escolla Sempre para substituír o tipo de letra, mesmo se o tipo orixinal estiver instalado no sistema. Escolla Só na pantalla para substituír só o tipo de letra da pantalla e non substituír nunca o tipo de letra ao imprimir.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fnonpropfontonly 61 Comprobe que na lista de caixa Tipos de letra só se visualizan tipos de letra non proporcionais.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fusetable 43 Activa a configuración de substitución de tipo de letra definida.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Freplacements 105 Substitúe un tipo de letra por un tipo de letra que se escolla. A substitución substitúe un tipo de letra só cando este se mostra na pantalla ou na pantalla ao imprimir. A substitución non cambia a configuración do tipo de letra que se grava no documento.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Faanf 36 Enter the smallest font size to apply antialiasing to.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fuseaccel 80 Accede directamente aos recursos de hardware do adaptador de visualización gráfica para mellorar a visualización da pantalla.
5 20201 4a Press Shift+Ctrl+R to restore or refresh the view of the current document.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fsidebariconsize 2d Indica o tamaño das iconas da barra lateral.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Faafont 2f Select to smooth the screen appearance of text.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fuseaa af When supported, you can enable and disable anti-aliasing of graphics. With anti-aliasing enabled, the display of most graphical objects looks smoother and with less artifacts.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fnotebookbariconsize 2c Indica o tamaño das iconas da barra global.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fshowfontpreview 7b Displays the names of selectable fonts in the corresponding font, for example, fonts in the Font box on the Formatting bar.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fmousemiddle 30 Defines the function of the middle mouse button.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Fmenuicons a4 Displays icons next to the corresponding menu items. Select from "Automatic", "Hide" and "Show". "Automatic" displays icons according to system settings and themes.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Ficonsize 34 Indica o tamaño das iconas da barra de ferramentas.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptviewpage%2Ficonstyle 53 Indica o estilo de icona das iconas das barras de ferramentas e caixas de diálogo.
1f sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Ftrans 66 Marque esta opción se desexa recibir un aviso sempre que o documento conteña obxectos transparentes.
27 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fconverttogray 38 Specifies that all colors are printed only as grayscale.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducegradcolor 49 Specifies that gradients are only printed in a single intermediate color.
28 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducegradstep 3e Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing.
2b sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducegradstripes 3e Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fframe2 35 Defines which warnings appear before printing begins.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 37 Especifica as opcións de configuración de impresión.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducetransauto 6f Especifica que a transparencia só se imprime se a zona transparente cobre menos dun cuarto da páxina enteira.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2FOptPrintPage 37 Especifica as opcións de configuración de impresión.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fpaperorient 5e Marque esta opción se se precisa determinada orientación do papel para imprimir o documento.
2b sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmaptrans 85 Se este campo está marcado, a redución na calidade impresa dos mapas de bits tamén se aplica ás zonas transparentes dos obxectos.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fprinter 57 Specifies whether the print settings apply to direct printing or to printing to a file.
1e sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Ffile 57 Specifies whether the print settings apply to direct printing or to printing to a file.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fpapersize 59 Marque esta opción se se precisa determinado tamaño de papel para imprimir o documento.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducetransnone 32 Con esta opción a transparencia nunca se imprime.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducetrans aa Ao marcar este campo, os obxectos transparentes imprímense da maneira habitual e os obxectos non transparentes segundo o escollido nos dous botóns de opción seguintes.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducegrad 4d Se este campo está marcado, os gradientes imprímense con calidade reducida.
2b sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmapresol 61 Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
2d sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmapoptimal 75 High print quality corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi. Normal print quality corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmap 6e Specifies that bitmaps are printed with reduced quality. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
2c sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmapnormal 75 High print quality corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi. Normal print quality corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmapdpi 61 Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2Fcolorconfig 3e Seleccione as cores para os elementos da interface de usuario.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2Fdelete 61 Elimina o esquema de cores mostrado na caixa Esquema. O esquema predefinido non se pode eliminar.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2Fsave 62 Garda a configuración actual como un esquema de cores que máis adiante vostede poderá recargar.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2Fcolorschemelb 32 Selecciona o esquema de cores que desexa utilizar.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2F@@nowidget@@ 39 Define as cores da interface de usuario de $[officename].
23 HID_OPTIONS_COLORCONFIG_NAME_SCHEME 2a Introduza un nome para o esquema de cores.
30 cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2FOptAppearancePage 39 Define as cores da interface de usuario de $[officename].
38 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fsystempagepreviewcolor 61 Aplica a configuración de alto contraste do sistema operativo ás previsualizacións de páxina.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fautodetecthc 59 Cambia %PRODUCTNAME ao modo alto contraste cando a cor do fondo do sistema é moi escura.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fanimatedtext 50 Previsualiza texto animado, como o que pestanexa e se despraza, en %PRODUCTNAME.
32 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fanimatedgraphics 42 Previsualiza imaxes animadas, como as imaxes GIF, en %PRODUCTNAME.
33 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Ftextselinreadonly 2d Mostra o cursor en documentos só de lectura.
2f cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fautofontcolor 89 Mostra os tipos de letra en %PRODUCTNAME usando a configuración de cor do sistema. Esta opción afecta só á presentación en pantalla.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2F@@nowidget@@ ab Define as opcións que permiten que as persoas con problemas de visión, coordinación, ou outras deficiencias, accedan con máis facilidade aos programas de %PRODUCTNAME.
36 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2FOptAccessibilityPage ab Define as opcións que permiten que as persoas con problemas de visión, coordinación, ou outras deficiencias, accedan con máis facilidade aos programas de %PRODUCTNAME.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2FOptSavePage 33 Especifica a configuración xeral de Cargar/Gardar.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fhttpsport 31 Type the port for the corresponding proxy server.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fnoproxy 5f Especifica os nomes dos servidores que non requiren servidor proxy, separados por punto e coma.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fhttps 53 Type the name of the proxy server for HTTPS. Type the port in the right-hand field.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fhttp 2a Teclee o nome do servidor proxy para HTTP.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fproxymode 2a Especifica o tipo de definición de proxy.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptemailpage%2Fbrowse 30 Opens a file dialog to select the email program.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptemailpage%2Furl 26 Enter the email program path and name.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Fcert 22 Opens the Certificate Path dialog.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fstoredwebconnectiondialog%2Fchange 54 Abre un diálogo no que se pode ver e cambiar o contrasinal da entrada seleccionada.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Fsavepassword ed Se está activado, o %PRODUCTNAME almacena de maneira segura todos os contrasinais que se usen para acceder a ficheiros que estean en servidores web. Pódense recuperar os contrasinais da lista após ter introducido o contrasinal mestre.
33 uui%2Fui%2Fmasterpassworddlg%2FMasterPasswordDialog 2e Introduza o contrasinal mestre para continuar.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2F@@nowidget@@ 81 Define as opcións de seguranza para gravar documentos, para as conexións á rede e parar abrir documentos que conteñan macros.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Foptions 31 Opens the "Security Options and Warnings" dialog.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Fconnections 70 Asks for the master password. If master password is correct, shows the Stored Web Connection Information dialog.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Fmasterpassword 30 Abre o diálogo Introducir o contrasinal mestre.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Fmacro 20 Opens the Macro Security dialog.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2FOptSecurityPage 81 Define as opcións de seguranza para gravar documentos, para as conexións á rede e parar abrir documentos que conteñan macros.
2b uui%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2Fpassword1 1a Enter the master password.
40 cui%2Fui%2Fstoredwebconnectiondialog%2FStoredWebConnectionDialog 28 Elimina a entrada seleccionada da lista.
33 cui%2Fui%2Fstoredwebconnectiondialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 28 Elimina a entrada seleccionada da lista.
2b uui%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2Fpassword2 20 Enter the master password again.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fstoredwebconnectiondialog%2Fremove 28 Elimina a entrada seleccionada da lista.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fstoredwebconnectiondialog%2Fremoveall 28 Elimina a entrada seleccionada da lista.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fpassword 8e Select to always enable the Save with password option in the file save dialogs. Deselect the option to save files by default without password.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fctrlclick 88 If enabled, you must hold down the Ctrl key while clicking a hyperlink to follow that link. If not enabled, a click opens the hyperlink.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fwhenpdf 93 Select to see a warning dialog when you try to export a document to PDF format that displays recorded changes in Writer, or that displays comments.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fwhensigning cb Select to see a warning dialog when you try to sign a document that contains recorded changes, versions, fields, references to other sources (for example linked sections or linked pictures), or comments.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fwhenprinting 6b Select to see a warning dialog when you try to print a document that contains recorded changes or comments.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fblockuntrusted 8a Blocks the use of linked images by documents not in the trusted locations defined on the Trusted Sources tab of the Macro Security dialog.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fsavesenddocs 7d Select to see a warning dialog when you try to save or send a document that contains recorded changes, versions, or comments.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 50 Set security related options and warnings about hidden information in documents.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fremovepersonal 132 Select to remove user data from file properties, comments and tracked changes when saving. The names of authors in comments and changes will be replaced by generic values as "Author1", "Author2" and so forth. Time values will also be reset to a single standard value. No personal metadata will be exported.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2FSecurityOptionsDialog 50 Set security related options and warnings about hidden information in documents.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsavegrflocal e6 Mark this check box to automatically upload the embedded pictures to the Internet server when uploading using network protocol. Use the Save As dialog to save the document and enter a complete URL as the file name in the Internet.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fprintextension a2 If you mark this field, the print layout of the current document (for example, table of contents with justified page numbers and dot leaders) is exported as well.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize1 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize7 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize2 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize4 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize3 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fstarbasic 62 Mark this check box to include the $[officename] Basic instructions when exporting to HTML format.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize5 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fstarbasicwarning 6f If this field is marked, when exporting to HTML a warning is shown that %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros will be lost.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fnumbersenglishus d6 If not checked, numbers will be interpreted according to the setting in Languages and Locales - General - Locale setting in the Options dialog box. If checked, numbers will be interpreted as 'English (USA)' locale.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2FOptHtmlPage 20 Defines settings for HTML pages.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize6 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fignorefontnames 97 Mark this check box to ignore all font settings when importing. The fonts that were defined in the HTML Page Style will be the fonts that will be used.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Funknowntag 67 Mark this check box if you want tags that are not recognized by $[officename] to be imported as fields.
14 .uno%3ASwEditOptions a1 Esta configuración determina como tratar os documentos de texto creados en $[officename]. Tamén pode definir a configuración para o documento de texto actual.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fmeasureunit 26 Specifies the Unit for HTML documents.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fvrulerright 29 Aliña a regra vertical ao bordo dereito.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fvrulercombobox 59 Mostra a regra vertical. Seleccione a unidade de medida desexada na lista correspondente.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fhelplines ab Displays snap lines around the frames when frames are moved. You can select the Helplines While Moving option to show the exact position of the object using lineal values.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fgraphics 3e Specifies whether to display images and objects on the screen.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fdrawings 33 Mostra os debuxos e controis contidos no documento.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fsmoothscroll 34 Activa a función de desprazamento suave de páxina.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Ftables 2a Mostra as táboas existentes no documento.
16 .uno%3ATableBoundaries b0 Para mostrar os límites de táboa prema co botón dereito do rato en calquera táboa e escolla Bordos de táboa ou escolla Táboa - Límites de táboa nun documento de Writer.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2F@@nowidget@@ 85 Define a configuración predefinida para a visualización de obxectos nos documentos de texto, así como para os elementos de xanela.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fcomments 114 Mostra comentarios. Prema un comentario para editar o texto. Empregue o menú de contexto do Navegador para localizar ou eliminar un comentario. Empregue o menú de contexto do comentario para eliminar ese comentario ou todos os comentarios ou todos os comentarios dese autor.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fhiddentextfield 47 Displays text that is hidden by Conditional Text or Hidden Text fields.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fhiddenparafield 39 Display paragraphs that contain a Hidden Paragraph field.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2FViewOptionsPage 85 Define a configuración predefinida para a visualización de obxectos nos documentos de texto, así como para os elementos de xanela.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fhrulercombobox 55 Mostra a regra horizontal. Seleccione unha unidade de medida na lista correspondente.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Fidxbox 52 Specifies the font used for indexes, alphabetical indexes, and tables of contents.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Flistbox 72 Specifies the font and font size for the List paragraph style, which is inherited by all derived paragraph styles.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Ftitlebox 2b Specifies the font to be used for headings.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Flabelheight 26 Especifica o tamaño do tipo de letra.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Ftitleheight 26 Especifica o tamaño do tipo de letra.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Flistheight 26 Especifica o tamaño do tipo de letra.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Fstandardheight 26 Especifica o tamaño do tipo de letra.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Findexheight 26 Especifica o tamaño do tipo de letra.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Fstandardbox 3e Specifies the font to be used for the Default Paragraph Style.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Flabelbox 3e Specifies the font used for the captions of images and tables.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2FOptFontTabPage 3d Specifies the settings for the basic fonts in your documents.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AListBox 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Finmargins 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fendpage 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fonly 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fnone 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Ffax 8e Se instalou un programa de fax no computador e desexa enviar un fax directamente desde o documento de texto, seleccione o fax que desexa usar.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fpapertray a9 For printers with multiple trays, the "Paper tray from printer settings" option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fblankpages 1d0 Estando esta opción activada, imprímense páxinas en branco inseridas automaticamente. Isto é útil cando se imprime por dúas caras. Nos libros, por exemplo, pódese definir o estilo de parágrafo "capítulo" de forma que comece sempre nunha páxina impar. Se o capítulo precedente termina nunha páxina impar, %PRODUCTNAME insire unha páxina en branco co número par correspondente. Este opción serve para estabelecer se se imprime esta páxina par ou non.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Frtl 59 Check to print the pages of the brochure in the correct order for a right-to-left script.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2FPrintOptionsPage 49 Especifica a configuración de impresión nun documento de texto ou HTML.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fhiddentext 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fgraphics 40 Indica se se desexa imprimir os gráficos do documento de texto.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Finblack 31 Especifica se se imprime sempre o texto en negro.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fbackground 9b Specifies whether to include colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page Style - Background) in the printed document.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Ftextplaceholder 78 Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 1d0 Estando esta opción activada, imprímense páxinas en branco inseridas automaticamente. Isto é útil cando se imprime por dúas caras. Nos libros, por exemplo, pódese definir o estilo de parágrafo "capítulo" de forma que comece sempre nunha páxina impar. Se o capítulo precedente termina nunha páxina impar, %PRODUCTNAME insire unha páxina en branco co número par correspondente. Este opción serve para estabelecer se se imprime esta páxina par ou non.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fformcontrols 45 Especifica se se imprimen os campos de control do documento de texto.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fend 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Frightpages 4a Specifies whether to print all right (odd numbered) pages of the document.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintHiddenText%3ACheckBox 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
3d .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintTextPlaceholder%3ACheckBox 78 Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
3c .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPageBackground%3ACheckBox 9b Specifies whether to include colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page Style - Background) in the printed document.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fbrochure 45 Select the Brochure option to print your document in brochure format.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fleftpages 4a Specifies whether to print all left (even numbered) pages of the document.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fvar 40 Specifies that changes to a row or column affect the table size.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Ffixprop 4d Specifies that changes to a row or column have an effect on the entire table.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2FOptTablePage 33 Defines the attributes of tables in text documents.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fheader 60 Specifies that the first row of the table is formatted with the "Table heading" Paragraph Style.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Frepeatheader 59 Specifies whether the table heading is carried over onto the new page after a page break.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Frowmove 30 Specifies the value to be used for moving a row.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Ffix 56 Specifies that changes to a row or column only affect the corresponding adjacent area.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fdontsplit 43 Specifies that tables are not split by any type of text flow break.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fborder 34 Specifies that table cells have a border by default.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fnumformatting 5e Specifies that numbers entered into a text table cell are recognized and formatted as numbers.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fnumfmtformatting 9a If Number format recognition is not marked, only input in the format that has been set at the cell is accepted. Any other input resets the format to Text.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fnumalignment 43 Specifies that numbers are always bottom right aligned in the cell.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fcolmove 33 Specifies the value to be used for moving a column.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Frowinsert 2f Specifies the default value for inserting rows.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fcolinsert 32 Specifies the default value for inserting columns.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fhyphens 185 Specifies whether soft hyphens (called also as optional or discretionary hyphens) are displayed. These are hidden user-defined delimiters that you enter within a word by pressing Ctrl+Hyphen(-). Words with soft hyphens are only separated at the end of a line at the point where a soft hyphen has been inserted, irrespective of whether the automatic hyphenation is activated or deactivated.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2FOptFormatAidsPage 6f In $[officename] text and HTML documents, defines the display for certain characters and for the direct cursor.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fspaces 42 Specifies whether to represent every space in the text with a dot.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ffillmargin 102 Sets the paragraph alignment when the direct cursor is used. Depending on where the mouse is clicked, the paragraph is formatted left aligned, centered or right aligned. The cursor before the mouse-click shows, by means of a triangle, which alignment is set.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fbreak 82 Displays all line breaks inserted with the Shift+Enter shortcut. These breaks create a new line, but do not start a new paragraph.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fhiddentext 5f Displays text that uses the character format "hidden", when View - Formatting Marks is enabled.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ffillindent 9d When the direct cursor is used, the left paragraph indent is set at the horizontal position where you click the direct cursor. The paragraph is left aligned.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ftabs 37 Specifies that tab stops are displayed as small arrows.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fcursorinprot 57 Specifies that you can set the cursor in a protected area, but cannot make any changes.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fcursoronoff 1c Activates the direct cursor.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fnonbreak af Specifies that non-breaking spaces are shown as gray boxes. Non-breaking spaces are not broken at the end of a line and are entered with the Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar shortcut keys.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ffillspace 9f When the Direct Cursor is used, a corresponding number of tabs and spaces are inserted in the new paragraph as necessary until the clicked position is reached.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fparagraph 79 Specifies whether paragraph delimiters are displayed. The paragraph delimiters also contain paragraph format information.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ffilltab 7f When the direct cursor is used, as many tabs as necessary are added in the new paragraph until the clicked position is reached.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fmarkcolor 43 Specifies the color for highlighting the changed lines in the text.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fmarkpos 3e Defines if and where changed lines in the document are marked.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fchanged 88 Defines how changes to text attributes are displayed in the document. These changes affect attributes such as bold, italic or underline.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fdeleted ca Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is deleted. If you record text deletions, the text is displayed with the selected attribute (for example, strikethrough) and is not deleted.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Finsert 4a Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is inserted.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fchangedcolor e8 You can also choose a color to display each type of recorded change. When you choose the condition "By author" in the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified to match to the author of each change.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2FOptRedLinePage 32 Defines the appearance of changes in the document.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fusecharunit 99 When this setting is enabled, the measurement units of indents and spacing on Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing tab will be character (ch) and line.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Ftab 37 Specifies the spacing between the individual tab stops.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fmetric 35 Specifies the unit of measurement for text documents.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fupdatefields c8 The contents of all fields are updated automatically whenever the screen contents are displayed as new. Even with this box unchecked, some fields are updated each time a special condition takes place.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fnever 31 Links are never updated while loading a document.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fonrequest 37 Updates links only on request while loading a document.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Falways 9c Always updates links while loading a document, and only if the document is in a trusted file location or the global security level is Low (Not recommended).
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fsquaremode 47 When this setting is enabled, the text grid will look like square page.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fupdatecharts be Specifies whether to automatically update charts. Whenever a Writer table cell value changes and the cursor leaves that cell, the chart that displays the cell value is updated automatically.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2FOptGeneralPage 2e Specifies general settings for text documents.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcompatpage%2Fdefault 69 Click to use the current settings on this tab page as the default for further sessions with %PRODUCTNAME.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcompatpage%2FOptCompatPage 8c Specifies compatibility settings for text documents. These options help in fine-tuning %PRODUCTNAME when importing Microsoft Word documents.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fapplyborder 41 Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fchapseparator 52 Define the character to display between the heading number and the caption number.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fposition 42 Determines the position of the caption with respect to the object.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Flevel be For typical use of headings, the selected number will indicate how many levels of heading number (starting from level 1) are displayed. If [None] is selected, no heading number is displayed.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fseparator 5a Define optional text character that appears after the caption category and caption number.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fnumbering 29 Specifies the type of numbering required.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fcategory 2e Specifies the category of the selected object.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fobjects 45 Enable the object type(s) for which AutoCaption settings are applied.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 45 Enable the object type(s) for which AutoCaption settings are applied.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fcharstyle 49 Specifies the character style of the caption category and caption number.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2FOptCaptionPage 45 Enable the object type(s) for which AutoCaption settings are applied.
14 SID_SW_ONLINEOPTIONS 51 Define a configuración básica para documentos de $[officename] en formato HTML.
28 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fnumflddivisiony 5a Especifique o número de puntos intermedios existentes entre os puntos da grade do eixe Y.
28 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fnumflddivisionx 5a Especifique o número de puntos intermedios existentes entre os puntos da grade do eixe X.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsynchronize 44 Specifies whether to change the current grid settings symmetrically.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrflddrawy 51 Defines the grid points spacing in the desired unit of measurement on the Y-axis.
10 .uno%3AGridFront 2e Sets the visible grid in front of all objects.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrflddrawx 4e Defines the unit of measure for the spacing between grid points on the X-axis.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fgridvisible 26 Specifies whether to display the grid.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fusegridsnap 5a Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid points.
15 .uno%3AHelplinesFront 2c Sets the snap lines in front of all objects.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2FOptGridPage cc Specifies the settings for the configurable grid on your document pages. This grid helps you determine the exact position of your objects. You can also set this grid in line with the "magnetic" snap grid.
13 .uno%3AToolsOptions f4 Defines various settings for spreadsheets, contents to be displayed, and the cursor direction after a cell entry. You can also define sorting lists, determine the number of decimal places and the settings for recording and highlighting changes.
14 .uno%3AScEditOptions f4 Defines various settings for spreadsheets, contents to be displayed, and the cursor direction after a cell entry. You can also define sorting lists, determine the number of decimal places and the settings for recording and highlighting changes.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Foutline 84 If you have defined an outline, the Outline symbols option specifies whether to view the outline symbols at the border of the sheet.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Ftblreg 56 Specifies whether to display the sheet tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet document.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fhscroll 59 Specifies whether to display a horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the document window.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Frowcolheader 34 Specifies whether to display row and column headers.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fguideline 5a Specifies whether to view guides when moving drawings, frames, graphics and other objects.
27 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fnil 36 Specifies whether to show numbers with the value of 0.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2FcbSummary 74 If checked, all sheets are shown with the same zoom factor. If not checked, each sheet can have its own zoom factor.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fbreak 46 Specifies whether to view the page breaks within a defined print area.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fannot d0 Specifies that a small triangle in the top right corner of the cell indicates that a comment exists. The comment will be shown only when you enable tips under %PRODUCTNAME - General in the Options dialog box.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2FTpViewPage 86 Defines which elements of the %PRODUCTNAME Calc main window are displayed. You can also show or hide highlighting of values in tables.
12 .uno%3ANoteVisible 5f To display a comment permanently, select the Show comment command from the cell's context menu.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fvscroll 56 Specifies whether to display a vertical scrollbar at the right of the document window.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fvalue 111 Mark the Value highlighting box to show the cell contents in different colors, depending on type. Text cells are formatted in black, formulas in green, number cells in blue, and protected cells are shown with light grey background, no matter how their display is formatted.
28 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fgrid db Specifies when grid lines will be displayed. Default is to display grid lines only on cells that do not have a background color. You can choose to also display grid lines on cells with background color, or to hide them.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fanchor 67 Specifies whether the anchor icon is displayed when an inserted object, such as a graphic, is selected.
28 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fdraw 40 Defines if drawing objects in your document are shown or hidden.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Frangefind bf Specifies that each reference is highlighted in color in the formula. The cell range is also enclosed by a colored border as soon as the cell containing the reference is selected for editing.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fobjgrf 34 Defines if objects and graphics are shown or hidden.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fsynczoom 74 If checked, all sheets are shown with the same zoom factor. If not checked, each sheet can have its own zoom factor.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fformula 43 Specifies whether to show formulas instead of results in the cells.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fdiagram 37 Defines if charts in your document are shown or hidden.
3f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Flegacy_cell_selection_cb 1a6 With the option set, expanding a selection (with Ctrl  +Shift+Down/Up) jumps to the end of the range in the column that was added as last to the initial selection. When the option is not set, expanding a selection (with Ctrl+Shift  +Down/Up) jumps to the end of the range in the column where selecting the cell range was started. The same of course applies when extending a selection on rows, with Ctrl+  Shift+Left/Right.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Freplwarncb 6d Specifies that, when you paste cells from the clipboard to a cell range that is not empty, a warning appears.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Fformatcb 74 Specifies whether to automatically apply the formatting attributes of the selected cell to the empty adjacent cells.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Fmarkhdrcb 56 Specifies whether to highlight column and row headers in the selected columns or rows.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Feditmodecb 7f Determines the behavior of the Enter key in a spreadsheet. Checking this option causes Enter to open cell contents for editing.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Fexprefcb f9 Specifies whether to expand references when inserting columns or rows adjacent to the reference range. This is only possible if the reference range, where the column or row is inserted, originally spanned at least two cells in the desired direction.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Falignlb 64 Determines the direction that the cursor in the spreadsheet will move after you press the Enter key.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Ftabmf 1f Defines the tab stops distance.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Funitlb 2c Defines the unit of measure in spreadsheets.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortlists%2Fadd 23 Adds a new list into the Lists box.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortlists%2Fcopyfrom 99 Defines the spreadsheet and the cells to copy, in order to include them in the Lists box. The currently selected range in the spreadsheet is the default.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortlists%2Fentries 50 Displays the content of the currently selected list. This content can be edited.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortlists%2Fcopy 10d Copies the contents of the cells in the Copy list from box. If you select a reference to related rows and columns, the Copy List dialog appears after clicking the button. You can use this dialog to define if the reference is converted to sort lists by row or by column.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortlists%2Flists 4a Displays all the available lists. These lists can be selected for editing.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortlists%2Fnew 37 Enters the contents of a new list into the Entries box.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortlists%2FOptSortLists 9c All user-defined lists are displayed in the Sort Lists dialog. You can also define and edit your own lists. Only text can be used as sort lists, no numbers.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcolorrowdialog%2Fcolumns 5c Seleccione a opción Columnas para resumir nunha lista o contido das columnas seleccionadas.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcolorrowdialog%2Frows 56 Seleccione a opción Filas para resumir nunha lista o contido das filas seleccionadas.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fcolorrowdialog%2FColOrRowDialog 3f Permite copiar as celas xa marcadas nunha lista de ordenación.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fgeneralprec dd You can specify the maximum number of decimal places that are shown by default for cells with General number format. If not enabled, cells with General number format show as many decimal places as the column width allows.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Flookup ec Especifica que se pode utilizar o texto de calquera cela como etiqueta para a columna situada debaixo do texto ou para a fila situada á dereita do texto. O texto debe conter unha palabra como mínimo e non pode conter ningún operador.
f HID_SCPAGE_CALC 10b Define a configuración de cálculo aplicábel ás follas de cálculo, o comportamento das follas de cálculo con referencias iterativas, a configuración de datas, o número de decimais, e se haberá que diferenciar entre letras maiúsculas e minúsculas ao buscar .
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fiterate b5 Especifica se as fórmulas con referencias iterativas (fórmulas que se repiten continuamente ata que o problema se resolve) se calculan tras un número específico de repeticións.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fcase 74 Especifica se o aplicativo debe distinguir entre maiúsculas e minúsculas no texto, ao comparar o contido de celas.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fprec ae Defines the number of decimals to be displayed for numbers with the General number format. The numbers are displayed as rounded numbers, but are not saved as rounded numbers.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fformulawildcards 5e Specifies that wildcards are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fdatestd 21 Define 30/12/1899 como día cero.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fminchange 9a Especifica a diferenza entre o resultado de dous pasos consecutivos dunha iteración. Se é inferior ao valor de modificación mínimo, a iteración para.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fdate1904 72 Define 1/1/1904 como día cero. Utilice esta configuración coas follas de cálculo importadas en formato externo.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fcalc 145 Especifica se os cálculos deben realizarse cos valores arredondados que aparecen na folla de cálculo. As gráficas mostraranse cos valores visualizados. Se a opción Cálculo segundo o visualizado non foi marcada, os números exhibidos arredóndanse. Porén, internamente se calculan partindo dos números non arredondados.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fmatch 18b Especifica que os criterios de busca que definiu para as funcións de base de datos de Calc deben aplicarse de forma exacta a toda a cela. Cando tanto a caixa  Criterios de busca = e <> deben ser aplicados a celas enteiras está marcada e tamén o está Permitir comodíns nas fórmulas ,  $[officename]  Calc compórtase igual que Microsoft Excel ao buscar celas nas funcións de base de datos.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fsteps 30 Define o número máximo de pasos de iteración.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fformularegex 84 Specifies that regular expressions instead of simple wildcards are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fdatesc10 83 Define 1/1/1900 como día cero. Utilice esta configuración coas follas de cálculo de StarCalc 1.0 que conteñan entradas de data.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fformulaliteral 66 Specifies that only literal strings are used when searching and also for character string comparisons.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2Finsertions 3a Specifies the color to highlight insertions in a document.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2Fentries 35 Specifies the color to highlight moved cell contents.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2Fdeletions 39 Specifies the color to highlight deletions in a document.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2Fchanges 31 Specifies the color for changes of cell contents.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2FOptChangesPage 5c The Changes dialog specifies various options for highlighting recorded changes in documents.
27 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdlg%2FprintCB e3 Specifies that only contents from selected sheets are printed, even if you specify a wider range in the File - Print dialog or in the Format - Print Ranges dialog. Contents from sheets that are not selected will not be printed.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdlg%2FsuppressCB 56 Specifies that empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdlg%2F@@nowidget@@ 43 Determina a configuración da impresora para as follas de cálculo.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdlg%2FoptCalcPrintPage 43 Determina a configuración da impresora para as follas de cálculo.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcompatibilitypage%2F@@nowidget@@ 34 Defines compatibility options for %PRODUCTNAME Calc.
42 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcompatibilitypage%2FOptCompatibilityPage 34 Defines compatibility options for %PRODUCTNAME Calc.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptformula%2F@@nowidget@@ 49 Defines formula syntax options and loading options for %PRODUCTNAME Calc.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptformula%2FOptFormula 49 Defines formula syntax options and loading options for %PRODUCTNAME Calc.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdefaultpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 37 Defines default settings for new spreadsheet documents.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdefaultpage%2FOptDefaultPage 37 Defines default settings for new spreadsheet documents.
14 .uno%3ASdEditOptions ad Defines various settings for newly created presentation documents, such as the contents to be displayed, the measurement unit used, if and how grid alignment is carried out.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2Fmoveoutline 59 %PRODUCTNAME displays the contour line of each individual object when moving this object.
34 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2Fhandlesbezier ec Displays the control points of all Bézier points if you have previously selected a Bézier curve. If the All control points in Bézier editor option is not marked, only the control points of the selected Bézier points will be visible.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2Fdragstripes 3a Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object.
2c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2Fruler 54 Specifies whether to display the rulers at the top and to the left of the work area.
31 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2FSdViewPage 26 Specifies the available display modes.
27 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrfldbezangle 26 Defines the angle for point reduction.
11 .uno%3ASnapPoints 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object.
1f svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Frotate 7c Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control.
26 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsnaphelplines 58 Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap guide when you release the mouse.
10 .uno%3ASnapFrame 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object.
1e svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fortho 79 Specifies that graphic objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°) when creating or moving them.
11 .uno%3ASnapBorder 58 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin.
23 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsnapborder 58 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin.
13 .uno%3AHelplinesUse 58 Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap guide when you release the mouse.
22 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsnapframe 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object.
23 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsnappoints 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object.
27 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrfldsnaparea cc Defines the snap distance between the mouse pointer and the object contour. $[officename] Impress snaps to a snap point if the mouse pointer is nearer than the distance selected in the Snap range control.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrfldangle 7c Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control.
21 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fbigortho 16b Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the Shift key is pressed before you release the mouse button. This also applies to an ellipse (a circle will be created based on the longest diameter of the ellipse). When the Extend edges box is not marked, a square or a circle will be created based on the shorter side or diameter.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fpapertryfrmprntrcb 52 Determines that the paper tray to be used is the one defined in the printer setup.
2d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fprntopts 43 Specifies print settings within a drawing or presentation document.
2d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fpagenmcb 29 Specifies whether to print the page name.
30 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fgrayscalerb 35 Specifies that you want to print colors as grayscale.
2e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Ffittopgrb 89 Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer, so that they fit on the paper in the printer.
2d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fbrouchrb 44 Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format.
2b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fdatecb 2c Specifies whether to print the current date.
2b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fbackcb 2c Select Back to print the back of a brochure.
2e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fdefaultrb 34 Specifies that you want to print in original colors.
31 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fblackwhiterb 41 Specifies that you want to print the document in black and white.
2b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Ftimecb 2c Specifies whether to print the current time.
2f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fhiddenpgcb 55 Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden from the presentation.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fpagedefaultrb 46 Especifica que non desexa modificar a escala das páxinas ao imprimir.
2d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Ftilepgrb b8 Especifica se restaurar ou non a visualización do último documento utilizado. Restauraranse moitas das propiedades de visualización válidas a última vez que se gardou o documento.
2c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Ffrontcb 2e Select Front to print the front of a brochure.
3e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2FmetricFields 26 Defines the spacing between tab stops.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fdistrotcb 70 Maintains relative alignment of Bézier points and 2D drawing objects to each other when you distort the object.
3c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fobjalwymov a6 Specifies that you want to move an object with the Rotate tool enabled. If Object always moveable is not marked, the Rotate tool can only be used to rotate an object.
3e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fcopywhenmove 56 If enabled, a copy is created when you move an object while holding down the Ctrl key.
40 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fbackgroundback 4e Specifies whether to use the cache for displaying objects on the master slide.
12 .uno%3APickThrough 3c Specifies whether to select a text box by clicking the text.
3e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Ftextselected 3c Specifies whether to select a text box by clicking the text.
10 .uno%3AQuickEdit 6e If on, you can edit text immediately after clicking a text object. If off, you must double-click to edit text.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Funits 35 Determines the Unit of measurement for presentations.
3a modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fqickedit 6e If on, you can edit text immediately after clicking a text object. If off, you must double-click to edit text.
3d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2FOptSavePage 42 Defines the general options for drawing or presentation documents.
17 .uno%3ASdGraphicOptions cb Define a configuración global para documentos de debuxo, incluíndo o contido que se debe mostrar, a escala que se debe usar, o aliñamento de grade e o contido que se vai imprimir de forma predefinida.
14 .uno%3ASmEditOptions 97 Defines the print format and print options for all new formula documents. These options apply when you print a formula directly from %PRODUCTNAME Math.
d tobeannounced 49 Saves only those symbols with each formula that are used in that formula.
2b modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fzoom 56 Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor.
34 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fnorightspaces 56 Specifies that these space wildcards will be removed if they are at the end of a line.
31 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fsizescaled 3c Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout.
2b modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Ftext 59 Especifica se se debe incluír o contido da xanela Ordes na parte inferior da impresión.
31 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fsizenormal 3b Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size.
2c modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fframe 3a Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout.
2c modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Ftitle 40 Especifica se desexa incluír o nome do documento na impresión.
34 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2FSmathSettings 3e Defines formula settings that will be valid for all documents.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptchartcolorspage%2Fdefault 4d Restores the color settings that were defined when the program was installed.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptchartcolorspage%2Fcolors 36 Displays all the colors available for the data series.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fpp_saveorig 120 Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fwo_saveorig 120 Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fwo_exec bf The VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code will be loaded ready to be executed. If this checkbox is not checked, the VBA code will be commented out so it can be inspected, but will not run.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fpp_basic d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fex_exec bf The VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code will be loaded ready to be executed. If this checkbox is not checked, the VBA code will be commented out so it can be inspected, but will not run.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fwo_basic d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fex_saveorig 120 Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fex_basic d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 81 Specifies the general properties for loading and saving Microsoft Office documents with VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2FOptFltrPage 81 Specifies the general properties for loading and saving Microsoft Office documents with VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrembedpage%2Fmso_lockfile 66 Mark this checkbox to generate a Microsoft Office lock file in addition to %PRODUCTNAME own lock file.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrembedpage%2Fshading 115 Microsoft Office has two character attributes similar to $[officename] character highlighting. Use this control to select the attribute, highlighting or shading, that $[officename] should use when exporting $[officename] character highlighting to Microsoft Office file formats.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrembedpage%2Fhighlighting 115 Microsoft Office has two character attributes similar to $[officename] character highlighting. Use this control to select the attribute, highlighting or shading, that $[officename] should use when exporting $[officename] character highlighting to Microsoft Office file formats.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrembedpage%2Fchecklbcontainer b3 The [L] and [S] checkbox displays the entries for the pair of OLE objects that can be converted when loading into $[officename] [L] and/or when saving into a Microsoft format [S].
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrembedpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 58 Specifies the settings for importing and exporting Microsoft Office and other documents.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrembedpage%2FOptFilterPage 58 Specifies the settings for importing and exporting Microsoft Office and other documents.
32 cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fignorelanguagechange dd Indicates whether changes to the system input language/keyboard will be ignored. If ignored, when new text is typed that text will follow the language of the document or current paragraph, not the current system language.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2FOptLanguagesPage 4f Define os idiomas predefinidos e parte da configuración local para documentos.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fctlsupport 7c Activates complex text layout support. You can now modify the settings corresponding to complex text layout in %PRODUCTNAME.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2F@@nowidget@@ 4f Define os idiomas predefinidos e parte da configuración local para documentos.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fcurrentdoc 5a Specifies that the settings for default languages are valid only for the current document.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fuserinterface c3 Select the language used for the user interface, for example menus, dialogs, help files. You must have installed at least one additional language pack or a multi-language version of %PRODUCTNAME.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fasianlanguage 4b Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in Asian alphabets.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fdatepatterns cd Specifies the date acceptance patterns for the current locale. Calc spreadsheet and Writer table cell input needs to match locale dependent date acceptance patterns before it is recognized as a valid date.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fcurrencylb 5c Specifies the default currency that is used for the currency format and the currency fields.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fwesternlanguage 4d Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in western alphabets.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fdecimalseparator 7f Especifica o uso da tecla separadora de decimal definida no seu sistema ao premer na correspondente tecla do teclado numérico.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fcomplexlanguage 3e Specifies the language for the complex text layout spellcheck.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Flocalesetting 7b Specifies the locale setting of the country setting. This influences settings for numbering, currency and units of measure.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fasiansupport 70 Activates Asian languages support. You can now modify the corresponding Asian language settings in %PRODUCTNAME.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fstart 51 Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the beginning of a line.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fstandard 75 When you mark Default, the following two text boxes are filled with the default characters for the selected language:
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Flanguage 4e Specifies the language for which you want to define first and last characters.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fend 4b Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the end of a line.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fpunctkanacompression 3c Specifies that punctuation and Japanese Kana are compressed.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fpunctcompression 32 Specifies that only the punctuation is compressed.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fcharpunctkerning 4d Specifies that kerning is applied to both western text and Asian punctuation.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fnocompression 30 Specifies that no compression at all will occur.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fcharkerning 37 Specifies that kerning is only applied to western text.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fignoremiddledot 27 Specifies the characters to be ignored.
33 cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchprolongedsoundmark 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Fmovementvisual 9b Premendo a frecha cara á dereita móvese o cursor do texto cara á dereita. Premendo a frecha cara á esquerda móvese o cursor do texto cara á esquerda.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Fmovementlogical b8 Premendo na frecha cara á dereita móvese o cursor do texto cara ao final do texto actual. Premendo a frecha cara á esquerda móvese o cursor do texto cara ao comezo do texto actual.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Frestricted 4b Prevents the use as well as the printing of illegal character combinations.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Fsequencechecking 3b Enables sequence input checking for languages such as Thai.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Fnumerals d1 Selecciona o tipo de numerais utilizados no texto, nos textos incorporados a obxectos, nos campos e nos controis en todos os módulos de %PRODUCTNAME. Isto non afecta ao contido das celas de %PRODUCTNAME Calc.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 41 Define as opcións para documentos con deseño de texto complexo.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2FOptCTLPage 41 Define as opcións para documentos con deseño de texto complexo.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fconnpooloptions%2Ftimeout 50 Define o tempo en segundos que se debe esperar ata que se libera unha conexión.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fconnpooloptions%2Fenablepooling 8d Seleccione un controlador da lista e marque a caixa de verificación Activar agrupamento para este controlador para agrupar a súa conexión.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fconnpooloptions%2Fconnectionpooling 37 Especifica se deben agruparse as conexións escollidas.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fconnpooloptions%2FConnPoolPage 0 
20 cui%2Fui%2Fdbregisterpage%2Fedit 3a Opens the Database Link dialog to edit the selected entry.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fdbregisterpage%2Fdelete 29 Removes the selected entry from the list.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fdbregisterpage%2Fnew 35 Opens the Database Link dialog to create a new entry.
17 CUI_HID_DBPATH_CTL_PATH 67 Lists the registered name and database file of all registered databases. Double-click an entry to edit.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fdatabaselinkdialog%2Fname 5d Insira un nome para a base de datos. %PRODUCTNAME usa ese nome para acceder á base de datos.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fdatabaselinkdialog%2Fbrowse 5b Abre unha caixa de diálogo de ficheiros onde pode seleccionar o ficheiro de base de datos.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fdatabaselinkdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 34 Creates or edits an entry in the Databases tab page.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fdatabaselinkdialog%2FDatabaseLinkDialog 34 Creates or edits an entry in the Databases tab page.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptbasicidepage%2Fautoclose_proc 37 Automatically insert closing statements for procedures.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptbasicidepage%2Fautoclose_paren 25 Automatically close open parenthesis.
31 cui%2Fui%2Foptbasicidepage%2Fextendedtypes_enable 2c Allow UNO object types as valid Basic types.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptbasicidepage%2Fautoclose_quotes 20 Automatically close open quotes.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptbasicidepage%2Fautocorrect 3b Correct cases of Basic variables and keywords while typing.
30 cui%2Fui%2Foptbasicidepage%2Fcodecomplete_enable 22 Display methods of a Basic object.
3f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fformulacalculationoptions%2F@@nowidget@@ 14b Sets the rules for conversion from strings values to numeric values, string values to cell references, and strings values to date and time values. This affects built-in functions such as INDIRECT that takes a reference as a string value or date and time functions that takes arguments as string values in local or ISO 8601 formats.
4c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fformulacalculationoptions%2FFormulaCalculationOptions 14b Sets the rules for conversion from strings values to numeric values, string values to cell references, and strings values to date and time values. This affects built-in functions such as INDIRECT that takes a reference as a string value or date and time functions that takes arguments as string values in local or ISO 8601 formats.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fexpertconfig 61 Abre o diálogo Configuración avanzada para opcións e configuración avanzados do %PRODUCTNAME.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fmacrorecording 16 Enable macro recording
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fclasspath 2a Abre a caixa de diálogo Camiño de clase.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fexperimental 28 Activar as funcionalidades experimentais
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fadd 3a Engada un camiño ao cartafol raíz dun JRE no computador.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fjavas b7 Select the JRE that you want to use. On some systems, you must wait a minute until the list gets populated. On some systems, you must restart %PRODUCTNAME to use your changed setting.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fparameters 37 Abre a caixa de diálogo Parámetros de inicio de Java.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fjavaenabled 34 Allows you to run Java applications in %PRODUCTNAME.
24 cui%2Fui%2Faboutconfigdialog%2Freset 28 Undo changes done so far in this dialog.
23 cui%2Fui%2Faboutconfigdialog%2Fedit 26 Opens a dialog to edit the preference.
2a cui%2Fui%2Faboutconfigdialog%2Fpreferences 3f List the preferences organized hierarchically in a tree layout.
2b cui%2Fui%2Faboutconfigdialog%2FsearchButton 3d Click to search your preference text in the Preferences tree.
2a cui%2Fui%2Faboutconfigdialog%2FsearchEntry 38 Type the preference you want to display in the text area
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fexpertconfig 5e Opens the Expert Configuration dialog for advanced settings and configuration of %PRODUCTNAME.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fjavaclasspathdialog%2Ffolder 36 Seleccione un cartafol e engádao ao camiño de clase.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fjavaclasspathdialog%2Farchive 55 Seleccione un ficheiro de datos en formato jar ou zip e engádao ao camiño de clase.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fjavaclasspathdialog%2Fremove 6c Seleccione un ficheiro ou cartafol na lista e prema en Eliminar para eliminar o obxecto do camiño de clase.
30 SVX_EDIT_RID_SVXPAGE_INET_SCRIPTING_ED_CLASSPATH 42 Especifica a localización de clases e bibliotecas de clases Java.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fjavastartparametersdialog%2Fremovebtn 33 Elimina o parámetro de inicio de JRE seleccionado.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fjavastartparametersdialog%2Feditbtn 44 Opens a dialog where the selected JRE start parameter can be edited.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fjavastartparametersdialog%2Fassignbtn 35 Engade o parámetro de inicio de JRE actual á lista.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fjavastartparametersdialog%2Fassignlist 7b Lista os parámetros de inicio de JRE atribuídos. Para eliminar un parámetro de inicio, seleccióneo e prema en Eliminar.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fjavastartparametersdialog%2Fparameterfield bd Introduza un parámetro de inicio para un JRE da mesma forma que o faría nunha liña de ordes. Prema en Atribuír para engadir o parámetro á lista de parámetros de inicio dispoñíbeis.
25 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2Flow db A macro pode configurarse para un comezo automático e, pode realizar accións potencialmente daniñas como eliminar ou renomear ficheiros. Non é recomendábel esta configuración ao abrir documentos de outros autores.
25 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2Fmed 134 As localizacións de ficheiros fiábeis poden definirse no separador Fontes fiábeis. Poden executarse as macros procedentes de fontes fiábeis. Alén diso, pódese executar calquera macro que proceda dunha localización de ficheiro fiábel. Con todas as demais macros é preciso fornecer unha confirmación.
26 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2Fhigh 101 As localizacións de ficheiros fiábeis poden definirse no separador Fontes fiábeis. Só as macros asinadas das fontes fiábeis teñen permiso de execución. Alén diso, todas as macros das localizacións fiábeis de ficheiros teñen permiso de execución.
27 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2Fvhigh 92 As localizacións de ficheiros fiábeis poden definirse no separador Fontes fiábeis. As macros desas localizacións teñen permiso de execución.
33 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2FSecurityLevelPage 92 As localizacións de ficheiros fiábeis poden definirse no separador Fontes fiábeis. As macros desas localizacións teñen permiso de execución.
2e xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 92 As localizacións de ficheiros fiábeis poden definirse no separador Fontes fiábeis. As macros desas localizacións teñen permiso de execución.
29 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Faddfile 7f Abre unha caixa de diálogo de selección de cartafoles. Seleccione un cartafol desde o que se poidan executar todas as macros.
2b xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Flocations 5f Document macros are only executed if they have been opened from one of the following locations.
2c xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Fremovefile 51 Elimina o cartafol seleccionado da lista de localizacións fiábeis de ficheiros.
2c xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Fremovecert 45 Elimina o certificado seleccionado da lista de certificados fiábeis.
2a xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Fviewcert 49 Abre a caixa de diálogo Ver certificado para o certificado seleccionado.
2e xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Fcertificates 1f Lista os certificados fiábeis.
2e xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 1f Lista os certificados fiábeis.
33 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2FSecurityTrustPage 1f Lista os certificados fiábeis.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fserverauthentication 71 Opens the Server Authentication dialog where you can specify the server authentication settings for secure email.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fsecure 38 When available, uses a secure connection to send emails.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Freplyto 46 Introduza o enderezo que desexa empregar para as respostas por correo.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Faddress 3f Introduza o seu enderezo de correo electrónico para respostas.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fdisplayname 15 Introduza o seu nome.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 64 Specifies the user information and server settings for when you send form letters as email messages.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Ftest 5c Abre a caixa de diálogo Probar configuración da conta para probar a configuración actual.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fport 17 Introduza o porto SMTP.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fserver 22 Introduza o nome do servidor SMTP.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Freplytocb 64 Emprega o enderezo de correo electrónico introducido na caixa de texto como enderezo para resposta.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2FMailConfigPage 64 Specifies the user information and server settings for when you send form letters as email messages.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fchecknow 22 A verificación efectuarase agora.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Feverymonth 29 A verificación efectuarase mensualmente.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fchangepath 3c Click to select the destination folder for downloaded files.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Feveryweek 48 A verificación efectuarase semanalmente. Esta é a opción predefinida.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Feveryday 27 A verificación efectúase diariamente.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fdestpathlabel 3c Click to select the destination folder for downloaded files.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fautocheck 82 Mark to check for online updates periodically, then select the time interval how often %PRODUCTNAME will check for online updates.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fautodownload 41 Enable the automatic download of updates to the specified folder.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2F@@nowidget@@ 68 Specifies some options for the automatic notification and downloading of online updates to %PRODUCTNAME.
34 cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2FOptOnlineUpdatePage 68 Specifies some options for the automatic notification and downloading of online updates to %PRODUCTNAME.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Finpassword 18 Introduza o contrasinal.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fpop3 39 Especifica que o servidor de entrada de correo usa POP 3.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fimap 38 Especifica que o servidor de entrada de correo usa IMAP.
44 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fsmtpafterpop 4e Select if you are required to first read your email before you can send email.
43 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Foutpassword 2f Introduza o contrasinal para o nome de usuario.
4e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fseparateauthentication 55 Seleccione esta opción se o servidor SMTP esixe un nome de usuario e un contrasinal.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fport 2b Introduza o porto no servidor POP3 ou IMAP.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fserver 41 Introduza o nome do servidor de mensaxes de correo POP 3 ou IMAP.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fusername 31 Introduza o nome de usuario para o servidor SMTP.
54 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2FAuthenticationSettingsDialog 42 Enables the authentication that is required to send email by SMTP.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Finusername 31 Introduza o nome de usuario para o servidor IMAP.
46 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fauthentication 42 Enables the authentication that is required to send email by SMTP.
44 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2F@@nowidget@@ 42 Enables the authentication that is required to send email by SMTP.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftestmailsettings%2Fstop 49 Prema no botón Parar para interromper manualmente unha sesión de proba.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftestmailsettings%2Ferrors 6b Na caixa de lista Erros pode ler unha explicación dos erros encontrados durante a proba da configuración.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftestmailsettings%2FTestMailSettings 6b Na caixa de lista Erros pode ler unha explicación dos erros encontrados durante a proba da configuración.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftestmailsettings%2F@@nowidget@@ 6b Na caixa de lista Erros pode ler unha explicación dos erros encontrados durante a proba da configuración.
21 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertpage%2FCertPage 77 A páxina Camiño do certificado da caixa de diálogo Ver certificado exhibe a localización e o estado do certificado.
1f xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertpage%2Fstatus 77 A páxina Camiño do certificado da caixa de diálogo Ver certificado exhibe a localización e o estado do certificado.
23 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertpage%2Fsignatures 77 A páxina Camiño do certificado da caixa de diálogo Ver certificado exhibe a localización e o estado do certificado.
25 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertpage%2F@@nowidget@@ 77 A páxina Camiño do certificado da caixa de diálogo Ver certificado exhibe a localización e o estado do certificado.
28 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertdetails%2Fvaluedetails 52 Use a caixa lista de valores para visualizar os valores e copialos no portapapeis.
27 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertdetails%2FCertDetails 6a A páxina Detalles da caixa de diálogo Ver certificado mostra información detallada sobre o certificado.
2a xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertdetails%2Ftablecontainer 6a A páxina Detalles da caixa de diálogo Ver certificado mostra información detallada sobre o certificado.
28 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertdetails%2F@@nowidget@@ 6a A páxina Detalles da caixa de diálogo Ver certificado mostra información detallada sobre o certificado.
28 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertgeneral%2F@@nowidget@@ 65 A páxina Xeral da caixa de diálogo Ver certificado mostra información básica sobre o certificado.
20 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fcertgeneral%2Fbox1 65 A páxina Xeral da caixa de diálogo Ver certificado mostra información básica sobre o certificado.
